Stelprd 3810021

United States Department of Agriculture
Forest Service
Engineering Staff • Washington, D.C. • EM7100-15 • Revised • October 2013
Sign and Poster

Guidelines for
the Forest Service
Non-Discrimination Policy
The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) prohibits discrimination against its customers, employees,
and applicants for employment on the bases of race, color, national origin, age, disability, sex, gender
identity, religion, reprisal, and where applicable, political beliefs, marital status, familial or parental status,
sexual orientation, or all or part of an individual’s income is derived from any public assistance program,
or protected genetic information in employment or in any program or activity conducted or funded by the
Department. (Not all prohibited bases will apply to all programs and/or employment activities.)
To File an Employment Complaint

If you wish to file an employment complaint, you must contact your agency’s EEO Counselor (click the
hyperlink for list of EEO Counselors) within 45 days of the date of the alleged discriminatory act, event, or
in the case of a personnel action. Additional information can be found online at http://www.ascr.usda.gov/
complaint_filing_file.html.
To File a Program Complaint

If you wish to file a Civil Rights program complaint of discrimination, complete the USDA Program
Discrimination form, found online at http://www.ascr.usda.gov/complaint_filing_cust.html, or at any
USDA office, or call (866) 632-9992 to request the form. You may also write a letter containing all of the
information requested in the form. Send your completed complaint form or letter to us by mail at U.S.
Department of Agriculture, Director, Office of Adjudication, 1400 Independence avenue, S.W., Washington,
D.C. 20250-9410, by fax (202) 690-7442 or email at program.intake@usda.gov.
Persons with Disabilities

Individuals who are deaf, hard of hearing or have speech disabilities and you wish to file either an EEO or
program complaint please contact USDA through the Federal Relay Service at (800) 877-8339 or (800)
845-6136 (in Spanish).
Persons with disabilities who wish to file a program complaint, please see information above on how to
contact us by mail directly or by email. If you require alternative means of communication for program
information (e.g., Braille, large print, audiotape, etc.) please contact USDA’s TARGET Center at (202) 720-
2600 (voice and TDD).
EM7100-15 Table Of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction and Principles—Policy and Standards
Chapter 2 Sign Plans
Chapter 3 Traffic Control Devices
Chapter 3A Traffic Control Devices—Regulatory Signs
Chapter 3B Traffic Control Devices—Warning Signs
Chapter 3C Traffic Control Devices—Guide Signs
Chapter 3D Traffic Control Devices—Placement and Installation
Chapter 3E Traffic Control Devices—Sign Drawings
Chapter 4 Temporary Traffic Control—Construction, Maintenance, and Incident
Management
Chapter 4A Temporary Traffic Control—Placement and Installation
Chapter 4B Temporary Traffic Control—Sign Drawings
Chapter 5 Trail Signing
Chapter 5A Trail Signing—Placement and Installation
Chapter 5B Trail Signing—Sign Drawing
Chapter 6 Travel Management Signing
Chapter 6A Travel Management Signing—Sign drawings
Chapter 7 Developed Recreation Site Signing
Chapter 7A Developed Recreation Site Signing—Placement and
Installation
Chapter 7B Developed Recreation Site Signing—Sign Drawings
Chapter 8 Forest Identification Signs
Chapter 8A Forest Identification Signs—Administrative Sites
Chapter 8B Forest Identification Signs—National Forest, Grassland, and
Other Administrative Boundaries
Chapter 8C Forest Identification Signs—Sign Drawings
Chapter 9 Cooperator Signs and Posters
Chapter 10 Visitor Information Signing
Chapter 10A Visitor Information Signing—Interpretive
Chapter 10B Visitor Information Signing—Bulletin Boards, Posters, Fees,
Registration
Chapter 10C Visitor Information Signing—Fire Rating
Chapter 12 Program Area Signs
Chapter 13 Accident Prevention and Safety Signing
Chapter 14 Manufacturing Specifications
Chapter 14A Manufacturing Specifications—Sign Blank Standards
Chapter 15 Procurement
Chapter 16 Sign Maintenance, Repairs, Recycling, and Disposal
Chapter 1 Introduction and Principles Policy and Standards
1.1 Policy ............................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Objectives............................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Principles................................................................................................................ 2
1.4 MUTCD—Standard for Traffic Control Devices................................................... 2
1.5 Sign Coordinators.................................................................................................. 3
1.6 EM-7100-15 Sign and Poster Guidelines for the Forest Service....................... 3
1.6.1 Purpose and Use....................................................................................... 3
1.6.2 Abbreviations............................................................................................. 3
1.6.3 Definitions of Headings, Words, and Phrases in Guidelines................ 4
1.6.4 Sign Identification................................................................................... 12
1.7 Sign and Poster Standards................................................................................. 14
1.7.1 Design....................................................................................................... 14
1.7.2 Standard Abbreviations for Signs......................................................... 15
1.7.3 Forest Service Shield, USDA Identification, and Logotypes ............. 17
1.7.3a Forest Service Shield and USDA Credit Line.......................... 17
1.7.3b Logotypes .................................................................................. 17
1.7.4 Accessibility Signing ............................................................................. 19
1.7.5 Other International Symbols.................................................................. 20
1.8 Removing/Covering Signs.................................................................................. 22
1.9 Temporary Signs and Posters............................................................................ 22
1.10 Overview of Chapters........................................................................................ 22
1.11 References.......................................................................................................... 28
August 2013
1.1 Policy
Forest Service (FSM) policy regarding signs and posters is contained in Forest
Service Manual 7100, chapter 7160—Signs and Posters.
Standard signs shown in the Management of Uniform Traffic Control Devices

Standard signs shall
(MUTCD) and the Engineering Management (EM) series 7100-15 “Sign and
not be modified Poster Guidelines for the Forest Service” shall not be modified unless there is a
demonstrated need. Refer to sections 1.4 and 1.6.
unless there is a
demonstrated need. The use of new shapes and colors for regulatory and warning signs; new
regulatory, recreational and cultural interest area symbols; and new traffic
control devices not referenced in the MUTCD, the EM 7100-15, or approved
addendums require Washington Office Director of Engineering approval. Refer
to FSM 7160.41b.
The use of new symbol warning and regulatory signs for National Forest
System roads (NFS roads) and bicycle trails not referenced in the MUTCD,
these Guidelines, or approved addendums require a recommendation from the
Washington Office Director of Engineering and approval by the FHWA. New
symbol warning and regulatory signs for all other uses shall be approved by the
Washington Office Director of Engineering.
All deviations from the standards in the MUTCD and the EM 7100-15 applicable
to acquisition, design, and installation of signs and posters not reserved to the
Washington Office Director of Engineering require Regional Office approval
through the regional sign coordinator. Refer to FSM 7160.42a.
The use of new word messages for regulatory and warning signs is not
considered a deviation from the standards in the MUTCD and the EM 7100-15,
but shall be approved by the regional sign coordinator for consistency and to
ensure the basic requirements are met.
1.2 Objectives
The objectives of the sign and poster program are to:
• Support accomplishment of direction contained in land and resource

management plans for the administration, protection, management, and use
of National Forest System lands.
• Provide information for the safety, enjoyment, and convenience of national

forest and grassland visitors, users, cooperators, and employees.
• Provide information about geographic and historical features and the use
and management of resource activities on National Forest System lands.
• Identify facilities and lands within the National Forest System.
S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 1-1
November 2012
1.3 Principles
Signs and posters shall be designed, installed, positioned, and maintained to:
• Fulfill a legal requirement or an important need.
• Command attention.
• Convey a clear, simple meaning.
• Command respect.
Signs and posters • Give adequate time for proper response.
should be used Signs and posters should be used conservatively. Signs and posters used to
conservatively. Signs excess tend to lose their effectiveness.
and posters used to Signs and posters that need to be seen both day and night shall be
excess tend to lose
retroreflective or illuminated.
their effectiveness. Signs should be installed on the right-hand side of the travelway except where
engineering judgment or engineering study determine topography or other
considerations, such as on curves to the right dictate a sign be placed on the
left-hand side.
Signage should consider the needs of persons with disabilities or non-English-

speaking users when and where appropriate. Use of languages other than
English on signs is not appropriate.
In addition, Forest Service signs and posters should match visitor and travel
information found in current Forest Service paper and electronic media maps or
other sources of visitor information.
The cost and need to maintain an effective sign program including planning,
fabricating, installing, maintaining, and replacing is an ongoing commitment and
must be factored into the short-term and long-term budget cycles.
1.4 MUTCD—Standard for Traffic Control Devices

The Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) is the national
standard for all traffic control devices (TCD). TCD are signs, markings,
pavement markings, and other devices used to control traffic on all roads open
to public travel. TCD shall be constructed, located, installed, and maintained
according to the standards contained in the MUTCD.
The MUTCD has been adopted by the Forest Service and has been
supplemented with the direction in the EM 7100-15 “Sign and Poster Guidelines
for the Forest Service.”
The Forest Service is required by 23 CFR 655.603(b)(3) to revise the EM 7100-

15 to be in substantial conformance with changes to the National MUTCD within
2 years of the effective date of the Final Rule for the changes.
Some devices in previous editions of the MUTCD have been changed, deleted,
and/or added. Refer to the current edition of the MUTCD for specific guidance
and target dates for compliance for these devices.
1-2 Si gn and P os t er G ui deli nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
1.5 Sign Coordinators

The Washington Office, regional offices, and national forests and grasslands are
each required to assign the duties of sign coordinator to an individual qualified
by education, training, and experience to make decisions about the design and
installation of signs and TCD (FSM 7160). The MUTCD states that engineering
judgment and engineering studies required for deciding upon the applicability,
design, operation, or installation of a traffic control device shall be exercised
by an engineer or someone under the direct supervision of an engineer. A
designated sign coordinator meets this requirement and is considered a qualified
engineer based on the specific duties of sign coordinators outlined in FSM 7160.
Forest Service employees should contact their respective unit sign coordinator
when they have questions and need advice on unique signing problems. In
addition to providing engineering judgment and preparing engineering studies
when necessary, a forest sign coordinator should review and approve sign
orders and sign packages contained in contracts, as well as verify compliance of
ordered signs with specifications.
1.6 EM 7100-15 Sign and Poster Guidelines for the Forest

Service
1.6.1 Purpose and Use
The purpose of the EM 7100-15 is to provide national guidance for the effective
management of the Forest Service signing program. The EM 7100-15 identifies
the basic signing principles for planning, designing, procuring, installing,
and maintaining signs and posters. The EM 7100-15 provides standards
and guidance for uses and situations that are specific to the Forest Service.
Following these principles, standards, and guidelines will result in a consistent,
effective, and economic signing program that meets Forest Service objectives
and conveys a professional and positive image of the Forest Service to the
public. Information from the MUTCD typically is not repeated in this EM unless
These Guidelines it is needed for emphasis or clarification. Detailed signing situations, sizes, and
identify the basic messages unique to the Forest Service and not covered in the MUTCD, as well
as amplifications or explanations necessary for clarification, are contained in the
signing principles for EM 7100-15. Only English equivalent units of measure, such as feet, inches, or
planning, designing, miles per hour are used in the EM 7100-15.
procuring, installing, When used in this Engineering Management series, “Guidelines” refers to EM
7100-15, “Sign and Poster Guidelines for the Forest Service.”
and maintaining signs
and posters.
1.6.2 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in these Guidelines:
• AADT or ADT—Average annual daily traffic or average daily traffic.
• AASHTO—American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials.
• CFR—Code of Federal Regulations
• DOT—Department of Transportation.
August 2013
• FHWA—Federal Highway Administration.
• FSH—Forest Service Handbook.
• FSM—Forest Service Manual.
• HDO—High Density Overlay plywood with hard smooth surface(s) to which

retroreflective sheeting will adhere.
• MDO—Medium Density Overlay plywood with surface(s) similar to kraft

paper that will accept routing and paint.
• ML—Road maintenance level, usually followed by a number (1 through 5).
• MUTCD—Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, a manual published

by the United States Department of Transportation Federal Highway
Administration containing national signing standards used by all public road
agencies.
• NFS—National Forest System.
• OHV—Off-Highway Vehicle(s).
• RMO—Road Management Objective(s).
• SADT—Seasonal Annual Daily Traffic.
• TCD—Traffic Control Device(s). Signs, markings, pavement markings, and

other devices used to give information to route users.
• TMO—Trail Management Objective(s).
• USC—United States Code.
• VIS—Visitor Information Services.
In addition, many chapters contain abbreviations that are defined in those

chapters.
1.6.3 Definitions of Headings, Words, and Phrases in Guidelines

Words and phrases used in these Guidelines shall have the following meanings:
Administrative unit—A national forest, a national grassland, a purchase

unit, a land utilization project, Columbia River Gorge National Scenic Area, Land
Between the Lakes, Lake Tahoe Basin Management Unit, Midewin National
Tallgrass Prairie, or other comparable unit of the National Forest System (36
CFR 212.1, 36 CFR 261.2, FSH 7705).
Advisory speed—A recommended speed for all vehicles operating on a

section of highway and based on the highway design, operating characteristics,
and conditions.
November 2012
Average daily traffic—The total number of vehicles passing a given point

during a given time period divided by the number of days in that time period
(AASHTO, 2001, A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets).
Average speed—The summation of the instantaneous or spot-measured

speeds at a specific location of vehicles divided by the number of vehicles
observed.
Basic rule—No person shall drive a vehicle at a speed greater than is

reasonable and prudent under the conditions and having regard to the actual
and potential hazards.
Breakaway—A design feature which allows a device, such as a sign support,

to yield or separate upon impact. Also refered to as crashworthy.
Clear zone—The total roadside border area, starting at the edge of the
traveled way that is available for an errant driver to stop or regain control of a
vehicle. This area might consist of a shoulder, a recoverable slope, and/or a
nonrecoverable, traversable slope with a clear run-out area at its toe.
Closure—When referring to access and travel management restrictions,

the term “closure” means the route or area is closed to ALL types of traffic,
including foot traffic. This option is seldom used except in emergencies, such as
fire or weather closures or special management situations, such as protection
of an eagle-nesting site. The term “closed” should not be used to refer to routes
that have been decommissioned or converted, or on routes where only some
uses have been restricted.
Coincident routes—A single route that is managed as part of two different

inventoried routes in the Forest Transportation Atlas. An example is a road that
is also managed as a trail. There are two types of coincident routes:
1. Concurrent: A coincident route on which the uses are simultaneous and

must be managed for mixed traffic.
2. Separate: A coincident route on which the uses are not simultaneous

but separate, so the route is not managed for mixed traffic. Separate use
periods may occur by:
• Specific times, such as weekday and weekend.
• Seasons, such as a summer road and a winter snow trail.
Commercial enterprises—Private commercial developments or
commercial public service establishments on National Forest System lands
or on private lands inside or adjacent to the national forest, such as resorts,
marinas, campgrounds, and ski areas.
Conventional road—A street or highway with over 400 seasonal average

daily traffic (SADT) and speeds of 35 miles per hour or more.
November 2012
Crashworthy—Breakaway, yielding, or shielded with a longitudinal barrier

or crash cushion. A characteristic of a roadside appurtenance that has been
successfully crash tested in accordance with a national standard such as the
National Cooperative Highway Research Program Report 350, “Recommended
Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features.”
Designated road, trail, or area—A National Forest System road, a

National Forest System trail, or an area on National Forest System lands that is
designated for motor vehicle use pursuant to 36 CFR 212.51 on a motor vehicle
use map (36 CFR 212.1).
Design speed—A selected speed used to determine the various geometric

design features of a roadway.
85th-Percentile speed—The speed at or below which 85 percent of the

motor vehicles travel. It is determined by speed studies and generally is used in
engineering studies to determine the prevailing speed.
Engineering analysis—An analysis and evaluation conducted by a qualified

engineer, or under the supervision of a qualified engineer, of an NFS roads,
road segment, or road system being considered for motorized mixed use.
The analysis and evaluation may include recommended mitigation measures.
The analysis may be simply documentation of engineering judgment or may
be a more complex engineering report that includes many factors related to
motorized mixed use (FSM 7705).
Engineering judgment—The evaluation of available pertinent information,

and the application of appropriate principles, standards, guidance, and practices
as contained in the MUTCD, EM7100-15, and other sources, for the purpose
of deciding upon the applicability, design, operation, or installation of a traffic
control device. It is less technical than an engineering study. Engineering
judgment shall be exercised by a qualified engineer, or by an individual
working under the supervision of a qualified engineer, through the application
of procedures and criteria established by the qualified engineer. Engineering
judgment shall be documented.
Engineering study—A formal, analytical, and comprehensive analysis

and evaluation of available pertinent information, and the application of
appropriate principles, standards, guidance, and practices as contained in the
MUTCD, EM7100-15, and other sources, for the purpose of deciding upon
the applicability, design, operation, or installation of a traffic control device. An
engineering study shall be performed by a qualified engineer, or by an individual
working under the supervision of a qualified engineer, through the application
of procedures and criteria established by the qualified engineer. An engineering
study SHALL be documented.
Font—An assortment or set of type of characters all of one style; typeface.
Highway-legal vehicle—Any motor vehicle that is licensed or certified under

State law for general operation on all public roads within the State. Operators of
highway-legal vehicles are subject to State traffic law, including requirements for
operator licensing (FSM 7705).
November 2012
Highway Safety Act of 1966 (23 U.S.C. 402, Pub. L. 89-564)—

Authorizes State and local governments and participating Federal agencies to
identify and survey accident locations; to design, construct, and maintain roads
in accordance with safety standards; to apply sound traffic control principles and
standards; and to promote pedestrian safety
Human factors—The process of designing and operating systems for human

use. It is the branch of expertise relating to the study of various interactions
between traffic control devices and the road user.
Low-volume road—A low-volume road is a facility lying outside of built-up

areas of cities, towns, and communities, and it shall have a traffic volume of less
than 400 AADT. A low-volume road is not a freeway, expressway, interchange
ramp, freeway service road, or a road on a designated State highway system. In
terms of highway classification, it shall be a variation of a conventional road or a
special purpose road as defined in the MUTCD, section 2A.01.C. A low-volume
road may be paved or unpaved.
Maintenance levels (ML)—The Forest Service classifies maintenance of

NFS roads by five levels: 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Maintenance level 1 roads are roads
that have been placed in storage between intermittent uses. Maintenance level
2 roads are maintained for high clearance vehicles. Maintenance levels 3, 4,
and 5 roads are maintained for passage by standard passenger cars during the
normal season of use. See FSH 7709.59, section 62.3
Managed use—A mode of travel that is actively managed and appropriate on

a trail, based on its design and management (FSH 2309.18).
May—Denotes a practice that is permissive and carries no requirement or

recommendation. In the MUCTD, “may” is equal to “option.”
Motorized mixed use—Designation of an National Forest System road for

use by both highway-legal and non-highway-legal motor vehicles (FSM 7705).
National Forest System road (NFS roads)—A forest road other than
a road which has been authorized by a legally documented right-of-way held
by a State, county or other local public road authority (36 CFR 212.1, 36 CFR
251.51, 36 CFR 261.2).
National Forest System trail (NFST)—A forest trail other than a trail
which has been authorized by a legally documented right-of-way held by a
State, county or other local public road authority (36 CFR 212.1).
Noncommercial enterprises—Privately built and owned camps and

residences on National Forest System lands, such as recreation residences,
organization camps, private clubs, lodges, and shelters.
Non-highway-legal vehicle—Any motor vehicle that is not licensed

or certified under State law for general operation on all public roads within
the State. Operators of non-highway-legal vehicles are subject to State
requirements, if any, for licensing and operation of the vehicle in question (FSM
7705).
August 2013
Off-highway vehicle—Any motor vehicle designed for or capable of cross

county travel on or immediately over land, water, sand, snow, ice, marsh,
swampland, or other natural terrain (36 CFR 212.1, FSM 2353.05, FSH
2309.18.05, FSM 7705).
Onsite signing—Comprises all signs within the site necessary to adequately

guide or inform the user. It includes all regulatory, warning, and guide signs
needed for road users, identification of buildings and other facilities, campsite
markers, bulletin boards, and posters.
Operating speed—The speed at which drivers are observed operating their

vehicles during free-flow conditions (AASHTO, 2001, A Policy on Geometric
Design of Highways and Streets).
Operating speed—A speed at which a typical vehicle or the overall traffic

operates. Operating speed might be defined with speed values such as the
average, pace, or 85th-percentile speeds.
Pace speed—The highest speed within a specific range of speeds that

represents more vehicles than in any other like range of speed. The range of
speeds typically used is 10 km/h or 10 mph.
Posted speed—The speed limit set by law, ordinance, or order, and shown
on Speed Limit signs.
Prevailing speed—The speed that drivers desire to travel on the segment

of road and should be used to set speed limits barring some other overriding
condition.
Professional Judgement—A decision made by an individual who by

experience, certification, education, or license, is a technically trained and
experienced professional in a specific area of expertise with the ability to
conduct a principled and reasoned analysis considering all of the appropriate
information and the best available science and expertise that complies with
FSM/FSH direction and other applicable established requirements, guidelines
and procedures.
Prudent driver—A prudent driver is a person operating within their physical

and mental limitation; with a properly equipped and maintained vehicle; and who
always exercises due care for the road, traffic, lighting, and weather conditions
(AASHTO’s “Guidelines for Geometric Design of Very Low-Volume Local
Roads” (ADTL400).
Public road—Any road or street under the jurisdiction of and maintained by a

public agency and open to public travel.
Qualified engineer—An engineer who by experience, certification,

education, or license, is technically trained and experienced in the proper
application of principles, standards, guidance, and practices for traffic control
devices, such as forest, regional, and national sign coordinators.
Reasonable and prudent—In defining negligence, practically synonymous

with “cautious driver.” (Black’s Law Dictionary) One who drives with care and
due caution at a speed and in a manner which is safe. The care a driver must
use considering factors such as traffic, weather, and road or trail conditions.
November 2012
Recreation opportunity spectrum (ROS)—A framework for

understanding the relationships of signing and other management actions in
various settings to the visitors’ experiences. For example, hiking in a wilderness
with few signs enhances the hiker’s feelings of self reliance, self-discovery,
challenge, and solitude. In contrast, walking easy interpretive trails outside
a visitor center with numerous signs and information offers the visitor more
comfort, security, opportunities for learning, and social opportunities.
Restriction—A restriction precludes the use of the route or area during a

specified time period by:
• Type of vehicle or mode of travel, such as motorized vehicles, passenger
cars, log trucks, all-terrain vehicles (ATV), motorcycles, or snowmobiles.
• Type of traffic, such as nonmotorized, public, or commercial traffic. Other

types of nonrestricted traffic or vehicles are accepted.
Retroreflective sheeting—Flexible sheets consisting of countless micro

cube-corners or spheres enclosed in a weather-resistant transparent plastic film.
To reflect color, pigment or dye is inserted into the film or onto the reflecting
surface.
Retroreflectivity—The nighttime visibility of signs and pavement markings.

The scientific term that describes the ability of a surface to return light back to
its original source. Retroreflective signs and pavement markings bounce light
from vehicle headlights back toward the vehicle and the driver’s eyes, making
signs and pavement markings visible to the driver. Signs and markings that
efficiently return the light appear brighter and easier to see and read.
Road Management Objectives (RMO)—Road management objectives

document the intended purpose, design criteria (FSM 7720), and operation
and maintenance criteria (FSM 7730.3) for each NFS road. RMO require
written approval by responsible official and are included in the applicable forest
transportation atlas (FSM 7711.2. para. 2a). Use the process enumerated in
FSH 7709.59, chapter 10, for documenting RMO. An RMO is required for each
NFS road.
Scenic integrity objectives—A measure of the degree to which a

landscape is visually perceived to be whole, intact, or complete. Scenic integrity
is measured as a continuum over five levels: very high (unaltered), high
(appears unaltered), moderate (slightly altered), low (moderately altered), and
very low (heavily altered).
Seasonal average daily traffic (SADT)—The total volume of traffic

passing a point or segment of a road in both directions for a particular season
divided by the number of days in the season. Normally, periodic daily traffic
volumes are adjusted for hours of the day counted, days of the week, and
seasons of use to arrive at the seasonal average daily traffic.
Shall—Used for a statement of required, mandatory, or specifically prohibited

practice. For traffic control devices, this requires compliance with the MUTCD
and any additional guidance provided by these Guidelines. In the MUTCD,
“shall” is equal to “standard.”
November 2012
Should—Used as guidance for a recommended but not mandatory practice

with deviations allowed where engineering judgment or engineering study
indicate a deviation is appropriate. In the MUTCD, “should” is equal to
“guidance.”
Speed limit—The maximum or minimum speed applicable to a section of

highway as established by law.
Statutory speed—A speed limit established by legislative action that typically

is applicable for highways with specified design, functional, jurisdictional and/or
location characteristic and is not necessarily shown on Speed Limit signs. This
may also be referred to as the “Basic Rule.”
Temporary traffic control (TTC)—The control of traffic when road

construction, utility work, maintenance operations, planned major events, and
the management of incidents, such as traffic accidents, wildfires, floods, and
hazardous material spills, take place on or adjacent to the road and the normal
use of the road is temporarily interrupted.
Temporary traffic control zone—An area of a highway where road

user conditions are changed because of a work zone or incident by the use of
temporary traffic control devices, flaggers, uniformed law enforcement officers,
or other authorized personnel.
Traffic—Pedestrians, bicyclists, ridden or herded animals, vehicles, streetcars,

and other conveyances either singularly or together while using for purposes of
travel any highway or private road open to public travel.
Traffic control device (TCD)—A sign, signal, marking, or other device

used to regulate, warn, or guide traffic placed on, over, or adjacent to a street,
road (or trail), or highway, public facility, private property open to public travel,
pedestrian facility, or shared use path, by authority of a public agency or official
having jurisdiction.
Traffic engineering—The study of the interaction between the road user,

the vehicle, and the roadway. A systematic investigation of traffic engineering
and safety issues must understand the communication process between traffic
control devices and the road user. It includes the optimum legibility, visibility,
interpretation, and reaction for colors, size, legibility, shapes, and placement of
signs that best meet the needs of conveying the appropriate message to the
driver at the proper time.
Traffic management strategies—Options for managing traffic on NFS

roads where appropriate to control traffic. Use one or a combination of the
following strategies for different modes of travel (FSM 7731.11):
• Encourage use. Encourage use consistent with the condition of the road
and its Road Management Objectives.
• Accept use. Accept, but do not encourage, use by vehicles that are
suitable for the road.
• Discourage use. Discourage some or all types of motor vehicle use.
• Prohibit use. Prohibit motor vehicle use.
November 2012
Trail Management Objectives—Trail management objectives (TMO)

document the intended purpose, design criteria (FSM 2353.26), and operation
and maintenance criteria (FSM 2353.25) for each NFS trail. TMO require written
approval by the responsible official and are included in the applicable forest
transportation atlas (FSM 7711.2, para. 2a). See FSM 2353.12 for direction on
documenting TMO. A TMO is required for each NFS trail.
Traveled way—The portion of the roadway used for the movement of

vehicles, exclusive of shoulders and auxiliary lanes (AASHTO, 2001, A Policy on
Geometric Design of Highways and Streets).
Unauthorized road or trail—A road or trail that is not a forest road or trail
or a temporary road or trail and that is not included in a forest transportation
atlas (36 CFR 212.1, FSM 2353.05, FSM 7705).
Vehicle—Any device in, upon, or by which any person or property is or may be

transported, including any frame, chassis, or body of any motor vehicle, except
devices used exclusively upon stationary rails or tracks (36 CFR 261.2).
Viewing distance—The distance an object is viewed. For viewing text, the

industry standard calculation is visibility at 50 feet per 1 inch of character height.
For viewing graphic and video images, both minimum and maximum viewing
distances should be considered.
• Minimum viewing distance is the closest a viewer can be located to the

display and see a uniform image. Text based displays are more forgiving
and can be legible from a few feet away.
• Maximum viewing distance is the farthest distance from the display the
viewer can be located and recognize the displayed content. The more
detailed the content the closer a viewer will need to be to adequately read it.
Warrant—A warrant describes threshold conditions to the engineer in

evaluating the potential safety and operational benefits of traffic control devices
and is based upon average or normal conditions. Warrants are not a substitute
for engineering judgment. The fact that a warrant for a particular traffic control
device is met is not conclusive justification for the installation of the device.
Wheelchair or mobility device—A device, including one that is battery-

powered, that is designed solely for use by a mobility-impaired person for
locomotion; that is suitable for use in an indoor pedestrian area; and that may be
used by a person whose disability requires its use anywhere that foot travel is
permitted (Title V, sec. 507c, of the Americans With Disabilities Act and 36 CFR
212.1) (FSM 2352.05, FSH 2309.18.05).
November 2012
1.6.4 Sign Identification
Signs are usually identified by a unique series of letters and numbers. The
letters are abbreviations that refer to the type of sign. The numbers refer to the
size of the sign or the sequence of the sign within a specific sign series. The
most common sign abbreviations are shown below.
Common Sign Abbreviations
Abbreviation Term
A Administrative Site—Urban
AS Administrative Site—Rural
BM Barricade Marker
D10 Reference location sign (formerly mile post)
FA Forest Service Fee Area
FE Forest Entrance—Major Boundary
FL Forest Leaving—Major Boundary
FM Forest Route Marker
FR Forest Service regulatory sign having a different size or

design than listed in MUTCD
FW Forest Service warning sign having a different size or

design than listed in MUTCD
FP Fire Prevention
FRD Forest Road Destination
IC Incident Command
JC Job Corps
M Route Markers
MFE Minor Forest Entrance
MFL Minor Forest Leaving
NFL National Forest Land Boundary
NHT National Historic Trail Marker
NRA National Recreation Area
NRT National Recreation Trail Marker
NST National Scenic Trail Marker
OM Object Marker
November 2012
Common Sign Abbreviations (continued)
Abbreviation Term
P USDA Plaque
PXX* Poster
R Regulatory (MUTCD signs for roads)
RA Recreation Area
RS-XXX* Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol
RD Road
RS Recreation Site Identification
RSE Recreation Site Entrance
S Forest Service Shield
SA Site Approach
SBL Scenic Byway Logo
SBR Smokey Bear Fire Rating
SDS Sanitary Dump Site
SW Solid Waste Disposal
TB Trail Blazer
TD Trail Destination
TDW Trail Destination—Wilderness
TM Travel Management
VIS Visitor Information Service
W Warning (MUTCD signs for roads)
WP Wilderness/Primitive Area
WSR Wild and Scenic River
YCC Youth Conservation Corps
* X’s stand for numbers in the specific sign or poster number
Figure 1-1 gives examples of how these abbreviations are used to identify
specific signs.
November 2012
Regulatory
Miscellaneous identification numbers
Size
R1-1 R1-1-30
Warning
Miscellaneous identification numbers
ONE LANE Size (generally the horizontal dimension)

BRIDGE Orange (temporary traffic control)
W5-3-30-0
W5-3
Forest Service design different than standard MUTCD signs

STEEP Warning
NARROW Miscellaneous identification numbers
ROAD Size (generally the horizontal dimension)
FW5-1b-24
FW5-1b
Fish Creek Recreation site identification

Modified #1 – two-line site type name
WILDLIFE
O B S E R VAT I O N S I T E Size – in this case 63 in. x 40 in.
ROGUE RIVER
RSM1-2
RSM
Forest Service design different than standard MUTCD signs

Boonton Lake 15 Road destination
Number of lines of text
Fishing Creek 3 Size of upper case letters
Long Meadow 7
FRD-3-4
FRD
Figure 1-1—How to read sign numbers.
1.7 Sign and Poster Standards

1.7.1 Design
Designs—Standard designs have been developed for signs and posters and
should be used as required. Design of signs should ensure that features, such
as size, contrast, color, shape, composition and lighting, or retroreflectivity, are
combined to draw attention to a simple sign with a clear meaning. Legibility and
Standard designs have size combined with placement should permit adequate time for user viewing and
response to the sign message.
been developed for
Colors—Standard colors have been established for specific purposes and types
signs and posters and
of signs. It is critical to use the colors specified consistently and only for these
should be used as purposes to facilitate sign recognition and user response. TCD shall use the
specified colors with no deviations.
required.
Word messages—Standard (approved) word messages shall be used for
most applications. Other word legends should be brief while clearly conveying
the intended message. Lettering shall be large enough to provide for adequate
legibility at required distances.
August 2013
Symbols—Standard symbols may be used in situations where they are more

effective than conventional word messages. They are particularly effective for
non-English users. Standard symbols shall be used without modification. Use of
other symbols and logos must be approved by the Washington Office Director of
Engineering. Symbols for warning signs shall be approved by FHWA.
Sign materials—Signs are manufactured using a variety of different materials

including high density overlay (HDO) plywood with hard smooth surface(s)
to which retroreflective sheeting will adhere; medium density overlay (MDO)
plywood with surface(s) similar to kraft paper that will accept routing and paint;
oak, cedar, and other wood materials; aluminum; fiberglass; plastics; and
composite materials. Other materials commonly used in the manufacturing
process include retroreflective sheeting, paint, stain, clear vinyl edge tape, clear
protective (graffiti-resistant) overlay sheeting, and installation hardware.
Sign manufacturing specifications—Sign manufacturing specifications

are contained in chapters 14 and 14A. These specifications are for service-
wide application. Regardless of the procurement source, all signs shall be
manufactured in full compliance with these specifications.
1.7.2 Standard Abbreviations for Signs

Use complete words or symbols in sign messages whenever possible.
Abbreviated words may be used where the length of named destinations or
features would cause excessive sign length and where the abbreviated form
has clear meaning to the public. Abbreviations shall not be used on boundary
and site identification signs.
The MUTCD, section 1A.15 identifies universally accepted abbreviations. In

addition, approved Forest Service abbreviations are given below for use on road
and trail guide signs. Only the abbreviations in the MUTCD or shown here shall
be used on signs. Periods are not a part of abbreviations on road signs but may
be used on trail signs.
Lettering style for abbreviations shall follow the same lettering style as
unabbreviated names and words. Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.4.2 for
lettering style description.
October 2013
Approved Forest Service Abbreviations
Upper Case Title Case

Boundary BDY Bdy
Branch BR Br
Brook BRK Brk
Campground CG CG*
Canyon CAN Can
Creek CR Cr
Divide DIV Div
Elevation ELEV Elev
Equipment EQUIP Equip
Fork FK Fk
Gulch GUL Gul
Headquarters HDQS Hdqs
Lake or Lakes L or LKS L or Lks
Little LIT Lit
Lookout LO Lo
Lower LOW Low
Meadow MDW Mdw
Middle MID Mid
National Forest NF NF
Number NO No
Off-Highway Vehicle OHV OHV
Peak PK Pk
Point PT Pt
Railroad RR Rr
Ranger Station RS RS
Reservation RES Res
Reservoir RESVR Resvr
River R or RIV R or Riv
Road RD Rd
Spring or Springs SPG or SPGS Spg or Spgs
Station STA Sta
Stream STRM Strm
Trail TR Tr
Trailhead TRHD Trhd
* This is an exception to the title case lettering style requirement.
November 2012
1.7.3 Forest Service Shield, USDA Identification, and Logotypes

1.7.3a Forest Service Shield and USDA Credit Line
The standard Forest Service shield is the only symbol used to identify the Forest
Service and shall be used without modification.
The standard Forest
The Forest Service shield shall be displayed either on the sign base or face as
Service shield is the
detailed in the drawings.
only symbol used to
Emphasize identification of the Forest Service as an agency of the Department
identify the Forest of Agriculture. In addition to the shield, the words “United States Department of
Service. Agriculture” or “U.S. Department of Agriculture” shall be displayed on all forest
entrance, administrative, and other major signs as identified in other chapters of
this guidebook. Interior boundary signs do not require the USDA credit line.
The color of the shield and USDA credit line should be compatible with the
primary identification sign color.
For FS shield artwork use the image shown in chapter 8C, section 8C.7.
1.7.3b Logotypes
The national standard logotypes shown in figure 1-2, shall be used without
modification for the following:
• National forests. • National monuments.
• National grasslands. • National Volcanic Monuments.
• National recreation areas. • Wilderness areas.
Logotypes are drawings and have not been created from a standard font.
The title of the unit type, such as “National Forest” or “National Grassland” shall
appear in the standard logotype preceded by the proclaimed name of the unit in
standard text.
The national standard In instances where more than one unit name is in the combined unit title or all
logotypes shall be used the forests in a State, the plural form of the unit, such as “National Forests,” is
used in the logotype.
without modification.
The national distinctive logotypes may be used sparingly for identification on
cooperative plaques, visitor information boards, interpretive signs, special
posters, pamphlets, and so forth, providing that priority and adequate identity
are given to the use of the national forest and U.S. Department of Agriculture.
Do not use logotypes on administrative signs or any other signs or posters that
deal with regulations, authority, or administration.
Use of national standard logotypes for other purposes or if other logotypes are
developed requires approval by the Washington Office Director of Engineering.
Submit these requests through the regional sign coordinator.
November 2012
Figure 1-2—National standard logotypes.
August 2013
1.7.4 Accessibility Signing

Signs provide key information concerning the accessibility of programs and
facilities.
For Federal accessibility standards, refer to the “Architectural Barriers Act

Accessibility Standards” (ABAAS) and the “Forest Service Outdoor Recreation
Accessibility Guidelines” (FSORAG) or “Forest Service Trail Accessibility
Guidelines” (FSTAG). The current direction for accessible signage is available in
the “Forest Service Accessibility Guidebook on Outdoor Recreation and Trails”
available on the Forest Service recreation/accessibility Web site.
Contact the regional accessibility coordinator (RAC) for more information or if

you need assistance.
Refer to chapter 6, section 6.8 for additional information on accessibiity signing.
International Symbol of Accessibility

The International Symbol of Accessibility (ISA) indicates the facility or area
is in full compliance with the applicable accessibility standards. No words
are required to be used with the symbol. If words are used with the ISA, use
“accessible” rather than “handicapped.”
The International Symbol of Accessibility (ISA) is required in the ABAAS, chapter

2, provision F 216, to be posted at the following six sites:
• Accessible parking spaces when five or more parking spaces are provided.
• Accessible restrooms.
• Accessible loading zones.
• If the main entrance is not accessible, the ISA and an arrow are to be
posted to direct to the closest accessible entrance.
• Accessible area of refuge inside multistory buildings.
• Accessible means of exit out of a building.
Do not post the ISA at:
• The entrance of a building if that entrance is accessible.
• Individual camping units.
• Recreation site entrances unless ALL of that facility meets the Federal
accessibility standards
There is no legal requirement for the ISA to be posted in blue and white on
federally managed lands, however the ISA must be posted in high contrast
colors. Yellow on brown or cream on brown colors blend well into the forest
setting, while providing the required high contrast. These alternate colors are
appropriate at restrooms and other required locations listed above.
November 2012
At designated accessible parking spaces at facilities on National Forest System

lands, where the State or local law enforcement would not be ticketing vehicles;
these alternate colors also may be used. Forest Service Law Enforcement
Officers may ticket those vehicles as necessary.
ISA signs shall comply with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(MUTCD), section 2B.47, with the accessibility symbol displayed blue and
white, to be enforceable by State or local law enforcement at accessible parking
spaces. Signs identifying accessible parking spaces shall be no less than 5 feet
to the bottom of the sign.
The only approved color for pavement markings to designate accessible parking
spaces is blue per the MUTCD, sections 3A.054 and 3B.19 and 20.
1.7.5 Other International Symbols

Post the appropriate International Symbols where required to promote and
publicize accessibility of places, programs and other activities for people with
various disabilities.
Audio Description for TV, Video, and Film. This service makes
television, video, and film more accessible for persons who are blind or have
low vision.
Telephone Typewriter (TTY)
TTY indicates a telephone device used with the telephone (and the phone
number) for communication between deaf, hard of hearing, speech-impaired
and/or hearing persons.
Volume Control Telephone
Use this symbol to indicate the location of telephones that have handsets with
amplified sound and/or adjustable volume controls.
Sign Language Interpretation
Sign language interpretation is provided for a lecture, tour, performance,

conference, or other program.
Braille
November 2012
Assistive Listening Systems
These systems transmit sound via hearing aids or head sets. They include
infrared, loop, and FM systems.
Braille
Accessible Print
Use this symbol for large print that is printed in 18 point or larger text.
The Information Symbol
Use this symbol to indicate the location where there is more specific information
or materials concerning access accommodations and services, such as “LARGE
PRINT” materials, audio cassette recordings of materials, or sign-interpreted
tours.
Closed Captioning (CC)
Use this symbol to indicate that a television program or videotape is closed

captioned for deaf or hard of hearing persons (and others).
Open Captioning (OC)
Use this symbol to indicate that a television program or videotape is captioned

on the screen for deaf or hard of hearing persons (and others).
Braille Symbol
Use this symbol to indicate that printed matter is available in Braille, including
Braille exhibition labeling, publications, and signage.
November 2012
1.8 Removing/Covering Signs

It may be necessary to have signs and posters that are for seasonal use only or
which pertain to a particular activity or event. Examples include such activities
as construction and maintenance of the roadway or adjacent area, timber sales,
and fires as well as recreation or firewood posters and other notifications about
forest uses. Some of these activities may be of short duration. Others may
continue for weeks, months, or even years. Some signs are needed continually
during a project, while others are needed off and on over a long period of time.
Unnecessary signs or posters should be removed or covered. It is important to

remove signs and posters when the project is completed or the need is past.
Failure to remove these signs and posters leads to a credibility problem, and
needed signs and posters become ineffective. Users may be confused by a
It is important to sign or poster for an activity or project that is not active. Examples include fire
remove signs and danger ratings during nonfire seasons, snowmobile notifications in off-seasons,
and signs left over from previously completed activities.
posters when the
Cover, hinge, or remove signs when not needed or where signs are needed
project or the need is
intermittently over a long period of time. The advantage of a hinged sign is
past. that it is already in place and can be made usable easily when needed, but
its message is covered when not needed. Refer to the hinged warning sign
drawing in chapter 14A. Hinged signs require active management to ensure that
the proper message is visible at the proper times.
If signs must remain in place for further use in the near future, such as for
construction that will continue in another season, they may be covered with
well-taped black plastic or commercial products specifically developed to cover
signs. It is not usually necessary to cover signs for short-term shutdowns like
weekends or holidays unless the presence of the signs would cause driver
confusion. Evaluate on a case-by-case basis.
1.9 Temporary Signs and Posters

Posters and other approved temporary notifications made of paper or other
lightweight materials should be removed when the season or need for them
is over. The display method should be professional and in harmony with the
surroundings. Posters and temporary signs shall not be placed or installed on
traffic-control devices, on the posts supporting TCD, or any other permanent
sign.
1.10 Overview of Chapters

The material in these Guidelines is arranged to facilitate its use by field
personnel on all national forests and national grasslands. A separate chapter
has been devoted to each type of signing, and each contains the basic policy,
description, standard signs, and detailed drawings for those signs. Placement
criteria, manufacturing specifications, and procurement for all signs are
contained in separate chapters.
November 2012
The chapters are described below:
Chapter 1: Introduction and Principles. This chapter provides a

general overview of basic principles, guidelines, and standards that govern the
application of all types of signs and posters.
Chapter 2: Plans and Documentation. This chapter provides guidelines

for developing, documenting, and maintaining a comprehensive sign plan.
Chapter 3: Traffic Control Devices. The MUTCD is the national standard

for all TCD, which are defined as all signs, markings, and other devices used to
regulate, warn, or guide traffic on roads or highways by authority of the public
agency having jurisdiction.
This chapter provides guidelines for signing on NFS roads, which includes
roads leading to and within administrative sites and developed recreation sites.
The MUTCD must be consulted for other specifics not included in the following
subchapters:
• Subchapter 3A: Traffic Control Devices—Regulatory Signs. Contains

guidelines specific to regulatory signs on NFS roads. Only Forest Service
signs or specific applications of MUTCD signs on NFS roads are included.
• Subchapter 3B: Traffic Control Devices—Warning Signs. Contains

guidelines specific to warning signs, roadway structures, pavement
markings, and other warning devices on NFS roads. Only Forest Service
signs or specific applications of MUTCD signs on NFS roads are included.
• Subchapter 3C: Traffic Control Devices—Guide Signs. Contains

guidelines specific to guide signs on NFS roads including scenic byways.
• Subchapter 3D: Traffic Control Devices—Placement and Installation.

Placement and installation standards and guidelines for all traffic control
devices.
• Subchapter 3E: Traffic Control Devices—Sign Drawings. Sign drawings

for traffic control devices specific to the Forest Service. The MUTCD and
the “Standard Highway Signs” book must be consulted for other signs.
Typical examples of traffic control devices in chapter 3 are:
STEEP
Hayesville 1 0
NARROW Murphy 20
ROAD
Scenic Byway Big Flat 2 2
R1-1 SBL FW5-1a FRD
November 2012
Chapter 4: Temporary Traffic Control. This chapter provides guidelines

for temporary traffic control for construction, maintenance, and utility operations
on roads as well as signs for incident management operations for fires, law
enforcement, and other incidents. Consult the MUTCD for those specifics not
included here.
• Subchapter 4A: Temporary Traffic Control—Placement and

Installation. Placement and installation standards and guidelines for all
temporary traffic control devices.
• Subchapter 4B: Temporary Traffic Control—Sign Drawings. Sign

drawings for traffic control devices specific to the Forest Service. The
MUTCD and the “Standard Highway Signs” book must be consulted for
other signs.
Typical examples of the signs in chapter 4 are:
LOGGING FIRE
OPERATIONS ACTIVITY
AHEAD
FW21-4a FW21-8
Chapter 5: Trail Signing. This chapter contains the guidelines for all trails.
• Subchapter 5A: Trail Signing—Placement and Installation. Placement

and installation instructions for all trail signs.
• Subchapter 5B: Trail Signing—Sign Drawings. Drawings for signs used

on trails.
Typical examples of the trail signs are:
RS-068
W H I T E R I V E R PA S S
FM1-7H INDIAN CREEK TR. NO. 211
S. FK. WHITE RIVER TR. NO. 138
M1-7H
TD-3
November 2012
Chapter 6: Travel Management Signing. This chapter contains the

guidelines for signing travel management activities, including motorized and
non-motorized uses. The objective of this chapter is to achieve agency-wide
consistency in the use of signs to reinforce travel management decisions so that
visitors traveling across the country can expect to encounter similar signing on
all national forests and grasslands. Lack of consistency leads to confusion and
undermines public support. Public acceptance of travel management decisions
is essential to successful implementation of those decisions.
• Subchapter 6A: Travel Management Sign Drawings. Includes sign

drawings for travel management signs.
A typical example is:
ROAD RESTRICTION
NO PUBLIC
MOTOR VEHICLE
USE YEARLONG
Motor vehicle use by
permit only
Public non-motorized use
allowed yearlong
Please do not block the gate
For further information, refer to the
Bearclaw District Use Map or contact
Bearclaw Ranger Station, Phone: XXX-XXXX
TM-1
Chapter 7: Developed Recreation Site Signing. This chapter identifies

and provides information for signing related to developed recreation sites. It
includes Forest Service managed developed recreation sites and privately
provided recreation sites.
• Subchapter 7A: Developed Recreation Site Signing—Placement and

Installation. Contains guidelines for placement and installation of recreation
signs. Guidance for signs on roads leading to and within recreation sites are
contained in chapters 3 through 3E.
• Subchapter 7B: Developed Recreation Site Signing—Sign Drawings.

Includes sign drawings for recreation signs.
A typical example is:
Trout Creek
CAMPGROUND
WINEMA
RS
November 2012
Chapter 8: Forest Identification Signing. This chapter provides

guidelines for signs used to identify national forest, national grassland, national
recreation area, wilderness area, primitive area boundaries, scenic rivers, and
administrative facilities.
Typical examples include:
Greys River
Headquarters RANGER STATION
WASATCH
BRIDGER – TETON TETON
AS—Forest Headquarters AS—Ranger District FE—Major Forest Entrance
• Subchapter 8A: Forest Identification Signing—Administrative Sites.

Contains guidelines on signing administrative sites.
• Subchapter 8B: Forest Identification Signing—National Forest,

Grassland, and Other Administrative Boundaries. Contains guidelines
for signing the boundaries of national forests and all the special areas
including wilderness and primitive areas and scenic rivers.
• Subchapter 8C: Forest Identification Signing—Sign Drawings. Includes

drawings of the different forest identification signs.
Chapter 9: Cooperator Signs and Posters. This chapter contains

guidelines for signs associated with cooperative activities with Federal, State,
municipal, or other public agencies and with private and civic organizations.
Typical examples include:
San Ysidro Trail Safe use of front country trails requires all users to follow
common trail etiquette. You will likely encounter others
on the trail and a little courtesy goes a long way.
Elevation: 3,463
Welcome to the Santa Barbara Front Country Trails System

All Trail Users
• Be courteous and polite.
• Pack out what you pack in.
• Stay on designated trails.
• Pass others only when it is safe to do so.
YIELD
• Do not use muddy trails. • Never cut switchbacks or create shortcuts.
TO
Hikers and Runners Equestrians
• Always yield to equestrians. • Know the level of difficulty of the trail.
• Be alert for approaching bicyclists. • Know your riding ability and horse’s
• Do not camp or make campfires. trail ability.
• Inform encountered users of the safest
way to pass.
Mountain Bikers
• Scatter manure on trails and away
• Always yield to all other trail users.
from trailheads.
• Always use a bike bell.
• Control your speed at all times
Trail Users with Dogs LOGO
• Anticipate others at turns.
• Dogs allowed off leash, but under control ?
• Avoid skidding.
at all times. www.sbtrails.org HERE
www.fs.fed.us/r5/lospadres/
• Do not allow your dog to chase wildlife.

• Carry a leash in case you need it. LOGO LOGO LOGO
? ? ?
• Always clean up after your dog! HERE HERE HERE
November 2012
Chapter 10: Visitor Information Signing. This chapter provides

guidelines for visitor information signing and interpretative signing including
bulletin boards to assist the forest and grassland visitor in understanding natural,
cultural, and historic features and management practices. The Smokey Bear fire
danger signs and installations are included.
• Subchapter 10A: Visitor Information Signing—Interpretive. Contains

examples and guidelines on interpretive signing in various circumstances.
• Subchapter 10B: Visitor Information Signing—Bulletin Boards,

Posters, Fees, Registration. Guidelines for visitor information signing;
including bulletine boards, posters, registration and payment, and
wilderness trailhead signs.
• Subchapter 10C: Visitor Information Signing—Fire Rating. Contains fire

rating and safety signs and drawings.
An example is:
Note:
Smokey colors not
reproduced here.
PREVENT WILDFIRES
SBR
Chapter 11: RESERVED. This chapter is reserved for guidelines on signing

historic sites.
Chapter 12: Program Area Signs. This chapter contains guidelines for the
use of program area signs that support program activities.
Typical examples are:
Property of
THE UNITED STATES
All persons are prohibited under
penalty of the Law from commit-
ting trespass
REWARD: For information leading to arrest and
conviction of any person so charged
Particulars available from the Forest Supervisor
64-1
64-1 27-7
November 2012
Chapter 13: Accident Prevention and Safety Signing. This chapter

provides guidelines for signs associated with accident prevention and safety
programs at facilities.
Examples are:
CAUTION DANGER
EYE PROTECTION AUTHORIZED
REQUIRED BEYOND PERSONNEL
THIS POINT ONLY
Chapter 14: Manufacturing Specifications. This chapter contains

detailed drawings and material and manufacturing specifications for all types of
signs. Use of these specifications is mandatory for all Forest Service signs.
Subchapter 14A. Manufacturing Specifications—Sign Blank

•
Standards. Includes sign blank standards to illustrate detailed dimensions
for the various signs used by the Forest Service.
Chapter 15: Procurement. This chapter provides information on how to

procure signs and posters.
Chapter 16: Sign Maintenance, Repairs, Recycling, and Disposal.

This chapter provides guidelines for the maintenance of signs and how to
recycle and dispose of them when they are no longer needed for their intended
purposes.
Chapter 17: Reserved. This chapter is reserved for forms used for
documenting engineering studies, engineering judgement, and other sign
decisions.
1.11 References
The following references contain signing information that typically is not
repeated in these Guidelines. The most recent edition of each of these
references shall be used. The edition available at this revision and the agency
publishing the documents are listed below as well as Internet locations to view
or purchase the publication.
• The (BEIG) Built Environment Image Guide (BEIG). 2001. FS-710. U.S.
Department of Agriculture, Forest Service.
• Forest Service Outdoor Recreation Accessibility Guidelines. U.S.

Department of Agriculture, Forest Service. <http://www.fs.fed.us/recreation/
programs/accessibility>.
November 2012
• Forest Service Trail Accessibility Guidelines. U.S. Department of

Agriculture, Forest Service. <http://www.fs.fed.us/recreation/programs/
accessibility>.
• A Guide to Small Sign Support Hardware. 1998. GSSH-1. AASHTO.
• Guidelines for Geometric Design of Very Low-Volume Roads (ADT< 400).

2001 edition. American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials. <https://www.transportation.org/publications/bookstore> (purchase
only, not available to view online).
• <http://www.halecolorcharts.com> (Source for U.S. Government and

industrial color tolerance charts.)
• Maintenance of Signs and Sign Supports, a guide for local Highway and
Street Maintenance Personnel. 2010. U.S. Department of Transportation,
Federal Highway Administration.
• Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. 2009 edition. Department of

Transportation, Federal Highway Administration. <http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.
gov> (can be viewed and downloaded online).
• Recreation Opportunity Spectrum, Users Guide. 1982. U.S. Department of

Agriculture, Forest Service.
• Roadside Design Guide. 2002. Third edition. American Association of State

Highway and Transportation Engineers, <https://www.transportation.org>
(purchase only, not available to view online).
• Sign Installation Guide. 2010. (2-page sized booklet) U.S. Department of

Agriculture, Forest Service, Missoula Technology and Development Center.
<http://fsweb.mtdc.wo.fs.fed.us>. Available on Forest Service Internal Web
site only.
• Standard Highway Signs. 2011. Department of Transportation, Federal

Highway Administration. <http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov> (can be viewed and
downloaded online).
• Traffic Control Devices Handbook. 2001 edition. Institute of Traffic

Engineers. <http://www.ite.org/bookstore> (purchase only, not available to
view online).
2.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................1
2.2 Plan Contents............................................................................................................2
2.2.1 Inventories....................................................................................................3
2.2.2 Historical records........................................................................................4
2.2.3 Sign procurement, installation, and removal ...........................................4
2.2.4 Accomplishment documentation...............................................................4
2.2.5 Inspection and maintenance records........................................................4
2.2.6 Engineering Judgment and Engineering Study documentation.............4
2.2.7 Problems .....................................................................................................4
2.3 Evaluation..................................................................................................................5
November 2012
2.1 Introduction
Sign plans are absolutely critical for accomplishing Forest Service signing
objectives in a professional, orderly, consistent, and cost-effective manner. A
sign plan provides the framework for managing an effective and consistent sign
and poster program; helps determine future budget needs; and aids in resolving
litigation and other problems involving signage. It helps identify signs that are
needed so unnecessary ones are not installed or can be removed if installed
prior to the plan. It also provides information for and commitment to a specific
course of action. It documents all decisions and actions regarding signs. A sign
Sign plans are plan helps avoid sign overload at certain locations and insures proper sign
spreading if multiple signs are needed in the same proximity.
absolutely critical for
accomplishing Forest A unit sign plan shall be developed that meets the requirements of FSM 7160,
this chapter, and the specific needs of the administrative unit. The minimum
Service signing administrative or planning unit for the unit sign plan is the ranger district.
objectives in a
Unit sign plans may be kept separately by each administrative unit or combined
professional, orderly, with adjoining units to form plans for a zone, a national forest or a national
grassland.
consistent, and cost-
effective manner. Experimental forests, research stations, and other regional facilities should have
administrative unit sign plans developed and maintained at the appropriate
organizational level.
Site-specific sign plans also may be developed for individual sites or situations,
such as the following:
• Administrative sites.
• Boundary Identification.
• Developed recreation sites and other recreation opportunities.
• Interpretive programs and other points of interest.
• Traffic control devices for individual or groups of roads and trails.
• Access routes to national forests and other administrative units.
• Construction, maintenance, and incident management activities.
• Travel management implementation of motor vehicle use maps.
These site-specific sign plans become addendums to the unit sign plan.
Interdisciplinary involvement is often needed and valuable in development of

administrative unit and site-specific sign plans. For example, developing a site-
specific sign plan for a recreation site may include the following information from
other disciplines:
• Safety (records of accidents or information on near misses).

• User information needs.
• Resource protection needs.
• Liability considerations.
• Law enforcement concerns and needs.
S i gn and P os t er G ui de l i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 2-1

November 2012
The initial sign plan may be done from a map, but the final sign plan must be
verified in the field.
Revise and update sign plans on an ongoing basis as signs are replaced, new
signs are added, signs that are no longer needed are removed, or as physical or
administrative changes occur, such as:
• Increase or decrease in traffic volume.

• A change in motor vehicle designation.
• Implementation of a speed limit.
• Change in surface type, such as pavement to gravel.
• Lowering the maintenance standard of a road, such as maintenance
level 3-5 to a maintenance level 2 or maintenance level 2-5 to a
maintenance level 1.
• Raising the standard of a road, such as moving it from maintenance
level 1 to a maintenance level 2-5 or maintenance level 2 to a
maintenance level 3-5.
• Changes made in a recreation site, such as changing the traffic flow or
adding or reducing facilities.
• Road reconstruction, such as changing traffic flows or adding ingress/
egress points.
• Change in road use, such as long term commercial haul.
• When road management objectives or transportation management
objectives are revised.
2.2 Plan Contents

Sign plans should contain relevant physical, technical, and management
information that is used to assist making decisions that involve the following:
• New installations.
A sign plan should be
• Replacements.
comprehensive even
• Sign removals.
if all signs are not
• Maintenance activities.
currently funded. • Budget preparation.
• Annual work plans.
2-2 S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
2.2.1 Inventories
The inventory should be all inclusive with a description of existing and planned
signs, posters, and other traffic control devices; their supports, locations, and
conditions; any relevant vandalism history; maintenance and inspection dates
and results; and documented engineering studies and application of engineering
judgment. The description should contain sufficient detail to allow reordering of a
sign if it is damaged or missing. Bulletin board assemblies, groups of delineators,
boundary line markings, and other similar groupings can be inventoried as a
unit. The inventory information should be recorded by a method that adequately
stores the inventory information for the unit. Some examples include Infra Travel
Routes, an Access database, other electronic formats, hard copy forms, maps or
other methods developed by the unit, or any combination of these.
The following specific information should be documented in the inventory:
The inventory should • ID Number: a unique identification number assigned to each sign.
be all inclusive with a • Catalog Number: the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices” or
Forest Service number of the sign.
description of existing
• Panel Size: the overall size and thickness of the sign panel.
and planned signs,
• Panel Substrate: the type of substrate, such as high density overlay,
posters, and other medium density overlay, polyplate, or aluminum.
traffic control • Sign Legend: the sign message exactly as it appears on the sign, line
by line.
devices.
• Legend Technique: the type of legend, such as routed, silk screened, or
pressure-sensitive sheeting.
• Legend Size: the letter heights of all legends.
• Surface Type: the type of the sign surface, such as retroreflective
sheeting, painted, stained, baked enamel, or natural.
• Basic information on the engineering study or application of engineer-
ing judgment that was completed for the sign installation, removal, or
replacement, including the date completed and the name of the quali-
fied engineer who conducted it.
Consider including the following information for more complete documentation:
• Post or Base Type: the type of post or base, such as wood, u-channel,
flexible fiberglass, stone, or log.
• Post or Base Size: the nominal dimensions of the existing post or base
size; note if breakaway is required.
• Viewing Distance: the approach distance at which the sign is to be
read.
• Clear zone determinations.
• Mounting Locations: the distance from the road grade to the bottom of
the sign panel and the distance from the edge of the traveled way to the
nearest edge of the sign panel.
• Photographic Record: a photographic record of each sign with the date
it was taken.

August 2013
• Notes: information on environmental or site conditions that may

be useful during development of the sign plan, including unusual
road conditions, speed of approach, impaired lines of sight, and
topographical and geologic constraints, such as surface bedrock, high
water table, or other conditions, that may affect sign location.
• Permit Requirements: a copy of the permit from the public road
authority where applicable.
2.2.2 Historical records

Include any historical records, such as field notes taken during a road review
recommending the need for a sign or the need to remove a sign, past accidents
at a site, documented problems, or photographs that document the existence of
a sign that is no longer in place.
2.2.3 Sign procurement, installation, and removal

Document the procurement information for signs including costs, vendor
information, and the inspection records when accepting the order. Document any
pertinent installation information, such as contractor or force account information,
any installation difficulties that were encountered, or other factors that could
affect future installations at that location. Document dates when signs were
removed and reasons for removal.
2.2.4 Accomplishment documentation

Document the accomplishment of the annual work plan and include any work
planned, but not accomplished. Include the reasons why the planned work was
not accomplished.
2.2.5 Inspection and maintenance records

Documentation indicating when sign inspections and maintenance were
accomplished should be included in the sign plan. This documentation should
include the results of the inspections and any maintenance that is required and
any maintenance that was accomplished.
2.2.6 Engineering study, Engineering judgment and Professional

judgement documentation
The removal and installation of all signs require an engineering study or
application of engineering judgment, or application of professional judgement as
advised for individual signs in the current MUTCD and/or these Guidelines.
A record of all engineering studies, application of engineering judgments, and

application of professional judgements shall be included with the unit sign plan.
2.2.7 Problems
Document any problems with signs. Problems may be observed by the unit or
reported by the public. Signs that are repeatedly vandalized or damaged may
require more frequent inspections and maintenance than other signs on the unit.
Recurrent problems with a sign may require a reevaluation as to whether the
sign should be permanently removed.
October 2013
2.3 Evaluation
An annual evaluation is suggested to compare existing and planned signs
against applicable standards and guidelines to include any sign needs with
the annual maintenance plans or to develop individual sign contracts. The sign
needs should include ordering and installing new or replacement signs, removing
obsolete signs, remounting or moving signs to be in compliance with placement
standards, and maintaining existing signs. Clearly describe planned actions,
schedule, responsibility, funding source, and estimated costs.
Consider the following questions in the annual evaluation:
An annual evaluation is • Are signs visible?

suggested to compare • Are signs missing?
existing and planned

• Are the existing signs in good condition?
• Do retroreflective signs meet the minimum retroreflectivity
signs.
requirements? When are they scheduled for replacement?
• Are existing signs in compliance with the current standards?
• Should existing signs be replaced or removed?
• Are existing signs necessary and appropriate?
• Are messages appropriate and/or accurate?
• Are signs in their proper locations?
• Have signs been installed correctly?
• Are new signs compatible with existing installations?
• Are existing signs compatible with changes in road maintenance levels
or use types?
• Are there too many signs resulting in confusing or conflicting messages
creating “sign pollution?”
• Based on accident reports or “near misses” are engineering studies or
application of engineering judgments required to determine if additional
signage is needed to alleviate safety concerns?
• Have signs been evaluated at night to determine their overall
effectiveness and retroreflectivity?

3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 1
3.1.1 Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, Compliance

Dates and Mandated Changes for Devices............................................ 2
3.2 Traffic Control Device Shapes.............................................................................. 3
3.3 Traffic Control Device Sign Materials.................................................................. 4
3.3.1 Substrates (Signboards).......................................................................... 4
3.3.2 Retroreflective Sheeting and Retroreflectivity...................................... 5
3.3.2a Replacing Signs Not Meeting Minimum Retroreflectivity

Requirements................................................................................ 5
3.4 Colors for Traffic Control Devices..................................................................... 10
3.5 Sign and Legend Size.......................................................................................... 11
3.6 Letter Font Series................................................................................................. 11
3.7 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standard Signs....................................................... 11
3.8 Signing Priority.................................................................................................... 12
3.9 Driver Expectancy and Behavior........................................................................ 12
3.10 Engineering Studies and Engineering Judgments ........................................ 13
3.10.1 Engineering Study and Engineering Judgment—Defined............... 13
3.10.2 Documentation of Engineering Studies and Engineering

Judgment .............................................................................................. 14
3.10.3 Specific MUTCD Engineering Study and Judgment

Requirements....................................................................................... 15
3.11 Elements in Engineering Studies..................................................................... 15
3.11.1 Spot Speed Studies.............................................................................. 15
3.11.2 Surface Changes................................................................................... 18
3.11.3 Vertical Curves....................................................................................... 18
3.11.4 Grades..................................................................................................... 18
3.11.5 Traveled Way Width............................................................................... 18
3.11.6 Traffic Composition (including motorized mixed use)...................... 19

November 2012
3.1 Introduction
Traffic control devices are all signs, signals, markings, and other devices used
to regulate, warn, or guide traffic, that are placed on, over, or adjacent to a
street, road, highway, pedestrian facility or bikeway, by authority of the agency
having jurisdiction.
The purpose of traffic control devices is to promote road safety and efficiency
by providing for the orderly and predictable movement of all road users. The
proper use of traffic control devices should provide the prudent driver with the
The purpose of traffic information necessary to travel the road efficiently and lawfully.
control devices is Traffic control devices notify road users of regulations and provide warning and
to promote road guidance needed for the uniform and efficient operation of all elements of the
traffic stream in a manner intended to minimize the occurrences of crashes.
safety and efficiency
Traffic control devices guide road users safely to, from, and within developed
by providing for the
recreation sites and administrative sites, such as campgrounds, trailheads,
orderly and predictable visitor centers, work centers, and ranger district compounds.
movement of all road Consider traffic patterns, road design, and use of traffic control devices when
users. planning and designing administrative and developed recreation sites. Site
plans that are completed without careful consideration of both vehicular and
pedestrian circulation patterns often result in site layouts that are overly
complicated to sign and confusing for users.
Engineering and recreation specialists should collaborate to determine how best

to sign roads and parking areas within developed recreation sites.
Use the standards and guidance contained in the “Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices” (MUTCD) for all signs and traffic markings intended to control
or regulate use on National Forest System roads. An exception is permitted
where there is an approved State supplement applicable to similar public roads.
In that situation, conform to the State supplement to avoid confusing motorists.
Refer to FSM 7731.16–Signing and Traffic Control Devices.
The MUTCD and these
The intent of this chapter is to provide Forest Service Guidelines that
guidelines provide supplement or complement the MUTCD for the most common signing and
standards, guidance, marking situations on conventional and low-volume National Forest System
roads. Refer to chapter 1, section 1.6.3.
and options for design
The MUTCD and these Guidelines provide standards, guidance, and options
and application of
for design and application of traffic control devices, but shall not be a legal
traffic control devices, requirement for their installation, nor a substitute for engineering judgment.
but shall not be a The decision to use a particular traffic control device at a specific location
legal requirement should be made on the basis of either an engineering study or the application
of engineering judgment. Refer to section 3.10. Decisions may vary from site-
for their installation, to-site even with similar conditions. Site-specific conditions may result in a
nor a substitute for determination that it is impossible or impractical to comply with a requirement,
and that the decision is to deviate from that requirement. In such cases, the
engineering judgment. deviation may be allowed, provided that the engineering reasons for the
deviation are fully documented.
November 2012
Traffic engineering assistance may be obtained through the forest, regional,

or Washington Office sign coordinator, State Departments of Transportation,
The MUTCD applies Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), States-Local Technology Assistance
Program (LTAP), a traffic engineering consultant if there are any questions
to all National Forest
about the applicability of the MUTCD or these Guidelines to a particular
System roads that are situation.
open to public travel. As defined in chapter 1, section 1.6.3:
• Shall (Standard) means a required, mandatory, or prohibitive practice.
• Should (Guidance) is a recommended but not mandatory requirement.
• May (Option) carries no requirement or recommendation.
The MUTCD applies to all National Forest System roads that are open to public
travel. Open to public travel means that the road section is available, except
during scheduled periods, extreme weather or emergency conditions, passable
by four-wheel standard passenger cars, and open to the general public for use
without restrictive gates, prohibitive signs, or regulation other than restrictions
based on size, weight, or class of registration (23 USC 460.2).
Maintenance level 2 (ML 2) roads are neither intended nor maintained for four-
wheel standard passenger car use, but many of them are passable by four-
wheel standard passenger cars. User safety is a consideration on these roads
All traffic control as it is on all roads. All traffic control devices needed on ML 2 roads shall be
consistent with the MUTCD and these Guidelines.
devices needed on
The use of new shapes and colors for regulatory and warning signs; new
ML 2 roads shall be regulatory, recreational, and cultural interest area symbols; and new traffic
consistent with the control devices not referenced in the MUTCD, these Guidelines, or approved
addendums, require Washington Office Director of Engineering approval. Refer
MUTCD and these to FSM 7160.41b.
Guidelines
The use of new symbol warning and regulatory signs for NFS roads not
referenced in the MUTCD, these Guidelines or approved addendums require
a recommendation from the Washington Office Director of Engineering and
approval by the FHWA.
All deviations from the standards in the MUTCD and these Guidelines
applicable to the acquisition, design, and installation of signs and posters not
reserved to the Washington Office Director of Engineering require regional office
approval through the regional sign coordinator. Refer to FSM 7160.42a.
The use of new word messages for regulatory and warning signs is not
considered a deviation from the standards in the MUTCD and these Guidelines,
but shall be approved by the regional sign coordinator for consistency and to
ensure the basic requirements are met.
3.1.1 Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices Compliance Dates and

Mandated Changes for Devices
The MUTCD contains compliance dates and upgrades/changes to existing
signs and devices that are mandated. Federal agencies are to have their
own manuals in substantial conformance with the MUTCD and the changes
contained therein within 2 years. These Guidelines complete that mandate.
3-2 Si gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
When traffic control devices are no longer serviceable, they shall be replaced
with devices conforming to the MUTCD, except as provided in paragraph 24
on page I-3 of the MUTCD. All nonconforming devices shall be brought into
conformance as part of systematic upgrades by the dates indicated in the
MUTCD, table I-2.
New construction or reconstruction of roads shall have traffic control devices

conforming to the latest edition of the MUTCD installed before that road is
opened to the public for unrestricted travel. Include all necessary traffic control
devices in the construction or reconstruction contract.
3.2 Traffic Control Device Shapes

Table 3-1 shows typical traffic control sign shapes.
Table 3-1—Traffic control sign shapes

New construction Image Shape Signs
or reconstruction
Octagon STOP
of roads shall have
traffic control devices
conforming to the
latest edition of the

Equilateral triangle YIELD
MUTCD installed (1 point down)
before that road is
opened to the public
for unrestricted travel.

Circle Highway-Rail Grade Crossing
(Advance Warning)
Pennant shape/isosceles NO PASSING

triangle (longer axis
horizontal)
Pentagon (pointed up) School Advance Warning
November 2012
Table 3-1—Traffic control sign shapes (continued)

Image Shape Signs
Pentagon (shape rounded) County Route
Crossbuck (two rectangles Highway-Rail Grade Crossing

in an “X” configuration)
Diamond Warning Series
Rectangle (including square) Regulatory Series

Guide Series
Warning Series
Recreation Symbols
Trapezoid Recreational and Cultural

Interest Area Series
National Forest Route
3.3 Traffic Control Device Sign Materials

3.3.1 Substrates (Signboards)
Permanent retroreflective traffic control device signs may be manufactured on a
variety of substrates, such as those shown below. Refer to chapter 14 for more
details.
• High density overlay (HDO) plywood.
• Fiberglass-reinforced plastic (polyplate).
• Aluminum.
• Aluminum composite.
• Wood plastic composites (WPC).
• Plastics (solid and corrugated), vinyl rollup, and other synthetic materials.
November 2012
Other existing substrate materials are available, and additional substrate

materials are being developed. The use of these other substrate materials is
allowed with the approval of the regional sign coordinator. Some tracking of
product effectiveness and longevity may be required.
3.3.2 Retroreflective Sheeting and Retroreflectivity

Regulatory, warning, and guide signs and object markers intended to be seen at
night shall be retroreflective or illuminated to show the same shape and similar
color by day and night.
The MUTCD, section 2A.08, requires that public agencies or officials

having jurisdiction for maintaining roadways open to the public travel use
an assessment or management method that is designed to maintain sign
retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels shown in the MUTCD, section
2A.08, table 2A-3. Compliance is achieved by having one of the methods
provided in the MUTCD, section 2A.08 in place and documented as officially
accepted.
Table 2A-Method D—blanket Replacement has been adopted by the Forest

Service as the national default method of compliance. This method requires all
traffic signs subject to the retroreflectivity standards be replaced within 12 years
of original installation, as measured by the installation date marker on the back
of the sign. Refer to chapter 3D, section 3D.8.
Regulatory, warning,
If a Forest Service unit chooses not to follow the default national standard for
and guide signs compliance, it must select one of the other methods provided in the MUTCD,
section 2A.08. The selection must be made in writing and kept as a permanent
and object markers record in the files.
intended to be seen
The method selected to meet the minimum retroreflectivity requirement is an
at night shall be important factor to consider when specifying the type of retroreflective sign
sheeting to use for a sign. Higher-grade retroreflective sheeting produces better
retroreflective or nighttime visibility, retains minimum retroreflectivity levels longer, and usually is
more cost effective in the long run.
illuminated.
The relative merits of some readily available retroreflective sheeting types are
shown in table 3-2. Other types of retroreflective sheeting not shown in table 3-2
may be used as long as they meet the minimum retroreflectivity requirements.
Adding glass beads to paint is not an acceptable method of providing

retroreflectivity.
3.3.2a Replacing Signs Not Meeting the Minimum Retroreflective Requirements
Regulatory and warning signs not meeting the minimums provided in

the MUTCD, section 2A.08 should be replaced with signs that meet the
requirements by the target date for compliance shown in the 2009 Edition of the
MUTCD, table I-2, Revision 2 or the most current revision.
Guide signs not currently using a sheeting type that meets the minimums
provided in the MUTCD, section 2A.08 should be replaced with signs that meet
these requirements as soon as resources and priorities allow.
Certain signs including parking signs and signs intended exclusively

for bicyclists are exempted from the requirements for maintenance of
retroreflectivity by footnote 6 in the MUTCD, section 2A.08.
November 2012
Decisions about priorities for replacing multiple nonretroreflective signs, when

faced with limited resources for sign replacement, should be advised by
engineering judgement. The following suggested priorities are provided as a
guide for judgement:
1. Location-critical regulatory signs, such as STOP and YIELD; object
markers; and location-critical warning signs, such as TURN and
INTERSECTION, on:
a. Maintenance Level 4 and 5 roads.
b. Maintenance Level 3 roads.
c. Maintenance Level 2 roads.
2. Nonlocation-critical regulatory signs, such as SPEED LIMIT, and
nonlocation-critical warning signs, such as LIVESTOCK, on:
3. Route markers on:
4. Destination and other guide signs on:
5. Informational and Motorist Services signs on:
Consideration also should be given to the physical attributes of the road when
determining priorities for sign replacement, especially when the attributes do not
currently match the maintenance level standards. For example, a road that was
maintenance level 4 but which has recently been lowered to maintenance level
2 or 3 may still function like a maintenance level road and consequently should
receive more consideration for sign replacement than a road which has long
been maintained at maintenance level 2 or 3.
Other factors to consider when determining sign replacement priorities include

RMO, traffic volume and composition, crash history, and Motor Vehicle Use Map
(MVUM) designations.
November 2012
Table 3-2—Retroreflective sheeting comparisons. Refer to Table 2A.3, MUTCD (2009 edition)
Name of ASTM D4956-09 Expected life Remarks
sheeting Type (manufacturer warranty)1
Engineer Grade and Type I NA This sheeting material
Engineer Grade does not meet the
Prismatic minimum AASHTO
classification criteria for
white, yellow, and orange
and is not acceptable
for most traffic control
devices. For those colors
where it does meet the
minimum criteria it may
not maintain this minimum
level for the expected life
of the sign.
Exceptions for certain
series and colors of
traffic control devices are
provided in the MUTCD,
section 2A.08.
Super Engineer Type II Orange–3 years This sheeting type meets

Grade All other colors–10-12 or exceeds the minimum
years levels of retroreflectivity
(Nikkalite) for all colors except for
white on green overhead
signs.
This sheeting is used
by some States to tone
down the retroreflective
brilliance for background
colors on some signs.
This sheeting may cost
less and be less prone to
separation of layers than
prismatics. Warranty is
similar to high intensity
prismatics, but may not
maintain the same level
of brilliance for as long as
prismatics. This material
may not be as readily
available as the high
intensity prismatics.
November 2012
(continued)
High Intensity Type III Orange–3 years This sheeting type meets
(beaded) All other colors–10 years or exceeds the minimum
(Avery Dennison) levels of retroreflectivity
for all colors except for
white on green overhead
signs.
This type of sheeting is

rarely used and may be
difficult to find. It offers
no appreciable cost
advantage over prismatic
or super engineering
grade and has less
retroreflective brilliance.
High Intensity Types III and IV Orange–3 years This sheeting type meets
Prismatic All other colors–10 years or exceeds the minimum
(3M) levels of retroreflectivity
for all colors. It is the
primary sheeting used
by most States and by
many sign manufacturers.
These factors help
keep the cost down
and the availability up.
Good warranty. This
sheeting may be prone
to separation from the
substrate especially in
locations where the sign
is covered with snow
for periods of time. For
these conditions it is
recommended that a
clear overlay film and
edge tape is applied. This
sheeting also is more
brittle than engineering
grade sheeting and may
crack and peel off if the
substrate is impacted
by a flying object. It is
recommended that clear
overlay film is applied if
this is a concern.
November 2012
(continued)
High Intensity Types >IV Up to 12 years (3M and Generally not cost
Prismatic Nikkalite) effective for Forest
Service applications.
Generally more brilliant
retroreflectivity than High
Intensity Prismatic III and
IV but at a higher cost.
Generally have the best
warranty. Fluorescent
colors available are in
the high grade sheeting
such as Diamond Grade
(3M) and Crystal Grade
(Nikkalite).
1
These warranty figures are from manufacturers’ literature and cannot be easily compared. For example,
the retroreflective brilliance of the prismatics is much higher at the end of their warranty period than that
of the Super Engineer Grade and the prismatics may retain minimum retroreflectivity for a longer period.
There are many other factors that affect sheeting longevity and the warranty information should be used
as general guidance only. Warranty information may also be dependent on the sign manufacturer.
Sheeting types are based on nighttime performance. Daytime performance

is comparable for all types of ordinary colored sheeting. Fluorescent colored
sheeting offers improved daytime visibility especially in rainy and foggy
locations.
Besides cost and past experience, some practical considerations influence

decisions on which type of retroreflective sheeting to order:
• Anticipated vandalism may dictate choosing the least expensive sheeting.
• Fabrication and stockpiling signs of different sheeting types may not be

efficient or practical.
• The sheeting selected should complement the method chosen to maintain

the minimum sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels shown in
the current edition of the MUTCD. Refer to chapter 14, section 14.3.3.
Installing retroreflective signs is only the beginning. Proper maintenance

ensures that signs continue to provide intended function and display sufficient
retroreflectivity to guide traffic at night.
November 2012
3.4 Colors for Traffic Control Devices

Colors for all traffic control devices are mandatory for consistent application
in the MUTCD. These colors shall be used regardless of which jurisdictional
authority installs signs to control traffic. The colors more commonly used on
National Forest System roads are listed below for convenience. See table 2A-5
in the MUTCD for a complete color use listing.
RED shall be used only as a background color for STOP signs, DO NOT
ENTER messages, and WRONG WAY signs. Red shall be used as a legend
color for YIELD signs, parking prohibition signs, and the circular outline and
diagonal bar prohibitory symbol. Red also shall be used on closure barricade
panels for other than construction and maintenance purposes. The fluorescent
version of this background color also may be used.
BLACK shall be used as a background on ONE WAY signs and certain weigh
station signs. Black shall be used for the legend on white, yellow, orange,
fluorescent yellow green, fluorescent pink, fluorescent yellow orange, and
fluorescent red orange signs.
WHITE shall be used as the background color for most regulatory signs,
except STOP signs. White also shall be used for the legend and border on
brown, green, blue, black, and red signs.
ORANGE shall be used as a background color for temporary traffic control

signs and incident management signs. The fluorescent version of this
background color also may be used.
FLUORESCENT ORANGE also may be used for temporary traffic control

signs and incident management signs. Fluorescent colors provide increased
visibility, especially in the low-light conditions of dawn and dusk.
YELLOW shall be used as a background color for warning signs, except where
orange is specified. The fluorescent version of this background color also may
be used.
BROWN shall be used as a background color for guide and information signs
on National Forest System roads and for recreational or cultural interest signs
on conventional highways. Brown also should be used for motorist services on
National Forest System roads.
GREEN shall be used as a background color for conventional highway guide

signs and reference location signs (mileposts) on both conventional and low-
volume roads and as a legend color with a white background for permissive
parking regulation signs.
BLUE is used as a background color for Interstate and county route numbers,
information signs related to motorist services and evacuation route markers, and
general service signs and plaques including the “Handicapped” plaque D9-6.
FLUORESCENT YELLOW GREEN may be used as the background color

only for school, playground, pedestrian, and bicycle warning signs.
FLUORESCENT PINK shall be used only as the background color for

incident management signs.
November 2012
3.5 Sign and Legend Size

Conventional road sign sizes are listed in the MUTCD, table 2B-1 for regulatory
signs and table 2C-2 for warning signs. Regulatory and warning sign sizes for
low-volume roads are listed in the MUTCD, table 5A-1. Sign sizes by road type
for regulatory and warning signs that are more commonly used on National
Forest System roads are shown in chapter 3A, table 3A-1 and chapter 3B,
table 3B-1. The legend size requirements for these signs are contained in the
“Standard Highway Signs” book.
Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.4.3 for guide sign legend and symbol size.
3.6 Letter Font Series

Traffic control signs shall use the Highway Gothic font in the following American
Standards Association (ASA) series as defined in “Standard Highway Signs”
book unless otherwise shown on the sign drawings.
Uppercase Letter size ASA Series
3- and 4-inch C
5- and 6-inch D
7 inches and above E
3.7 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standard Signs

Some signs made need additional emphasis for a variety of reasons.
• Road users may continue to miss signs in certain locations.
• A sign is new and unexpected.
• Conditions have changed.
Use any of the following methods, based on engineering judgment, to enhance

the conspicuity of a sign. Some methods are temporary and may be more
appropriate for temporary traffic control devices while others are more suitable
for permanent sign installations.
• Remove nonessential signs and conflicting signs from the right-of-way.
• Use fluorescent retroreflective sheeting, if allowed.
• Add one or more red or orange flags above the regulatory or warning sign,
with the flags oriented at 45 degrees to the vertical.
• Relocate the sign to provide better spacing, if possible.
• Increase the size of the sign.
November 2012
• Add a vertical strip of retroreflective material to the sign support for

regulatory and warning signs. It shall be at least 2 inches in width and
placed for the full length of the support to within 2 feet above the edge of
the road. The color shall match the background color of the sign.
• Other methods are documented in MUTCD, section 2A.15.
3.8 Signing Priority

Signing priorities for Signing priorities for traffic control devices on National Forest System roads
traffic control devices should be established for each administrative unit as part of a unit sign
plan. Priorities are appropriate for both first time installation and for sign
on National Forest replacement. Program implementation should consider the current level of
System roads should signing and available funding and personnel. The top priority for signing should
be established for address public health and safety issues and concerns. Other priorities will
vary by road depending on other factors, such as, traffic volumes and types,
each administrative traffic management strategies, road management objectives, motor vehicle
unit as part of a unit designations, and functional classification.
sign plan.
3.9 Driver Expectancy and Behavior

Drivers of different standards of roads are expected to drive with different levels
of caution, based on what the driver expects to encounter ahead. The physical
characteristics of National Forest System roads are usually readily apparent
to the driver. After viewing the start of a road and driving a short distance,
the alignment, surface type, road width, and ride quality usually suggest an
appropriate safe speed to a prudent driver.
Driver expectancy and behavior on National Forest System roads are influenced
by what was experienced on the previous section of road. Studies have shown
that what a driver has just encountered is what the driver expects on the next
portion of the road. This includes the road surface, width, alignment, traffic
volume and mix, and overall maintenance condition of the road as well as the
presence or absence of signs and other traffic control devices.
Past experiences with traffic control devices on other similar roads also
contribute to driver expectancy. If the road is inconsistent from what a
prudent driver would normally expect, the use of traffic control devices could
be considered to reduce the “surprise element” created by an unexpected
change in the road. Use of traffic control devices may reduce the uncertainty
and allow the driver to proceed ahead with greater confidence. Examples of
inconsistencies that may require traffic control devices are:
• Paved road changing to a gravel road.
• Sharp curve on the end of a straight section of road.
• Double-lane road or wide road narrowing to a single-lane road or bridge.
• Changing the designation of a road from highway legal vehicles to all motor
vehicles (motorized mixed use).
• A maintenance level 3-5 road that has been lowered to a maintenance

level 2, but is still accessible by passenger cars.
November 2012
Generally, maintenance level 2 roads require few if any traffic control devices.
Refer to FSH 7709.59, section 62.33. The requirement for traffic control
Generally, devices is influenced more by the physical attributes of the road and the user
maintenance level expectations rather than the maintenance level or the fact that these roads may
not be subject to all of the requirements of Forest Service guidance on highway
2 roads require few safety.
if any traffic control
The road user typically is not aware of the relationship between a maintenance
devices. Refer to FSH level 2 road and the highway safety program and that the road is not maintained
for passenger cars. Safety issues should still be evaluated and traffic control
7709.59 section 62.33.
devices may be required. The need for warning and regulatory signs on a
maintenance level 2 road should still be determined by engineering judgment or
an engineering study, and any necessary traffic control devices shall follow the
requirements of MUTCD and EM7100-15.
3.10 Engineering Studies and Engineering Judgments

The use of engineering studies and engineering judgments is a fundamental
principle of the application of traffic control devices. The selection of a particular
traffic control device is not required in most cases, but is determined by
engineering studies and engineering judgment.
Engineering studies
Engineering study and engineering judgment are specific terms defined in the
and engineering MUTCD and used throughout the highway industry to denote evaluations that
judgments shall are performed by qualified individuals for certain tasks involving traffic control
devices. Care needs to be taken to comply with the requirements denoted for
be exercised by a these evaluations. Unless otherwise indicated in these Guidelines engineering
qualified engineer judgment is assumed to be the minimum evaluation required.
or by an individual Engineering studies and engineering judgments shall be exercised by a qualified

engineer or by an individual working under the supervision of a qualified
working under the
engineer. A qualified engineer is an engineer that is knowledgeable in the
supervision of a proper application of principles, standards, guidance, and practices for traffic
control devices, such as forest, regional, and national sign coordinators. Refer
qualified engineer.
to chapter 1, section 1.5.
Engineering judgment can be exercised by an individual working under

the supervision of a qualified engineer or through policies and procedures
established by a qualified engineer.
3.10.1 Engineering Study and Engineering Judgment -Defined

Most signing needs on National Forest System roads may be determined based
on engineering judgment. This consists of the evaluation of available pertinent
information for the situation and the application of appropriate principles,
provisions, and practices as contained in these Guidelines, the MUTCD, and
other sources. Engineering judgments and studies are performed by a qualified
engineer as defined above and in chapter 1, section 1.5.
It is sometimes necessary or required to determine signing needs on National

Forest System roads based on an engineering study. This is a more formal,
analytical, and comprehensive evaluation of available pertinent information
November 2012
for the situation and the application of appropriate principles, provisions, and
practices as contained in these Guidelines, the MUTCD, and other sources. The
study may include information such as:
• Accident history and analysis.
Most signing needs
• Spot speed studies.
on National Forest
• Curve speed studies.
System roads may be
• Traffic counts and classification.
determined based on
• Existing and anticipated road conditions.
engineering judgment.
Engineering studies normally are limited to roads maintained for passenger
car traffic. An engineering study also may be necessary for a particular sign
or situation that is identified in these Guidelines or the MUTCD as requiring an
engineering study. One example is the requirement for an engineering study
before posting a speed limit.
Studies are more likely to be used for roads with the following characteristics:
• Higher speeds.
• Higher traffic volumes.
• Mixtures of commercial and recreation traffic.
• High accident frequencies.
• Severe accident consequences.
• Mixture of highway vehicles and off-highway vehicles.
3.10.2 Documentation of Engineering Studies and Engineering Judgment

Documentation is required for both an engineering study and engineering
judgment. The documentation for an engineering judgment should at a minimum
have the date the judgment was made, what the judgment was, the name and
signature of the person making the judgment and the name and signature of
the qualified engineer if different from the person making the judgement. This
will document that an engineering judgment was made and help provide future
reference for sign maintenance and replacement, and will aid in any possible
tort claims. Documentation of engineering judgment may be recorded on a sign
plan inventory for the road.
The documentation for an engineering study is more comprehensive and in

addition to the basic information included with an engineering judgment it
Documentation is
should include a discussion of all of the factors considered, individual studies
required for both an conducted, references, conclusions, and any other factors. It should be signed
by the person conducting the study and the qualified engineer, if different from
engineering study and
the person conducting the study. It is equally important to document engineering
engineering judgment. judgment and engineering studies that conclude a traffic control device is
not necessary or an existing traffic control device needs to be removed as it
is to document a determination that a new traffic control device is needed.
Place documentation for engineering studies and engineering judgments in a
permanent file for the road.
November 2012
3.10.3 Specific MUTCD Engineering Study and Judgment Requirements

Requirements for performing engineering studies and engineering judgments for
many traffic control devices and situations are scattered throughout the MUTCD.
Four specific requirements are repeated here for emphasis:
1. “Signs should be used only where justified by engineering judgment or

studies, as provided in Section 1A.09.” MUTCD, section 2A.03.
2. “The use of warning signs shall be based on an engineering study or on

engineering judgment.” MUTCD, section 2C.02
3. “Speed zones shall only be established on the basis of an engineering

study that has been performed in accordance with traffic engineering
practices. The engineering study shall include an analysis of the current
speed distribution of free-flowing vehicles.” MUTCD, section 2B.13.
4. “The advisory speed shall be determined by an engineering study that

follows established engineering practices.” MUTCD, section 2C.08.
It is critical that the qualified engineer consult these Guidelines and the MUTCD
to determine the specific requirements for performing engineering judgment or
an engineering study for a particular sign.
3.11 Elements in Engineering Studies

There are many elements that may be included in an engineering study. Some
elements that are relevant to National Forest System roads are discussed
below.
3.11.1 Spot Speed Studies

The intent of spot speed studies are to record speed characteristics under
prevailing traffic conditions at a specific location along a roadway.
The many applications of spot speed studies include, but are not limited to, the
following:
• Determine existing roadway speeds, for potential use in posting speed

limits.
• Evaluate the effectiveness of speed enforcement programs.
• Identify the speed impact of roadway geometry, including horizontal and

vertical alignment and general roadway features.
• Determine impact on speed of traffic control devices (traffic signs,

pavement markings, signals).
• Provide evidence to support/refute complaints of excessive speed.
• Analyze accident sites.
November 2012
Step 1: Organize the Study Plan

Identify the reason for conducting the study and the nature of the problem to be
evaluated. Other considerations include the date(s) and time(s) during which the
study should be completed, and the number of vehicles that should be observed
as part of the study.
The timing of the study should be consistent with the reason for conducting the
study. For example, if the study is being completed to determine the speed limit
to post due to excessive speeds during weekends, then the study should be
completed during the weekend.
Literature suggests that speed data be collected for a minimum of 1 hour and
observe at least 30 vehicles; however depending upon the type of technology
used to complete the study, and the complexity of the study, sample sizes and
durations can often include thousands of vehicles over multiple days. For low-
volume National Forest System roads, speed checks may be needed on more
than 1 day to obtain the necessary minimum sample size.
Once the plan is completed, the study can be carried out and the data can be
evaluated as outlined in the steps below.
Step 2: Location Selection and Collect Field Data

The specific location of a study should be chosen carefully so that recorded
speeds reflect how vehicles typically travel along unimpeded sections of the
road under free-flow conditions. Spot speed studies should be made during
daylight hours, good weather conditions, and typical road conditions. Newly
constructed or recently bladed roads may allow traffic to travel at higher speeds
than road surfaces that are worn, potholed, rutted, wash boarded, or covered
with loose material. The best and worst road surface conditions expected should
be considered when doing speed studies.
Things to consider:
• Select roadway section with typical travel speed.
• Make an attempt to avoid the following, primarily to avoid accelerating/

decelerating vehicles:
o Intersections.
o Work zones.
o Curves.
o Parking zones.
o Active crosswalks.
• Consider free-flow vehicles only (those not impacted by speed of preceding
vehicle).
• Consider date and time (consistent with step 1).
November 2012
• Avoid unusual conditions, including:
o Unique events.
o Inclement weather.
o Holidays.
• Determining speeds on unpaved roads may be difficult.
• When using a radar, consider:
o The angle of measurement to assure accurate speeds.
o Remain inconspicuous so as not to influence speeds (not from Forest

Service vehicle or in uniform).
o Ensure that you record the speeds and vehicle types (passenger car,
off highway vehicle, dump truck, etc.).
Step 3: Speed Data Reduction and Analysis

After the study is completed, tabulate the data to determine the 85th percentile
speed.
• 85th Percentile Speed: The speed at or below which 85 percent of a sample

of free flowing vehicles is traveling; this typically is used as a baseline for
establishing the speed (based on a spot speed study).
Step 4: Interpret and Report Findings

Using the descriptive speed characteristics determined in step 3, it is likely that
there is now sufficient data to answer the primary questions for which the spot
speed study was originally initiated. Such as:
• How do observed speeds compare with the proposed speed limit for the
observed roadway?
• How does the distribution of speeds before compare with speeds during or
after an enforcement campaign?
• If the desire to post a speed limit is due to excessive speeds, does your
data support this claim?
• Are speeds on the approach to a high crash location higher than the
roadway design speed?
• How do 85th percentile speeds compare with other roadways in the area?
November 2012
Spot speed studies may be conducted by several methods:
• Timing vehicles over a known distance.
• Following vehicles (staying far enough back to not affect their driving
speed).
• Driving the road several times to determine a prudent, comfortable speed

for the average driver, without skidding the rear tires around the curve.
• Using radar.
Refer to traffic engineering textbooks, such as the “Traffic Control Devices

Handbook” (ITE 2001), for information on speed studies. Information also is
available on various Web sites. Traffic engineering assistance also may be
obtained through the forest, regional, or Washington Office sign coordinator,
State Departments of Transportation, States Local Technology Assistance
Program (LTAP), Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), or a traffic
engineering consultant.
3.11.2 Surface Changes

Drivers are generally accustomed to asphalt or concrete pavements. Driving
aggregate- or native-surfaced National Forest System roads provides a different
experience that may need to be called to their attention. These roads usually
require longer stopping distances. They generally have poorer visibility because
of dust in the air and can have a rough driving surface because of wash
boarding, ruts, bumps, or potholes. In addition, loose gravel or other surface
Traffic control devices
conditions can cause skidding around curves or even on straight sections of the
alert drivers to road road.
inconsistencies so they
can travel at speeds 3.11.3 Vertical Curves

they deem prudent Sight distance may be critical on crest vertical curves located on single-lane
roads, or on any road where vertical and horizontal curves are combined.
based on current road
conditions.
3.11.4 Grades
Grades often exceed those normally experienced by drivers so additional
stopping distance may be required. Drivers may not be aware of the effect of
steep grades and various types of surfaces on the control and stopping distance
of their vehicles.
3.11.5 Traveled Way Width

Most National Forest System roads are single lane, which creates a unique
driving experience for drivers unfamiliar with this type of traveled way. Drivers
may need to stop and back into a turnout to allow another vehicle to pass.
National Forest System roads often change from a double-lane road to a single-
lane road with two-way traffic. Bridges may be narrower than the roadway.
November 2012

3.11.6 Traffic Composition (including motorized mixed use)
Traffic on National Forest System roads may include heavy logging trucks,
large construction, mining, or logging equipment, vehicles towing trailers, motor
homes, passenger cars, and nonhighway legal vehicles, such as off highway
vehicles and trail cycles. Drivers may not be accustomed to these types of
mixed traffic, and drivers for some of these vehicles, such as off highway
vehicles and trail cycles may not be licensed. Ideally, motorized mixed use
(highway legal and nonhighway legal vehicles) should not be allowed on the
same road. In some situations, however, it may be necessary to allow a mix of
highway legal vehicles with nonhighway legal vehicles, such as passenger cars
with off highway vehicles or snowmobiles.
Chapter 3A Traffic Control Devices Regulatory Signs
3A.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................... 1
3A.2 Intersection Controls—STOP/YIELD Signs....................................................... 3
3A.2.1 Where To Install STOP and YIELD Signs............................................ 3
3A.2.2 Intersection Sight Distance................................................................... 4
3A.3 Speed Limit Signs............................................................................................... 9
3A.3.1 Encouraging Safe Speeds Without Speed Limits............................. 10
3A.4 Keep Right/Left Signs....................................................................................... 11
3A.5 Selective Exclusion Signs................................................................................ 11
3A.6 Road Closure Signs.......................................................................................... 12
3A.7 Portal Signs........................................................................................................ 13
3A.7.1 Travel Management Portal Signs....................................................... 14
3A.7.2 COMMERCIAL USE PROHIBITED without permit Portal Sign........ 15
3A.7.3 CERTIFIED WEED-FREE STRAW & FEED Portal Signs (FR17-1)... 15
3A.8 Check Station Signs.......................................................................................... 15
3A.9 Weight Limit Signs............................................................................................ 16
3A.10 Non-Road Related Signs Placed in Road Right of Way.............................. 16

November 2012
3A.1 Introduction
Regulatory signs inform road users of traffic laws or regulations and indicate the
applicability of legal requirements that are not apparent.
All regulatory traffic control devices shall be supported by laws, ordinances,

or regulations, such as weight and size limits, road closures, and speed limits.
National Forest System road regulations shall be supported by a signed order.
See FSH 7709.59, section 23 and 36 CFR 261.54.
Regulatory signs should be used conservatively because these signs, if used

to excess, tend to lose their effectiveness. Regulatory signs shall not be used
unless enforcement is feasible and planned. If there is no enforcement of
regulatory signs, there is no consequence to drivers who ignore signs they
consider unnecessary. If enforcement is not planned or feasible, do not install
signs that contribute to the sign credibility problem. Unnecessary signs create
a climate of disrespect for all signs and result in the possibility of accidents
Regulatory signs caused by drivers ignoring signs that are necessary.
should be used Chapters 2B and 5B of the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices”
conservatively because (MUTCD) contain guidelines for regulatory signs. This chapter contains Forest
Service Guidelines that supplement the MUTCD, provide additional emphasis as
these signs, if used to needed for NFS road, and signs that are specific to the Forest Service only.
excess, tend to lose
For regulatory sign sizes refer to the MUTCD, table 2B-1 for conventional roads
their effectiveness. and table 5A-1 for low-volume roads.
Low-volume NFS road with speed limits or 85th percentile speeds of 30 miles
per hour (mph) or less would allow the minimum sizes. Larger signs may be
used when needed for higher speeds or other situations requiring greater sign
visibility. Table 3A-1 shows the sign sizes by road type for regulatory signs that
are more commonly used on NFS road.
The minimum sizes shown in table 3A-1 for low-volume roads with speeds 30
mph and below were derived from the minimum size columns in the MUTCD,
tables 2B and 5A, depending on which one contained the smallest size. The
judgment was made that these roads are considered low-speed roadways
where the reduced legend size would be adequate for the regulation or warning
or where physical conditions preclude the use of larger sizes as described in the
MUTCD, section 2A.11, paragraph 2.
Si gn and P os t er G ui de l i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 3A-1

November 2012
Table 3A-1—Regulatory sign sizes by road type

Low-volume road
Sign Conventional Typical sizes Minimum sizes

Regulatory signs code or road (inches) = or (inches)
series (inches) >35 mph 30 mph & below
STOP R1-1 30 x 30 30 x 30 30 x 30
YIELD R1-2 36 x 36 x 36 30 x 30 x 30 30 x 30 x 30
SPEED LIMIT R2-1 24 x 30 24 x 30 18 x 24
Keep Right Symbol R4-7 24 X 30 24 X 30 18 X 24
KEEP RIGHT R4-7a 24 x 30 24 x 30 18 x 24
NO MOTOR VEHICLES R5-3 24 X 24 24 X 24 24 x 24
AUTHORIZED TRAFFIC ONLY FR5-11a 30 x 24 30 x 24 30 x 24
HIGHWAY LEGAL VEHICLES ONLY FR5-11b 24 x 30 24 x 30 24 x 30
Variable Road Restrictions FR5-11c NA3 NA3 NA3
ENTERING MOTOR VEHICLE

RESTRICTION AREA STAY ON
FR5-12a 96 x 42 96 x 42 60 x 24
ROUTES DESIGNATED ON MOTOR
VEHICLE USE MAP

RESTRICTION AREA STAY ON FR-12b 96 x 30 96 x 30 60 x 18
DESIGNATED ROUTES
ROAD CLOSED 2 R11-2 48 x 30 48 x 30 48 x 30
ROAD CLOSED TO PUBLIC USE FR11-4a 60 x 30 60 x 30 60 x 30
ROAD CLOSED TO PUBLIC USE

FR11-4b 60 x 30 60 x 30 60 x 30
(hours and days) 2
COMMERCIAL USE PROHIBITED

FR11-4c 60 x 30 60 x 30 36 x 18
WITHOUT PERMIT
WEIGHT LIMIT XX TONS R12-1 24 x 30 24 x 30 24 x 30
AXLE WEIGHT LIMIT XX TONS R12-2 24 x 30 24 x 30 24 x 30
WEIGHT LIMIT w/ symbols R12-5 24 x 36 24 x 36 24 x 36
VEHICLES WITH WATERCRAFT

FR13-1a 60 x 48 60 x 48 42 x 30
MUST ENTER CHECK STATION
CERTIFIED WEED-FREE STRAW

AND FEED REQUIRED ON FEDERAL FR17-1 84 x 30 84 x 30 48 x 18
LANDS 1
1
This regulatory sign is not used to inform road users of selected traffic laws or regulations and therefore should not
be funded with road-related funds.
2
This regulatory sign may be smaller sized when placed on gates or other barriers and will not be viewed from a
moving vehicle.
3
Size depends on message. Refer to section 3A.5.
3A-2 S i gn and P os t er G ui de l i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15

November 2012
3A.2 Intersection Controls—STOP/YIELD Signs

Intersections on NFS road may appear different from those on other roads that
drivers are accustomed to driving for several reasons:
Most intersections
• Intersections may not be signed.
on low-volume NFS
• Grades are often steeper.
roads do not need
• Intersecting angles may be sharper.
intersection control in
• Road surfaces and conditions change frequently.
the form of STOP or
• Roadside vegetation may inhibit sight distance.
YIELD signs. Most intersections on low-volume NFS road do not need intersection control
in the form of STOP or YIELD signs. Unwarranted installation of these signs
causes unnecessary stops or delays. The enforcement of STOP and YIELD
signs requires an order pursuent to 36 CFR 261.54(d).
R1-1 R1-2
Use a STOP sign only when traffic is ALWAYS required to stop. Consider
using YIELD signs in lieu of STOP signs when appropriate. YIELD signs do not
require drivers to come to a full stop. They still clearly establish right-of-way and
do not require the level of enforcement needed for STOP signs.
When used, YIELD signs normally should be placed to control the traffic on the
road with the lowest volume. They should not be placed on the approach to
more than one of the intersecting roads at a “Y” or “T” intersection, nor placed
on more than two approaches at an “X” intersection. They should not be used at
any intersection where there are STOP signs.
3A.2.1 Where To Install STOP and YIELD Signs

For conventional roads, use the MUTCD, section 2B.04 to 2B.10 in performing
an engineering study or applying engineering judgment evaluating the need for
STOP or YIELD signs.
For low-volume roads, consider STOP (R1-1) and YIELD (R1-2) signs
consistent with the provisions of the MUTCD, sections 2B.04 to 2B.10 where an
engineering study or engineering judgment indicates that either of the following
conditions applies:
A. An intersection of a less important road with a main road where

application of the normal right-of-way rule might not be readily apparent.
B. An intersection that has restricted sight distance for the prevailing vehicle
speeds.

November 2012
Consider the following in performing an engineering study or engineering

judgment about the need for STOP or YIELD control at intersections of low-
volume roads.
• Engineering judgment may be sufficient for a single-stop situation. Perform

an engineering study for multi-way stops at an intersection.
• Intersection control may not be needed when:
o Traffic volumes are less than 100 seasonal average daily traffic
(SADT) on all approaches, unless a need has been determined
by engineering study or engineering judgment or demonstrated by
accident history.
o Approach speeds are equal to or less than 15 mph.
• Intersection control may be needed when:
o Adequate sight distance does not exist on all approaches to a low-

volume road intersection and it is impracticable to remove sight
distance obstructions. Refer to section 3A.2.2.
o Two low-volume roads with similar SADT intersect, and the

application of the right-of-way rule could be unduly hazardous.
o Two or more vehicle accidents have occurred within the last 3 years,
or an accident investigation indicates the need for intersection control.
o The intersection configuration is confusing, such as with “Y”

intersections, and normal right-of-way expectations may be violated.
Reevaluate intersection-control needs when there is an increase or decrease

in use patterns, such as an increase in commercial or logging vehicles, a new
recreation development with increased traffic, a developed recreation site is
closed with a decrease in traffic, or a revised motor vehicle designation that
mixes motor vehicle traffic. An increase in traffic may result in the need for
intersection control while a decrease in traffic may result in STOP signs being
converted to YIELD signs, or removal of existing intersection control.
Also consider the need to control vehicle-pedestrian conflicts near locations that
generate high pedestrian volumes; locations where a road user, after stopping,
cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to reasonably safely negotiate the
intersection unless conflicting cross traffic also is required to stop.
Refer to chapter 3D, figure 3D-1 for STOP and YIELD signs location examples.
3A.2.2 Intersection Sight Distance

One of the primary considerations for determining the need for a STOP or
YIELD sign, or choosing between the two, at an intersection on low-volume
roads is the intersection sight distance. The intersection sight distance refers
to the corner sight distance available at an intersection that allows the driver
of a vehicle approaching the intersection to be able to see all potentially
conflicting traffic on the other legs of the triangle in time to react appropriately
and avoid a collision. The critical intersection sight distance depends on the

November 2012
approach speeds of both roads, the type of traffic control at the intersection, and
the presence of any roadside obstructions that could block or hinder the view
in either direction. Evaluate sight distance triangles for all approaches to an
intersection in an engineering study or engineering judgment using figure 3A-1
and table 3A-2.
Evaluate the intersection as follows:
• Determine the approach speed for each approach to the intersection by

using the 85th percentile speed or a spot speed study. Refer to chapter
3, section 3.11.1. Where these methods are not readily available, use the
common sense method of driving the road at various speeds to determine a
prudent speed for each approach.
Evaluate sight • Use the approach speeds to determine the sight distance requirements for
distance triangles each approach in accordance with the “no control” figures in table 3A-2.
for all approaches to • On each approach, from the approach distance for its speed, measure the
distance from the intersection to where a vehicle on other approaches would
an intersection in an
no longer be visible.
engineering study or
• Where those measured distances are longer than those in the “no control”
engineering judgment columns in table 3A-2, no control is needed.
• Where those distances are less than “no control” distances but more than
“stop control” distances on both left and right approaches, consider using a
YIELD sign.
• Where those distances are less than “stop control” distances on either
approach, consider using a STOP sign.
Minor
road
Major road Sight distance*

CL
Sight distance*
Sight
triangle
The sight triangle should be free of all sight
obstructions. An obstruction in the sight
triangle is anything over 32 feet high. A few
trees would not be considered an obstruction
if limbed up to 9 feet above the line of sight
and good sight of vehicles approaching is
available.
*Obtain sight distances from table 3A-2.

Figure 3A-1—Sight triangle.

November 2012
Table 3A-2—Sight distance requirements at various speeds

Sight distance requirements (feet)
Column A
Operating Column B Column C Column D
speed Major road with Minor road with Major or minor
(miles per stop control1 stop control1 road with no
hour) control2
10 45 50 —
20 90 50 125
30 130 50 200
40 180 50 325
50 220 50 475
60 260 50 650
1
Stop control means a stop sign is at the intersection on the approach under
consideration.
2
No control means there are no stop or yield signs at the intersection.

November 2012
Case A – Intersections With No Control.
Minor
Assume no control is being considered on the major route and only the minor
road route is under consideration.
B
Given: No traffic control at the intersection of Major Road A and Minor Road B.
325 ft
CL
Major road A
Needed Step 1—Determine needed site triangle.

sight triangle
Approach speed of Major Road A is 40 mph
Approach speed of Minor Road B is 20 mph
125 ft
Sight distance from table 3A-2:

• Major Road A (no control):
Use Column A value of 40 mph
Value of Column D = 325 feet
• Minor Road B (no control)
Step 2—Determine measured sight triangle.

From the 125-foot sight distance on Road B, the distance from the intersection to
where a vehicle on Road A was no longer visible was measured at 75 feet to the
right and 100 feet to the left. The minimum required sight distance of 325 feet
cannot be provided in either direction due to obstructions in the sight triangles.
Minor
road
B
Major road A 75 ft
CL
.100 ft
125 ft
Measured Measured
sight triangle sight triangle
Step 3—Compare and evaluate.

Since these distances are less than the “no
control” distance (325 feet) but more than the
“stop control” distance (50 feet) on at least one
(both left and right approaches in this case)
of the approaches, consider using a YIELD
sign. The next step is to evaluate the need for
intersection control with a yield sign on Road B
considering all of the factors for the site.

November 2012
Minor Case B – Intersections With No Control.

road
B Assume no control is being considered on the major route and only the minor
route is under consideration.
325 ft
CL
Major road A
Needed
sight triangle
125 ft
Step 1—Determine needed site triangle.

Given: No traffic control at the intersection of Major Road
A and Minor Road B.
Approach speed of Major Road A is 40 mph
Approach speed of Minor Road B is 20 mph
Sight distance from table 3A-2:
• Major Road A (no control):
Step 2—Determine measured sight triangle. • Minor Road B (no control)

From the 125-foot sight distance on Road B, Use Column A value of 20 mph
the distance from the intersection to where Value of Column D = 125 feet
a vehicle on Road A was no longer visible
was measured at 40 feet to the right and 100
feet to the left. The minimum required sight Minor
road
distance of 325 feet cannot be provided in B
either direction due to obstructions in the sight
triangles.
Major road A 75 ft
CL
100 ft
.
125 ft
Measured Measured
sight triangle sight triangle
Step 3—Compare and evaluate.

Since the distance on the right (40 feet) is less
than the “stop control” distance (50 feet as
shown in column C for 20 mph) consider using
a STOP sign. The next step is to evaluate the
need for intersection control with a STOP sign
on Road B considering all of the factors for the
site.
Refer to AASHTO A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets,

2004 or current edition.

November 2012
3A.3 Speed Limit Signs

Speed limits are generally not needed nor recommended on most NFS road.
Impose speed limits only where and when necessary. Application of the “basic
Speed limits shall
rule” found in State motor vehicle codes requiring that drivers travel at speeds
“reasonable and prudent for conditions” is usually sufficient. Also, sight distance
only be established and physical characteristics of NFS road often influence safe operating speeds.
on the basis of an Experience has shown that drivers’ speeds are usually governed more by
engineering study that road conditions than by posted speed limits. This is particularly true when
enforcement is lacking.
has been performed in
accordance with traffic

Speed limits (other than statutory speed limits) shall only be established on the
basis of an engineering study that has been performed in accordance with traffic
engineering practices. engineering practices. The posting and enforcement of established speed limits
including statutory speed limits requires an order pursuant to 36 CFR 261.54(d).
New speed limits should not be established without a plan to enforce them, and
existing speed limits should be removed should enforcement lapse.
Speed limits less than 15 miles per hour shall not be posted on NFS road
including roads in recreation areas unless recommended by an engineering
study. If unreasonably low speeds are posted, the limit will be violated by a large
number of drivers. This creates a credibility problem with drivers and breeds
disrespect for all signs.
It is often advantageous to develop an agreement for enforcement with local law

enforcement agencies such that they can enforce speed limits on NFS road.
At least every 5 years, nonstatutory speed limits should be reevaluated where

R2-1 significant roadway characteristics or surrounding land use has changed.
3A.3.1 Encouraging Safe Speeds Without Speed Limits

Encouraging safe speeds without setting speed limits is a method of positive
guidance that works well on unpaved roads but also is applicable to low-volume,
low-speed paved roads. It is appropriate for almost any low-volume road where
establishing speed limits is deemed inappropriate or where speed limits cannot
or will not be enforced. For example, most NFS road are unpaved, and surface
conditions are susceptible to changes throughout the year with or without
surface maintenance. Where this is the case, posted speed limits could be
inappropriate at times for some road conditions.
An alternative to posting speed limits is the common sense approach of

installing warning devices giving positive guidance at locations where a driver’s
expectancy could be exceeded as determined through engineering judgments
or engineering studies. Thus, drivers can travel at speeds they deem prudent,
based on existing road conditions, but are warned when road geometry or
conditions change abruptly.

November 2012
Consider the following when encouraging safe speeds without posted speed
limits:
• Warning signs or devices including advisory speed plaques on sharp

curves after long tangents or other unexpected road geometry changes
where a speed reduction approaching the curve or other unexpected road
geometry is 10 mph or greater.
• Where tangents lead to visible flat curves and then to increasingly sharper
curves that automatically slow traffic and the curves are expected, signing
might not be needed.
• Roads with long tangents and visible curves without major inconsistencies
may not need any signs. Road users will choose their own prudent speed.
• Warning signs with or without advisory speed plaques in areas of high

pedestrian or other non-motorized traffic, such as campgrounds and visitor
centers.
Using this “common sense” method of encouraging safe speeds without

speed limits negates the need and expense of speed limit signs, orders, and
enforcement costs. In addition, the traffic control devices alert drivers to road
inconsistencies so they can travel at speeds they deem prudent based on
current road conditions.
Speed limits in recreation areas often provide poor traffic control and are
ineffective without consistent enforcement. Warning signs, such as a Pedestrian
symbol (W11-2) with Advisory Speed plaque (W13-1P), may provide better
control.
Pavement markings may be used in place of or in support of regulatory signs as

determined by an engineering study or engineering judgment. Some examples
include Speed Hump Markings, Crosswalk Markings, and Edge Line Pavement
Markings.
3A.4 Keep Right/Left Signs

The Keep Right symbol (R4-7) or Keep Left symbol (R4-8) sign should be used
at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the right-hand or
left-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction and where it is not readily
apparent that traffic is required to keep to the right or left.
The Keep Right symbol sign shall not be installed on the right-hand side of the
roadway in a position where traffic must pass to the left-hand side of the sign.
R4-7
The Keep Right symbol sign shall not be used to supplement standard traffic
rules which require operators to drive on the right side of the road.
Word message KEEP RIGHT (R4-7a) or KEEP LEFT (R4-8a) with an arrow
signs may be used instead of the R4-7 or R4-8 symbol signs.
R4-7a

November 2012
3A.5 Selective Exclusion Signs

Travel by various types of traffic or vehicles on NFS road may be restricted
seasonally or yearlong to accomplish a variety of management strategies.
Selective exclusion signs give notice to road users that CFR orders exclude
designated types of traffic from using a road. Selective exclusion signs may be
used to supplement travel management decisions or designations on the Motor
Vehicle Use Map. Refer to chapter 6 for travel management signing.
Selective Exclusion signs shall clearly indicate the type of traffic that is excluded.
The NO MOTOR VEHICLES (R5-3) sign may be used at locations where

all public motor vehicle use is prohibited unless they are excluded from the
prohibition, such as law enforcement vehicles or emergency vehicles; or are
performing official business, such as administrative or permitted vehicles.
Nonvehicular traffic is still allowed.
R5-3
The AUTHORIZED TRAFFIC ONLY (FR5-11a) sign, may be used at locations

AUTHORIZED to prohibit all traffic from using the road unless they are excluded from the
prohibition, such as law enforcement or emergency personnel, or others
TRAFFIC performing official business, such as administrative or permitted use.
ONLY
FR5-11a
The HIGHWAY LEGAL VEHICLES ONLY (FR5-11b) sign may be used:

HIGHWAY
• At the beginning of a road where nonhighway legal vehicles are not allowed
LEGAL for the entire length.
VEHICLES • At intersections where nonhighway legal vehicles can access the road
ONLY designated for highway-legal vehicles only from other motorized mixed use
roads or motorized trail systems.
FR5-11b • On road segments where nonhighway legal vehicles are no longer allowed
after road segments where they had been allowed.
Variable Road Restrictions (FR5-11c) signs indicate specific times and/or days
of use and modes of travel that are restricted. The information on these signs
should be clear and concise to avoid confusion for the user. Remove or cover
any signs that are not appropriate to the use occurring at that time or may be
confusing or distracting to the user.
Variable Road Restrictions signs may be used to sign coincident and

noncoincident routes that are managed for separate seasons and/or times for
different uses.

August 2013
These signs should be designed on a case-by-case basis and shall be approved

by the regional office sign coordinator.
LOGGING TRAFFIC ONLY

MON 6AM THRU FRI 5 PM
SNOWMOBILES ONLY
FRI 5 PM THRU SUN 12 AM
FR5-11c (changeable message)
LOGGING TRAFFIC ONLY

MON 6AM THRU FRI 5 PM
OCT 31 – MAR 15
FR5-11c (changeable message)
Roads that are physically restricted by a gate or other barrier may have travel
management signs that are smaller than those required for open roads and are
not meant to be read from a moving vehicle. Refer to chapter 6, Access and
Travel Management, for more information on these signs.
3A.6 Road Closure Signs

Use the ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign to mark roads that have been closed
to all traffic except authorized vehicles. It is intended primarily for use where
travel on the road has been impacted by situations, such as work zones,
incident zones, floods, landslides, bridge washouts, and other areas where the
general public is not allowed.
R11-2
ROAD CLOSED Use the ROAD CLOSED TO PUBLIC USE (FR11-4a) sign when administrative
ROAD TO
CLOSED traffic is allowed behind the closure and there may be some confusion with other
TO PUBLICUSE
PUBLIC USE public traffic when they see authorized vehicles entering the closed road. Dates
FR11-4a and times may be added to the sign as applicable (FR11-4b).
The ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) and ROAD CLOSED TO PUBLIC USE (FR11-4a)
ROAD CLOSED
signs shall be preceded by the applicable Advance Road Closed warning sign
TO PUBLIC USE with the secondary legend AHEAD or a distance. Refer to the MUTCD, section
7 AM - 5 PM MON THRU FRI
6F.20.
FR11-4b

November 2012
Do not use ROAD CLOSED signs where nonvehicular traffic is allowed.
Do not use ROAD CLOSED signs at a gate or other restriction device for
seasonal or long-term access and travel management road restrictions. ROAD
CLOSED signs are not appropriate for ML1 roads that are placed in long-term
storage and are not designated for motor vehicle use but non-motorized use is
allowed. Road Restriction signs may be used if signing is necessary. Refer to
section 3A.5 and chapter 6, for detailed information on displaying access and
travel management decisions.
3A.7 Portal Signs

Portal signs may be used for notifying the public that certain prohibitions are in
effect.
Appropriate locations for portal signs include:

• Principal or key access routes at national forest boundaries.
• At or as close as practical to the point of restriction.
• County, township, State, or Federal roads which pass through national

forests.
• Arterial and collector NFS road.
• Installations which would minimize the number of signs.
Coordinate with:
• Other jurisdictions to install signs on non-Forest Service routes.
• The forest or regional sign coordinator when modifying messages.
If a unit elects to use portal signs, they should be used consistently over the
entire area covered by the restriction.
Portal signs that are used for information purposes and will not require
enforcement may be brown and white. Refer to chapter 6, figure 6-8 for an
example.
3A.7.1 Travel Management Portal Signs

Travel Management Portal Signs are:
• Used to inform the public that they are entering an area with motor vehicle
travel restrictions and that they should have a Motor Vehicle Use Map (MVUM).
• Optional – they are not required for enforcement. The MVUM is the
enforcement tool.

November 2012
FR5-12a may be used for areas with no motorized over-snow (snowmobile)

designated routes. The sign only refers to motor vehicle use shown on the
MVUM.

RESTRICTION AREA
STAY ON ROUTES DESIGNATED
ON MOTOR VEHICLE USE MAP
FR5-12a
FR5-12b may be used if there also is an Over-Snow Vehicle Use Map

(OSVUM). The sign does not refer to a specific map product. Combine
messages when possible such as areas that also have restrictions on
snowmobiles.
RESTRICTION AREA
STAY ON DESIGNATED ROUTES
FR5-12b
3A.7.2 COMMERCIAL USE PROHIBITED without permit Portal Sign

(FR11-4c)
The COMMERCIAL USE PROHIBITED WITHOUT PERMIT (FR11-4c) sign may
be used on any NFS road. A forest order shall be written under the authority of
36 CFR 261.54 before the sign is posted.
COMMERCIAL USE
PROHIBITED
WITHOUT PERMIT
FR11-4c
Signs for other specific road use prohibitions, such as prohibiting snow plowing
without a use permit or prohibitions with specific times and/or dates may also be
made using a variation of the FR11-4c sign.
Permits allowing snow plowing, maintenance, and other road operations on NFS
road shall contain all standard required TCD as a condition of the permit. Forest
sign coordinators are responsible for reviewing permits containing signing
requirements to assure compliance with the MUTCD and these Guidelines.

October 2013
3A.7.3 CERTIFIED WEED-FREE STRAW AND FEED Portal Signs (FR17-1)

The CERTIFIED WEED-FREE STRAW AND FEED (FR17-1) portal sign may
be used at the entrance to areas where a CFR order has been issued that
requires only weed-free straw and feed be used. The last line of this sign may
be modified to include the appropriate jurisdiction such as: ON NATIONAL
FOREST LANDS, STATE AND FEDERAL LANDS, or ON PUBLIC LANDS.
CERTIFIED WEED-FREE
STRAW AND FEED REQUIRED
ON FEDERAL LANDS
FR17-1
This regulatory sign is not used to inform road users of selected traffic laws or
regulations and therefore should not be funded with road-related funds.
3A.8 Check Station Signs

An FR13-1a sign with the legend VEHICLES WITH WATERCRAFT MUST
ENTER CHECK STATION should be used to direct appropriate traffic that is
required to enter the check station. The FR13-1a sign should be supplemented
with guide signs as shown in chapter 3D, figure 3D-22. The sign may be
modified to reflect appropriate vehicle type or product, such as GAME ANIMALS
or FIREWOOD.
VEHICLES WITH
WATERCRAFT
MUST ENTER
CHECK STATION
FR13-1a

November 2012
3A.9 Weight Limit Signs

Use Weight Limit signs to notify road users of a legal load limit less than State
legal limits. Post WEIGHT LIMIT signs immediately in advance of the structure
or section of road to which it applies.
Posting and enforcing weight limits requires an order pursuant to 36 CFR

261.54(d).
The WEIGHT LIMIT XX TONS sign (R12-1) is used to indicate vehicle weight
restrictions including load regardless of axle configuration.
The Weight Limit symbol sign (R12-5) is the preferred sign to depict weight
R12-1 limits on roads and bridges. It permits increased weights when more axles are
used to distribute the load. A bottom line of legend stating GROSS WT may be
included if needed for enforcement purposes.
An advance warning assembly consisting of a WEIGHT LIMIT sign and

a supplemental distance plaque, such as the W16-2P or W16-3P, should
be placed at road intersections or locations where the traffic can detour or
conveniently turn around without significant backtracking for bridges posted
at less than the legal or customary weight limit on the road. A supplemental
warning plaque used with a regulatory sign shall have a black legend and
border on a yellow background. Refer to chapter 3B, section 3B.2.23a, and
chapter 3D, figure 3D-12 for additional information on supplemental plaques.
R12-5
3A.10 Non-Road Related Signs Placed in Road Right of Way

Regulatory signs that are not road or traffic related generally are not placed
within a road right-of-way, but under some circumstances this may be
acceptable. One example is the weed-free portal sign shown in section 3A.7.3.
Signs that are not road or traffic related are rarely placed within a road right of
way, but under some circumstances this may be acceptable. One example is an
acknowledgment sign such as the ADOPT A HIGHWAY sign (MUTCD D14-3).
Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.11.4.
All non-road related signs not shown in the MUTCD or these Guidelines that
will be placed in a NFS road right-of-way shall be approved by the regional sign
coordinator.

Chapter 3B Traffic Control Devices Warning Signs
3B.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................... 1
3B.2 Warning Signs..................................................................................................... 6
3B.2.1 Horizontal Alignment Warning Signs.................................................. 6
3B.2.1a Horizontal Alignment Signs (W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11).... 9
3B.2.1b Chevron Alignment Sign (W1-8)............................................ 10
3B.2.1c One-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-6)............................... 10
3B.2.2 Intersection Warning Signs (W2-1 through W2-5)............................ 11
3B.2.3 Stop Ahead and Yield Ahead Symbol Signs (W3-1, W3-2).............. 11
3B.2.4 ROAD CLOSED, XX FT, XX MILES, or AHEAD (FW3-4a) Sign........ 11
3B.2.5 GATE CLOSED, XX FT, XX MILES, or AHEAD (FW3-5a) Sign......... 12
3B.2.6 CATTLE GUARD, XX FT, XX MILES, or AHEAD (FW3-6a) Sign...... 12
3B.2.7 ROAD NARROWS (W5-1) and ONE LANE ROAD (FW5-1a) Signs.. 12
3B.2.8 ROUGH NARROW ROAD (FW5-1b), STEEP NARROW ROAD

(FW5-1c), NARROW WINDING ROAD (FW5-1d) Signs...................... 13
3B.2.9 NOT SUITABLE FOR PASSENGER CARS (FW5-1e) Sign............... 13
3B.2.9a NOT MAINTAINED FOR WINTER TRAVEL (FW5-1f) Sign... 14
3B.2.10 NARROW BRIDGE(W5-2) and ONE LANE BRIDGE (W5-3) Signs.14
3B.2.11 BUMP (W8-1) and DIP (W8-2) Signs................................................. 15
3B.2.12 PAVEMENT ENDS (W8-3) Sign......................................................... 15
3B.2.13 Surface Condition Signs................................................................... 15
3B.2.14 NO CENTER LINE (W8-12) Sign....................................................... 18
3B.2.15 Vehicular Traffic Warning Signs...................................................... 19
3B.2.15a Coincident Route Signs....................................................... 19
3B.2.16 Non-Vehicular Warning Signs.......................................................... 20
3B.2.17 STREAM CROSSING (FW8-18c) or FORD (FW8-18d) Signs.......... 21

3B.2.18 ROAD MAY FLOOD (W8-18), FLASH FLOOD AREA

(FW8-18a) and IMPASSABLE DURING HIGH WATER
(FW8-18b) Signs................................................................................ 21
3B.2.19 Depth Gauge (W8-19) Sign............................................................... 21
3B.2.20 NO TURNAROUND AHEAD (FW14-1a) Sign.................................... 22
3B.2.21 SPEED HUMP (W17-1) Sign.............................................................. 22
3B.2.22 NO TRAFFIC SIGNS (W18-1) Signs.................................................. 22
3B.2.23 Supplemental Plaques...................................................................... 23
3B.2.24 Advisory Speed Plaques................................................................... 24
3B.2.25 Additional Warning Signs................................................................. 25
3B.3 Object Markers................................................................................................... 25
3B.3.1 Type 2, Type 3 and Modified Type 2 Object Markers....................... 25
3B.3.1a Cattleguards............................................................................ 26
3B.3.1b Guardrail and Other Roadside Apperatures........................ 27
3B.3.1c Other Obstructions................................................................. 27
3B.3.2 Type 4 Object Marker ......................................................................... 27
3B.3.3 Gate and Fixed Barricade Markers.................................................... 27
3B.3.3a Gates........................................................................................ 28
3B.3.3b Fixed Barricades..................................................................... 29
3B.4 Markings............................................................................................................. 30
3B.4.1 Delineators........................................................................................... 30
3B.4.2 Pavement Markings............................................................................. 30
3B.4.2a Center Line Pavement Markings........................................... 31
3B.4.2b Edge Line Pavement Markings.............................................. 32

November 2012
3B.1 Introduction
Warning signs call attention to unexpected conditions on or adjacent to a road

open to public travel and to situations that might not be readily apparent to road
users. Warning signs alert road users to conditions that might call for a reduction
of speed or an action in the interest of safety and efficient traffic operations.
Warning signs should be used conservatively because these signs, if used to
excess, tend to lose their effectiveness. Consider mitigating these situations
through other available means before using a warning sign.
The use of warning The physical characteristics and low-traffic volumes on many National Forest
System Roads (NFS road) preclude the need for many warning signs and their
signs shall be based use should be kept to a minimum. When warning signs are used, sign all similar
on an engineering situations on the road. Typical situations that may require use of warning signs
are:
study or on engineering
• Turns and curves.
judgment.
• Grades.
• Intersections.
• Crossings.
• Narrow roadways.
• Hazards.
• Advance warning of traffic control devices.
The shape, size, color, and message of warning signs shall follow the direction
in the MUTCD and these Guidelines. Coordinate new message warning signs
or warning signs for unique situations with the regional sign coordinator. New
warning sign symbols shall be recommended by the Washington Office Director
of Engineering and approved by the FHWA.
Chapters 2C and 5C of the MUTCD contain standards for warning signs. Sizes
of typical MUTCD warning signs common to NFS road, Forest Service signs
supplementary to the MUTCD, standard signs requiring further information or
emphasis, and unique Forest Service warning signs are shown in table 3B-1.
When used, warning signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of

the affected section. For advanced placement distances for warning signs on
unpaved, low-volume roads, refer to chapter 3D, table 3D-2. For advanced
placement distances for warning signs on conventional roads and paved low-
volume roads, refer to the MUTCD, section 2C.05, table 2C-4.
Refer to chapter 3D for additional information on warning sign placement.
A supplemental warning plaque may be displayed with any warning sign when
engineering judgment indicates that road users require additional warning
information beyond that contained in the main message of the warning sign.
Refer to section 3B.2.23a for standards and guidance on use of supplemental
plaques.
Si gn and P os t er G ui deli nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 3B-1
August 2013
Table 3B-1—Warning sign sizes by road type

Low-volume roads
Sign Conventional Typical Minimum

Message or Symbol code road sign sign sign
or sizes sizes sizes
series (inches) (inches) (inches)
= or >35 mph <35 mph
Diamond SHAPED SIGNS
Horizontal Alignment symbols W1-1, 2, 3,

4, 5, 10 30 x 30 30 x 30 30 x 30
Hairpin Curve symbol W1-11 30 x 30 30 x 30 30 x 30
Intersection Warning symbol W2-1, 2, 3, 4, 5 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
Stop Ahead symbol W3-1 30 x 30 30 x 30 30 x 30
Yield Ahead symbol W3-2 30 x 30 30 x 30 30 x 30
ROAD CLOSED
XX FEET, XX MILES, or AHEAD FW3-4a 36 x 36 30 x 30 30 x 30
GATE CLOSED
CATTLE GUARD
ROAD NARROWS W5-1 36 x 36 36 x 36 30 x 30
ONE LANE ROAD FW5-1a — 36 x 36 30 x 30
ROUGH NARROW ROAD FW5-1b 36 x 36 36 x 36 30 x 30
STEEP NARROW ROAD FW5-1c 36 x 36 36 x 36 30 x 30
NARROW WINDING ROAD FW5-1d 36 x 36 36 x 36 30 x 30
NARROW BRIDGE W5-2 36 x 36 36 x 36 30 x 30
ONE LANE BRIDGE W5-3 30 x 30 30 x 30 30 x 30
BUMP W8-1 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
DIP W8-2 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
PAVEMENT ENDS W8-3 36 x 36 30 x 30 30 x 30
GRAVEL SECTIONS FW8-3b 36 x 36 30 x 30 30 x 30
Slippery When Wet symbol W8-5 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
TRUCK CROSSING W8-6 36 x 36 30 x 30 24 x 24
3B-2 S i gn and P os t er G ui deli nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
August 2013
Table 3B-1—Warning sign sizes by road type (continued)

Low-volume roads

LOOSE GRAVEL W8-7 36 x 36 30 x 30 24 x 24
ROUGH ROAD W8-8 36 x 36 30 x 30 24 x 24
BROKEN PAVEMENT FW8-8a 36 x 36 30 x 30 24 x 24
NO CENTER LINE W8-12 36 x 36 36 x 36 36 x 36
FALLEN ROCKS W8-14 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
FALLEN TREES FW8-14a 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
FALLEN ROCK AND DEBRIS FW8-14b 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
ROAD MAY FLOOD W8-18 36 x 36 30 x 30 24 x 24
FLASH FLOOD AREA FW8-18a 36 x 36 30 x 30 24 x 24
STREAM CROSSING FW8-18c 36 x 36 30 x 30 24 x 24
FORD FW8-18d 36 x 36 30 x 30 24 x 24
Bicycle symbol W11-1 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
Pedestrian symbol W11-2 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
Large Animals symbols W11- 3, 4, 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
Farm Vehicle symbols W11-, 5, 5a 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
Snowmobile symbol W11-6 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
OHV symbol FW11-6a 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
Equestrian symbol W11-7 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
Emergency vehicle symbol W11-8 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
Handicapped symbol W11-9 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
Truck symbol W11-10 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
TRAIL CROSSING W11-15a 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
August 2013

Low-volume roads

NO TURNAROUND AHEAD FW14-1a 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
SPEED HUMP (or SPEED BUMP) W17-1 30 x 30 30 x 30 24 x 24
NO TRAFFIC SIGNS W18-1 — 30 x 30 24 x 24
Rectangular SHAPED SIGNS
Large Arrows W1-6, 7 48 x 24 36 x 18 36 x 18
Chevron W1-8 18 x 24 12 x 18 12 x 18
NOT SUITABLE FOR PASSENGER

CARS XX MILES AHEAD FW5-1e NA 60x30** 36x18**
(variable messages)
NOT MAINTAINED FOR FW5-1f NA 36 x 24 36 x 24

WINTER TRAVE
SHARE THE ROAD

(2 symbols) FW8-7 72 x 54 60 x 48 48 x 36
Depth Gauge W8-19 12 x 72 12 x 72 12 x 72
FALLEN ROCK & DEBRIS

FLASH FLOOD AREA FW8-14c 80 x 30 80 x 30 66 x 24
NEXT XX MILES
ENTERING
BURNED AREA, FW8-14d 60 x 42 60 x 42 48 x 30
STAY ON ROADS AND TRAILS
IMPASSABLE DURING
HIGH WATER FW8-18b NA 36 x 24 36 x 24
Supplemental Plaques
NEXT XX MILES (plaque) W7-3aP 24 x 18 24 x 18 24 x 18
WHEN WET W8-5P 24 x 18 24 x 18 24 x 18
ICE W8-5aP 24 x 18 24 x 18 24 x 18
EXCESS OIL W8-5cP 24 x 18 24 x 18 24 x 18
TRAIL X-ING (plaque) W11-15P 24 x 18 24 x 18 24 x 18
August 2013

Low-volume roads

Advisory Speed W13-1P 24 x 24 18 x 18 18 x 18
SHARE THE ROAD (plaque) W16-1P 18 x 24 18 x 24 18 x 24
XX FEET(plaque) W16-2P 24 x 18 24 x 18 18 x 12
XX FT (plaque) W16-2aP 24 x 12 24 x 12 18 x 12
XX MILES (2-line plaque) W16-3P 30 x 24 30 x 24 30 x 24
XX MILES (1-line plaque) W16-3aP 30 x 12 30 x 12 30 x 12
NEXT XX FEET (plaque) W16-4P 30 x 24 30 x 24 30 x 24
Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque) W16-7P 24 x 12 24 x 12 24 x 12
AHEAD plaque W16-9P 24 x 12 24 x 12 24 x 12
Object Markers
Type 2 Object Marker OM2-2V 6 x 12 6 x 12 6 x 12

OM2-2H
Modified Type 2 Object Marker FOM2-2V NA NA 3 x 18
OM3-L
Type 3 Object Marker OM3-R 12 x 36 12 x 36 12 x 36
OM3-C
18 x 18 18 x 18
Type 4 Object Markers
OM4-3 18 x 18 12 x 12*
Barricade Markers FBM-L NA NA 24 x 8

FBM-R
Barricade Markers FBM1-L NA NA 12 x 6*

FBM1-R
*Single-lane ML 2 roads not passable by a standard passenger car operated by a prudent driver.
**Sizes may vary depending on length of message.
November 2012
3B.2 Warning Signs
3B.2.1 Horizontal Alignment Warning Signs

Changes in horizontal alignment, such as curves and turns that vary significantly
from the driver’s expectations, may need to be signed.
Consider the driver’s expectations and behavior when evaluating curves and
turns. The driver’s expectations of a curve are based on a complex variety of
conditions, such as speed, grade, sight distance, visibility (day versus night,
inclement weather), and surface type. The greater the speed reduction required
for a curve, the greater the probability of driver error at that curve.
Curves should be evaluated in both directions of travel. The differences in sight

distance, prevailing speed, and grade may affect the driver’s ability to transition
to a safer speed for the curve and could result in different recommendations for
each direction of travel.
Curves should Warning signs usually are not needed when the speed reduction from tangent
be driven in both to curve is less than 10 miles per hour.
directions. Consider the speed of vehicles at three locations.
Prevailing speed—The speed the driver is traveling on the road before the
driver perceives a curve ahead.
Approach speed—The speed to which the driver transitions after

perceiving the curve. This is the speed at which the driver enters the
curve; it is affected by what the driver can determine beforehand regarding
the severity of the curve. Natural features may be all that are needed for
adequate guidance. A cut bank, trees, or brush on the outside of the curve
make it easier for drivers to perceive the curve because there is a visual
reference versus a fillslope on the outside. Consideration also must be
given to the fact that roadside vegetation is less obvious during hours of
darkness.
Speed profile—The speed of the vehicle as it traverses the curve. When

drivers maintain a constant speed profile throughout the curve, it indicates
the driver expected the curve and correctly selected an appropriate
speed for the curve. Decreasing vehicle speeds while rounding the curve
suggests the driver selected an approach speed that was too high.
November 2012
The decision to sign a particular curve is primarily based on the relationship

of a constant speed profile to the prevailing speed and shall be determined by
an engineering study or engineering judgment. One or more of the following
methods may be used to determine the relationship of a constant speed profile
to the prevailing speed:
Curve sight distance—Safe speeds on single-lane roads are often

dictated by sight distance. On these roads, and many roads without a
center line, sight distance should be checked first to determine whether
it is the dominant factor for safe curve speed. Stopping sight distance for
two-way single-lane roads should be twice the stopping sight distance for a
comparable two-lane road.
Values for stopping sight distances for low-volume roads can be found in
FSH7709.56, chapter 40.
Trial runs by driving—This is a valid procedure for determining speeds on

gravel and native-surfaced low-volume roads.
Speeds can be determined through experience by driving the section of road

in a vehicle that is representative of the traffic on the road. Several trial runs
should be made at various speeds along the center of the travel lane in the
direction that the curve will be traveled.
Determine the speed that allows the driver to negotiate the curve in a
comfortable manner. The constant speed profile through the curve would be
this speed rounded down to the nearest 5-mph increment.
Trial runs with ball-bank indicator— A ball-bank indicator (also known

as a manual inclinometer) is a device with a ball enclosed in a liquid
filled tube. The ball moves in response to travelling around a curve. The
goal is to determine the speed of travel where the ball stays below the
maximum recommended reading. Trial runs are made around the curve at
various speeds, increasing the speed 5 mph each time, until the maximum
recommended speed is found. The next lowest 5-mph increment is then the
constant speed profile for that curve in that direction.
Use the following criteria:
• 16 degrees of ball bank for speeds of 20 mph or less.
• 14 degrees of ball bank for speeds of 25 to 30 mph.
• 12 degrees of ball bank for speeds of 35 mph and higher.
Gravel and native surfaced low-volume roads could constitute an unusual

circumstance where the skill of the engineer is needed before making a
determination to use a ball-bank indicator.
November 2012
It is important to follow correct procedures when using the ball-bank

indicator, or incorrect readings may result. Mount the ball-bank indicator on
the dashboard of a standard automobile. Sports cars, trucks, and SUVs with
heavy duty suspensions are not recommended for use. They trend to over
or underestimate the curve speeds. Level the ball-bank indicator on a level
surface with two people in the stationary vehicle. The vehicle should be
driven smoothly in the center of the lane without cutting corners.
Mathematical computation—Determine the radius of curvature from field

measurements or design data. Look up the design speed for the radius
of curvature and surface type in FSH 7709.56, chapter 40, Transportation
System Preconstruction Handbook. Verify the results obtained by a trial
run and adjust if necessary. The constant speed profile for the curve is
the verified speed determined above, rounded down to the nearest 5-mph
increment.
Some horizontal alignment changes also may need additional warning devices,
such as delineators, chevron signs, advisory speed plaques or distance plaques
to provide adequate curve identification, as determined in an engineering study
or engineering judgment. Some factors to consider are:
• Accident history.
• Speed reduction of 15 mph or greater.
• Conditions, such as hours of darkness or lack of vegetation, make it difficult

for drivers to perceive the change in alignment or its severity.
• Downhill grades that occur on the approach or around a curve. Downhill

grades require more approach distance than uphill grades. For more
information, see chapter 3D, table 3D-2.
The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque may be used to supplement any

warning sign including horizontal alignment signs to indicate the advisory
speed for a condition. The advisory speed for curves should be the same as
the constant speed profile throughout the curve as determined by one of the
methods mentioned above, the 85th-percentile speed of free-flowing traffic
through the curve, or as determined by any other method documented in an
engineering study. Regardless of the method selected, the advisory speed shall
be determined by an engineering study that follows established engineering
practices.
Also, it is important to take into consideration the standards used to post

advisory speeds for curves on adjacent county and State roads.
Additional information on Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques can be found in

section 3B.2.23b and in the MUTCD, section 2C.08.
Refer to the MUTCD, table 2C-5, for general guidance on horizontal alignment
sign usage. Use engineering judgment to determine whether the CURVE
or TURN sign should be used. It may be more appropriate to consider road
geometry than speed to better portray the curve or turn ahead.
November 2012
3B.2.1a Horizontal Alignment Signs (W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11)

If a horizontal alignment sign is determined to be needed the sign installed in
advance of the curve shall be a Curve (W1-2) sign unless a different sign is
recommended or allowed by the provisions of this section or by engineering
judgment.
W1-2
A Turn (W1-1) sign shall be used instead of a Curve sign in advance of curves
that have advisory speeds of 30 mph or less.
W1-1
Where there are two changes in roadway alignment in opposite directions that
are separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet, the Reverse Turn
(W1-3) sign should be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) signs and the
Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign should be used instead of multiple Curve (W1-2)
signs.
W1-4
W1-3
A Winding Road (W1-5) sign may be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1)
or Curve (W1-2) signs where there are three or more changes in roadway
alignment each separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet.
W1-5
October 2013
If the curve has a change in horizontal alignment of 135 degrees or more, the
Hairpin Curve (W1-11) sign may be used instead of a Curve or Turn sign. When
the Hairpin Curve sign is installed, either a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6)
sign or Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs should be installed on the outside of
the turn or curve.
W1-11
Turn or Curve signs may be combined with intersection signs to create a

combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection (W1-10 series) where an
intersection occurs within or immediately adjacent to a turn or a curve. Refer to
the MUTCD, section 2C.11.
W1-10
3B.2.1b Chevron Alignment Sign (W1-8)

The Chevron Alignment (W1-8) sign is used to provide additional emphasis and
guidance for a change in horizontal alignment and may be used instead of or in
addition to standard delineators.
If used, Chevron Alignment signs should be visible for a sufficient distance to

provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.
Chevron Alignment signs shall not be placed on the far side of a T-intersection
W1-8
facing traffic on the stem approach to warn drivers that a through movement
is not physically possible, as this is the function of a Two-Direction (or One-
Direction) Large Arrow sign.
Chevron Alignment signs shall not be used to mark obstructions within or

adjacent to the roadway, including the beginning of guardrails or barriers, as this
is the function of an object marker.
3B.2.1c One-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-6)

A One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be used either as a supplement
or alternative to Chevron Alignment signs in order to delineate a change in
horizontal alignment.
A One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be used to supplement a Turn or

W1-6 Reverse Turn sign to emphasize the abrupt curvature.
If used, the One-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient
distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in
alignment.
November 2012
3B.2.2 Intersection Warning Signs (W2-1 through W2-5)

Intersection warning signs may be used where engineering judgment indicates
a need to inform the road user in advance of an intersection that is not clearly
visible and to indicate the possibility of turning or entering traffic. Volume of
traffic and speed are important factors to consider. Generally, if guide signs are
used an intersection warning sign is not needed.
W2-1 W2-2 W2-3 W2-4 W2-5
3B.2.3 Stop Ahead and Yield Ahead Symbol Signs (W3-1, W3-2)
The W3-1 or W3-2 signs shall be installed on an approach to a STOP or YIELD
sign that is not visible for a sufficient distance to permit the road user to respond
to the device. The distance for posted or 85th percentile speeds of 35 mph or
less is 100 feet. Refer to chapter 3D, table 3D-2 for unpaved, low-volume roads
and the MUTCD, section 2C.05, table 2C-4 for conventional roads and paved,
low-volume roads.
W3-1
W3-2
3B.2.4 ROAD CLOSED, XX FT, XX MILES, or AHEAD (FW3-4a) Sign

A ROAD CLOSED, XX FT, XX MILES, or AHEAD (FW3-4a) sign may be used
ROAD for long-term closures typically related to an incident, such as washouts and
flood damage. Place the sign in advance of locations where the road is closed
CLOSED and the closure is not visible for a sufficient distance for a road user to respond
1000 FT to the closure and/or it is necessary to notify a road user of the closure at a
location where there is adequate room for a vehicle to turn around.
FW3-4a
Supplemental plaques, such as xx miles ahead and/or NO TURNAROUND
also may be used when necessary. Refer to section 3B.2.23a and to chapter
3D, figure 3D-12.
For short-term closures, such as maintenance, construction projects and incident

management, such as a fire refer to chapter 4, Temporary Traffic Control.
November 2012
3B.2.5 GATE CLOSED, XX FT, XX MILES, or AHEAD (FW3-5a) Sign

A GATE CLOSED, XX FT, XX MILES, or AHEAD (FW3-5a) sign should be used
GATE in advance of locations where motor vehicle use of a road is restricted by a gate
CLOSED that is not visible for a sufficient distance for a road user to bring the vehicle to a
stop before the gate. The sign should be installed at a location where a vehicle
AHEAD can safely turn around.
GATE
CLOSED
XX FT
FW3-5a
3B.2.6 CATTLE GUARD, XX FT, XX MILES, or AHEAD (FW3-6a) Sign

Based on engineering judgment, a CATTLE GUARD XX FT, XX MILES, or
CATTLE CATTLE
AHEAD (FW3-6a) sign may be used in advance of a cattle guard that is not
GUARD GUARD
visible for a sufficient distance for a road user to respond appropriately. Cattle
AHEAD guard steel grates may present unique problems for motorcycles, snowmobiles,
XX FT
and bicycles. Evaluate the cattle guard approach from both directions.
Depending on sight distance, the signs may be needed on one or both approach
legs.
CATTLE CATTLE
GUARD GUARD
AHEAD XX FT
FW3-6a
3B.2.7 ROAD NARROWS (W5-1) and ONE LANE ROAD (FW5-1a) Signs
The ROAD NARROWS (W5-1) sign may be used in advance of a location on a
ROAD two-lane road where the width is reduced abruptly such that vehicles traveling
in opposite directions cannot simultaneously travel through the narrow portion
NARROWS without reducing speed. It also may be used on single-lane roads when the road
width abruptly narrows significantly.
W5-1 The ONE LANE ROAD (FW5-1a) sign may be used in advance of the point
where a two-lane road narrows to one lane. The sign should be placed at the
start of the one-lane section.
ONE Do not use the ROAD NARROWS sign and the ONE LANE ROAD sign at the
beginning of a road that starts as a single-lane road.
LANE
ROAD
W5-1a
October 2013
3B.2.8 ROUGH NARROW ROAD (FW5-1b), STEEP NARROW ROAD

(FW5-1c), NARROW WINDING ROAD (FW5-1d) signs
ROUGH These signs may be used when a road abruptly changes to the conditions
NARROW indicated on the signs. They are generally not intended to be used on a road
that is maintained for high-clearance vehicles unless emphasis is needed to
ROAD discourage passenger car traffic.
FW5-1b Use of supplemental plaques such as XX MILES AHEAD is recommended when

necessary to avoid a situation where a vehicle cannot be turned around.
Use of a supplemental plaque such as NEXT XX MILES may be necessary to

STEEP warn operators of the length of the condition so they can make an informed
NARROW decision as to whether to continue on especially if it is unreasonably long.
ROAD
FW5-1c
NARROW
WINDING
ROAD
FW5-1d
3B.2.9 NOT SUITABLE FOR PASSENGER CARS (FW5-1e) Sign

A NOT SUITABLE FOR PASSENGER CARS (FW5-1e) sign may be used to
warn operators when it is not apparent at the intersection that a road is not
suitable for passenger cars. This will allow the operator to make an informed
decision as to whether to continue or seek an alternate route. The distance
ahead message can be displayed in feet or miles.
NOT SUITABLE FOR
PASSENGER CARS Alternative vehicle types can be used, such as trailers, vehicles towing trailers,
XX MILES AHEAD RVs, low clearance vehicles, etc.
NOT SUITABLE FOR

VEHICLES TOWING TRAILERS
XX MILES AHEAD
FW5-1e
November 2012
3B.2.9a NOT MAINTAINED FOR WINTER TRAVEL (FW5-1f) Sign

A NOT MAINTAINED FOR WINTER TRAVEL sign may be used when
NOT MAINTAINED significant numbers of motorists may not be aware that winter conditions make a
road impassable and when it is likely a prudent driver would expect the road to
FOR be maintained for winter travel. Examples include:
WINTER TRAVEL
1. A road heavily used as a pass-through route for nonwinter travel that a
FW5-1f prudent driver likely would expect to be maintained for winter travel.
2. A road where vehicles get stuck every winter or where there are
documented injuries or fatalities resulting from a erroneous expectation that
the road is maintained for winter travel.
3. A road identified as a scenic route for nonwinter travel that likely would be
mistaken as a route maintained for winter travel by a prudent driver when
global positioning system navigational devices are used.
4. A road that accesses a heavily used, dispersed snow play area that cannot
be closed with a gate when snow levels or other winter hazards, such as
downed trees make the road impassable.
This guidance is not a substitute for the exercise of engineering judgement or

completion of an engineering study.
The NOT MAINTAINED FOR WINTER TRAVEL sign should be used sparingly,
since most NFS roads are not maintained for winter travel, and widespread
use may give the user an unreasonable expectation that roads not signed are
maintained for winter travel.
When used, this sign should be placed in a location that is visible to the user
early enough to avoid getting stuck on the road and where the critical vehicle
can safely turn around. This sign may be hinged so that it can be folded down
when not needed.
3B.2.10 NARROW BRIDGE (W5-2) and ONE LANE BRIDGE (W5-3) Signs
On low-volume roads the NARROW BRIDGE (W5-2) sign may be used on
an approach to a bridge or culvert that has a clear width less than that of the
approach roadway. Additional emphasis may be provided by the use of object
markers and/or delineators.
A ONE LANE BRIDGE (W5-3) sign should be used on low-volume two-way

roadways in advance of any bridge or culvert:
W5-2
• Having a clear roadway width of less than 16 feet, or
• Having a clear roadway width of less than 18 feet when commercial vehicles
constitute a high proportion of the traffic, or
• Having a clear roadway width of 18 feet or less where the sight distance is
limited on the approach to the structure.
W5-3 Do not use a ONE LANE BRIDGE sign on single lane roads.
November 2012
Roadway alignment and additional warning may be provided on the approach

to a bridge or culvert by the use of object markers and/or delineators. Refer
to chapter 3D, figure 3D-7 for placement guidance and section 3B.3.1, Object
Markers.
3B.2.11 BUMP (W8-1) and DIP (W8-2) Signs

BUMP (W8-1) and DIP (W8-2) signs may be used to give warning of a sharp
rise or depression in the profile of the road.
These signs may be supplemented with an Advisory Speed plaque.
W8-1
The DIP sign shall not be used at a short stretch of depressed alignment that
might momentarily hide a vehicle.
The BUMP and DIP signs should not be used on unpaved roads.
W8-2
3B.2.12 PAVEMENT ENDS (W8-3) Sign

A PAVEMENT ENDS (W8-3) word message sign should be used where a paved
surface changes to either a gravel surface or a native surface by design.
PAVEMENT
ENDS
W8-3
3B.2.13 Surface Condition Signs

A GRAVEL SECTIONS (FW8-3b) sign may be used on a single-lane road
where the management decision is to continually replace deteriorated sections
GRAVEL of a paved road with gravel with a long-term goal of converting the pavement
entirely to gravel surface. The purpose of this sign is to consolidate signing of
SECTIONS the multiple gravel sections into one installation and eliminate over-signing at
each individual section of gravel some of which may only be a few hundred feet
FW8-3b in length.
The road must contain three or more sections of gravel and the maximum length
of road section before the sign needs to be repeated is 5 miles.
Use of a supplemental plaque NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) is required to indicate

the distance where gravel sections will be encountered.
Use of an Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) is optional and should be

considered on a case-by-case basis based on an engineering study.
November 2012
This sign shall not to be used to replace the PAVEMENT ENDS (W8-3) sign
where the roadway surface changes from pavement to gravel by design.
This sign shall not be used if the deteriorated sections of pavement are not
replaced with gravel. A ROUGH ROAD (W8-8) with a NEXT XX MILES (W7-3)
or BROKEN PAVEMENT NEXT XX MILES (FW8-8a) sign may be considered
for this situation.
The Slippery When Wet symbol (W8-5) sign may be used to warn of
unexpected slippery conditions. Supplemental plaques with legends, such as
ICE, WHEN WET, STEEL DECK, or EXCESS OIL, may be used with the W8-5
sign to indicate the reason that the slippery conditions might be present.
The use of the Slippery When Wet symbol sign can be helpful to motorcyclists if
those conditions exist.
W8-5 The Slippery When Wet sign should not be used on unpaved roads.
The LOOSE GRAVEL (W8-7) sign may be used to warn of loose gravel on a
paved roadway surface.
W8-7
The ROUGH ROAD (W8-8) sign may be used to warn of a rough roadway
surface.
W8-8
The BROKEN PAVEMENT (FW8-8a) sign may be used to warn of a paved

road with areas of deteriorating and broken pavement. Use of a supplemental
plaque, such as NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP), may be used to indicate the
BROKEN distance where multiple broken pavement sections will be encountered and
engineering judgment has determined that an individual sign is not needed at
PAVEMENT each section.
FW8-8a
August 2013
The FALLEN ROCKS (W8-14) sign may be used in advance of an area that
is adjacent to a hillside, mountain, or cliff where rocks frequently fall onto the
roadway.
FALLEN
ROCKS
W8-14
The FALLEN TREES (FW8-14a) sign may be used in advance of an area

where trees frequently fall onto the roadway. It shall not be used to warn of
danger trees that may fall onto a vehicle.
FALLEN
TREES
FW8-14a
The FALLEN ROCK AND DEBRIS (FW8-14b) sign may be used in advance of
a burned area where trees, limbs, rocks, and stumps may be coming off a side
slope and frequently fall onto the road. Use of a supplemental plaque, such as
FALLEN NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP), may be used to indicate the length of the condition.
ROCK AND The sign should be removed when the area has been stabilized. Refer to the
DEBRIS Burned Area Emergency Response (BAER) program for additional guidelines
<http://fsweb.sdtdc.wo.fs.fed.us/programs/wsa/baer/index.htm>.
FW8-14b
FALLEN ROCK AND DEBRIS

FLASH FLOOD AREA
NEXT XX MILES
FW8-14c The FALLEN ROCK AND DEBRIS, FLASH FLOOD AREA, NEXT XX MILES,
(FW8-14c) sign may be used in advance of a burned area where trees, limbs,
rocks, and stumps may be coming off a side slope and frequently fall onto the
road and flash floods are possible. The sign should be removed when the area
has been stabilized. Refer to the Burned Area Emergency Response (BAER)
program for additional guidelines <http://fsweb.sdtdc.wo.fs.fed.us/programs/wsa/
baer/index.htm>.
October 2013
The ENTERING BURNED AREA, STAY ON ROADS AND TRAILS (FW8- 14d)

EN TER ING portal sign may be used in advance of a burned area where there are
BURNED AREA unexpected conditions related to recent fire activity. The sign should be
STAY ON removed when the area has been stabilized. The message may be modified as
ROADS AND TRAILS necessary, such as STAY ON DESIGNATED ROUTES. Refer to the Burned
Area Emergency Response (BAER) program for additional guidelines <http://
FW8-14d
fsweb.sdtdc.wo.fs.fed.us/programs/wsa/baer/index.htm>. If there is a closure
order, use appropriate regulatory sign colors of black and white.
When used, Surface Condition signs should be placed in advance of the

beginning of the affected section and additional signs should be placed at
appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists. Refer to chapter
3D, table 3D-2.
3B.2.14 NO CENTER LINE (W8-12) Sign

The NO CENTER LINE (W8-12) sign may be used to warn of a roadway without
center line pavement markings. Consider using this sign on low-volume two-lane
paved roads instead of striping when engineering judgment determines some
form of guidance or warning is necessary. Refer to section 3B.4.2a.
W8-12
November 2012
3B.2.15 Vehicular Traffic Warning Signs
Vehicular Traffic Warning signs may be used to alert road users to locations
where unexpected entries into the roadway or where shared use of the roadway
by trucks, bicyclists, OHV, snowmobiles farm vehicles, emergency vehicles, or
other vehicles might occur.
Most standard symbols normally face to the left for mounting along the right
shoulder of roadways. However, image symbols in reversed directions may be
used if they portray the on-the-ground conditions more accurately.
These signs may be supplemented with plaques to indicate the distance to the
condition or the length of the condition. For example, a supplemental plaque
stating XX MILES may be used when signing coincident routes in lieu of or in
conjunction with the SHARE THE ROAD supplemental plaque. Refer to section
3B.2.23a and chapter 3D, figure 3D-12.
The TRUCK CROSSING (W8-6) word message sign may be used as an

alternate to the Truck Crossing (W11-10) symbol sign.
W8-6 W11-1* W11-5 W11-5a W11-8
W11-6 FW11-6a W11-10 W11-15A*
*A fluorescent yellow-green background color may be used for this sign or

plaque.
3B.2.15a Coincident Route Signs

When identified as the appropriate mitigation in a motorized mixed use study
or other appropriate study for non-motorized uses, use the FW8-7 sign on
concurrent coincident routes where both types of traffic are actively managed.
Use symbols that best represent the primary or managed traffic types on each
SHARE THE ROAD individual route. Limit the sign to two symbols—one for each route system. Use
NEXT 1 MILE of the NEXT XX MILES message is optional. Refer to chapter 3D, figure 3D-11.
FW8-7 Coincident routes that are managed for separate seasons or times of use do
not require SHARE THE ROAD signing. These separate coincident routes
typically require a regulatory sign to notify the user of the restrictions and to
assist in enforcement. Refer to section 3A.5.
November 2012
3B.2.16 Non-Vehicular Warning Signs

Non-Vehicular Warning signs may be used to alert road users in advance of
locations where unexpected entries into the roadway might occur or where
shared use of the roadway by pedestrians, animals, or equestrians might occur.
Most standard symbols normally face to the left for mounting along the right
shoulder of roadways. However, image symbols in reversed directions may be
used if they portray the on-the-ground conditions more accurately.
Warning signs that advise road users about conditions that are not related to a
specific location, such as animal crossings, may be installed in an appropriate
location, such as known migratory paths and areas with high accident rates
involving animal crossings. The specific locations for these signs should be
based on engineering judgment. These signs should be used judiciously as
they can be overused and ignored. Shown are those signs used more often on
NFS roads. Additional non-vehicular warning signs can be found in the MUTCD,
figure 2C-11.
These signs may be supplemented with plaques to indicate the distance to the
condition or the length of the condition. Refer to 3B.1.23a, and chapter 3D,
figure 3D-12.
W11-2* W11-3 W11-4
W11-7 W11-9*
*A fluorescent yellow-green background color may be used for this sign or
plaque.
August 2013
3B.2.17 STREAM CROSSING (FW8-18c) or FORD (FW8-18d) Signs

The STREAM CROSSING (FW8-18c) or FORD (FW8-18d) signs may be used
in advance of a perennial or year-round, low-water stream crossing or ford. A
STREAM Depth Gauge (W8-19) sign may also be installed at the deepest point of the
CROSSING stream crossing or ford.
FW8-18c
3B.2.18 ROAD MAY FLOOD (W8-18), FLASH FLOOD AREA (FW8-18a) and
IMPASSABLE DURING HIGH WATER (FW8-18b) Signs
FORD The ROAD MAY FLOOD (W8-18), FLASH FLOOD AREA (FW8-18a), and
IMPASSABLE DURING HIGH WATER (FW8-18b) signs may be used to warn
road users that a section of roadway is subject to frequent flooding and where
unexpected or seasonal high water would prevent passage. One example is dry
FW8-18d washes that drain a large area in desert country.
The FLASH FLOOD AREA (FW8-18a) warning sign should be posted at

appropriate locations along roads within and/or at the entrance to developed
recreation sites that the Forest Service has determined are vulnerable to flash
flooding. Hydrologists and recreation managers should advise on the need and
locations for FLASH FLOOD AREA warning signs posted along roads or parking
lots. This sign is intended to be read from a moving vehicle, and posting of
this sign shall be based on application of engineering judgement. The FLASH
W8-18 FLOOD AREA warning sign may also be posted at appropriate locations along
roads within long stream corridors outside of developed recreation sites when
the Forest Service has determined these areas are vulnerable to flash flooding.
SSABLE FLASH Refer to chapter 7, section 7.7.1b.2.
URING FLOOD A supplemental warning plaque may be added to the ROAD MAY FLOOD,
H WATER AREA FLASH FLOOD AREA, and IMPASSABLE DURING HIGH WATER warning
signs when a section of road is subject to flooding for a long distance, such as
FW8-18a within a stream corridor. Refer to section 3B.2.23a.
A Depth Gauge (W8-19) sign may also be installed within a roadway section
IMPASSABLE that frequently floods.
FLASH
DURING FLOOD
HIGH WATER AREA
FW8-18b
3B.2.19 Depth Gauge (W8-19) Sign
Depth gauges may be installed on a roadway section that frequently floods
based on an engineering study.
If used, the Depth Gauge sign shall be in addition to the ROAD MAY FLOOD
(W8-18), IMPASSABLE DURING HIGH WATER (FW8-18b), STREAM
CROSSING (FW5-1d) or FORD (FW5-1e) signs and shall indicate the depth of
the water at the deepest point on the roadway. Refer to chapter 3D, figure 3D-8.
Maintain the depth gauges to ensure they are accurate since flooding could
scour or wash out the crossing making the water deeper than indicated on the
depth gauge. The crossing may also fill in over time and the depth may be less
than that shown on the depth gauge.
W8-19
November 2012
3B.2.20 NO TURNAROUND AHEAD (FW14-1a) Sign
The NO TURNAROUND AHEAD (FW14-1a) sign may be used to warn road

NO users at the last turnaround on a road without an outlet or that terminates in a
TURNAROUND dead end.
AHEAD If used, this sign should be placed at a location that gives drivers of large
FW14-1a
commercial or recreational vehicles an opportunity to turn around.
3B.2.21 SPEED HUMP (W17-1) Sign

The SPEED HUMP (W17-1) sign should be used to give warning of a vertical
deflection in the roadway that is designed to limit the speed of traffic.
If used, the SPEED HUMP sign should be supplemented by an Advisory Speed

plaque.
If a series of speed humps exists in close proximity, an Advisory Speed plaque

W17-1 may be eliminated on all but the first SPEED HUMP sign in the series.
The legend SPEED BUMP may be used instead of the legend SPEED HUMP
on the W17-1 sign.
3B.2.22 NO TRAFFIC SIGNS (W18-1) Signs

A NO TRAFFIC SIGNS (W18-1) warning sign may be used only on unpaved,
low-volume roads to advise users that no traffic signs are installed along the
NO distance of the road. If used, the sign may be installed at the point where
TRAFFIC road users would enter the low-volume road or where, based on engineering
SIGNS judgment, the road user might need this information.
Situations where these signs may be used:

W18-1
• When a road has been transitioned to a lower maintenance level and
existing signs have been removed, and advance warning of a change in
traffic signs is necessary to warn users who have historically relied on
these signs. When the changed signage is no longer considered to be new,
or within 12 months this sign should be removed.
• When a signed road segment transitions to a nonsigned road segment.
Other than the situations above, this sign should not be used where it has been
determined that signs are not needed. This sign is not normally used on ML 2
roads.
A W7-3aP, W16-2P, or W16-9P supplemental plaque with the legend NEXT

XX MILES, XX FEET, or AHEAD may be installed below the W18-1 sign when
appropriate. Refer to section 3B.2.23a and chapter 3D, figure 3D.12.
August 2013
3B.2.23 Supplemental Plaques

A supplemental warning plaque may be displayed with any warning sign when
engineering judgment indicates that road users require additional warning
information beyond that contained in the main message of the warning sign.
Supplemental distance plaques also may be used with some regulatory signs
if necessary to provide advance warning of a regulation at locations where the
traffic can detour or conveniently turn around.
W7-3aP W8-5P W8-5aP W8-5cP W11-15P
W16-1P W16-2P W16-2aP W16-3P
W16-3aP W16-4P W16-7P W16-9P
Supplemental plaques with legends such as AHEAD, XX FEET, or NEXT XX

MILES, may be mounted below Vehicular Traffic Warning signs to provide
advance notice to road users of unexpected entries.
A TRAIL X-ING (W11-15P) supplemental plaque may be mounted below the

W11-1, W11-2, W11-5, W11-6, FW11-6a, W11-7, and W11-15 signs to warn of
shared-use path crossings where pedestrians, bicyclists, and other user groups
might be crossing the roadway. Refer to chapter 3D, figure 3D-13.
The SHARE THE ROAD plaque (W16-1p) may be used to warn road users that
mixed use is allowed on the road. The plaque is installed beneath a standard
nonvehicular or Vehicular Traffic Warning sign that depicts the traffic which is
allowed to use the road or the side of the road, such as bicycles, equestrian,
snowmobiles, all terrain vehicles, and motorcycles. Refer to chapter 3D, figures
3D-9, 3D-10, and 3D-12.
If a post-mounted W11-2, W11-6,W11-6a, W11-7, or W11-9 sign is placed at

the location of the crossing point where pedestrians, snowmobilers, all terrain
vehicles, or equestrians might be crossing the roadway, a diagonal downward
pointing arrow plaque (W16-7P) shall be mounted below the sign. Refer to
chapter 3D, figure 3D-12.
November 2012
Supplemental plaques with legends such as ICE, WHEN WET, or EXCESS

OIL may be used with the Slippery when wet symbol sign (W8-5) sign to
indicate the reason that the slippery conditions might be present.
Supplemental plaques shall not be used alone. Unless otherwise provided in

MUTCD for a particular plaque, supplemental warning plaques shall be mounted
below the sign they supplement.
A supplemental warning plaque used with a warning sign shall have the same
legend, border, and background color as the warning sign with which it is
displayed.
Supplemental plaque messages that are not in the MUTCD or these Guidelines
shall be approved by the regional sign coordinator.
See chapter 3D, figure 3D-12 for correct sequence of supplemental plaques.
3B.2.24 Advisory Speed Plaques

The Advisory Speed plaque (W13-1P) is used to supplement any warning sign
to indicate the advisory speed for a condition and shall not be installed as a
separate sign installation.
Advisory Speed plaques suggest a reasonable and prudent speed to the

motorist for specific conditions on a segment of road, but they are not regulatory
and are not enforceable like speed limit signs.
Except in emergencies or when the condition is temporary, an Advisory Speed

W13-1P plaque shall not be installed until the advisory speed has been determined by
an engineering study following established engineering practices.
Advisory Speed plaques may be used in conjunction with curve warning signs
when the curve speed reduction from tangent to curve is so great that drivers
have difficulty selecting a safe approach speed for the curve. On curves with
approach speeds 35 mph and above, consider using an Advisory Speed plaque
for speed reductions of 10 mph or greater.
On roads that have established speed limits the use of the Advisory Speed
plaque for horizontal curves is recommended for a 5 mph difference between
Advisory speeds shall the speed limit and advisory speed, and required for all speed differences
be determined by an
greater than 5 mph.
engineering study. The Advisory Speed plaque may be used to advise road users of the advisory
speed for other roadway conditions.
Use of Advisory Speed plaques is not always advisable on gravel or native

surfaced roads because surfaces on these roads can vary significantly with
traffic wear, washboards, inclement weather, or road maintenance.
The Advisory Speed plaque shall carry the message XX MPH and the speed
displayed shall be a multiple of 5 mph.
Advisory speeds less than 15 mph are very rarely necessary or used unless
advised by an engineering study for a special circumstance. Do not use
advisory speeds less than 10 mph.
August 2013
3B.2.25 Additional Warning Signs

Additional warning signs are shown in the MUTCD that may be applicable on
New warning symbols NFS roads. Other warning signs may be developed for specific uses and special
situations not addressed in the MUTCD or these Guidelines. The shape, colors,
shall be approved by
and message shall conform with the direction in these Guidelines and the
the FHWA. MUTCD. Submit development of any sign messages not shown in the MUTCD
or these Guidelines to the regional sign coordinator for approval. New warning
symbols shall be approved by the FHWA.
3B.3 Object Markers

The MUTCD, chapter 2C provides for four types of retroreflective object
markers: Type 1 (OM1), Type 2 (OM2), Type 3 (OM3), and Type 4 (OM4). Type
1, 2, and 3 object markers are used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to
the roadway. Type 4 object markers are used to mark the end of a roadway.
The Forest Service has approved standards for a modified Type 2 object marker
(FOM2), which may be substituted for a Type 2 object marker on low-volume
roads with travel speeds less than 35 mph.
Types 2, 3, and 4, and Modified Type 2 are the ones typically used for Forest
Service applications.
3B.3.1 Type 2, Type 3 and Modified Type 2 Object Markers

Obstructions not actually within the roadway are sometimes so close to the
edge of the road that they need to be marked in order to warn the road user of
their presence. These include underpass piers, bridge abutments, handrails,
ends of traffic barriers, utility poles, cattleguards, and culvert headwalls. In
other cases there might not be a physical object involved, but other roadside
conditions exist, such as narrow shoulders, drop-offs, small islands, and abrupt
changes in the roadway alignment, that might make it undesirable for a road
user to leave the roadway.
Use a Type 2 or Type 3 object marker to mark an obstruction adjacent to the

roadway. A Modified Type 2 object marker may be substituted for a Type 2
object marker on low-volume roads with travel speeds less than 35 mph. If an
object marker is used, the edge of the marker that is closest to the road user
shall be installed in line with the closest edge of the obstruction.
November 2012
The alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-L, OM3-R) shall
be sloped down at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side on which traffic is to
pass the obstruction. Refer to chapter 3D, figure 3D-23.
FOM2-2V OM2-2V OM3-L OM3-R OM3-C
3B.3.1a Cattleguards
Type 3 object markers shall be used to mark cattleguards in which the approach
shoulders are narrowed or eliminated, or that have a clear width less than that
of the approach roadway.
A Type 2 object marker may be used if the cattleguard wings are adjacent to
the roadway. A Modified Type 2 object marker may be substituted for a Type 2
object marker on low-volume roads with travel speeds less than 35 mph. The
Type 2 and modified Type 2 object markers may be mounted on both sides of a
post or flexible stake.
Where the cattleguard is on a curve or has limited sight approach distances,
advance warning signs such as CATTLEGUARD AHEAD (FW3-6a), should be
installed where an engineering study or engineering judgment determines a sign
is needed.
Cattleguards also may present a unique hazard to motorcycles, bicycles, and
snowmobiles. Advance warning signs may be considered when such traffic
routinely uses the road.
Refer to chapter 3D, figure 3D-24.
November 2012
3B.3.1b Guardrail and Other Roadside Appurtances

Where Type 3 object markers are applied to the approach ends of guardrail
and other roadside appurtances, sheeting without a substrate shall be directly
affixed to the approach end of the guardrail in a rectangular shape conforming
to the size of the approach end of the guardrail with alternating black and
retroreflective yellow stripes sloping downward at a angle of 45 degrees toward
the side of the obstruction on which traffic is to pass.
3B.3.1c Other Obstructions

Obstructions within the roadway, such as bridge supports, refuge islands,
median islands, toll plaza islands, and raised channelization islands, shall be
marked with a Type 3 object marker. In addition to markers on the face of the
obstruction, warning of approach to the obstruction on a paved road shall be
given by appropriate pavement markings. Refer to the MUTCD, section 3B-10.
Obstructions within the roadway typically are not found on NFS roads.
3B.3.2 Type 4 Object Marker

The Type 4 object marker (OM4-3) is used to warn and alert road users of
the end of a roadway in other than construction, maintenance, or incident
management areas.
Type 4 object markers also may be used to mark devices, such as gates, barrier
rails, or other devices across a road, that restricts access and blocks further
travel including locked gates that seasonally close roads or facilities, such as
campgrounds, and visitor centers. Do not use a Type 1, 2, or 3 object marker to
OM4-3 mark the end of a roadway except as allowed in section 3B.3.3b.
-2 OM4-3 Use a minimum of one marker for each lane of road. Where conditions warrant,
more than one marker, or a larger marker with or without a Type 3 Barricade
may be used.
Refer to 3B.1.25 for necessary advance warning signs.
Refer to chapter 3D, figures 3D-25 and 3D-26 for placement examples.
3B.3.3 Gate and Fixed Barricade Markers

The Forest Service uses a wide variety of gates and fixed barricades. It is
important that these gates and fixed barricades are installed and marked
Cables, chains, or appropriately. All gates and barricades on NFS roads require retroreflective
markings to warn the motor vehicle user of their presence.
single-wire barriers
Cables, chains, or single-wire barriers shall never be used across any roadway
shall never be used
as a gate or barricade because they are not readily visible to road users. Refer
across any roadway. to FSM 7731.16.
The back side of a gate or fixed barricade may require barricade markers,
Type 4 object markers, or retroreflective tape when an engineering study or
engineering judgment indicates there is a potential for vehicle traffic including
snowmobiles, all terrain vehicles, and bicycles to approach a closed gate from
behind. When markers are required on the back side of a gate or fixed barricade
they will be similar to the markers on the front side.
Refer to section 3B.25b for information on Type 4 object markers.
November 2012
3B.3.3a Gates
Gate arms, shall be fully retroreflective with vertical stripes alternately red and
white at 16-inch intervals measured horizontally as shown in figure 3B-1.
Figure 3B-1—Retroreflective tape on gate arm.
When a style of gate is used that does not have a gate arm, such as a powder
river gate, or it is not practical to apply vertical stripes, modified retroreflective red
and white striped barricade markers (FBM-R or L) may be used on low-volume
roads with travel speeds less than 35 mph based on engineering judgment. Use a
minimum of two barricade markers per lane of traffic.
Refer to chapter 3D, figures 3D-25 and 3D-26 for installation and placement details.
FBM-L FBM-R
Type 4 object markers may be used on locked gates that seasonally close roads
or facilities, such as campgrounds, and visitor centers. Use a minimum of one
Type 4 object marker per lane of traffic.
Standard signs are usually too heavy and may weigh a wire gate down. Small
flexible barricade markers (FBM1-R and L) or retroreflective tape on PVC pipe
may be used for marking wire gates on low speed (<35 mph), low-volume,
single-lane ML 2 roads not passable by a standard passenger car. Use a
minimum of two FBM1 barricade markers.
August 2013
Refer to chapter 3D, figure 3D-27 for placement and installation details.
FBM1-L FBM1-R
A 12-inch by 12-inch Type 4 object marker may be used on wire gates on

low speed (<35 mph), low-volume, single-lane ML 2 roads not passable by a
standard passenger car operated by a prudent driver.
All gates shall be able to be secured in the open position so as not to be a

hazard to traffic.
A Type 2 or Type 3 object marker shall be used to mark gate posts that are
adjacent to the roadway. A Modified Type 2 object marker may be substituted
for a Type 2 object marker on low-volume roads with travel speeds less than 35
mph. The edge of the marker that is closest to the road user shall be installed in
line with the closest edge of the obstruction.
Gates adjacent to cattleguards may not require barricade markers if traffic is not
directed toward the gate. A properly designed edge ditch or natural features can
keep the gate approach from being confused with the normal travel way.
Appropriate advanced warning signs should be used as determined by

engineering judgement or on engineering study. Refer to section 3B.2.5.
Travel management signs may be used on gates to display access and travel
management restrictions and closures. Refer to chapter 6.
If traffic is allowed beyond the gate, the program area sign, PLEASE CLOSE
THE GATE may be used. Refer to chapter 12.
Barricade markers (FBM and FBM1) and Type 4 object markers may be
removed during periods when the gate is locked in the open position and does
not present a hazard.
3B.3.3b Fixed Barricades

If an object marker is used to mark fixed barricades such as jersey barriers and
barrier rails that are being used to end a roadway a Type 4 object marker shall
be used. Use a minimum of one Type 4 object marker per lane of traffic.
Modified retroreflective red and white striped barricade markers (FBM-R or L)

may be substituted for Type 4 object markers on low volume roads with travel
speeds less than 35 mph based on engineering judgement. Use a minimum of
two barricade markers per lane of road. Retroreflective tape may be used as an
alternative to the FBM barricade markers.
Appropriate advanced warning signs should be used as determined by

engineering judgement or on engineering study. Refer to section 3B.2.4.
Refer to chapter 3D, figures 3D-25 and 3D-26 for placement and installation
guidelines.
August 2013
3B.4 Markings
Markings have important functions in providing guidance and information for
the road user. In some cases, they are used to supplement the regulations
or warnings of other traffic control devices. In other instances, they are used
alone and produce results that cannot be obtained by the use of other devices.
In such cases, they serve as a very effective means of conveying certain
regulations, guidance and warnings that could not otherwise be made clearly
understandable by using other traffic control devices. Markings typical for NFS
roads are delineators and some pavement markings.
3B.4.1 Delineators
Road delineators are retroreflective devices mounted in a linear series at the
side of a roadway to help indicate the roadway alignment at locations that might
Delineators are be confusing or unexpected. They are effective at night and during adverse
weather. They remain visible when the road is wet or snow covered. Delineators
considered guidance are considered guidance devices rather than warning devices.
devices rather than
The purpose of delineators is to enhance driver safety where it is desirable
warning devices to call attention to a changed or changing condition, such as abrupt roadway
narrowing or curvature.
Delineators shall meet the requirements of the MUTCD, chapter 3F and chapter
5E, including size, color, and minimum retroreflectivity.
Delineators may be used on low-volume NFS roads based on engineering

judgment, such as for curves, T-intersections, and abrupt changes in the
roadway width. In addition, they may be used to mark the location of driveways
or other minor roads entering the low-volume road.
The color of delineators shall comply with the color of edge line pavement
markings. Refer to section 3B.4.2b and the MUTCD, section 3B.06. On single-
lane and double-lane roads with two-way traffic, delineators should be white on
both sides of the road. On roads with one-way traffic, delineators viewed to the
driver’s right side should be white and delineators viewed to the driver’s left side
should be yellow. Delineators shall consist of retroreflective devices and their
retroreflective elements shall have a minimum dimension of 3 inches.
Refer to chapter 3D, figure 3D-28 for placement examples.
3B.4.2 Pavement Markings

Pavement markings shall be consistent with the MUTCD, chapters 3A, 3B, and
5E, including materials, colors, functions, widths, and patterns.
Decisions to use or not use pavement markings shall be determined by an

engineering study or based on engineering judgment as described in the
MUTCD and these Guidelines.
Pavement markings that must be visible at night shall be retroreflective.

Pavement markings that are no longer applicable and may cause confusion for
the road user shall be removed or obliterated as soon as practicable.
November 2012
Retroreflective arrow markings may be used for directional guidance instead of

signs where recommended by an engineering study or engineering judgment.
Pavement arrows and alphabets can be found in the “Standard Highway Signs”
book (FHWA).
Pavement markings have limitations. Visibility of the markings can be limited

by snow, debris, and water on or adjacent to the markings. Marking durability
is affected by material characteristics, traffic, weather, and location. Consider
the initial cost and ongoing maintenance necessary. Pavement markings should
be included in maintenance plans to maintain visibility. Many NFS roads are in
areas where climate conditions such as rapid moss growth, leave and needle
debris, and snow cover make it difficult to adequately maintain the visibility
of pavement markings. These conditions combined with limited maintenance
funding should be strongly considered before applying pavement markings.
Paved parking lot patterns should be marked by striping. Parking lot stripes are
not required to be retroreflective.
3B.4.2a Center Line Pavement Markings

Center line pavement markings are used to delineate the separation of traffic
lanes that have opposite directions of travel on a roadway and shall be yellow.
Center line pavement markings generally are not needed on NFS roads, but
when used, they shall be consistent with the MUTCD, sections 3B.01 and
3B.02, local State/county practice on adjacent facilities, and these Guidelines.
The need for center line markings shall be determined basis of either by an
engineering study or based on engineering judgment.
Some conditions to consider in the engineering study or engineering judgment:
• Type of terrain.
• Accident history.
• If road markings, or lack of markings, contributed to accidents.
• The mix and volume of traffic.
• Local, State, or county practices on adjacent roads.
• Traffic volumes. If a traffic count is not available, the seasonal daily

average traffic may be estimates that are based on engineering judgment.
Where center line markings are installed, no-passing zone markings in

compliance with the MUTCD, section 3B.02, also shall be installed.
Center line markings may be placed on highways with or without edge line
markings.
November 2012
On roadways without continuous center line pavement markings, short sections

may be marked with centerline pavement markings to control the position of
traffic at specific locations, such as around curves, over hills, on approaches to
highway-railroad grade crossings, at highway-railroad grade crossings, and at
bridges.
3B.4.2b Edge Line Pavement Markings

The purpose of edge line pavement markings is to delineate the left or right
edges of a roadway and provide a visual reference to guide road users during
adverse weather and visibility conditions.
Use of edge line pavement markings should be consistent with the direction in
the MUTCD, sections 3B.06, 3B.07, 3B.08, and 5E.03, and these Guidelines.
Edge line pavement markings are rarely required on low-volume NFS roads.
Use of edge line pavement markings shall be based on an engineering study or
Consider some of the following conditions in the engineering study or judgment:

Edge line pavement • The road has narrow lanes and shoulders, particularly with vertical edge
markings are rarely drops between pavement and shoulders.
required on low- • There is a need to delineate the edge of the road when the edge of the
volume NFS roads
pavement does not provide adequate delineation.
• Pavement edges may need to be marked to highlight specific roadway

features such as horizontal curves, narrow bridges, pavement width
transitions and curvilinear alignment.
• The road has significant night traffic or is subjected to heavy fog or rain.
• When adequate guidance cannot be obtained from the pavement edge.
Edge line pavement markings should not be placed where an engineering study
or engineering judgment indicates that providing them is likely to decrease
safety.
White edge line pavement markings may be used on single-lane or double-lane

paved roads. Edge line pavement markings may be placed on roads with or
without center line markings.
Use white for both edges of the traveled way for edge line pavement markings
on single-lane roads.
When applying edge line pavement markings on a single-lane road with

turnouts, either:
• Mark an uninterrupted uniform lane width without identifying a turnout if the

width of the pavement is less than the 20 feet required for the travel lane
and the turnout.
November 2012
• Mark the lane width and turnout if the width of the pavement plus the width
of the turnout meets or exceeds 20 feet. A broken white lane line, with
entry and departure breaks, may be used at turnouts to provide continuity
of guidance and define the turnout lane. Refer to figure 3B-2.
Edge line pavement markings should not be placed closer than 6 inches from
the edge of the pavement.
Lane width between edge line and center line pavement markings should be
increased on sharp curves to accommodate the curve widening needed for the
curve. Proportion the additional lane width to each lane.
At the intersection with ML 3-5 roads, the edge line should be cut off so that no
edge line shows through the intersection. Similar treatment should be applied
to intersections with ML 2 roads based on engineering judgment. Consider
the volume and type of use on the road, the need to discourage passenger
car traffic on ML 2 roads, and whether the ML 3-5 road user is alerted to the
presence of an intersection by other methods such as signing or clear sight
distance.
On ML 1 roads the edge line shall show through the intersection.
Do not use a broken line through an intersection.

White edge line
Turnout
Figure 3B-2—Edge line pavement marking with turnout.
Chapter 3C Traffic Control Devices Guide Signs
3C.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................... 1
3C.2 Route Markers...................................................................................................... 1
3C.2.1 Distinctive Route Markers (M1-7)......................................................... 2
3C.2.2 Horizontal Route Markers (FM1-7H).................................................... 2
3C.2.3 Vertical Route Markers (FM1-7V)......................................................... 3
3C.3 Recreation and Cultural Interest Area Signs.................................................... 3
3C.4 Forest Road Destination (FRD) Signs............................................................... 6
3C.4.1 Size of Forest Road Destination Signs............................................... 6
3C.4.2 Lettering Style ...................................................................................... 7
3C.4.3 Size of Lettering.................................................................................... 7
3C.4.4 Rules for Destination Signing.............................................................. 8
3C.5 Site Approach Signing...................................................................................... 13
3C.6 Check Station Signs.......................................................................................... 14
3C.7 Trailblazer Assemblies...................................................................................... 15
3C.8 National Forest Access Signing...................................................................... 15
3C.9 General Service Signs ..................................................................................... 16
3C.10 Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs ............................................................... 16
3C.11 Miscellaneous Information Signs.................................................................. 17
3C.11.1 Feature Signs..................................................................................... 17
3C.11.2 Elevation Signs.................................................................................. 17
3C.11.3 Pass and Continental Divide Signs................................................. 17

3C.11.4 Acknowledgment Signs.................................................................... 18
3C.11.5 Private Land Signs............................................................................ 18
3C.11.6 Memorial or Dedication Signs ......................................................... 19
3C.11.7 Tour Route Signs.............................................................................. 19
3C.12 Scenic Byway Signing.................................................................................... 20
3C.12.1 Scenic Byway Logo........................................................................... 20
3C.12.2 Scenic Byway Identification Sign (SB)............................................ 21
3C.12.3 Scenic Byway Marker Sign (SBM)................................................... 21
3C.13 Reference Location Signs.............................................................................. 22

November 2012
3C.1 Introduction
Guide signs are essential to meet public needs and expectations for reliable
guidance to forest destinations, such as campgrounds, trailheads, visitor
centers, lakes, historical sites, and other points of interest. Guide signs assist
in way finding within forests; and just as important, to find the way back out of
forests in the event of becoming lost. They also serve the important function of
route identification.
Guide signs are
essential to meet Guide signs typically are rectangular in shape and retroreflective with a white
message and border on a brown background. Guide signs consist of route
public needs and markers, destination signs, recreation and cultural interest area symbol signs,
expectations for site approach signs, other informational signs, and reference location signs
(milepost markers).
reliable guidance to
Guide signing shall never interfere with regulatory or warning signs. Proper
forest destinations.
spread distances and sign priorities are given in chapter 3D, section 3D.2.1.
Guide signs shall only be installed where adequate spacing is available between
the guide sign and other higher priority signs.
Up-to-date recreation, visitor, and motor vehicle use maps are important
companions to road users finding their way in the national forests. There is
no substitute for consistency between maps and signs on the ground. Signing
should match the most recent maps.
Coordinate with public road agencies when guide signs must be approved,
installed, or maintained by State or local authorities when located on their rights-
of-way. As possible, develop the basis for coordination and cooperative support
through memorandums of understanding or cooperative agreements.
3C.2 Route Markers

The Forest Service uses three shapes of route markers to identify National
Forest System roads (NFS roads): distinctive, horizontal, and vertical. The
shape and number on the route marker should correlate with the management
Do not use Forest of the road and its operational maintenance level.
Service route number Route numbers should be consistent when routes connect between adjacent
forests. Forest routes that are continuations of county roads may have the
signs for roads that
same number. Dual designations using both a Forest Service and county route
are not under Forest number are discouraged.
Service jurisdiction. Do not use Forest Service route number signs for roads that are not under
Forest Service jurisdiction, such as county roads. In a situation where roads are
included in a Cooperative Forest Road Agreement with a county that does not
post route markers and it is necessary to show route numbers on administrative
maps, the Forest Service may post route number signs on county roads. In this
case, use either the MUTCD standard M1-6, County Route sign, or a modified
Forest Service horizontal route number sign in the yellow legend on blue color
of the M1-6 sign.
S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 3C-1
November 2012
Place route markers at each NFS road intersection regardless of whether or

not the road is designated for motor vehicles and shown on a Motor Vehicle
Use Map (MVUM). Priority should be given to those roads designated for motor
vehicles on the MVUM. Ensure that route markers for these roads are clearly
visible on maintenance level (ML) 2-5 roads. Route markers on ML 1 roads may
be placed out of the line of sight to not draw attention to the road.
Consider using additional route markers for reassurance beyond road

intersections on highly traveled roads where the road user might be in doubt
as to the choice of route. Erect reassurance route markers periodically along a
route or after junctions when it is not readily apparent which route the road user
may be on. If using reassurance markers along a long route, there should be no
more than 5 miles between reassurance markers.
Refer to chapter 3D, sections 3D.3 and 3D.4 for typical placement of route
markers.
3C.2.1 Distinctive Route Markers (M1-7)
Use the Distinctive Route Marker (M1-7) to identify significant, highly traveled
arterial or collector roads, such as roads that State or regional public road
authorities also would likely show on maps they publish. These typically are
operational ML 4 or 5 roads. Such routes usually are assigned forest route
numbers of one or two digits for ease of road user recognition.
The Distinctive Route Markers also may be used on regionally significant

operational ML 3 roads for which the traffic management strategy is to
M1-7 encourage passenger car travel and that receive adequate maintenance.
The National Forest Logotype on the Distinctive Route Marker provides agency
identification for the road. Distinctive Route Markers shall be retroreflective. A
Directional Arrow Auxillary Sign (M5-M6 series) may be mounted separately
below the route marker to indicate direction. Refer to chapter 3E, section 3E.6b
for Directional Arrow Auxillary Signs.
Legend sizes shall be based on the speed of travel as shown in chapter 3E,
section 3E.3.
3C.2.2 Horizontal Route Markers (FM1-7H)
3134-A Use Horizontal Route Markers (FM1-7H) on local or minor collector roads that
are operational ML 3, 4, or 5.
FM1-7H 22N44 Marker sizes are based on the speed of travel and the number of characters as
shown in chapter 3E, section 3E.3.
FM1-7H 21 4 A Directional Arrow Auxillary Sign (M5-M6 series) may be mounted separately
below the route marker or incorporated with the route number on the Horizontal
M6-1
Route Marker. Refer to chapter 3E, section 3E.6b for Directional Arrow Auxillary
Signs.
3C-2 Si gn and P os t er G ui deli nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
August 2013
3C.2.3 Vertical Route Markers (FM1-7V)

2
1 2 Use the vertical route marker FM1-7V to identify ML 1 and 2 NFS roads.
2 Vertical route markers typically should be visible at road intersections. However,
4 on ML 1 roads that have been placed in long-term storage and the intent is to
disguise the intersection of the road, vertical route marker may be located far
enough down a road so as not to be visible from the intersection. This prevents
potential users from discovering a road by spotting a visible route marker.
Use 3-inch-minimum retroreflective characters stacked vertically on a brown

flexible post or on a separate fully retroreflective sign panel for ML 2 roads.
Route markers do not need to be retroreflective when placed on ML 1 roads.
FM1-7V When a long road number is displayed, a portion of the number may be in 1-inch
characters across the top of the route marker. Refer to chapter 3E, section 3E.3.
3C.3 Recreation and Cultural Interest Area Signs

Recreation or cultural interest areas are attractions or traffic generators that are
open to the general public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation.
Recreational attractions include such facilities as parks, campgrounds,
trailheads, and ski areas, while examples of cultural attractions include
museums, visitor centers, and historical buildings or sites.
Recreation and cultural interest area symbol guide signs may be used to
RS-068 direct persons to facilities, structures, and places, and to identify various
Hiking Trail services available to the general public. These guide signs also may be used
in recreation or cultural interest areas for signing nonvehicular events and
amenities, such as trails, structures, and facilities.
Recreation and cultural interest area symbol guide signs shall only be used to
guide the public to attractions when those activities are actively managed for
Recreation and cultural that use, the public is encouraged to use the site or participate in the activities,
and facilities have been provided to accommodate that use. Symbols shall not
interest area symbol be used when the use is allowed, but not managed or encouraged.
guide signs shall only
These symbols shall be used for guidance and information purposes and not as
be used to guide the warning or regulatory signs on roads. Warning and regulatory signs and symbols
require a specific color and guidance for their use.
public to attractions
when those activities Recreation and cultural interest area symbol guide signs consist of white
symbols and borders on brown backgrounds. Signs are retroreflective when
are actively managed. used on roads and on some trails. Refer to chapter 5 for trail sign guidance.
Green or blue background colors may be used to better fit in some situations,
such as the RS-200 Recycling and D9-6 Handicapped symbols.
Symbol sizes shall follow the guidelines in table 3C-1.
A complete listing of available recreation and cultural interest area symbols

approved for use and their applications is contained in the MUTCD, part 2M.
The Forest Service has approved the use of additional symbols shown in
chapter 3E, section 3E.12 for use on NFS roads and for nonroad applications.
November 2012
These symbols are not approved for use on roads not under Forest Service
jurisdiction.
Use of other recreation and cultural interest area symbols for use on NFS roads
and for nonroad applications not shown in chapter 3E, section 3E.12 or the
MUTCD, chapter 2M shall be approved by the Washington Office Director of
Engineering.
Symbols are often preferable to word messages wherever their meanings are
applicable to the recreational activity or facility. These symbols are intended to
reduce the number of larger, more expensive signs by providing a simple set of
easily recognizable graphic symbols that represent opportunities and facilities.
Symbols are often
Symbols should be as generic as possible for signing along access roads
preferable to word leading to the destination. Use one symbol that represents a class of activities,
messages wherever such as the D9-3 Camping (tent) symbol, which represents all camping
opportunities, or the RS–090 Winter Recreation Area symbol, which represents
their meanings are a variety of winter activities that may occur within an area. Symbols may be
applicable to the incorporated within the design of a destination sign. Using symbols within a sign
design often will increase the size and cost of the signs.
recreational activity or
facility.
FRD
Mounting separate symbol signs below the destination sign frequently is more
cost efficient. It also allows the symbols to be kept current, changed to reflect
seasonal recreational opportunities, and easily replaced when damaged.
FRD
D9-3 RS-007 RS-040
November 2012
Symbols may be used singly or in groups of two, three, or four on a single sign
assembly. Use no more than four symbols on a single sign assembly.
RS-056
Use no more than four
symbols on a single
M6-3
sign assembly.
RS-054 RS-057
M6-1L M6-1R
Recreation symbols generally face to the right. Use mirror images where the
reversed image better portrays the message or direction. If Directional Arrow
Auxillary Signs (M5-M6 series) are used, face symbols the same direction as
the arrows.
RL-150 RS-067
M6-1L M6-1R
Use of symbols should be consistent within an area. Do not mix older symbol
styles from the 2003 MUTCD with newer symbols shown in the 2009 MUTCD.
If replacing a few symbols within an area, use the same symbols, even if they
are the older symbols. Implement the new symbols when replacing or installing
signs for an entire site or area. Refer to chapter 3E, section 3E.12 for a
comparison of the 2003 MUTCD symbols with the 2009 MUTCD symbols.
Refer to the MUTCD, chapter 2M for typical symbol assembly arrangements.
November 2012
Boonton
Chapter 3C Lake 5 Control Fishing
Traffic Devices Creek
7 Guide Signs
5
Fishing Creek 3 Boonton Lake 5
FRD-2 • 2 messages FRD-2 • 2 messages
3C.4 Forest Road Destination (FRD) Signs
ake 3 In addition to guidance by route markers, it may be desirable to supply the user
with signs that provide information concerning prominent destinations, their
5 distances, and directions.
Forest Road Destination signs (FRD) serve the important traffic control function
d line
of informing drivers of important sites and destinations ahead. Proper sign
locations, as outlined in chapter 3D and table 3D-3, allow time for the driver to
make decisions before reaching the intersection.
Boonton Lake Boonton Lake 15

5
6 Overlook Fishing Creek 3
B
Fishing Creek 3 Long Meadow 7 FRD
rge arrow FRD-3 • 2 messages and line FRD-3 • 3 messages
FRD signs may be placed after intersections and at reassurance locations along
sections of roads to provide additional guidance.
ake 3 Boonton Where Lakeconditions
15 permit, repetition of destination information on successive
eek 7 Fishing
Use FRD signs to
signs gives the road user more than one opportunity to obtain the information
Creek
needed.
3 Boonton Lake 3
dow 15 LongtrafficMeadow
encourage on 7 signs to encourage traffic on NFS roads suitable for the typeFishing
Use FRD of traffic Creek 7
roads suitable for that being encouraged. For example, do not place FRD signs on a ML 3, 4, or 5
road encouraging highway vehicles to turn onto a ML 2 road. If there Long Meadow 15
arge arrow FRD-3 • 3 messages and line
is an
type of traffic.
important destination on the ML 2 road, place the FRD sign after the user has
turned onto the ML 2 road.
ion Area Murphy FRD signs typically are not used on most ML 2 roads, where route markers and
current3maps provide sufficient guidance.
Haysville
Do not 1use FRD signs on ML 1 roads.
BB
MP 1
UND 1/2 Goshen The placement
4 and installation of FRD signs should be based on engineering
judgment recommendations. Refer to chapter 3D.
1/4 Hiwassee 10 1
FRD-4 • 4 messages 3C.4.1 Size of Forest Road Destination Signs
d line and 2 lines
4
The legends on FRD signs are so variable that a standardized design or size is
not appropriate. The size is determined by the length of the message, and the
size of lettering and spacing necessary for proper legibility.
Reduced letter height, reduced interlines spacing, and reduced edge spacing
may be used on FRD signs if sign size must be limited by factors such as
vertical or lateral clearance. This should not be used as a means of reducing
the overall size of a sign except where determined as necessary by
engineering judgment to meet unusual lateral space requirements. In
such cases, the legibility distance of the sign legend should be the primary
consideration in determining whether to reduce the spacing between the words
or between the words and the sign border, or to reduce the letter height. Letter
height shall not be reduced below the minimum requirement.
November 2012
Consider the visual needs of older drivers when considering reducing letter size.
Larger size letters may be necessary for destinations with a larger percentage of
older drivers.
3C.4.2 Lettering Style
The design of letters shall conform to the FHWA “Standard Alphabets for Traffic
Control Devices” as found in the “Standard Highway Signs” book. The font is
commonly referred to as Highway Gothic.
The lettering for proper names of places and roads shall be title case—a
combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters.
All other word legends shall be in upper-case letters, such as an action

message—NEXT LEFT, EXIT; ENTERING, or LEAVING: a distance
message—1 MILE: or a nonproper name, such as FEE STATION, RANGER
STATION, or ACCESS.
3C.4.3 Size of Lettering
Sign legibility is a direct function of letter size and spacing. Legibility distance
has to be sufficient to give road users enough time to read and comprehend
the sign. Under optimum conditions, a guide sign message can be read and
understood in a brief glance. The legibility distance takes into account factors,
such as driver inattention, blocking of view by other vehicles, unfavorable
weather, inferior eyesight, or other causes for delayed or slow reading.
Legend size on guide signs is a function of the viewing distance and the amount
of time available for viewing. Table 3C-1 contains the minimum letter and
symbol sizes that shall be used for guide signs unless otherwise shown on the
drawings. The speed used should be the posted speed limit, or the speed that
a vehicle could reasonably be expected to be traveling as the sign is viewed as
determined by engineering judgment or an engineering study.
Table 3C-1—Legend and symbol size for guide signs on NFS roads
Upper Case Letters and Numbers* Symbols
Minimum Size (inches) Minimum Size (inches)
Speed Conventional Low-Volume Conventional Low-Volume

(mph) Roads Roads Roads Roads
50 and over 6 6 24 24
30-45 6 5 24 24
20-25 6 4 24 18
15 and under 6 3 24 12
*The size of lower case letters are ¾ the height of the upper case letters.
November 2012
3C.4.4 Rules for Destination Signing
Consistency in the layout of destination signs is critical to the road user

comprehending and understanding the information on the destination sign.
Amount of Legend:
The longer the legend on a guide sign, the longer it will take road users to
Limit legend to four
comprehend it, regardless of the letter size.
lines of destinations on
• Limit legend to three lines of destinations on conventional roads.
low-volume roads.
• Limit legend to four lines of destinations on low-volume roads.
• Prioritize, group, or eliminate multiple destinations to avoid exceeding the

number of lines of destinations.
Selection of Destinations:
• Assume a route user has done some pretrip planning or has a map. It is
impossible to sign for someone without a map.
• Carefully select appropriate destinations. Do not encourage road users to

travel to destinations where that vehicle physically cannot go or to travel on
a road where uses have been restricted.
• Assure that road users know that they have arrived at a previously signed
destination by installing a feature sign or site identification sign at the
destination.
• Do not sign Forest Service administrative facilities where the public is not
encouraged to visit, especially if personnel are not always on duty or visitor
information is not available.
• Sign all junctions with roads designated on motor vehicle use maps
between a first destination sign and the destination. It is important that each
successive sign along the route continue to carry a starting destination until
it is reached.
• When signing is provided to guide road users to a destination, exit signing

should be provided at each decision point back to guide road users back to
the starting point.
• Correlate signing with information provided on administrative maps. Only

names and numbers that appear on the most current administrative maps
should be used.
• Only use the road name if the name is also shown on current maps and is
well known in the local community.
August 2013
Mileages:
• Show mileages to each destination over 1 mile. Round distance to the

nearest mile.
Show mileages to each
• If the distance is less than 1 mile, use the nearest fraction, ¼, ½, or ¾ mile
destination over 1 mile. or if the site is visible from the sign, mileage may be omitted.
Round distance to the • Fractions shall be displayed with the numerator and denominator diagonally
nearest mile. arranged about the forward slash. The overall height of the fraction is
measured from the top of the numerator to the bottom of the denominator,
each of which is vertically aligned with the upper and lower ends of the
forward slash. The overall height of the fraction shall be determined by the
height of the numerals within the fraction, and shall be 1.5 times the height
of an individual numeral within the fraction.
Lake 3 1-line sign
• General direction or general access signs do not typically require mileages.
Boonton Lake 3
The “Standard Highway Signs” book, section 1A.11 contains details regarding
the layouts of fractions on signs.
FRD-1 • 1 message
Arrows:
e Boonton • Lake Arrows 5are used to Fishing

indicate
2-line Creek
the directions
signs toward7routes and destinations.
5
Fishing Creek • Refer to3chapter 3E,
Boonton
sections 3E.4Lake 5 for detailed information on
and 3E.10
arrow sizes. Boonton Lake Boonton Lake
FRD-2 • 2 messages FRD-2 • 2 messages 5
• Arrows control the orderOverlook Fishing Creek
of text on the sign, not the mileage. The proper
arrow direction and the associated message sequence should be as
Lake 3 follows: FRD-2 • 1 message FRD-2 • 2 messages
k 5 1. Straight-ahead arrow, the straight-ahead destination name, then the

distance. Boonton Lake 3
and line
2. Left arrow, theFishing Creek
left destination 5 the distance.
name, then
3. Right destination
FRD-2name, followed by
• 2 messages the
and mileage, then the right arrow.
line
e Boonton Lake Boonton Lake 15

5 3-line signs
B
Boonton Lake Boonton Lak

a Fishing Creek 3 FRD LongWildlife Meadow 7
large arrow FRD-3 • 2 messages and line
6 Overlook
FRD-3 • 3 messages
• To avoid sign clutter associated with multiple destinations in the same
Viewing Area
direction, individual arrows may be replaced with a single arrowFishing
one size Creek 3
larger than the height (H)•indicated in chapter
• large3E, section 3E.10, centered
Lake 3 Boonton Lake 15 FRD-3 1 message
on all legends to which it applies.
arrow FRD-3 • 2 messages and line
Creek 7 Fishing Creek 3 Boonton

Boonton Lake 3 BoontonLake Lake 3
adow 15 Long Meadow 7 Fishing
Fishing Creek 7 FishingCreek
Creek 7
• large arrow FRD-3 • 3 messages and line
Long Meadow 15 LongMeadow
Long Meadow 715
FRD
FRD-3 • 3 messages • large arrow FRD-3 • 3 messages and line
ation Area Murphy 3 4-line signs

Haysville 1 BB
Lake Boonton Lake 15
5 November 2012
ook Fishing Creek 3
B
k 3 Chapter 3C
Long Meadow Traffic
7 Control Devices Guide Signs
and line FRD-3 • 3 messages

• If all destinations on the sign are straight ahead, the up arrow may be
Lake 15 eliminated from the sign to reduce the overall size.
reek 3 Boonton Lake 3

w 7 Fishing Creek 7
and line Long Meadow 15
FRD
• Directional arrows are generally horizontal or vertical, but at irregular

intersections, arrows may be pointed at the appropriate angle to convey a
3 clearer indication of the direction to be taken.
e 1 BB
• Arrows also may be placed below the principal sign legend to avoid
oversized signs. 1/4
4
Lake 3
0 1
and 2 lines
4
FRD
e Lake 5
BoontonLegend: Fishing Creek 7
5
Fishing Creek 3 should
• Destinations
Lake 5 order:
be listed in the following
Boonton
FRD-2 • 2 messages 1. Straight ahead
FRD-2destination(s),
• 2 messagesif any, first.
2. Left destination(s), if any, next.
Lake 3 3. Right destination(s), if any, last.
k 5 • If more than one destination is shown in any direction, the closest
destination shall appear above those farther away in that direction.
nd line
• Text lines and arrows for route identities and destinations are to be left
justified first and then right justified if possible.
e Boonton Lake Boonton Lake 15

5
B
a Fishing Creek 3 Long Meadow 7

large arrow FRD-3 • 2 messages and line FRD-3 • 3 messages
Left justified Right justified
Lake 3 Boonton Lake 15
Creek 7 Fishing Creek 3 Boonton Lake 3
adow 15 Long Meadow 7 Fishing Creek 7
large arrow
3C-10
FRD-3 • 3 messages and line
Si gn and P os t er G ui deli nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
Long Meadow 15
November 2012
Chapter 3C
1-line sign Traffic Control Devices Guide Signs
Boonton Lake 3
FRD-1 • 1 message • Keep messages brief, while effectively conveying necessary information.
1-line
Where signmeaning
clearer • Where clearer meaning will result, standard recreation and cultural interest
area signs may be used in lieu of words. See section 3C.3 for rules on use
2-line
will result, signs
standard of recreation and cultural interest area symbol signs.
Boonton Lake 3
recreation and cultural
FRD-1Boonton
• 1 messageLake Boonton Lake 5 Fishing Creek
interest area signs 5
Overlook
may be used in lieu of
Fishing Creek 3 Boonton Lake 5
2-line
words.
signs
FRD-2 • 1 message FRD-2 • 2 messages FRD-2 • 2 messages
FRD
Boonton Lake Lake 3
Boonton Boonton Lake 5 Fishing Creek 7
• 5Complete words are preferable, however if message length causes
OverlookCreekexcessive
Fishing 5 sign length, use Fishing Creek
the standard 3 in chapter
abbreviations Boonton Lake 5
1, section
1.7.2 and the MUTCD, table 1A-1. For example, the word CAMPGROUND
FRD-2 • 1 message may FRD-2 • 2 messages FRD-2 • 2 messages
FRD-2 • 2 messages and linebe abbreviated to CG.
• Word messages should not contain periods, apostrophes, question marks,
Boonton Lake 3
ampersands, or other punctuation or characters that are not letters,
3-line signs
Fishing Creek 5numerals, or hyphens unless necessary to avoid confusion.
FRD-2Boonton Lake Boonton Lake Boonton Lake
Horizontal Lines:
• 2 messages and line
5
6horizontal line
Wildlife • Adestinations may be added toOverlook
destination signs to separate
in different directions and enhance readability.
Fishing Creek
3-lineViewing
signs Area Fishing Creek 3 Long Meadow 7
Boonton Lake
FRD-3 • 1 message • large arrow
Boonton Lake
Boonton Lake 1
5
Boonton 6Lake 3
Wildlife OverlookLake 15
Boonton Fishing Creek
ViewingFishingArea Creek FRD 7 FishingFishing CreekCreek 3 3 Long Meadow 7
FRD-3 • 1 message • large arrow
Long Meadow 15 FRD-3Long • 2 messages and line
Meadow 7
• A horizontal line(s) shall be used on four-line destination signs unless all

Boonton Lake 3
FRD-3 • 3 messages • large arrow
four destinations areFRD-3Boonton
in the same Lake
• 3 messages
direction.and 15
line
Each separate direction shall be
separated by a line.
Fishing Creek 7 Fishing Creek 3
4-line signs
Long Meadow 15 Long Meadow 7
FRD-3Moon Recreation
• 3 messages
Murphy
• large arrowArea FRD-3 • 3 messages and line
3
BOAT RAMP 1 Haysville 1
4-line signsCAMPGROUND 1/ Goshen 4
2
Moon PICNIC AREA 1/Area
Recreation 4 FRD
Murphy 10 3
Hiwassee
FRD-4Haysville
• 4 messages and12 lines
BOAT RAMP
1
CAMPGROUND 1/2 Goshen 4
PICNIC AREA 1/4 Hiwassee 10
S i g n a n and
d P oline
s t er FRD-4
G ui del i nesf o r t h •e 4
F omessages
r e s t S e r vand
i ce 2
• lines
EM 7100- 15 3C-11
November 2012
General:
• A junction with another road should be shown on signs as follows: JCT

LAKE RD NO 999 or JCT HWY 93, with the appropriate direction and
distance.
• Consider the number of posts necessary for the proposed sign. Refer to
chapter 3D, section 3D.7 for the number of posts based on the length of the
sign. The larger the sign, the more posts it will require.
Figure 3C-1 contains various destination signs and shows examples of message
layouts.
1-line sign
Boonton Lake 3
FRD-1 • 1 message
2-line signs
Boonton Lake Boonton Lake 5 Fishing Creek 7

5
Overlook Fishing Creek 3 Boonton Lake 5
FRD-2 • 1 message FRD-2 • 2 messages FRD-2 • 2 messages
Boonton Lake 3
Fishing Creek 5
3-line signs
Boonton Lake Boonton Lake Boonton Lake 15

5
Wildlife 6 Overlook Fishing Creek 3
B
Viewing Area Fishing Creek 3 Long Meadow 7
FRD-3 • 1 message • large arrow FRD-3 • 2 messages and line FRD-3 • 3 messages
Boonton Lake 3 Boonton Lake 15

Fishing Creek 7 Fishing Creek 3 Boonton L
Long Meadow 15 Long Meadow 7 Fishing Cr
FRD-3 • 3 messages • large arrow FRD-3 • 3 messages and line Long Mea
4-line signs
Moon Recreation Area Murphy 3

Haysville 1 BB
BOAT RAMP 1
CAMPGROUND 1/2 Goshen 4
PICNIC AREA 1/4 Hiwassee 10
FRD-4 • 4 messages and line FRD-4 • 4 messages and 2 lines
4
Figure 3C-1—Typical destination sign layouts.
November 2012
3C.5 Site Approach Signing

Site Approach (SA) signs serve the important traffic control function of preparing
drivers for the slowing, braking, and turning maneuvers necessary for safe
entry to destinations. Refer to chapter 3D, figures 3D-14 and 3D-15 for proper
placement.
At a minimum, use one set of site approach signs at the intersection to the
At a minimum, destination. Additional approach signs may be used a quarter to a half mile in
advance of the intersection depending on factors, such as the importance of the
use one set of site
site, highway speed, and sight distance.
approach signs at
Place signs a sufficient distance before the intersection based on an engineering
the intersection to the study or application of engineering judgment considering factors, such as speed,
destination. sight distance, traffic volume, season of use, and intermediate or conflicting
intersections. Refer to chapter 3D, table 3D-3 for placement distances.
Forest Road Destination (FRD) signs may be used for site approach guidance
when there are single or multiple facilities or opportunities available at the
destination. Mileages are not shown on these signs. Recreation and cultural
interest area symbols may be incorporated within the design as shown in
section 3C.3.
SA signs are used for site approach guidance when only one recreation symbol
or message is displayed. Do not use the SA for destinations requiring multiple
recreation symbols or messages. SA signs may use words or symbols. Refer to
chapter 3E, section 3E.5 for message options.
Trout Creek
The SA sign includes the national forest or national grassland logotype to provide
immediate recognition for Forest Service destination. Do not modify the SA sign
Recreation 7
to include the name of the national forest above the national forest logotype. The
important information on this sign is the name of the site. Forest identification is
Area
provided on the Site Identification sign. Refer to chapters 7 and 8.
Do not use the SA

RECREATION ACCESS
sign for destinations AREA ACCESS
requiring multiple Antelope Lake
Crystal Trout Antelope
recreation symbols or Mountain Creek Lake SA
messages.
M6-1R
A Directional Arrow Auxillary Sign (M5-M6 series) may be mounted separately

below the SA sign to indicate the direction. Refer to chapter 3E, section 3E.6b
for Directional Arrow Auxillary Signs.
Do not mount other guide signs onto the same post as the SA.
November 2012
A single recreation and cultural interest area symbol with a Directional Arrow
Auxillary Sign also may be used as a site approach sign for minor sites.
Signs should be removed, covered, or marked “Closed” or “Closed Until (Date)”

D9-3
RM-010 when recreation and administrative sites are seasonally or permanently closed.
Refer to chapter 7.
M6-1
M6-1R
3C.6 Check Station Signs

The general concept for check stations is similar to Weigh Station signing. Refer
to the MUTCD, section 2D.49.
They are designed to assist in:
• Enforcing Federal and State fish, game, and trapping laws, rules, and
regulations.
• Checking for invasive species.
• Ensuring compliance with miscellaneous permits, such as firewood,

Christmas trees, mushroom picking, etc.
• Obtaining information, such as biological or recreation visitor use.
• Providing public education.
The safety of the public, law enforcement officers, and other personnel involved
in a check station is of primary importance in selecting a site and establishing the
check station. Check stations should only be established where there is sufficient
room to stop the vehicle safely off the road or shoulder, perform the inspection or
survey, operate the check station in a safe manner, allow traffic to enter and exit
safely, and offer protection to the employees and the public.
Do not require vehicles to cross an oncoming lane of traffic to enter the check.
station. Traffic only may be stopped from one direction on the roadway. Check-
station personnel shall wear high visibility safety apparel.
Use engineering judgment to determine if additional temporary traffic control is

needed in addition to the typical applications shown in chapter 3D, figures 3D-21
and 3D-22. Placement of signs shall provide a safe distance for the vehicle to
slow down and enter the check station considering road conditions, weather,
road surface, and sight distance for the approaching traffic.
If stopping is required before a vehicle reenters the road, the STOP sign (R1-1)
and other appropriate requlatory signs shall be used.
Consult with the forest or regional sign coordinator for assistance as necessary.
November 2012
3C.7 Trailblazer Assemblies

Trailblazer assemblies are another method of providing guidance to
destinations, activities, or other special interest areas. Locate trailblazers
at strategic locations to indicate direction to the nearest or most convenient
point of access to the destination. The trailblazer assembly consists of a TO
marker, recreation and cultural area symbol or route marker, and a Directional
Arrow Auxillary Sign pointed along the route leading to the destination. The
background color on each individual assembly should be the same.
M4-5 TO TO M4-5
M1-7 RS-068
M6-3 M6-1R
3C.8 National Forest Access Signing

Signs may be used to guide visitors from major highways and other roads
providing general access to National Forest System lands. Use white
retroreflective legend on brown retroreflective background signs. Include
Federal recreation symbols where appropriate. States may require signs placed
on their highways to be fully retroreflective white on green to match their
destination signage.
ACCESS ACCESS
Antelope Lake
Antelope FRD
SA
Lake
M6-1R
November 2012
3C.9 General Service Signs

General Service signs may be used with destination signs where services, such
as gas, food, and lodging are infrequent and are offered at privately provided
recreation sites. Refer to chapter 7, section 7.1.1.
These signs may be used on any class of road, but are normally not installed on
NFS roads unless they are of value to the forest visitor.
General Service signs shall conform to the guidelines established for these signs
in chapter 3 and the MUTCD, section 2I.
Martin's 3/
Dude Ranch 4
FRD
3C.10 Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs

Tourist-oriented directional signs are guide signs that display the business
identification and directional information for eligible businesses, services, and
activity facilities at privately provided recreation sites. Refer to chapter 7, section
7.1.1.
These signs may be used on any class of road, but are normally not installed on
NFS roads unless they are of value to the forest visitor.
Tourist-oriented directional signs shall conform to the guidelines established for

these signs in the MUTCD, section 2K.
November 2012
3C.11 Miscellaneous Information Signs

Miscellaneous information signs are used to provide some type of information to
the road user, such as road user, information, geographical features, rivers and
Miscellaneous summits, and other jurisdictional boundaries. They should be used only if there
information signs are specific reasons for orienting the road users or identifying control points for
activities that are in the public interest.
should not contain a
Miscellaneous information signs should not contain a regulatory or warning
regulatory or warning
message and should not interfere with other signing.
message and should
If miscellaneous information signs are to be of value to the road user, they
not interfere with other should be consistent with other guide signs in design and legibility. On all such
signing. signs, the design should be simple and dignified, devoid of any tendency toward
flamboyant advertising, and in general compliance with other signing.
Coordinate the message with the forest sign coordinator.
3C.11.1 Feature Signs
When features have been signed as a destination, they should be signed when
Mystic Spring reached. Other significant features not signed as destinations also may be
identified with signs.
If feature signs are to be viewed by the passing motorists, they should be

sized according to the speed the traffic is traveling on the road and placed
perpendicular to the road. Refer to table 3C-1.
If feature signs are provided for general information, they may be placed parallel
to the road. They are not required to be retroreflective. They may be routed on
any appropriate substrate.
3C.11.2 Elevation Signs
On important recreation roads, an elevation sign may be placed at the highest

ELEVATION elevation point that the road reaches. In addition, when the road crosses even,
1,000-foot elevation contours, elevation signs may be installed.
3000 FT Elevations should be to the nearest foot.
Tioga Pass 3C.11.3 ELEVATION

Pass and Continental Divide Signs
Rogers Pass
Locations where roads cross significant or historical mountain passes and the
ELEV 8238 FTContinentalContinental
3000 Divide
FTbe identified.
Divide may States may require these signs to be fully
retroreflective white on green on roads under their jurisdiction.
ELEV 9945
Tioga Pass Rogers Pass
ELEV 8238 FT Continental Divide
ELEV 9945
November 2012
3C.11.4 Acknowledgment Signs
Acknowledgment signs are a way of recognizing a company, business, or

volunteer group that provides a road-related service, such as adopt-a-road litter
removal programs, maintenance, and other road maintenance or beautification
sponsorship programs. Acknowledgment signs should indicate clearly the type of
highway services provided by the sponsor.
Acknowledgment signs shall only be installed where adequate spacing is

available between the acknowledgment sign and other higher priority signs
such as warning and regulatory signs. They shall not be installed in a position
where they would obscure or distract the road users’ view of other traffic control
devices.
Do not install acknowledgement signs on any other traffic control devices (TCD),
supports or structures, or bridge piers, or at key decision points where a road
user’s attention is more appropriately focused on other TCD, roadway geometry,
or traffic conditions, intersections, grade crossings, temporary traffic control
zones, and areas of limited sight distance.
Each Forest Service unit may develop their own acknowledgment sign designs
with the Forest Service shield, and/or a brief jurisdiction-wide program slogan as
part of any portion of the acknowledgment sign, provided that the signs comply
with the provisions for shape, color, and lettering style in these Guidelines and
the requirements in the MUTCD, section 2H.08.
Do not use trade logos, slogans, contact information, such as telephone

numbers and Web sites, nonstandard letter styles, and similar forms of
commercial promotion on acknowledgement signs.
Lettering shall be in upper-case letters as provided in the “Standard Highway

Signs” book, see section 1A.11.
The sponsor acknowledgment logo shall not exceed one-third of the total area
of the sign and shall not be located at the top of the sign. The sign shall not
exceed 8 square feet.
The sign shall not contain any messages, lights, symbols, or trademarks that
resemble any official traffic control devices.
3C.11.5 Private Land Signs
In addition to boundary signs, information signs may be needed on NFS roads

that have easements through private land but it is confusing to the public as to
whether they can drive on the NFS roads. It is not appropriate for the Forest
Service to post NO TRESSPASSING signs on the private land—that is the
responsibility of the landowner. Reinforce this sign with the appropriate NFS
roads route marker.
PRIVATE LAND
NEXT 1/4 MILE
STAY ON ROAD
November 2012
3C.11.6 Memorial or Dedication Signs
The Forest Service may approve requests for placement of memorial signage
on NFS roads to honor private individuals on a case-by-case basis.
Memorial or dedication signs shall be rectangular in shape and should have a

white legend and border on a brown background when located on NFS roads.
These signs shall not interfere with the placement of any other necessary
signing or compromise the safety or efficiency of traffic flow.
Limit the legend to the name of the person and a simple message such as:
“Captain Ted Hall and Engineer Arnie Quinones Memorial Interchange.”
“Patrol Agent Robert Rosas Memorial Highway.”
“Dedicated to Janie Ybarra.”
Do not allow any other information on the sign, such as biographical, dates,
logos, etc. Limit signs to one sign in each route direction, each as an
independent sign installation.
Approval is contingent on appropriate wording, sign standards, desired

placement, and procurement, installation, and maintenance of the memorial
signs by the requesting entity.
Signs shall follow all standards in chapter 3 and the MUTCD, section 2M.10.
The forest sign coordinator shall assure that signs do not interfere with safe
function of motorists, nor obscure existing traffic control devices.
Contact the regional sign coordinator for assistance.
3C.11.7 Tour Route Signs

Tour Route signs are informational signs, plaques, or shields designed to
provide road users with route guidance in following a tour route of particular
cultural, historical, recreational, or educational significance.
Tour Route signs may be used on nationally designated or other specially

designated trails that are coincident with roads, such as National Historic,
Scenic, and Recreation Trails. Refer to chapter 5 for National Historic, Scenic
and Recreation trail logotypes and signing requirements.
November 2012
Tour route signs also may be used for locally or specially designated trails or
SCENIC routes such as the C.M Russell Auto Tour on the Lewis and Clark National
BIKEWAY Forest and the Oregon Scenic Bikeway.
Congressionally designated trail signage must be consistent among

administrative units. Coordinate area and trail management plans as
appropriate. Standardize signing on routes that include more than one
administrative unit. Coordinate with other road agencies to install tour route
signs on roads under their jurisdiction.
Tour route signs should be retroreflective white legend on a brown background

when placed on NFS roads unless otherwise approved through the regional sign
coordinator.
Tour route signs should be reviewed by the forest and regional sign coordinator
before they are placed on NFS roads to ensure they meet the required
standards.
Refer to the MUTCD, section 2H.07 for specific information on tour route signs.
3C.12 Scenic Byway Signing

Install scenic byway signs in accordance with established highway signing
principles and practices. Keep all signing along scenic byways to the minimum
consistent with user needs. Avoid excessive clutter that may detract from
the scenic qualities of the route or interfere with regulatory or warning signs.
Coordinate signing activities with States, counties, or other local jurisdictions on
those routes where they have jurisdiction. Scenic byway signs are not intended
to replace existing Federal, State, or local scenic route identification signs.
Avoid excessive clutter 3C.12.1 Scenic Byway Logo

that may detract from The National Forest Scenic Byway Logo is the approved symbol to identify a
the scenic qualities of route officially designated by the Chief of the Forest Service as a National Forest
Scenic Byway. The logo also may be used in conjunction with interpretive and
the route or interfere other informational signs at locations along scenic byways routes.
with regulatory or
The logo shall be fully retroreflective when incorporated into road guide signing.
warning signs.
The logo design should be incorporated into signing for dual-designated
facilities. This includes routes previously designated and signed by States,
counties, or local agencies. While the overall design for these facilities will be
determined on a case-by-case basis in cooperation with the road management
agency, the scenic byway logo design, when used, shall not be modified.
Use a single logo on routes designated through more than one scenic byway
program, such as National Scenic Byways, All-American Roads, or National
Forest Scenic Byways. Byways designated by the Department of Transportation
prevail in priority over Forest Service byway designations and should be
signed according to the MUTCD, section 2D.55. If a route has multiple byway
designations, the various byway logos may be installed on a byway entrance
yway Scenic Byway sign.
oth 3C-20 Si gn and P os t er G ui deli nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
ay
November 2012
3C.12.2 Scenic Byway Identification Sign (SB)
The Scenic Byway Identification sign (SB) marks the route as a National
Forest Scenic Byway and should be used at the beginning and end of the
scenic byway and at major road intersections. It may also be used at selected
locations along the route as a reassurance marker.
The use of the Scenic Byway Name plaque (SBa) is optional. When used, the
name plaque shall be the same width as the Scenic Byway sign.
SB
Scenic Byway Scenic
The Byway
minimum sign sizes shown in chapter 3E, section 3E.8 shall be used when
designing or choosing Scenic Byway signs that will be viewed from a moving
Beartooth vehicle. The speed used should be the posted speed limit, or the speed that a
SBa vehicle could reasonably be expected to be traveling as the sign is viewed, as
Highway
determined by engineering judgment.
3C.12.3 Scenic Byway Marker Sign (SBM)
Use the Scenic Byway Marker (SBM) sign as a reassurance marker to guide
visitors along National Forest Scenic Byways.
Appropriate locations include the following:
• At the beginning and terminus of a designated route.
• At junctions with other routes.
• At intersections where the route turns and may confuse the visitor.
• At intersections just beyond and between intersections to reassure visitors

that they are still on the scenic byway.
Scenic Byway Markers should be used in common assemblies with Federal,

State, local jurisdiction, and Forest Service route markers. Refer to figure 3C-2
Byway Scenic Byway for typical assemblies.
Directional Arrow Auxillary Signs (M5-M6 series) and auxilliary route markers
SBM
tooth (FM2, 3, and 4) may be used with the Scenic Byway Marker signs. Refer to
chapter 3E, section 3E.68.
hway
November 2012
TO M4-5
Scenic Byway Scenic Byway

SBM SBM
END M4-6
M6-3
Scenic Byway Scenic Byway
Other Forest Service

jurisdiction’s route route Scenic Byway trailblazer assembly
Figure 3C-2—Scenic Byway assemblies
3C.13 Reference Location Signs

Reference location signs are intended to serve as mile point location guides
for road users and as a means to identify road locations and road maintenance
sections. Reference location signs may be erected on any NFS road but are
typically used on higher-volume paved roads.
Reference location signs are fully retroreflective and have white legend and
borders on green background when used on NFSR. When used on motorized
trails, they may be brown and white.
D10-1
Use of the heading MILE shall be used to distinguish the reference location
sign from the vertical route marker.
D10-2a
Chapter 3D Traffic Control Devices Placement and Installation
3D.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................1
3D.2 Sign Placement....................................................................................................1
3D.2.1 Sign Spreading .....................................................................................2
3D.2.2 Longitudinal Placement .......................................................................3
3D.2.2a Regulatory Signs......................................................................3
3D.2.2b Warning Signs...........................................................................3
3D.2.2c Guide Signs...............................................................................5
3D.2.3 Clear Zones ...........................................................................................6
3D.2.4 Mounting Height ...................................................................................6
3D.2.5 Lateral Offset .........................................................................................6
3D.2.6 Sign Face Orientation Angle ...............................................................9
3D.3 Typical Warning Sign Placement Location ....................................................10
3D.4 Typical Guide Sign Placement Location.........................................................15
3D.5 Object Markers and Barricade Markers .........................................................22
3D.6 Delineator Positioning and Spacing................................................................26
3D.7 Sign Posts..........................................................................................................27
3D.7.1 Wood Posts .........................................................................................30
3D.7.2 Square or Round Tube Steel Posts...................................................32
3D.7.3 U-Channel Steel Post..........................................................................33
3D.7.4 Hardware .............................................................................................34
3D.7.5 Graffiti Film ..........................................................................................34
3D.8 Installation Date and Vandal Warning Labels ...............................................35
3D.9 Other References...............................................................................................36

November 2012
3D.1 Introduction
Uniform sign placement and installation assists drivers in observing signs and
in determining where the directed action is to take place. The effectiveness
of a sign can be compromised if it is used inappropriately or if it is installed
incorrectly. A sign that is confusing, or one that cannot be seen in time, is
useless.
Uniform sign Uniform installation of signs is highly desirable. However, because no two roads
are exactly alike, unusual situations may be encountered related to topography,
placement and man-made objects, intermediate intersections, or other circumstances that may
installation assists require some modifications to typical sign placement guidelines and standards.
The most suitable placement of each sign must be determined at the site where
drivers in observing all variables are visible. Any deviations or adjustments should be documented in
signs and in the unit sign plan.
determining where the Select locations that maximize the opportunity for signs to be visible and
to convey the intended message. It also is important that signs be installed
directed action is to
correctly to ensure that errant vehicles are protected when they leave the
take place. roadway and collide with the sign post.
When placing Forest Service signs on roads under other jurisdictions,

coordinate signing requirements with that agency. In those instances, follow
the placement and installation guidelines and standards of the agency with
jurisdiction of the road.
Installation of traffic control devices as recommended by engineering judgment

or an engineering study should occur in a timely manner.
Removal of existing traffic control devices as recommended by engineering

judgment or an engineering study should occur in a timely manner so the
Installation of traffic unneeded messages do not breed disrespect for traffic control devices that are
needed. Existing devices, even though not appropriate or necessary, may have
control devices as
created a driving pattern by road users familiar with the road and may require
recommended by that other actions be taken in conjunction with their removal. These actions if
necessary should be evaluated and documented with engineering judgments
engineering judgment
and engineering studies.
or an engineering study
Check with utility companies and other agencies that have underground cables
should occur in a timely and conduits along roads before installing new signs.
manner.
3D.2 Sign Placement

Sign placement involves the longitudinal location along the roadway, mounting
height, and lateral offset.
With the exception of the “No Passing” pennant, place all signs on the right-
hand side of the traveled way as close to the standard location as is practical.
Consider the following guidelines when selecting sign placement locations:
1. Place signs where they are clearly visible and provide adequate time for
proper viewer response. Consider factors, such as speed, road conditions,
intermediate intersections, sight distances, and road geometry.
S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 3D-1
November 2012
2. Select locations that minimize viewing obstructions. Some common

placement locations to be avoided include:
• Dips in the road.
• Just beyond the crest of a hill.

Signs with unrelated
messages should be • Where a sign could be obscured by other signs or objects.
erected individually on • Where the sign may interfere with the normal use of the road.
separate posts. • Where there is increased need for users to focus on the road.
• Too close to trees or other foliage that could grow to cover the sign
face.
• Snow removal and disposal areas.
3. Erect signs individually on separate posts or mountings except where one

sign supplements another, such as a warning sign with an advisory speed
plaque, or where route markers and destination signs must be grouped.
Signs with unrelated messages should be erected individually on separate
posts.
3D.2.1 Sign Spreading

Several signs at the same location can overload road users with too much
information, causing confusion and detracting from critical messages. Signs
requiring different decisions by the road user shall be spaced sufficiently far
apart for the required decisions to be made independently.
The following should be used as placement order:
1. Location-critical regulatory signs such as STOP and YIELD.
2. Location-critical warning signs such as TURN and INTERSECTION.
3. Other regulatory signs such as SPEED LIMIT.
4. Other warning signs such as LIVESTOCK.
5. Route markers.
6. Destination and other guide signs.
7. Informational and Motorist Services signs.
The posted or 85th-percentile speed should be considered when determining

the appropriate spread distance between signs.
3D-2 Si gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
Table 3D-1 Minimum spread distance between signs

Posted or 85th-percentile Speed Minimum Spread Distance
 35 miles per hour 100 feet

 40 miles per hour 5 times the speed = XXX feet
3D.2.2 Longitudinal Placement

All signs need to be visible to drivers in time for them to see the sign, perceive
the message, react, and complete the necessary maneuver considering
approach speeds and road conditions.
3D.2.2a Regulatory Signs

Place regulatory signs at or near where their mandate or prohibition applies or
begins, as shown in figure 3D-1.
* Edge of traveled way or shoulder
*
*As close as practical, or
following the lateral
offset guidelines in
section 3D.2.5.
R1-2 R1-1
Figure 3D-1—STOP and YIELD sign locations example.
3D.2.2b Warning Signs

Warning signs are normally placed in advance of the situation to which they call
attention to allow adequate time for proper driver response, as shown in figure
3D-2. Use table 3D-2 to determine the advance placement approach distances
“X”.
Traffic direction
Traffic direction
Figure 3D-2—Advance placement distances for warning sign.
November 2012
Table 3D-2—Advance warning sign placement distances for unpaved low-volume roads
Distance for Additional distance
85 percent
deceleration (feet) to (feet) on
speed or
posted speed advisory speed listed (mph) owngrade (percent)
d
(mph)
0-10 20
30 40 3 6 9 12
20 125 — — — 5 10 20 30
25 150 — — — 8 15 30 45
30
200 150 — — 10 20 45 65
35
250 225 — — 15 35 60 90
40
325 300 275 — 20 45 75 120
45
400 350 300 — 25 55 95 150
50
475 450 375 275 30 70 120 185
55
550 525 450 350 35 85 145 225
• These minimum distances may be exceeded when necessary.
• Distance for deceleration above, is the minimum distance a warning sign should be placed in
advance of a condition. It covers situations where the driver probably will be required to decrease
speed (for example, advisory speed for a curve or a road dip) or come to a stop (for example a
STOP sign, pedestrian crossing, single-lane bridge, or a closed gate).
• Sign placement distances are based on sign legibility provided by 24-inch signs and 4-inch letters.
• If larger signs are used, evaluate the placement distances as part of the engineering study or
engineering judgment to determine whether the placement distances may be reduced. Document
calculations and rational.
• Distances are for level roadways. Increase placement distance on downgrades of 3 percent or
greater.
• Placement distance on upgrades may be reduced by one-half the distances listed for downgrades.
For advance placement distances for warning signs on conventional roads and paved low-volume roads,
refer to the MUTCD, section 2C.05, table 2C-4.
November 2012
3D.2.2c Guide Signs

Place guide signs in advance of the destination or intersection to allow adequate
time for the vehicle to slow down and make the turn into the destination as
shown in figure 3D-3. Use table 3D-3 to determine the advance placement
distance “x” for guide signs.
*Use 25 to 200 feet on

unpaved roads or
about 300 feet
on paved roads.
Forest Boundary 9
Antelope Lake 13
FRD
Maint *
enan x ACCESS
c e le ACCESS
vel 4 or Antelope Lake
road
Antelope FRD
Lake SA
M6-1R
Figure 3D-3— Advance placement distances for guide signs.
Table 3D-3—Advance placement of guide signs at intersections

Speed limit or ML 3, 4, 5 ML 2 roads and roads
85th-percentile roads within administrative or
speed (mph) (feet) recreation sites
Under 15 25 At or near intersection
15 to 25 100 25
30 to 40 100 to 200 NA
45 and higher 200 minimum NA
November 2012
3D.2.3 Clear Zones

Clear zones are the total roadside border area, starting at the edge of the
traveled way, that is available for an errant driver to stop or regain control of a
vehicle. This area might consist of a shoulder, a recoverable slope, and/or a
nonrecoverable, traversable slope with a clear run-out area at its toe. Slopes
steeper than 1V:3H are usually considered nonrecoverable.
High-speed, high-volume, paved highway clear zone guidelines are contained in

AASHTO’s “Roadside Design Guide,” 2002 edition. Widths ranging from 7 feet
to over 40 feet are discussed, depending on the speed and volume of traffic.
AASHTO’s “Guidelines for Geometric Design of Very Low-Volume Roads

(ADT<= 400),” 2001 edition, notes that it generally is not cost effective to
provide clear zones on very low-volume roads, particularly unpaved roads.
However, clear zones of any width contribute to safety and should be provided
and used where practical.
Sign placement on National Forest Service Roads shall follow breakaway

or crashworthy guidelines for signs within roadway clear zones as required.
Breakaway and crashworthy sign posts are defined in section 3D.7.
3D.2.4 Mounting Height

Mounting height is measured from the road surface to the bottom of the sign.
Signs in rural areas shall be mounted at least 5 feet from the bottom of the
primary sign from the elevation of the nearest edge of the road.
Where the view of the sign might be obstructed or where parking or pedestrian
movements occur, such as urban, business, commercial, or residential areas,
the clearance to the bottom of the primary sign shall be at least 7 feet.
Supplemental plaques or signs mounted below the primary sign may be 1-foot
less than the specified heights. If the supplemental plaque or sign is greater
than 1 foot in height, the primary sign must be mounted at a higher height to
meet the minimum requirements for the supplemental sign. Allow a 1-inch gap
between stacked signs so they can expand and contract.
Refer to figures 3D-4 and 3D-5 for mounting height requirements.
3D.2.5 Lateral Offset

Lateral offset for all sign placements is the distance from the edge of the
traveled way to the nearest edge of the sign—not the distance to the sign
post. All supports should be located as far as practicable from the edge of the
shoulder to minimize the exposure of traffic to sign supports.
Lateral offset guidelines for post-mounted signs are:
• On conventional roads, the minimum lateral offset should be 12 feet from

the edge of the traveled way. If a shoulder wider than 6 feet exists, the
minimum lateral offset should be 6 feet from the edge of the shoulder.
November 2012
• On all roads where signs are placed behind barriers, such as curbs or
guardrails, a lateral offset of not less than 2 feet from the roadside edge of
the barrier may be used.
• On low-volume roads, a minimum of 12 feet lateral offset should be used

where roadway slopes and vegetation permit.
• On low-volume roads where roadside features, such as terrain, shrubbery,

and/or trees, prevent standard lateral offset, a lateral offset of not less than
2 feet from the edge of the road to the roadside edge of the sign may be
used.
• Major sign installations, such as forest boundary signs on solid bases,

should be located behind existing roadside barriers or outside of the clear
zone. If a sign installation is located within the clear zone, a breakaway
structure shall be used.
Figures 3D-4 and 3D-5 show the lateral offsets for signs on rural roads.
Not less than HEAVY

2 ft from STEEP Not less
Not less TRUCK than
edge of NARROW than 12 ft TRAFFIC
traveled ROAD 2 ft
way
N EXT
7 M ILES
Guardrail
or curb
5 ft 5 ft
5 ft
Road Edge of 4 ft Road
surface traveled way surface
Low-volume rural roads where All rural roads—standard Rural low-volume and
terrain or vegetation limit the placement. conventional roads.
lateral offset.
Figure 3D-4—Lateral offset and mounting height for warning signs on rural
roads.
November 2012
Not less than

12 ft Dutch John 5 Not less than
Truckee 3 12 ft
214 2
3
2
5-ft min. 1 or
2
4-ft
3-ft min. min.
4-ft Edge of to lowest
Edge of min. traveled number
traveled way
way
Road surface
Not less than

12 ft 3134
Edge of 5-ft min. or

traveled
way
Road surface
Note: Refer to figure 3D-4 for lateral offset guidelines that apply to roads with
shoulders or where the 12-foot minimum is not practical.
Figure 3D-5—Standard lateral offset and mounting height for guide signs
and route markers on rural roads.
November 2012
3D.2.6 Sign Face Orientation Angle

Mount signs at approximately right angles to oncoming traffic so that the vehicle
headlights will illuminate the sign face.
It may be necessary to rotate a sign slightly off 90 degrees to avoid glare

reflecting off the sign face directly into the driver’s eyes. An angle of about 93
degrees to the line of approaching traffic is recommended. On curves, orient the
sign to face the oncoming traffic—not the road edge. Refer to figure 3D-6.
On steep grades, it may be necessary to tilt the sign from the vertical position
to make it easier for motorists to read the sign. Tilt the sign forward for uphill
grades. Tilt the sign back for downhill grades.
Signs placed more than 30 feet from the edge of the traveled way should be
turned toward the road.
Traffic direction
93ϒ
Traffic direction
93ϒ
Figure 3D-6—Sign face orientation angle.
November 2012
3D.3 Typical Warning Sign Placement Location
Examples of possible warning sign placements for conditions typically found on National Forest System
roads are shown in figures 3D-7 through 3D-13.
Narrow bridge or culvert One-lane bridge Single-lane road
Type 3 Type 3 Type 3

Object Object Object
Marker Marker Marker
* *
W5-2 W5-3 W5-2
*Distance from bridge can be determined from advance placement table 3D-2.
Note: Inside edge of object marker shall be flush with the inside edge of the hub guards or guard rail.
Place advance warning signs on both approaches to restricted bridge.
At a minimum, use Type 3 object markers. Consider using advance warning assemblies where traffic
volumes are higher or the view of the bridge is obstructed.
Figure 3D-7—Typical narrow bridge and one-lane bridge locations.
November 2012
**
IMPASSABLE FW5-15
DURING
HIGH WATER
STREAM
FW5-1d FW5-1e FFW8-18a
LASH
W8-19
CROSSING or FO R D or F LO O D
A R EA
W8-18
* Use table 3D-2 to determine advance
placement distance.
** Place on the deepest point on the roadway

that floods
Figure 3D-8—Typical warning sign placement location for flood hazards.
November 2012
M
ot
or
4
ize
5
d
VEHICLES
m
HIGHWAY
6
LEGAL
ixe
ONLY
1
d
use road 456
Route marker
Maintenance level 2 or 3 road Motorized mixed use road
*
Route marker
Motorized mixed us
0
2
0
1
Use sign as a portal * Use table 3C-2 to
entry sign which would determine advance
e
indicate that all roads placement distances. ro
a d
behind this sign are 10
mixed use. 20
Figure 3D-9—Signing for motorized mixed use on National Forest System roads.
VEHICLES
HIGHWAY
LEGAL
ONLY
Concurrent coincident use
Maintenance level 2 or 3 road

TR
TR
6
4
5
4
6
5
VEHICLES
HIGHWAY
LEGAL
TR TR
ONLY
4 4
5 5
6 6 6
45
il
Tra
Tra
il
456
Figure 3D-10—Signing for a road and trail that have concurrent coincident use on a segment.
November 2012
TR
4
5
6
Trail 456
20
d 10
R oa
HIG EGALLES
L IC
HW
VE ONLY
H
AY
FR5-11b
1
Concurrent coincident use 0
(shaded area) 2
0
FM1-7v
Road
Trai
102
l4
*If a road and trail have the same

56
route number, sign with a road

route marker only.
M
ai
nt
en
an
ce
Le
ve SHARE THE ROAD
l2 NEXT 1 MILE FW8-7
ro
ad
TR *
Pa
rk
1
in
4
g
0
FR5-11b ONLY 2 5
VEHICLES 0 6
LEGAL
HIGHWAY
Maintenance Level 3, 4, or 5 road
Figure 3D-11—Signing for a road and trail that have concurrent coincident use on a segment
beginning at the intersection of two roads.
November 2012
STEEP
NARROW
ROAD
W1-5 R12-1 FW5-1c W11-6 W11-2
W16-7P
W16-3P
W7-26P
W13-1P W7-3aP
Figure 3D-12—Typical placement order for supplemental plaques.
3D.4 Guide Sign Placement Location

5
ail
Tr
4
3 2 1
Major highway or NFSR
3
1 2 4
ROAD SIGNS TRAIL SIGNS
HIGHWAY
LEGAL
Trail
VEHICLES
FW11-6a*
ONLY
500 FR5-11b R1-1 W3-1
F E ET 5
W16-2P W11-15P
1* 2* 3 4 5
*Use appropriate symbol/message Refer to chapter 5
designating managed trail use. for trail signs
Figure 3D-13—Typical placement of regulatory and warning signs for motorized trail and road
crossings.
3D-14 Si gn and Pos t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
August 2013
3D.4 Typical Guide Sign Placement Location

Guide sign location examples are shown in figures 3D-14 through 3D-20.
Antelope Lake
NFSR #284
Fo
Antelope Lake
res
tB
ou
nd
ary
County Road #24
FRD
Lolo Pass 15
Antelope Lake 1
8
#1
284 18
SR
NF
FM1-7H FM1-7H
CACHE
Jct Hwy 89 6
FRD
FE
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
Forest Boundary 3
Antelope Lake 7 Forest Boun
dary
18
4
#2
ad
*Use 25 to 200 feet on

Ro
unpaved roads or
ty
un
approximately 300 feet

Co
on paved roads.
Forest Boundary 9
Antelope Lake 13
FRD
State
High *
way
89 ACCESS ACCESS
or
Antelope Antelope Lake
FRD
Lake SA
Figure 3D-14—Typical placement of guide, destination, and National Forest Access Signs.
November 2012
Approach
signing
RECREATION
AREA
Trout
Creek
e
o sit
or Destination
signing
d int
Approach signing
Trout Creek Trout Creek
Roa
Recreation Recreation 5
*Obtain distance from table 3D-3 Area
Area
Main Highway *
*
Trout Creek
Recreation 7 Trout Creek
Destination Approach
signing Area Recreation signing
FRD
Area
FRD
or
RECREATION
AREA Approach
signing
Trout
Creek
SA
Figure 3D-15—Site destination and site approach signing examples.
August 2013
FM
1- 73
7H
8 1
132
NF
Jc
tH
SR
Big wy
13
Ck 93
21
Tr h 3
d
F
2
RD
FRD
Jct Hwy 93 3
Big
G l e n Tr h d 2
Ck
738
1321
NF
Lk T
County Road
FM1
To
SR
rhd
-7H
73
FRD
738
FRD
8
Jct Hwy 93 3
8
To FM4-5
RS-068
Note: Allow a 1-inch gap between
County Road
stacked signs so they can expand

M6-1R
and contract.
Big Ck Trhd 5
FRD
Highway 93 North
Figure 3D-16—Typical placement of destination signs, route markers, and trailblazer assemblies.
November 2012
Truckee 3
Keystone 4 FRD
210 202 * Dutch John 5
FM1-7H Truckee 3
Allow a 1-inch gap between
210 stacked signs so they can
expand and contract.
M6-4
NFSR 202
Center the sign
for the approaching
or lane of traffic.
NFSR 210
*
*Obtain distance from table
3D-3.
Dutch John 5
Keystone 4
210 202
Figure 3D-17—Typical placement for destination signs with route markers.
2 14 2 14
M1-7
25 to 100 ft* 25 to 100 ft* M6-4
Center the sign

for the approaching
lane of traffic
Note: Route markers *Obtain distance from
may be installed below table 3D-3. 2 14
applicable guide signs FM1-7H
*
where available. M6-1L
or
2 14 FM1-7H
Minor intersection Major intersection
Figure 3D-18—Typical locations for distinctive and horizontal route markers, for use on
Maintenance Level 3, 4, and 5 roads.
August 2013
2 to 12 ft
Edge of traveled way

3 Barrier or entrance
5 treatment
3 ft to Maintenance
lowest Level 1 road
number
Road surface
1
25 to 100 ft *
25 to 100 ft 2
3 Option: Use a delineator
4
1 post with a wood or
5 aluminum sign panel.
Maintenance Level 2 road

FM1-7V
*Distances may be greater when the

entrance is intentionally disguised
to discourage use.
Figure 3D-19—Typical locations for vertical route markers, for use on Maintenance Level 1 and 2
roads.
RS-068
RS-095
No turnout or safe
parking area.
TR 152 Do not sign.
Old Highway South Fork 301
or Tr No 152 or Tr No 246
TR 246
M6-4 FRD FRD 301
152
Turnout
Major road
Min
or
Turnout roa
d
152
Signs may be
Tur mounted back-to-
n out back on one post
246 for low-speed roads.
6
24
TR 246 FM1-7H
South Fork
Tr No 246
FRD
M6-1R
Use appropriate Recreational and Cultural Interest Area symbols for trail use.
Trail junctions should be signed with appropriate route markers, destination signs,
and reassurance markers. Refer to chapter 3E, section 3E.6B for arrow details
below recreation symbols.
Figure 3D-20—Typical placement of road guide signs for trail crossing or beginning at roads.
November 2012
Application Notes
Use the National Forest VOLUNTARY VISITOR

SURVEY AHEAD guide sign to inform road
R1-1
R1-2
users that they are approaching a voluntary
survey station. Distances may be expressed as
AHEAD, XX FEET, or XX MILE. (Sign 1).
Or
Use the SURVEY STATION NEXT RIGHT
PLEASE STOP guide sign to inform the road
users that they need to begin to slow down
in order to exit the road and enter the survey
station activity area (Sign 2).
Use the SURVEY STATION with directional

arrow guide sign to indicate that the road user
must exit at this location to participate in the
Survey Station
Activity Area
survey (Sign 3).
A STOP or YIELD sign may be used to control

traffic reentering the road from the check station
activity area. Use is optional and based on
* Obtain distances from table 3D-3.
SURVEY
STATION Sign 3
*
SURVEY STATION
NEXT RIGHT Sign 2
PLEASE STOP
*
VOLUNTARY
V I S I T O R S U R V E Y Sign 1
AHEAD
Figure 3D-21—Survey station with optional compliance.
November 2012
Application Notes
Use the appropriate guide sign, such as

WATERCRAFT CHECK STATION AHEAD to
R1-1
R1-2
inform road users that they are approaching a
check station. Distances may be expressed as
AHEAD, XX FEET, or XX MILE (Sign 1).
Or
Signs may be modified depending on the type
of check station, such as LOGGING, GAME
ANIMAL, FIREWOOD, FOREST PRODUCTS,
etc.
Use the regulatory sign FR13-1a to inform the

targeted road users that the check station is
mandatory. Use only if supported by law or CFR
order (Sign 2).
Check Station
Activity Area
Messages may include options, such as:

VEHICLES WITH WATERCRAFT
VEHICLES WITH GAME ANIMALS
VEHICLES WITH FIREWOOD, etc.
Use the CHECK STATION NEXT RIGHT guide

sign to inform the affected users that they need
to begin to slow down in order to exit the road
and enter the check station activity area (Sign 3).
Use the CHECK STATION with directional arrow

CHECK guide sign to indicate that the road user must
STATION Sign 4 exit at this location (Sign 4).
A STOP or YIELD sign may be used to control

* traffic reentering the road from the check station
activity area. Use is optional and based on
CHECK STATION
NEXT RIGHT Sign 3
* Obtain distances from table 3D-3.
*
VEHICLES WITH
WATERCRAFT
MUST ENTER
Sign 2
CHECK STATION
FR13-1a
*
WATERCRAFT
CHECK STATION Sign 1
AHEAD
Figure 3D-22—Check station with mandatory compliance.
November 2012
3D.5 Object Markers and Barricade Markers

Type 3 object markers are used to mark objects that intrude into or constrict the
roadway. Figure 3D-23 shows correct mounting of Type 3 object markers.
Notes:
Traffic side Traffic side
1. Stripes slope downward
toward the side of the
obstruction on which
traffic is to pass.
Bridge rail end
2. For a bridge with a
railing but no curb, mark
the inner edge of the
Curb or railing.
Inner edge of hazardous
marker in line obstruction
with inner to be marked
edge of the 4 ft* 4 ft*
8 ft
obstruction Edge of or less
traveled way
Road surface Road surface
Ground
*Vertical mounting height may vary according to need. Mounting height is

normally 4 feet, but shall be no less than 6 inches.
Figure 3D-23—Typical placement for Type 3 object markers on a narrow

bridge.
When cattle guards are marked by object markers, a dual-faced object marker
(a right face on the front side and a left face on the back side) may be mounted
on a single post placed on the middle edge of each side of the cattle guard.
Another option is to place dual-faced object markers on the opposite right
corners of the cattle guard. (Both examples are shown in figure 3D-24.)
Road
Alternate location Object markers mounted back to back

Modified type 2 object marker
Figure 3D-24—Object marker locations on a cattle guard where the cattle

guard is not constricting the roadway.
November 2012
Type 2 OM
Securing post
Type 2 OM Type 2 OM
PLAN VIEW
FBM-L FBM-R
Type 2 OM
Min. 32 to 42 in
Traveled way
One-lane road
ELEVATION VIEW
16” 16”
Type 2 OM
Min. 32 to 42 in
Traveled way
One-lane road
ELEVATION VIEW
OM4-3 Type 2 OM
Min. 32
to 42 in
One-lane road
If motorized or mechanized use, such as bicycles, occurs behind a gate, the back sides of the barrier or
gate may require signing also.
The tape shall be red and white striped and wrapped fully around the large members of closure gates.
It should be overlapped at the bottom, and the seam should be protected from collecting moisture. This
option makes it harder to vandalize the gate markings and also allows for visibility from both sides of the
gate.
Figure 3D-25—Typical gate and barricade markers, including modified red and white barricade
markers, end-of-roadway markers, and red and white retroreflective tape.
November 2012
Type Type 2
2 OM Securing Securing OM
post post
Edge of road
Locking device
Type Type
2 OM Plan view BM 2 OM
Locking device Type 2 OM
BM
32 to 42
inches 32 to 42
inches
Two-lane road Elevation view
Locking device Type 2 OM
32 to 42
inches
Locking device
Type 2 OM
32 to 42
inches
If motorized or mechanized use, such as bicycles, occurs behind a gate, the back sides of the barrier or
gate may require signing also.
The tape shall be red and white striped and wrapped fully around the large members of closure gates.
It should be overlapped at the bottom, and the seam should be protected from collecting moisture. This
option makes it harder to vandalize the gate markings and also allows for visibility from both sides of the
gate.
Figure 3D-26—Typical gate and barricade markers for double lane roads including modified red
and white barricade markers, end of roadway markers, and red and white retroreflective tape.
November 2012
3-inch PVC, minimum 12 inches

long, wrapped with red and white
striped retroreflective tape. The
retroreflective tape should be
Fence post overlapped at the seams and
protected from collecting moisture.
Gate post Minimum 2 per gate.
Type 2 object
marker (both
sides of post)
Marker should Typical rigid

be mounted wire
32 to 42 inches Barbed wire
from ground level.
Slide the two PVC pipes (3 inches in diameter by 12 inches long) wrapped with retroreflective
red and white tape over the barbed wire. Ensure that stripes are facing the correct direction
for both approaches.
Note: The retroreflective-taped PVC may be replaced with 2 FBM1’s placed equidistant right and left
12 inches
from the top center of the gate with stripes slanted downward to the center of the gate or OM4-3 placed
at the top center of the gate.
45° angle
3 inches 6 inches
Figure 3D-27—Wire-fence gate marking. May be used on low-volume roads with speeds less than
35 mph.3D.6 Delineator Positioning and Spacing
FBM-12
Note: Front stripes slant downward to the right. Back stripes to the left.
November 2012
3D.6 Delineator Positioning and Spacing

When engineering judgment indicates a need, figure 3D-28 shows the position and spacing of
delineators for curves on low-volume roads.
Place delineators perpendicular to the oncoming traffic. At least three delineators should be visible
C
throughout the curve. The color of delineators should be white for both directions of travel.
Curve delineator placement
B
Approx. On-curve Spacing before
C
Operating curve spacing and after curve End of curve
A
Curve delineator placement
Beginning of curve
BC
speed radius (ft) (ft)
Approx. On-curve
(ft)Spacing before
X
(mph) S A B C Endplacement
Curve delineator of curve See
Operating curve spacing and after curve
AB
note 1
S
Beginning of curve
Approx. On-curve
speed radius20 (ft) (ft) 25 Spacing before See
Operating 100
curve spacing 50curve 75
and after 150 End of curve
note 1
X
A
(mph) (ft) S A B(ft) C
S
Beginning of curve
speed radius (ft)
30 250 S 40 80 C 120 240
XS
(mph) (ft) A B
20 100 25 50 75 150
S
S
40 500 65 130 150195 300
S
20 100
30 250 40 80 12025 240 50 75
S
30 250 40 80 120 240
500 50 800 195 80 160 240 300
S
40 65 130 300
S
40 500 65 130 195 300 S
S
50 800 60 5080 1,000
160 24080 90
300 160 180 300270 300
S
800 240 S S
S
60 1,000 6090 180
1,000 27090 300 180 270 300 S
e
S S
S
Notes:
ot
n
22
S S C B A S
e
tee
SS S
Notes: Notes:
Se
oot
1. Prorate distance “x” “x” among all spacings so that the C CB BA AS
nn
1. Prorate distance “x” 1. Proratealldistance
spacings among
so thatallthe
spacings so that the ee
lastamong
delineator
last delineator falls
falls onon
thethe
end end
of the of the curve.
curve. SeS
last delineator falls on the end of the curve.
2. Install
2. Install delineators delineators
2. Install perpendicular
delineators perpendicular
perpendicular to oncoming to oncoming
to oncoming
traffic.
traffic. traffic.
Travel direction
2 to 8 ft Travel direction
from the
Travel dire
2 to 8 ft edge2ofto 8 ft
from the pavement White White
edge of from the
or shoulder diamond diamond
pavement edge of reflector
White reflector
White
or shoulder pavement 48 in diamond diamond
Delineators reflector reflector White
or shoulder U-post diamond
48 in reflector
Delineators U-post
Road surface 48 in
Delineators
Top View
U-post
Road surface Bidirectional delineator
30 in
Top View
Road surface
Bidirectional delineator
30 in
Top View
Notes:
1. Colors (as viewed by driver) on two-way roads, including single- Bidirectional
3. Reflectors may be fasteneddelineator
to posts using rivets or other
lane roads, are white on both sides of the road. 30 in suitable, nonremoveable fasteners.
On one-way roads, colors are white on the right and yellow on the 4. The delineators shall be 4- by 4-inch (silver) crystal on both
Notes: left side of the road. (From the MUTCD, section 3F.03.) sides. Type 3 retroreflective sheeting. The delineator
2. Delineator posts may be galvanized steel U-posts. 1.12 pounds per housing shall be the bidirectional type.
1. Colors (as viewedlinear
by driver) on two-way roads, including single-
foot, 6.5 feet long, or flexible fiberglass posts.
3. Reflectors may be fastened to posts using rivets or other
lane roads, are white on both sides of the road. suitable, nonremoveable fasteners.
On one-way roads, colors are white on the right and yellow on the 4. The delineators shall be 4- by 4-inch (silver) crystal on both
Notes:
left side of the road. (From the MUTCD, section 3F.03.) sides. Type 3 retroreflective sheeting. The delineator
2. Delineator posts may be galvanized steel U-posts. 1.12 pounds per
1. Colors housing shall be the bidirectional type. may be fastened to posts us
Figure(as viewed by driver)
3D-28—Delineator on two-way
placement androads, including
spacing single-
on curves. 3. Reflectors
linear foot, 6.5 feet long, or flexible fiberglass posts.
lane roads, are white on both sides of the road. suitable, nonremoveable fasteners.
On one-way roads, colors are white on the right and yellow on the 4. The delineators shall be 4- by 4-inch (s
left side of the road. (From the MUTCD, section 3F.03.) sides. Type 3 retroreflective sheeting. T
2. Delineator posts may be galvanized steel U-posts. 1.12 pounds per housing shall be the bidirectional type.
linear foot, 6.5 feet long, or flexible fiberglass posts.
November 2012
3D.7 Sign Posts

Posts are used to hold signs in a proper and permanent position and to resist
swaying in the wind.
A sign support can become a deadly hazard when struck by a vehicle; therefore
the MUTCD requires that all sign posts installed within clear zones shall be
breakaway, yielding, or shielded by a barrier or crash cushion. Refer to section
3D.2.3.
Breakaway sign supports will break or bend upon impact. This includes sign
posts that separate from the base and are knocked ahead of or up-and-over
the vehicle. A “yielding” support will bend, allowing the vehicle to run over it. To
avoid undercarriage snagging, no more than a 4-inch substantial stub should
protrude from the ground after a vehicle has hit a sign post.
Do not add supports and braces to sign posts unless crash tested with supports
and braces in place. Extra posts and braces could significantly affect the crash
performance of an otherwise accceptable design
Do not add supports Posts should be installed vertical. Visibility of the sign will diminish if not
vertically straight. Posts may need to be buried deeper than recommended to
and braces to sign reduce vandalism and reduce dislodging by heavy winds or snow thrown by
posts unless crash snow plows. The three most common post types for Forest Service applications
are:
tested with supports
and braces in place.

• Pressure-treated wood.
• Square or round tube steel.
• U-channel steel.
Use wood or steel posts for small signs less than 50 square feet. Small signs
typically will need one or two posts.
Use specially designed steel or aluminum posts for large signs greater than 50
square feet.
Larger signs require multiple supports as shown in figure 3D-29. All supports
within a 7-foot width are considered to be acting together. In these cases,
install no more than the allowable number of posts in a 7-foot width so that the
combined sign and support system will meet breakaway guidelines.
November 2012
73-inch min. to 96-inch max. length 37-inch min. to 72-inch max. length 36-inch max.
1⁄8 3⁄8 3⁄8 1⁄8 1⁄5 3⁄5 1⁄5

Width Width Width Width Width Width Width
Typical Three-Post Detail* Typical Two-Post Detail* Typical Single-Post Detail

(Nonbreakaway installation)
Wood One post Two posts Three posts

*Post spacing applies to both wood and steel posts.
**For sizes of steel posts, refer to section 3D.7.2. Post
Size** Max. Max. sign Max. Max. sign Max. Max. sign
***The maximum width is 36 inches for diamond-shaped signs. width area width area width area
(in) (in) (sq. ft) (in) (sq. ft) (in) (sq. ft)
4 by 4 48*** 10 72 20 96 30
Nonbreakaway sign posts should be installed outside the
clear zone, behind a guardrail, or behind a nontraversable ditch. 4 by 6 48 20 72 50 144 75
6 by 6 48 20 96 95 — —
Figure 3D-29—Typical post spacing and size requirements.
Posts are installed by direct driving, drilling and backfilling, or setting in a concrete foundation. In soft
soils, soil bearing plates, or concrete footings may be needed to hold the sign in a stable position.
Refer to figures 3D-30 and 3D-31 and tables 3D-4 through 3D-6 for detailed information, requirements,
and breakaway/yielding guidelines for these posts. The total installation cost for these post types is not
significantly different. Decisions to use post types should be based on site specific conditions, weather,
soil, vandalism, local availability, and maintenance issues.
November 2012
Cross section Cross section (inches) Cross section

6 by 6
4 by 6
4 by 4
4.5 diameter
Not to exceed See table 3D-4

3.5 feet 3 feet
U-channel rolled Pressure- Square steel tube

mild carbon steel post treated wood post (perforated)
ion 4-inch maximum

ect l
Bolts 4-inch overlap Dir trave Bolt (1 inch
when in concrete of preferred)
Compacted
backfill or concrete
Base Styrofoam Base
(sleeve)
U-Channel Steel Post Pressure-Treated Wood Post Square Steel Tube (Perforated)
The U-channel, rolled, milled, carbon Pressure-treated wood posts of the The square steel tube design with pre-
steel post will bend, break, or pull out of proper size and installation will break off punched holes will break or pull out of
the ground when it is hit. when hit by a vehicle. They should be the ground when hit.
pine, grade 2 or equivalent, and pressure
The post should be driven into the Posts can be driven into the ground. Do
treated.
ground and not encased in concrete. not place concrete around the post.
Drive posts into the ground no more Posts should be buried in firm ground. A broken or damaged post is easier to
than 3.5 feet to make it easier to pull out Minimum recommended direct burial remove if it is not driven or set into the
damaged posts. depth is shown in table 3D-4. ground more than 3 feet.
Splices can be purchased commercially Posts larger than 4 by 4 can be used if Sleeve assemblies like the one shown
to install at ground level (see drawing). the cross section is weakened by drilling in the drawing will increase the safety of
They allow the post to break off on holes as shown in figure 3D-20 (drill a sign when it is hit and make it easier
impact. These devices improve safety perpendicular to roadway). to repair. After the sign has been hit, the
when the post is hit and will make repair broken stub of the post can be removed
A 4.5-inch diameter round post is
easier in concrete. from the base sleeve and a new sign
considered equal to a 4 by 4-inch post
post put back in place.
but it is difficult to keep signs oriented
correctly.
Wrapping the post with a 0.5-inch
sheet of styrofoam before encasing it in
concrete will make replacement easier.
Figure 3D-30—Sign post installation details.
November 2012
3D.7.1 Wood Posts

Follow guidelines in figures 3D-29 through 3D-31 and table 3D-4 for wood posts.
Wood posts that are 4 inches by 4 inches or have a cross-sectional area of 24 square inches or smaller
are considered to meet breakaway standards when installed in normal soil conditions. 4 by 4 posts are
susceptible to breakage in snowplow areas.
Wood posts larger than 4 inches by 4 inches or a cross-sectional area of 24 square inches or greater,
require specific-sized holes be drilled perpendicular to traffic flow in exact locations and the post
installed with the holes properly oriented to the traffic to meet breakaway standards as shown in figure
3D-31.
Direction of travel
Sign post
Di
re
T C ct
L io
n
of
18 in tra
Breakaway
ve
l
holes
Breakaway
holes 18 in
4 in Ground line 4 in
D
D Field drill holes and treat with T = large dimension of

T
perservatives. Refer to table 3D-4 sign post. T dimensions

for hole diameter and burial depth. shown in table 3D-4.
Breakaway holes must

*All posts closer than 7 feet from each other act together.
be perpendicular to
Install no more posts than allowed within 7 feet of each other the direction of vehicle
so the combination of posts meets the breakaway guidelines. travel.
Dimension T is parallel
to the direction of
Breakaway Design Requirements vehicle travel and
D B
is the larger of the
Hole minimum minimum breakaway dimensions.
Post size diameter burial depth distance
(in) (in) (ft) (ft)
After installing the sign
4 by 4 — 3 — post, drill the breakaway
4 by 6 1.5 4 — holes and treat holes
6 by 6 2 4 7 with preservative.
6 by 8 3 4 7
Figure 3D-31—Wood sign post breakaway guidelines.
November 2012
Table 3D-4—Pressure-treated wood post

Minimum Diameter Number of Suggested
Post burial of posts in maximum
specifics depth holes* 7-foot sign size
(inches) (feet) (inches) width* (square feet)
10 (48-inch max.
width)
3 N/A 1
36-inch width
for diamond sign
4 by 4 –
direct burial 20 (72-inch max.
3 N/A 2
width)
30 (96-inch max.
3 N/A 3**
width)
4 by 6 – 20 (40-inch max.
4 1 ½ 1
direct burial width)
Note: put 6-inch 50 (72-inch max.
4 1 ½ 2
dimension parallel width)
to traffic direction 75 (96-inch max.
4 NA 3**
width)
20 (48-inch max.
4 2 1
6 by 6 – width)
direct burial 95 (96-inch max.
4 NA 2**
width)
6 by 8 Larger signs in
4 3 1
direct burial high wind area
Note: put 8-inch Larger signs in
dimension parallel 4 NA 2** high wind
to traffic direction area

* Breakaway details—See figure 3D-31 for breakaway hole placement
information.
**Does NOT meet breakaway standards. Sign must be behind barriers or out of
clear zone.
November 2012
3D.7.2 Square or Round Tube Steel Posts

Follow guidelines in figures 3D-29 and 30, and table 3D-5 for square or round
tube steel posts.
Square tube steel posts are considered breakaway if they are 2¼ inches or less
in size. For larger posts, use sleeve assemblies or slip couplings for the base to
make it breakaway or yielding. This also will make it easier to repair if the post is
damaged. Refer to figure 3D-30. The post should be driven into the ground and
not encased in concrete. A broken or damaged post is easier to remove if it is
not driven or set into the ground more than 3 feet.
Table 3D-5—Square steel tubing (perforated)

Burial Number of Suggested
Post
(feet posts in maximum sign
specifications
depth) 7-foot width* width (inches)
1.75–12 gauge 1 30
with 3 2 72
sleeve 3 96
2.0–12 or 14 gauge 1 36
3
with sleeve 2 72
2.25–12 or 14 gauge
3 1 42
with sleeve
2.5–10 gauge 1 48
3
with sleeve 2 72
2.5–10 gauge with

sleeve and triangular 3 3 96
slip base
*See figure 3D-29.

Follow manufacturer’s specific use, sleeve, anchor, hardware, and installation
requirements.
November 2012
3D.7.3 U-Channel Steel Post

Follow guidelines in figures 3D-29 and 30, and table 3D-6 for U-Channel steel
posts.
U-channel posts of rerolled rail steel weighing 3 pounds-per-foot or less, and

installed in normal soil, are considered to be breakaway since it will bend, break,
or pull out of the ground when it is hit. For heavier posts, either purchase splices
to install the post at ground level or set a stub post of the same material in a
concrete base with a 4-inch length available to bolt to the sign post as a base
connection. Refer to figure 3D-30.
Splicing of U-channel posts is not recommended unless tested because the

impact performance of a spliced post cannot be accurately predicted.
The post should be driven into the ground and not encased in concrete. A
broken or damaged post is easier to remove if it is not driven or set into the
ground more than 3½ feet.
Table 3D-6—U-channel steel post (milled carbon steel)

Post specifications Maximum Number of Suggested
(pounds per foot) burial depth) posts in maximum sign
(feet 7-foot width* size (sq ft)
1 3 (18-inch max.
2 – direct burial 3 ½ width)
2 9 (36-inch max.
width)
2 – direct burial 3 ½ 3 14 (72-inch max.

with splice width)
1 4 (24-inch max.
width)
3 – direct burial 3 ½ 2 16 (72-inch max.

with splice width)
3 24 (72-inch max.
width)
1 6 (30-inch max.
4 – direct burial width)
3½
with splice 2 20 (72-inch max.
width)
*See figure 3D-29.
Follow manufacturer’s specific use, splice, hardware, and installation

requirements.
November 2012
3D.7.4 Hardware
Basic hardware used to erect signs consists of bolts, washers, clamps, fittings,
and brackets. All hardware used to attach signs to wood or metal posts should
be aluminum or galvanized metal.
Use brackets for multiple signs on the same post, large signs, or where wind
conditions or the presence of animals necessitate stronger attachment to the
post.
Signs should be attached to posts in a manner that the hardware does not
interfere with the legibility of the message.
After a sign is installed, snip the ends of the bolts off and upset or fracture
the threads to prevent removal of the nuts by vandals or thieves. Several
manufacturers produce vandal-resistant hardware that helps protect sign
installations from unauthorized removal.
3D.7.5 Graffiti Film

Consider applying clear overlay (graffiti film) on the entire surface. This protects
the sign face and retroreflective sheeting from peeling and other weather
damage, and makes it easier to clean graffiti, paint, and other materials from the
sign face.
November 2012
3D.8 Installation Date and Vandal Warning Labels

Attach installation-date labels (P64-10) to the back of all signs at the time of
installation. If units are complying with Method D–Blanket Replacement method
for periodic replacing signs on a 12-year cycle, it is critical that signs have the
installation-date decals installed. Refer to chapter 3, section 3.3.2.
Vandal-warning labels may be used as needed (P64-11 black on clear, P64-11a

white on clear). Place vandal warning labels on the back of STOP or YIELD
signs, but on the front of all other signs. Route markers typically are too small to
have vandal decals on the front of the sign.
Labels are attached to the corner of the sign closest to the road to make it
easier to read.
These decals and the locations for applying them are shown in figure 3D-32 and
3D-33.
Both decals may be obtained from Unicor. Refer to chapter 15.
Sign installation
date decal
2 0 0 1 2
1 YEAR 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
INSTALLATION
7 7
DATE
8 8
9 MONTH 9
Typical placement of the decal
10 11 12 0
on the back of the sign.
Guide signs Regulatory signs Warning signs
Figure 3D-32—Installation-date decal.
November 2012
Vandal warning
decal
THE WILLFUL DEFACING OR
REMOVAL OF FOREST SERVICE
NOTICES SUBJECT TO CRIMINAL
PROSECUTION WHICH MAY
RESULT IN A FINE AND/OR
IMPRISONMENT
1 USC S. 1 1
$10,000 FINE AND/OR 10 YEARS
Typical placement on the front of the sign.
ONE
ACCESS WAY
Antelope Lake
Ant
Guide sign— Regulatory sign— Warning sign—
decal has white legend on decal has black decal has black
transparent film legend on legend on
transparent film transparent film
Figure 3D-33—Vandal-warning decal.
3D.9 Other References

Sign Installation Guide, 1071-2812D MTDC March 2010
A Guide to Small Sign Support Hardware, AASHTO GSSSH-1, 1998.
Sign Posts and Supports, C14.1, Center for Transportation Research Excellence, Iowa,
2001. http://ctre.iastate.edu/pubs/itcd/signposts.pdf
Chapter 3E Traffic Control Devices Sign Drawings
3E.1 Regulatory Signs.................................................................................................1
3E.2 Warning Signs......................................................................................................8
3E.3 Forest Route Markers........................................................................................18
3E.4 Forest Road Destination Sign (FRD)...............................................................21
3E.5 Site Approach Signs..........................................................................................23
3E.6A Auxiliary Route Markers.................................................................................26
3E.6B Directional Arrow Auxillary Signs.................................................................27
3E.7 Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbols..........................................28
3E.8 Scenic Byway Marker (SBM)............................................................................29
3E.9 Reference Location Signs.................................................................................31
3E.10 Type D Arrow Layout......................................................................................32
3E.11 Miscellaneous Information Signs...................................................................33
3E.12 Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs...............................34

August 2013
3E.1 Regulatory Signs
Text layout—Selective exclusion sign (FR5-11a)
AUTHORIZED
H TRAFFIC C
ONLY A
B
L
FR5-11a
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
number L H A B C case) Border Inset
FR5-11a 30 24 3 2 10 16 2 4D s a
Notes
Center text on vertical centerline.
Text—ASA series as noted.
Colors
Legend and border are black.
Background is retroreflective white.
References
For sign guidelines, see chapter 3A.
For manufacturing specifications, see chapters 14 and 14A.
S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 3E-1
November 2012
Text layout—Regulatory sign (FR5-11b)
HIGHWAY
H LEGAL
VEHICLES
ONLY A
B C D
L
FR5-11b
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border

number L H A B C D case) Border Inset
18 24 3 8 13 18 3E s a
FR5-11b
24 30 4 10 16 22 4D s a
Notes
Center text and mounting holes on vertical centerline.
Colors
Legend and border are black
References
3E-2 Si gn and P os t er G ui deli nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
Text layout—Travel management sign (FR5-12a and FR5-12b)

RESTRICTION AREA
H
STAY ON ROUTES DESIGNATED C
D
E
ON MOTOR VEHICLE USE MAP A

B
L
FR5-12a

H RESTRICTION AREA
D
STAY ON DESIGNATED ROUTES A
B
C
L
FR5-12b
Dimensions (inches)
Border
Text and
Sign (upper seperation Border

number L H A B C D E case) line Inset
60 24 2 2 7 2 12* 13 2 18 2 3D a a
FR5-12a
96 42 4 13 21* 24 33 5C s 2
60 18 2 6 2* 8 13 — 3D a a
FR5-12b
96 30 3 11* 14 22 — 5C s 2
Notes
* Center of horizontal line.
Colors
Legend and border are black
References
For sign guidelines, see chapters 3A and 6.
November 2012
Text layout—Regulatory sign (FR11-4a)
ROAD CLOSED
H
TO C
PUBLIC USE A
B
L
FR11-4a
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
FR11-4a 60 30 4 12 2 21 6C w 2
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Regulatory sign (FR11-4b)
D
ROAD CLOSED
E
TO PUBLIC USE C
H
F
7AM-5PM MON-FRI A
B
L
FR11-4b
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper case) Border
number L H A B C D E F* Border Inset
FR11-4b 60 30 4 4 11 2 19 w 6C 5C 4C w 2
* Text size may need to be reduced to accomodate message.
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Regulatory signs (FR11-4c and FR17-1)
COMMERCIAL USE
H PROHIBITED
C
WITHOUT PERMIT B
A
L
FR11-4c
CERTIFIED WEED-FREE
H STRAW AND FEED REQUIRED
C
ON FEDERAL LANDS B
A
L
FR17-1
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
number L H A B C case) Border inset
36 18 3 9 w 16 2 4C 2 a
FR11-4c
60 30 4 12 2 21 6C w 2
48 18 3 9 w 16 2 3C 2 a
FR17-1
84 30 4 12 2 21 6B w 2
FR13-1
Notes
COMMERCIAL USE
Last line on FR17-1 may be modified to reflect appropriate jurisdiction such as:
ON NATIONAL FOREST LANDS or ON PUBLIC LANDS.
PROHIBITED WEEKENDS
HCenter text on vertical centerline.
E
Colors AND HOLIDAYS C
D
L white.
Background is retroreflective
References
November 2012
Text layout—Regulatory sign (FR13-1a)
VEHICLES WITH
H WATERCRAFT
MUST ENTER C
D
CHECK STATION A
B
L
FR13-1a
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
number L H A B C D case) Border inset
42 30 3 9 w 16 2 23 4 4C 2 a
FR13-1a
60 48 4 12 2 21 29 2 6C w 2
Notes
Second line on FR13-1a may be modified to reflect appropriate vehicle type or
forest product such as: GAME ANIMALS, FIREWOOD.
Colors
References
For sign guidelines, see chapters 3A and 3C.
August 2013
3E.2 Warning Signs
Text layout—Warning sign (FW8-18d) (one line)
CL
FORD A
CL
FW8-18d
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper case) Border
number L A Border Inset
24 6D s 2
FW8-18d 30 8D w s
36 10D d w
Notes
Center text on panel.
Colors
Background is retroreflective yellow.
References
For sign guidelines, see chapter 3B.
August 2013
Text layout—Warning sign (FW8-3b, FW8-8a, FW8-14a, FW8-18c) (two line)
GRAVEL BROKEN FALLEN STREAM

SECTIONS PAVEMENT TREES CROSSING
L
FW8-3b FW8-8a FW8-14a FW8-18c
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
number Message L case) Spacing Border Inset
24 4C 2 2 s a
GRAVEL
FW8-3b SECTIONS 30 5C 3 w 2
36 6C 3 2 d s
24 4C 2 2 s a
BROKEN
FW8-8a PAVEMENT 30 5C 3 w 2
36 6C 3 2 d s
FALLEN 24 4D 3 s a
FW8-14a
TREES
30 5D 3 s w 2
24 4C 2 2 s a
STREAM
FW8-18c 30 5C 3 w 2
CROSSING
36 6C 3 2 d s
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Warning sign (FW3-4a, FW3-5a, FW3-6a) (three-line with distances)
ROAD GATE CATTLE

CLOSED CLOSED GUARD
* L * *
FW3-4a FW3-5a FW3-6a
* AHEAD, XX FEET, XX MILES
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
ROAD
30 4D 2 2 w 2
CLOSED
FW3-4a AHEAD
(XX FT or 36 5D 3 w d s
XX MILES)
GATE
30 4D 2 2 w 2
CLOSED
FW3-5a AHEAD
(XX FT or 36 5D 3 w d s
XX MILES)
CATTLE
30 4C 2 2 w 2
GUARD
FW3-6a AHEAD
(XX FT or 36 5C 3 d s
XX MILES)
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Warning sign (FW5-1a, FW5-1b, FW5-1c, and FW5-1d) (three line)
FW5-1a FW5-1b FW5-1c FW5-1d
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
ONE 30 5D 2 2 w 2
FW5-1a LANE
ROAD 36 6D 3 d s
ROUGH 30 4D 2 2 w 2
FW5-1b NARROW
ROAD 36 5D 3 d s
STEEP 30 5D 3 w 2
FW5-1c NARROW
ROAD 36 6D 3 2 d s
NARROW 30 4C 2 2 w 2
FW5-1d WINDING
ROAD 36 5C 3 d s
Notes
Center each line of text on vertical centerline.
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Warning sign (FW8-14b, FW8-18a, FW14-1a) (three line)
FW8-14b FW8-18a FW14-1a
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
24 4D 2 s a
FALLEN
FW8-14b ROCK AND 30 5D 2 2 w 2
DEBRIS 36 6D 3 d s
FLASH 24 4D 2 s a
FW8-18a FLOOD 30 5D 2 2 w 2
AREA
36 6D 3 d s
NO 24 3D 2 s a
FW14-1a TURNAROUND
AHEAD 30 4C 3 w 2
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Warning sign (FW8-7 and FW11-6a)
E E E
L
D
B
H
SHARE THE ROAD C

C
NEXT 1 MILE B
L
A
L
FW8-7 FW11-6a
Dimensions (inches)
D Text
Sign symbol (upper Border
number L H A B C size E case) Border Inset
48 36 3 9 15 18 4 4D s 2
FW8-7 60 48 4 12 20 24 4 5D s 2
72 54 5 15 25 24 4 6D s 2
24 NA NA 7 a 4 w NA 17 w NA s a
FW11-6a*
30 NA NA 9 4 5 d NA 20 8 NA ¾ 2
Notes
*Center symbol on vertical centerline.
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Warning sign (FW5-1e and FW8-18b)
NOT SUITABLE FOR NOT MAINTAINED

H PASSENGER CARS C
H FOR C
XX MILES AHEAD A
B WINTER TRAVEL A
B
L L
FW5-1e FW5-1f
IMPASSABLE
H DURING C
HIGH WATER A
B
L
FW8-18b
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
36* 18 3 7 w 12 2 3E 2 a
FW5-1e
60* 30 4 12 2 21 5D s 2
FW5-1f 36 24 3 2 10 16 2 4C a 4
FW8-18b 36 24 3 2 10 16 2 4D s 2
Notes
* Length of FW5-1e may vary depending on message.
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—BAER Warning sign (FW8-14c)
FALLEN ROCK AND DEBRIS

H
FLASH FLOOD AREA
C
NEXT XX MILES B
A
L
FW8-14c
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
66 24 3 2 10 16 2 4C s 2
FW8-14c
80 30 4 12 2 21 5C s 2
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—BAER Warning sign (FW8-14d)
ENTERING
H
BURNED AREA
STAY ON CD E
ROADS AND TRAILS A
B
L
FW8-14d
Dimensions (inches)
Text Border and
Sign (upper separation
Border
number L H A B C* D E case) line Inset
48 30 3 9 2 15 12 2 23 4C s 2
FW8-14d
60 42 4 13 21 24 33 5C s 2
Notes
* Center of horizontal line.
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Barricade markers (FBM, FBM1) and Object marker (FOM2-2V)
45° angle
A A
H
FBM-R
45° angle
A A H
FBM1-L
Dimensions (inches
L Sign
number L H A B C
FBM 36 12 6 NA NA
A
(L and R) 24 8 4 NA NA
B
FBM1
H 12 6 3 NA NA
(L and R)
FOM2-2V 3 18 4 3 40 to 54
Notes
*48 inches recommended
C
For FBM1 (L and R)—Flexible plastic polyethylene or polycarbonate.
See chapter 14, section 14.6.
Colors
ground FBM/FBM1—Alternating retroreflective red and white stripes.
FOM2-2V—Alternating retroreflective yellow and black stripes.
FOM2-2V References
For manufacturring specifications, see chapters 14 and 14A.
November 2012
3E.3 Forest Route Markers
Text layout—Distinctive route marker (M1-7)
H D
D
A
M1-7
Dimensions (inches)
M series arrow Road

Sign plaque to use speed
number L H below sign A B C D E F Border (mph)
M1-7-18 18 18
* 12 w 2 s 6D 1 8 4 1 s 2 Up to 45
M1-7-24 24 24 17 3 2 8D 1 w 5 2 4 2
* 50+
Notes
*See section 3E.6B for arrow plaque.
Colors
Fully retroreflective: White legend on brown background.
References
For sign guidelines, see chapter 3C.
November 2012
Text layout—Horizontal route marker (FM1-7H)
L
L/2 Up to 4 characters
2 14 2 14 2 14
H
33N34A B
5 or 6 characters
3134-A 22N44
FM1-7H A
Dimensions (inches)
Text Traffic
Number of (upper speed
Sign number characters L H A B Border case) (mph)
FM1-7H-16 Up to 4 16 8 2 6 2 2 4D 0 to 25
FM1-7H-21 5 or 6 21 8 2 6 2 2 4D 0 to 25
FM1-7H-20 Up to 4 20 10 2 2 8 2 2 5D 30 to 45
FM1-7H-28 5 or 6 28 10 2 2 8 2 2 5D 30 to 45
FM1-7H-26 Up to 4 26 12 3 10 2 s 6D 50+
FM1-7H-36 5 or 6 36 12 3 10 2 s 6D 50+
Notes
*Arrow on route marker is same size as text and counts as one character.
When separate plaques are used for arrows, see section 3E.6B.
Specify arrow direction.
Colors
Fully retroreflective: White legend on brown background.
References
October 2013
Text layout—Vertical route marker (FM1-7V) —to be used on ML1 and ML2 roads.
2 3 1
2 2
N
S
0
2
4
E
0000 L
B 2 4
5
4
D
000
05
22N E
N A
Y
4 4
H
10 **
05
H
5 5 **
**
B A D
A D
5 Y C
B
Y C
B
R 1 2 3
A A
(Optional) (Optional) FM1-7v Examples
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H A B C D E R Border
FM1-7V 6 *variable 1 1 2 3E 2 2C 1 2 2
Notes
All mounting holes are a-inch diameter.
* Height is dependant on number of characters.
** 36-inch minimum to lowest number, letter or symbol.
Colors
Fully retroreflective white legend on brown background. See example 1 above.
Routed text on wood post. See example 2 above.
Retroreflective white text on brown flexible post. See example 3 above.
References
August 2013
3E.4 Forest Road Destination Sign (FRD)

Text layout—Forest road destination sign (FRD)
B E F B
C
Haysville 1 0
C
Murphy 20
A
Big Flat 22
D F G
Design guidelines listed below shall be consistent on each individual sign or each group of signs
manufactured from this guide.
A Edge of panel to top and bottom of text–w of the capital letter height.
B Edge of panel to beginning and end of lines–w of the capital letter height.
C Between lines–w of the capital letter height.
D Between words–w to the whole height of a capital letter.
E Between words and arrows–1 to 12 the height of a capital letter.
F Between words and mileage–minimum 1 to 12 the height of a capital letter.
G Between mileage and arrows–1 to 12 the height of a capital letter.
Requirements for spacing between letters shall conform to the Standard Alphabets for Traffic Control
Devices in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” book.
Note: Spacing may be reduced 25 percent on C and D Series text, 3 inches and smaller when
necessary to fit the message on the sign. Increasing spacing to 125 percent makes signs easier to read.
Border standard
Borders should be of similar proportions but should not exceed the stroke width of the major lettering on
the sign.
Dimensions (inches) Colors

Fully retroreflective: White legend and
Upper Lower Minimum border border on brown background.
case case and Text is ASA series as noted.
letters and numbers letters separation line
Numbering System
3C 2 4C 2
FRD-X-Y X = number of lines
4C 3C 2 Y = size of upper case letters
References
5D 3 wD s For sign guidelines, see chapter 3C.
For arrow (typical), see section 3E.10.
6D 4 2D w For manufacturring specifications, see
chapters 14 and 14A.
November 2012
Text layout—Forest road destination sign with separation line (FRD)
B E D F B
C
Watkins Gulch 17
H
Grizzly Springs 6
H
Weaverville Camp 9
I
Jct Hwy 3
L I F O R NI A
CA
A
15
F G
Design guidelines listed below shall be consistent on each individual sign or
each group of signs manufactured from this guide.
A-G See page 3E-21.
H Between text and center of separation line–2 to w of the capital letter height.
I Between lines and route shields–14 to 12 the capital letter height.
Requirements for spacing between letters shall conform to the Standard
Alphabets for Traffic Control Devices in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs”
book.
Note: Spacing may be reduced 25 percent on C and D Series text, 3 inches and
smaller when necessary to fit the message on the sign. Increasing spacing to
125 percent makes signs easier to read.
Border and separation-line standard
Borders and separation lines should be of similar proportions but should not
exceed the stroke width of the major lettering on the sign. See dimensions on
page 3E-21.
Route Symbol
Other agencies route signs may be incorporated as part of a directional sign.
When possible, use the same shape and colors used by the agency. Examples
of agency route signs are found in the MUTCD, section 2D-10. If colored route
signs of appropriate size are not available, a brown on white version in the
same shape may be used.
Colors
Fully retroreflective: White legend and border on brown background.
References
For arrow (typical), see section 3E.10.
November 2012
3E.5 Site Approach Signs

Text layout—Site approach with symbol (SA)
L
NF Logotype
Symbol*
H
E
DC Crystal Facility name

B
A
Mountain or legend
Dimensions (inches) two-line facility name or legend
Facility name NF Road

Sign or legend Symbol Logo speed
number L H A B C D E Border (title case) * type (mph)
SA-1a 38 40 3 8 w 15 17 2 33 w 4C 12 4 0 to 45
SA-2b 48 52 4 11 2 19 2 24 43 1 5C 15 5 50+
H
D
C
B 500 FT. 1/4
A
Dimensions (inches) one-line facility name or legend
Facility name NF Road

Sign or legend Symbol
Logo speed

number L H A B C D Border (upper case) * type (mph)
SA-1c 38 40 4 11 2 15 w 33 w 4D 12 4 0 to 45
SA-2d 48 52 7 16 2 22 43 1 5D 15 5 50+
Notes * Symbol size specifications are average. Some symbols

Specify symbol, distance, message, or arrow may need to be proportioned in size to fit sign. Use only one
direction (left or right only). symbol per sign.
Text is ASA series as noted. Fully Retroreflective Colors
Arrows and arrow plaques: Arrows on the sign with Top–White legend on brown background.
the legend are one size larger than the text. Arrows Bottom–Brown on white background.
alone on the sign are extended to within 1-letter
height of sign edge. When separate plaques are References
used for arrows, see section 3E.6B. For sign guidelines, see chapter 3C.
For horizontal text placement, see section 3E.4.
November 2012
Text layout—Site approach with two-line facility type (SA)
NF Logotype
RANGER Facility type or legend

H
F
STATION
E
DC Crystal Facility name
B
A
Mountain or legend
Dimensions (inches) Two-line facility name or legend
Facility Facility name NF Road

Sign type or legend Logo speed
number L H A B C D E F Border (upper case) (title case) type (mph)
SA-1e 38 40 2 2 8 14 17 24 2 33 w 5C 4C 4 0 to 45
SA-2f 48 52 3 2 10 2 18 22 2
32
43
1 7C 5C 5 50+
VISITOR VISTA VISTA

E CENTER H POINT POINT
D
C
B Soda Lake 1 /4
A
Dimensions (inches) One-line facility name or legend

number L H A B C D E Border (upper case) (title case) type (mph)
SA-1g 38 40 4 11 2 16 23 2 33 w 5C 4C 4 0 to 45
SA-2h 48 52 7 16 2 22 31 2 43 1 7C 5C 5 50+
Notes Fully Retroreflective Colors

Specify symbol, distance, message, or arrow direction Top–White legend on brown background.
(left or right only). Bottom–Brown on white background.
Text is ASA series as noted.
References
Arrows and arrow plaques: Arrows on the sign with
the legend are one size larger than the text. Arrows
For manufacturring specifications, see chapters 14
alone on the sign are extended to within 1-letter
and 14A.
height of sign edge. When separate plaques are used
for arrows, see section 3E.6B.
November 2012
Text layout—Site approach with one-line facility type (SA)
L L
NF Logotype
ACCESS ACCESS
ACCESS
Facility type ACCESS
ACCESS ACCESS
H H
E E
D
C
East Fork D
C
East
EastFork
Facility Fork
name
East Fork
Basin Basin
B Creek B or Creek
Cr.
legend Cr.
Lake Lake
A A
Dimensions (inches) Two-line facility name or legend

number L H A B C D E Border (upper case) (upper case) type (mph)
SA-1i 38 40 3 8 w 15 22 2 33 w 5D 4C 4 0 to 45
SA-2j 48 52 4 11 2 19 2 28 43 1 7C 5C 5 50+
D
LOOKOUT H TRAILHEAD TRAILHEAD
C
B Jump Off 1/4
A
Dimensions (inches) One-line facility name or legend

number L H A B C D Border (upper case) (title case) type (mph)
SA-1k 38 40 4 11 2 19 2 33 w 5D 4C 4 0 to 45
SA-2l 48 52 7 18 2 27 43 1 7C 5C 5 50+

Specify symbol, distance, message, or arrow direction Top–White legend on brown background.
(left or right only). Bottom–Brown on white background.
References
Arrows and arrow plaques: Arrows on the sign with the
legend are one size larger than the text. Arrows alone
For manufacturring specifications, see chapters
on the sign are extended to within 1-letter height of sign
14 and 14A.
edge. When separate plaques are used for arrows, see
section 3E.6B.
November 2012
3E.6A Auxiliary Route Markers

Text layout—Auxiliary route markers (FM2, FM3, and FM4)
R
typical
L
H
JCT TO END
FM2-1 C D FM4-5 FM4-6
Dimensions (inches)
Sign Border Text
number L H C D R (upper case)
FM2-1, FM4-5, FM4-6 12 8 2 2 1 2 4C
R
typical
L
NORTH SOUTH
H
NORTH FM3-1
EAST
FM3-3
WEST
FM3-1 C D FM3-2 FM3-4
Dimensions (inches)
Sign Border Text
number L H C D R (upper case)
FM3-1, FM3-2, 18 8 2 2 1 2 4C
FM3-3, FM3-4
Notes
Text—ASA series upper case as noted.
Colors
References
November 2012
3E.6B Directional Arrow Auxillary Signs

Directional arrow auxillary signs (M5 and M6)
M5-1L (shown) M5-2L (shown) M6-1L (shown) M6-2L (shown)

M5-1R M5-2R M6-1R M6-2R
M6-3 M6-4 M6-6L (shown) M6-7L (shown)

M6-6R M6-7R
Dimensions (inches)
W
hen separate plaques are used
Directional arrow
auxiliary sign Distinctive Horizontal Site
Sign Recreation route route approach
number L H symbol marker marker sign
12 9 12 NA NA NA
16 12 18 M1-7-18 FM1-7H-16 NA
M5 & M6
FM1-7H-21
21 15 24 and 36 M1-7-24 through SA1 and SA2
FM1-7H-36
Colors
Fully retroreflective: White arrow and border on brown background.
References
See “Standard Highway Signs” book.
December 2013
3E.7 Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbols

Layout—Recreational and cultural interest area symbols
A
R
D
B C B
L PROHIBITION
RS-095
Dimensions (inches)
L H A B C R D
24 24 2 2 20 1 2 2
18 18 2 1 2 15 1 2 1 2
12** 12** a 1 10 w 1
Non-road 9 9 a w 7 2 w w
applications
6 6 4 2 5 a 2
Notes
Symbols may be reversed to show a mirror image if that better reflects direction of the activity or area.
Match the direction of the symbol and arrow.
For prohibitive applications the symbol shall be scaled proportionately to fit completely within the circle
and the diagonal slash shall be oriented from the upper left to the lower right portions of the circle.
Colors
Fully retroreflective*—White legend and border on brown background.
Green or blue background colors may be used to better fit in some situations, such as the RS-200
Recycling and D9-6 Handicapped symbols.
For prohibition applications—Black legend and border on retroreflective* white background with
retroreflective* red prohibition symbol.
* Retroreflectivity is required for all road applications. Refer to chapter 5 for retroreflectivity requirements
for trails.
** A 12” symbol is allowed on a low volume road with prudent operator speeds <15 mph.
References
For sign guidelines, see chapters 3C and 7.
November 2012
3E.8 Scenic Byway Marker (SBM)
Text layout—Scenic Byway marker (SBM)
C
R
White retroreflective
H1 5135C—Light plum
H
330C—Teal
AB
Scenic Byway 5493C—Light blue gray
L1
L
SBM
Dimensions (inches)
Scenic Road
Sign Byway Speed

Number L H A B C Border R logo Text (mph)
L1
H1
SBM-1 18 18 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 16 13 1 sC 0-25
SBM-2 24 24 1 w 5 2 s 1 2 20 16 4 2 4C 30-45
SBM-3 30 30 2 6 3 s 1 d 24 19 2 2 wC 50+
Notes
Colors
All colors are solid Pantone Matching System (PMS) transparent ink.
Text, border, and road centerline are PMS-330C—Teal
Background is white retroreflective.
References
November 2012
Text layout—Scenic Byway Identification sign (SB) and nameplate (SBa)
F
R
White retroreflective
H
5135C—Light plum E
H1 D
C
330C—Teal
F AB
5493C—Light blue gray Scenic Byway R
L1
L
White retroreflective SB
Dimensions (inches) H
5135C—Light plum E
H1 D
NF Scenic C Road
Sign
330C—Teal FS Logo
Byway Speed

Number L H A B C D E F Border R Shield
type logo
A BText (mph)
R 5493C—Light blue gray
L1
H1
Scenic Byway
A L1
SB-1 24 30 1 w 4 2 22 4 25 w 28 2 s 1 2 6 2 4 L
20 16 4 2 4 C 0-15
H Beartooth
SB-2 30 36 2 2 6 27 4 31 4 34 3 s 1 d 8 2 w 24 19 2 2 w C 20-25
Highway A
SB-3 36 48 3 2 9 36 41 2 45 3 w 1 4 10 3 2 30 24 a 3 2 C 30-45
L 48 60 4 10 45 51 2
SB-4 56 4 1 3 12 4 2 40 32 2 4 2 C 50+
R Dimensions (inches)
A
Text Road
H Beartooth Sign L H A Border R (title speed
Highway A
number (min) case) (mph)
SBa-1 24 12 2 s 1 2 3C 0-15
L
SBa-2 30 16 2 2 s 1 d 4C 20-25
SBa-3 36 20 3 w 2 4 5D 30-45
SBa-4 48 22 3 2 1 3 6D 50+
Notes
Colors References
All colors are solid Pantone Matching System (PMS) transparent ink. For sign guidelines, see chapter 3C.
Text, border, shield, and road centerline are PMS-330C—Teal For manufacturring specifications,
Text—ASA series as noted. see chapters 14 and 14A.
Background is white retroreflective.
SBa length and height may be adjusted to accommodate longer
names.
November 2012
3E.9 Reference Location Signs

Text layout—Reference location signs (FD10) for low volume roads only
L
MILE E
4
B
L MILE E
C
D
4 4
H
B
MILE
H D D
E
C C
4 4
H C
4 A
D
B
A
D
B
A
D
R = 12
FD10-1 FD10-2 FD10-3
Dimensions (inches)
Number
Sign Number Mile of
number L H A B C D E R Border characters
FD10-1 6 12 1 2 1 4 4D 2 wB 1 2
a 1
FD10-2 6 18 1 2 4 1 4 4D 2 wB 1 2
a 2
FD10-3 6 24 1 2 w 1 4 4D 2 wB 1 2
a 3
Notes
All mounting holes are 3/8-inch diameter.
Text—ASA series as noted
Colors
Fully retroreflective: White legend and border on green background for roads.
Fully retroreflective: White legend and border on brown background for trails.
References
For intermediate distances, see MUTCD, section 2H.05.
August 2013
3E.10 Type D Arrow Layout
L
C
A CL H
D
R
Dimensions (inches)
Upper case
Arrow text size to use
number L* H A B C D R this arrow with
AR-3 4 3 1 8 1 c 2 4 4 x 3
AR-4 5 4 1 2 1 n 3 c c 4
AR-5 6 5 1 d 2 8 3 w v a 5
AR-6 7 6 2 4 2 b 4 2 2 v 6
Notes
* L is the minimum functional length.
The arrow shaft can be lengthened for added emphasis on the direction of
movement and/or for optical balance of the sign.
Do not extend the arrow shaft for the entire length of the legend.
Typically, the arrow shaft may be extended up to 2 the length of the legend. In
some cases, the arrow shaft may be extended up to q the length. Refer to SA
signs chapter 4B, FG 21 series signs for examples.
The arrow height (H) may be increased one size larger to avoid sign clutter
associated with multiple destinations in the same direction. Refer to chapter 3C,
section 3C.4.4.
November 2012
3E.11 Miscellaneous Information Signs
Text layout—Slow rising flood awareness road signs (FLD1 and FLD2)
RECREATION THIS AREA

H AREA MAY C
H SUBJECT TO C
FLOOD A
B FLOODING A
B
L L
FLD1 FLD2
Dimensions (inches)
Text
Sign (upper Border
FLD1/FLD2 36 24 3 2 10 16 2 4D s 2
Notes
Text—ASA series as noted
Colors
References
For sign guidelines, see chapter 7, section 7.7.1c.2.
For manufacturing specifications, see chapter 14 and 14A.
August 2013
3E.12 Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol signs
General Applications
2009 MUTCD Symbols
RS-002 RS-005 RS-006 RS-007 RS-009 RS-011

No Smoking* Tunnel Lookout Tower Lighthouse Dam Deer Viewing Area
RS-012 RS-017 RS-031 RS-036 RS-042 RS-090

Bear Viewing Area Pets on Leash Bus Stop Viewing Area No Campfires* Fire Extinguisher
RS-102 RS-003 RS-115 RS-140 RS-141 RS-142

Snack Bar No Radios* Sea Plane Pick-up Trucks Nature Study Area Cultural Interest Area
RS-200
Recycling
* Educational plaque optional

Notes
See section 3E.7 for typical symbol layout and colors.
Symbols with green or blue background colors may be changed to brown.
such as RS-200 Recycling and D9-6 Handicapped symbols.
For prohibition applications use black legend and border on white background
with red prohibition symbol.
Symbols shown are the most common for Forest Service applications, but
additional symbols can be found in the MUTCD.
Older symbol styles (2003 and 2005) may be used until current supply is
depleted. Refer to “Reference for 2003 and 2009 MUTCD Symbols comparison”
on the EM7100-15 web site for a comparison of old and new symbols.
August 2013
Accommodations
2009 MUTCD Symbols
NA NA
NA NA NA NA
Notes
August 2013
Services
2009 MUTCD Symbols
NA NA NA NA NA
Notes
August 2013
Land Recreation
2009 MUTCD Symbols
NA NA NA NA
Notes
August 2013
Water Recreation
2009 MUTCD Symbols
NA NA NA
RS-147
No Boat Motor *
NA NA NA NA NA

Notes
Green or blue background colors may be used to better fit in some situations, such as RS-200 Recycling and D9-6
Handicapped symbols.
For prohibition applications use black legend and border on white background with red prohibition symbol.
Symbols shown are the most common for Forest Service applications, but additional symbols can be found in the
MUTCD.
Older symbol styles (2003 and 2005) may be used until current supply is depleted. Refer to “Reference for 2003
and 2009 MUTCD Symbols comparison” on the EM7100-15 web site for a comparison of old and new symbols.
August 2013
Winter Recreation
2009 MUTCD Symbols
NA
*

Notes
August 2013
NFS Symbols
These symbols were in the 2003 MUTCD but are not in the 2009 MUTCD. Use is approved for NFS
roads and facilities only.
2003 MUTCD Symbols
RG-080
No Firearms
* *
RG-240 RL-040
No Dogs No Hunting
These symbols are unique to the NFS and have been approved for NFS roads and facilities only.
The following are new symbols
EXIT
* * *
FS-RS-001 FS-RS-080 FS-RS-117 FS-RS-139
Whitewater Rafting Shooting Range Bus Access
Notes
Green or blue background colors may be used to better fit in some situations, such as RS-200 Recycling and
D9-6 Handicapped symbols.
For prohibition applications use black legend and border on white background with red prohibition symbol.
Symbols shown are the most common for Forest Service applications, but additional symbols can be found in
the MUTCD.
Older symbol styles (2003 and 2005) may be used until current supply is depleted. Refer to “Reference for
2003 and 2009 MUTCD Symbols comparison” on the EM7100-15 web site for a comparison of old and new
symbols.
Construction, Maintenance,
Chapter 4 Temporary Traffic Control
and Incident Management
4.1 Introduction............................................................................................................. 1
4.2 Temporary Traffic Control Plans .......................................................................... 3
4.2.1 Temporary Traffic Control Plans for Incident Management ................ 4
4.2.2 Temporary Traffic Control Plans for Force Account Projects ............. 5
4.2.3 Temporary Traffic Control Plans for Contract Projects ....................... 6
4.3 Temporary Traffic Control Zones.......................................................................... 6
4.4 Worker Safety ........................................................................................................ 7
4.4.1 High-Visibility Safety Apparel.................................................................. 7
4.4.2 Flagger Control.......................................................................................... 8
4.5 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices.......................................................... 10
4.5.1 Temporary Traffic Control Signs........................................................... 10
4.5.2 Channelizing Devices ............................................................................ 11
4.5.2a Barricades .................................................................................. 12
4.5.2b Traffic Cones and Flares........................................................... 13
4.6 Typical Work Zone Temporary Traffic Control Sign Applications ................. 14
4.6.1 Road Closures........................................................................................ 14
4.6.2 Logging Operations .............................................................................. 14
4.6.3 Heavy Truck Traffic ............................................................................... 14
4.7 Typical Incident Management Temporary Traffic Control

Sign Applications................................................................................................ 14
4.7.1 General ................................................................................................... 14
4.7.2 TRAFFIC CONTROL POINT (EM-3) Sign.............................................. 15

Chapter 4 Temporary Traffic Control and Incident Management
4.7.3 FIRE TRAFFIC ENTERING ROAD (FW8-6a) Sign................................ 15
4.7.4 FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD (FW21-8) Sign................................................. 16
4.7.5 END FIRE ACTIVITY (FG20-5) Sign....................................................... 16
4.7.6 SMOKE LIMITED VISIBILITY (FW25-1) Sign........................................ 16
4.7.7 ROCK AND ROLLING DEBRIS (FW25-3) Sign..................................... 16
4.7.8 HELICOPTER OPERATIONS (FW25-4) Sign........................................ 17
4.7.9 Incident Management Guide Signs (FG21 series).............................. 17
4.7.10 MANAGED BURN—DO NOT REPORT (FG21-11) Sign..................... 17
4.7.11 DROP POINT Sign................................................................................ 17
4.7.12 Traffic Control Devices used within an Incident Base..................... 18
4.7.13 Additional incident management Signs ............................................ 18
4.8 Slow-Moving Vehicle Emblem ........................................................................... 18

November 2012
4.1 Introduction
Temporary traffic control (TTC) is the control of all road users through a TTC
zone where road construction, utility work, maintenance operations, planned
major events, vehicle check stations, and the management of incidents, such as
traffic accidents, wildfires, floods, hazardous material spills, and other unplanned
events, take place on or adjacent to a road, temporarily interrupting or affecting
the normal flow of traffic.
TTC zones present constantly changing conditions that are unexpected by the
road user. This creates an even higher degree of vulnerability for the workers
and incident management responders on or near the roadway There are
potential dangers and distractions, and road users may encounter unexpected
or unusual situations, including reduced speed limits, road closures, travel
delays, detours, heavy traffic, workers and incident responders on or adjacent to
the road, and flagger stations.
The primary function of TTC is to provide for the reasonably safe and effective
TTC is the control of movement of road users through or around TTC zones while reasonably
protecting road users, workers, incident responders, and equipment. At the
road users for road
same time, the TTC zone provides for the efficient completion of whatever
construction, utility activity interrupted the normal use of the roadway. TTC zones also may be
established when necessary to conduct compliance checks and to restrict use of
work, maintenance
road systems to incident management personnel.
operations, planned
There are seven fundamental principles of TTC. Refer to the MUTCD, section
events, vehicle check 6B.01.
stations, and incidents
• Develop general plans to provide safety for all road users, workers, and
on or adjacent to a equipment.
road. • Inhibit road user movement as little as practical.
• Guide road users in a clear and positive manner while approaching and
traversing TTC zones and incident sites.
• Perform routine day and night inspections of TTC elements to provide

acceptable levels of operations.
• Give attention to the maintenance of roadside safety during the life of the
TTC zone.
• Each person whose actions affect TTC zone safety should receive
appropriate training.
• Maintain good public relations.
For TTC on conventional roads, follow the standards and principles contained in
the MUTCD, part 6, and these Guidelines. For TTC on low-volume roads refer
to the MUTCD, chapter 5G and part 6, and these Guidelines.
Sizes of unique Forest Service TTC signs are shown in table 4-1.
Refer to chapter 4A for additional information on TTC sign placement and

installation.
November 2012
A supplemental warning plaque may be displayed with any warning sign when engineering judgment
indicates that road users require additional warning information beyond that contained in the main
message of the warning sign. Refer to chapter 3B, section 3B.2.23a for standards and guidance on use
of supplemental plaques.

Table 4-1—Temporary Traffic Control sign sizes by road type
Low-volume roads
Typical Minimum
Sign Conventional sign sizes sign sizes
Message or Symbol code or road sign (inches) = (inches)
series sizes (inches) or >35 mph <35 mph
Regulatory
TRAFFIC CONTROL POINT EM-3 30 x 24 30 x 24 30 x 24
Warning
LOGGING OPERATIONS FW11-10a 36 x 36 36 x 36 30 x 30
LOG TRUCKS FW11-10b 36 x 36 36 x 36 30 x 30
LOG TRUCKS ENTERING ROAD FW11-10c 36 x 36 36 x 36 30 x 30
HEAVY TRUCK TRAFFIC FW11-10d 36 x 36 36 x 36 30 x 30
FIRE TRAFFIC ENTERING ROAD FW8-6a 36 x 36 36 x 36 36 x 36
FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD FW21-8 36 x 36 36 x 36 36 x 36
SMOKE LIMITED VISIBIITY FW25-1 36 x 36 36 x 36 36 x 36
ROCK AND ROLLING DEBRIS FW25-3 36 x 36 36 x 36 36 x 36
HELICOPTER OPERATIONS FW25-4 36 x 36 36 x 36 36 x 36
Guide
END FIRE ACTIVITY FG20-5 36 x 18 36 x 18 36 x 18
INCIDENT BASE w/Arrow FG21-1 36 x 36 36 x 36 36 x 36
INCIDENT BASE AHEAD FG21-1a 36 x 36 36 x 36 36 x 36
SPIKE CAMP w/Arrow FG21-1b 36 x 24 36 x 24 36 x 24
WASH AREA w/Arrow FG21-3 36 x 24 36 x 24 36 x 24
STAGING AREA w/Arrow FG21-4 36 x 24 36 x 24 36 x 24
HELIBASE w/Arrow FG21-5 36 x 24 36 x 24 36 x 24
FUEL w/arrow FG21-6 36 x 24 36 x 24 36 x 24
DIP SITE w/arrow FG21-7 36 x 24 36 x 24 36 x 24
FILL SITE w/arrow FG21-7a 36 x 24 36 x 24 36 x 24
FIRE INFORMATION AHEAD FG21-8 54 x 36 54 x 36 54 x 36
FIRE INFORMATION w/arrow FG21-8a 54 x 36 54 x 36 54 x 36
Name Plate FG21-10 36 x 12 36 x 12 36 x 12
MANAGED BURN FG21-11 36 x 36 36 x 36 36 x 36
DO NOT REPORT
Drop Point Arrow FG-35 12 x 12 12 x 12 12 x 12
Multiple Drop Point FG-36 12 x 18 12 x 18 12 x 18
Single Drop Point FG-36a 24 x 18 24 x 18 24 x 18
November 2012
No one set of TTC devices can satisfy all conditions for a given project or
incident. Typical applications are shown in the MUTCD, section 6H and these
Guidelines. The TTC selected for each situation depends on the type of road,
road user conditions, duration of operations, physical constraints, and the
nearness of the work space or incident management activity to road users. In
addition to signs, variable message signs, warning lights, flags, barricades, and
cones may be used as available to enhance the visibility of TTC zones.
This chapter provides Forest Service specific information for TTC zones.
Chapter 4A contains information on TTC device installation and placement for
typical Forest Service applications. Chapter 4B provides drawing details of TTC
devices that are not located in the “Standard Highway Signs” book.
The MUTCD and Forest Service requirements for TTC apply equally to all
agency operations regardless if conducted by force account crews or contract
employees. (Refer to FSM 7721.34 and FSM 7733.04c.)
4.2 Temporary Traffic Control Plans

A TTC plan provides continued effective user flow when a work zone, incident,
or other event temporarily disrupts normal use. TTC planning should be
completed for all planned projects and incidents regardless of size or scope
prior to working within the TTC zone.
TTC plans should be completed before initiating planned incidents or projects

on or adjacent to roads that could potentially impact traffic, such as construction
and maintenance activities; commercial activities, such as timber sales,
prescribed burns, vehicle and equipment auctions, vehicle inspection stations, or
large gatherings.
TTC plans should be TTC plans should be prepared by persons knowledgeable about the
fundamental principles of TTC and work activities to be performed. The design,
prepared by persons selection, and placement of TTC devices for a TTC plan should be based on
knowledgeable about engineering judgment.
the fundamental Each person whose actions affect TTC zone safety, from upper-level
principles of TTC and
management to the field workers, should receive training appropriate to the job
decisions each individual is required to make. Only those individuals who are
work activities to be trained in proper TTC practices and have a basic understanding of the principles
performed.
should supervise the selection, placement, and maintenance of TTC devices
used for TTC zones and for incident management.
User and worker safety in TTC zones should be an integral and high-priority
element of every project from planning through design and construction. Other
design elements to consider may include the type of work, duration of the work,
proximity of work to traffic, traffic conditions, traffic volumes, speed limits, and
roadway characteristics.
November 2012
TTC plans range in scope from being very detailed to simply referencing
typical drawings, approved agency drawings and manuals, or specific drawings
contained in the contract requirements. For example:
• A bridge replacement project requiring the use of a temporary bridge to

keep the road open to traffic should have site specific TTC construction
drawings showing the signing for the temporary alignment change,
barricades and signs for the existing bridge closure, and all safety signs
needed to post the temporary bridge.
• Routine, recurrent work, such as road blading, brushing, or sign installation

projects, should have a typical plan that is applicable for the work on any
road. The plan should include the traffic control devices and procedures
needed for safe traffic control. Worker safety requirements should be
completed, discussed, and implemented before work begins. Modifications
to the TTC plan should be made on a site-by-site basis.
• Minor or mobile work, such as small culvert replacement, blading, and

brushing on low-volume roads where traffic can be sufficiently warned in
advance, may require only minimum devices as shown in figures 4A-1 and
4A-2.
• A more detailed and extensive project, such as a campground

reconstruction project should have a site-specific TTC plan developed for all
phases of the project operations.
Refer to the MUTCD, section 6C for more detail on TTC plans. The MUTCD,
chapter 6H provides examples of typical applications.
Another good reference for TTC planning is “The Traffic Control Devices
Handbook” Institute of Transportation Engineers 2001 edition (www.ite.org),
chapter 8.
In order to respond TTC devices should be utilized, inspected, maintained, and modified as needed
until the project has been finalized and accepted or the event is over.
logically, and
efficiently, proactive Signs shall be removed, turned, or covered when work is not occurring.
steps, such as
4.2.1 Temporary Traffic Control Plans for Incident Management
coordination, ordering,
Natural disasters, such as wildfires, floods, or earthquakes; emergency
and stocking of signs,
road user incidents, such as traffic accidents, hazardous material spills, law
needed training, such enforcement, or rescue operations; and other unplanned events can occur
anytime or anywhere. While it is impossible to predict the exact location, size,
as flagger certification,
or timing of natural disasters, they do occur. It is important to consider the need
and MOUs with other for TTC at these incident management areas. An incident management area is a
type of TTC zone and should have a TTC plan.
agencies should be
completed before In order to respond logically, efficiently, and swiftly when a natural disaster
occurs, proactive steps outlined in a TTC plan, such as coordination, ordering
incidents occur. and stocking of signs, training such as flagger certification, and memorandums
of understanding (MOUs) with other agencies should be completed before
incidents occur.
November 2012
Incident-specific signs and other TTC devices, such as barricades, cones,

flagging equipment, and personal protective equipment should be identified on a
TTC plan and obtained as part of the incident planning process.
Procurement plans should be in place for quickly obtaining replacements and

additional types and amounts of signs and TTC devices if the traffic control
needs for the incident escalate or become more complex.
Initial incident responders, such as law enforcement, initial attack engines and
others, should have a basic set of rollup signs and portable sign stands in their
vehicles for immediate deployment.
Local, regional, and national incident caches or warehouses should have sign
incident kits ready to dispatch for incident management traffic control needs,
including a supply of signs, hardware, posts, and general placement and
location instructions.
MOUs, State-to-State agreements, or other coordination documents should

be developed mutually with the appropriate transportation agencies before
incidents occur. Prior planning with these agencies will determine which signs
are authorized by the agency; which agency will be responsible for installation,
maintenance, and removal of incident signs; and who will coordinate other
activities, such as emergency road closures. If no MOU, permits, or other
documents exist, coordination with the appropriate road agency should occur as
soon as possible.
Identify sites that have been used often in the past or have a high potential for
recurrent use for incident management activities. Such sites could include likely
incident base camps, fairgrounds, local staging areas, airports, mobilization
sites, helibases and helispots, fire return warehouses, and ranger district
facilities. A TTC plan for these sites should be completed prior to the incident
season.
The TTC plan should identify needed signs, other traffic control devices, and
installation locations. Placement locations should be checked for underground
utilities. Post holders could be installed so that sign posts could be quickly
attached or installed when needed. Signs should be purchased, packaged to
prevent unauthorized use, and stored locally. All posts, hardware, and other
needed materials or supplies, and a copy of the site sign plan should be
included in sign kits stored onsite. Individuals should be assigned and trained to
activate these plans as the incident is being organized.
4.2.2 Temporary Traffic Control Plans for Force Account Projects

TTC plans should be For Forest Service force account projects, TTC plans should be a part of the
part of the JHA. Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) as required by Forest Service policy in FSH 6709.12,
Safety and Health Program Handbook Chapter 10–Safety and Health Program
A JHA must Administration, Section 14–Job Hazard Analysis and FSH 6709.11 Health and
Safety Code Handbook, chapter 20–Work Projects and Activities.
accompany all project
A JHA must accompany all project work plans. The analysis identifies hazards
work plans.
associated with the work project and should identify all TTC devices, protective
equipment, or work procedures needed, such as flaggers, detours, and road
closures.
November 2012
Work supervisors shall discuss the TTC plans, procedures, devices, and
personal protective equipment with crew members prior to beginning new
projects or changing work sites during a work supervisor’s tailgate safety
meeting. Document these meetings and file documentation with other project
work documents when the project is completed.
4.2.3 Temporary Traffic Control Plans for Contract Projects

TTC plans are required for all contract projects and should be based on:
• Requirements for TTC on all public works and timber sale road contracts
as found in the latest version of “Standard Specifications for Construction
of Roads and Bridges on Federal Highway Projects,” FP-03 or as
supplemented.
• Safety requirements as published in Federal Acquisition Regulations Clause

52.236.13 Accident Prevention, which apply to all public works contracts.
FSH 7709.57, Road Construction Handbook, Section 1.2 and FSH 6309.11
require that all TTC and flagger qualifications and certifications are to be
discussed at the prework conference.
If contractor employees do not have appropriate safety apparel or equipment,

such as standard signs, it is considered an imminent threat to their health
and safety. Take the appropriate actions through the contract administrative
authorities to mitigate this imminent health and safety threat. Document all
events in the contract diary.
4.3 Temporary Traffic Control Zones

A TTC zone is an area of a road where road user conditions are changed
because of a work zone, an incident zone, or a planned special event through
the use of TTC devices, uniformed law enforcement officers, or other authorized
personnel. Most TTC zones have four components shown in the MUTCD, figure
6C-1:
1. The advance warning area is where road users are informed about the
upcoming work zone or incident area. The advance warning area may vary
from a single sign to a series of signs in advance of the TTC zone activity
area.
2. The transition area is where the road users are redirected out of their
normal path.
3. The activity area is where the work activity takes place. It contains the
work space, the traffic space, and the buffer space.
4. The termination area is where road users are returned to their normal
driving path.
November 2012
Each TTC zone is different and varies with conditions, such as road
configuration, location of work, work activity, duration of work, user volume,
vehicle type, and speed. The goal of TTC in work zones is safety with minimum
disruption to the user. The key factor in promoting TTC zone safety is proper
judgment.
4.4 Worker Safety

Worker safety within a TTC zone is of equal importance as the safety of the
road users. TTC zone workers should keep in mind that, while they have an
important job to do, they must ensure their own safety, the safety of the public,
and the safety of their coworkers. Consider the following key elements to
improve worker safety. Refer to the MUTCD, chapter 6D for complete details.
No job is so important • Training.
that we cannot take the • Temporary traffic barriers.

time to work safely. • Speed reduction.
• Activity area planning.
• Worker safety planning.
4.4.1 High-Visibility Safety Apparel

Federal regulations require that all workers, including emergency responders,
who are exposed to traffic or work vehicles and construction equipment within
the road right-of-way, shall wear high-visibility safety apparel that meets the
Performance Class 2 or 3 requirements of ANSI/ISEA 107-2004 or current
edition publication.
This includes:
• Construction and maintenance workers engaged in roadside activities
• Workers engaged in roadside activities, such as timber cruising or danger

tree identification.
All workers within the
• Firefighters engaged in roadside firefighting activities, such as installing
TTC zone shall wear
road signs, directing traffic, and conducting tactical/logistical operations.
high-visibility safety
• Uniformed law enforcement personnel directing traffic, investigating
apparel. crashes, or handling lane closures, obstructed roadways, and disasters.
• Personnel conducting flagging operations for temporary traffic control.
• Personnel maintaining road closures.
A work supervisor should perform a documented Job Hazard Analysis (JHA)

to determine the appropriate class of garment for use, either Class 2 or Class
3. The appropriate garment color should be selected which will provide the
greatest contrast between the worker and the work environment. If there is any
doubt as to the appropriate class, go with the higher level of protection.
November 2012
Class 2 garments provide a moderate level of visibility. Select when:

• Greater visibility is desired during inclement weather conditions.
• Complex backgrounds are present.
• Speeds of traffic or moving equipment exceed 25 mph.
• Worker’s activities take place in closer proximity to vehicle traffic.
Class 3 garments provide the highest level of visibility. Select when workers:
• Are exposed to significantly higher vehicle speeds and/or reduced sight
distances.
• Face serious hazards and have high task loads that require attention away
from their work.
• Are conducting flagging operations at night.
• Must be conspicuous through the full range of body motions at a minimum
of 1,280 feet.
Refer to the Missoula Technology and Development Center (MTDC) publication

“High Visibility Garments and Worker Safety on Roadways, 2012” 1151-2811 for
more information on high visibility safety apparel.
4.4.2 Flagger Control

Flagging traffic is a critical and potentially hazardous part of providing a safe
TTC zone. When workers are killed, it is often the construction traffic-control
supervisor and the flagger who are the work zone casualties. Without question,
flagging is one of the most dangerous TTC jobs.
Flaggers have the responsibility of protecting themselves and their fellow

workers as well as the users traveling through the TTC zone.
Flaggers working on Flaggers working on any Forest Service project, event, or incident shall be
any Forest Service trained and certified by a State, local Department of Transportation, Local
Transportation Assistance Program (LTAP), or other qualified training source. In
project, event, or most States, flaggers are required to be certified before being allowed to perform
incident shall be trained flagging operations on roads.
and certified. Flaggers should demonstrate the ability to:

• Receive and communicate specific instructions clearly, firmly, and
courteously.
• Move quickly to avoid danger from errant vehicles.
• Control signaling devices to provide clear guidance to approaching drivers.
• Apply safe traffic control practices in stressful or emergency situations.
• Recognize dangerous traffic situations and warn workers quickly enough so
they can avoid injury.
Memorandums of Understanding or other agreements with State Departments

of Transportation may grant reciprocity to flaggers certified in other States to
perform flagging duties when assigned to incident management activities.
November 2012
Use flaggers when engineering judgment determines there is a need. Factors

to be considered in the engineering judgment are work duration, work location,
work type, and highway type.
A single flagger may be used for:
• Short-length and short-duration projects, such as culvert or cattle

guard cleaning on a low-volume road and the flagger is visible to traffic
approaching in all directions.
• At spot lane closures where adequate sight distance is available for safely
handling traffic.
At a spot constriction, the flagger may have to take a position on the shoulder
opposite the closed section to operate effectively.
Flaggers shall use a Flaggers must be clearly visible to approaching traffic at all times. Flaggers
shall wear high-visibility safety apparel that meets the Performance Class 2
STOP/SLOW paddle,
or 3 requirements of the ANSI/ISEA 107-2004 or current edition publication.
flag or an Automated For nighttime activity, flaggers should wear safety apparel meeting Class 3
risk exposure. Refer to section 4.4.1 and MTDC publication 1151-2811, “High
Flagger Assistance
Visibility Garments and Worker Safety on Roadways, 2012”.
Device.
Flagger stations should be located in advance of the actual work area so that
approaching road users will have enough visibility distance to stop safely.
Guidelines for buffer space distances are shown in table 4-2 and are based on
stopping sight distances. Distances may be increased for downgrades and other
conditions that affect stopping distances.
Table 4-2—Buffer space distance for flagger stations.

Speed 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
mph*
Distance 115 155 200 250 305 360 425 495 570 645 730 820
feet
*Use posted speed, 85th-percentile speed prior to work area, or the anticipated operating
speed.
Vehicle activity or storage of equipment, vehicles, or materials should not occur

in a buffer space.
Except in emergencies, flagger stations shall be preceded by advance warning

signs to alert road users and shall be illuminated at night.
Flaggers shall use a STOP/SLOW paddle, flag or an Automated Flagger

Assistance Device (AFAD) to control users approaching a TTC zone.
November 2012
The STOP/SLOW paddle shall meet the following standards:
• Octagonal shape.
• Minimum 18 inches wide with 6-inch letters.
• The STOP face shall have white letters and border on a red background.
• The SLOW face shall have black letters and border on an orange
background.
• Be retroreflective when used at night.
• Be fastened to a rigid staff that is tall enough that when the end of the
staff is resting on the ground, the message is high enough to be seen by
approaching or stopped traffic.
The use of hand movements alone is prohibited except for law enforcement
personnel or emergency responders at incident scenes as described in the
MUTCD, chapter 6I.
Refer to the MUTCD, chapters 6E, 6G, and 6H for specific information on
flagger qualifications, advance warning signs, methods, and equipment.
4.5 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices

Traffic control devices are all signs, signals, markings, barricades, and other
devices used to regulate, warn, or guide users, placed on, over, or adjacent to a
road open to public travel.
All traffic control devices used for construction, maintenance, utility, planned
events, or incident management operations on a road open to public travel shall
Signs shall be comply with the MUTCD and these Guidelines.
professional in design
and appearance, 4.5.1 Temporary Traffic Control Signs

and meet all size, TTC zone signs convey both general and specific messages by means of
appearance and
words, symbols, and/or arrows and have the same three categories as all traffic
control devices: regulatory, warning, and guide. Signs shall be professional
retroreflectivity in design and appearance, and meet all size, appearance and retroreflectivity
requirements.
requirements. Homemade signs do not meet these requirements.
Regulatory signs, such as STOP, YIELD, and DO NOT ENTER, shall follow
chapter 3A and the MUTCD, chapter 2B.
Warning and guide signs in TTC zones used for construction, maintenance, and
utility projects, and planned events, shall have a black legend and border on
an orange retroreflective background. Use fluorescent orange sheeting when
maximum visibility is needed especially during twilight. Refer to the MUTCD,
chapter 6F, section 6F.02 for exceptions.
Standard retroreflective orange and black construction warning and guide

signs situations may be used in incident management zones if they are readily
available.
November 2012
Fluorescent pink may also be used for incident management warning and
guide signs. For approach roads to incident areas or operations, the preferred
FIRE sign color for incident warning and guide signs is fluorescent pink for several
reasons:
ACTIVITY
AHEAD • The color commands attention and gives notice of something unusual
ahead.
• There is no confusion with other yellow or orange signs that may be

installed for standard road construction and maintenance activities.
• Incident personnel and supply vehicle drivers notice them immediately and
are readily guided to incident locations.
If incident management signs are not available, use standard construction

signs until appropriate incident-specific signs can be obtained and installed.
Nonstandard signs shall not be used unless it is an emergency and no other
timely or appropriate option is available. As soon as standard incident signs are
available, all construction or nonstandard signs shall be replaced.
Table 6F-1 of the MUTCD provides a list of TTC signs and their sizes. The
minimum size shown in table 6F-1 shall only be used on roadways where the
85th percentile or posted speed limit is less than 35 mph.
All TTC signs used at night shall be either retroreflective or illuminated to show
the same shape and similar color both day and night.
4.5.2 Channelizing Devices

The function of channelizing devices is to warn road users of conditions created
by work activities in or near the roadway and to guide road users. Channelizing
devices provide for smooth and gradual vehicular traffic flow from one lane to
another, onto a bypass or detour, or into a narrower traveled way. They also are
used to channelize vehicular traffic away from the work space, pavement drop-
offs, pedestrian or shared-use paths, or opposing directions of vehicular traffic.
A channelizing device can be a barricade, cone, drum, tubular marker, or

vertical panel, and shall meet the requirements shown in the MUTCD, chapter
6F, section 6F.63
All channelizing devices shall be crashworthy.
Figure 6F-7 of the MUTCD shows standard channelizing devices. Included here
are Forest Service guidelines that supplement the MUTCD.
November 2012
4.5.2a Barricades
Type 1 and Type 2 barricades are commonly misused for road closures. They
shall only be used where traffic flow is maintained through the TTC zone and
not for road closures.
Type 1 and Type 2
barricades shall only be
used where traffic flow
is maintained through
the TTC zone and not
for road closures.

TYPE 1 BARRICADE TYPE 2 BARRICADE
* Warning lights (optional) * Warning lights (optional)
Use Type 3 barricades to close or partially close roads for TTC activities, such
as project work; road closures due to fire, flood, or other danger; and incident
management. Type 3 barricades are a minimum length of 48 inches with 6
stripes.
Use Type 3 barricades
to close or partially
close roads for TTC
activities.
TYPE 3 BARRICADE
* Warning lights (optional)
Traffic control signs may be installed on Type 3 barricades. Refer to the

MUTCD, section 6F.03. Typical signs installed on these barricades include:
• ROAD CLOSED, AREA CLOSED
• ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC
• LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY
• DETOUR
• ONE WAY
Refer to the MUTCD, sections 6F.63 and 6F.68 for more comprehensive
information on Type 1, 2, and 3 barricades. Refer to the MUTCD, figure 6F-7 for
Type 1, 2, and 3 barricade dimensions.
November 2012
Signs shall not be less than 1-foot above the road when mounted on the
barricade. In no case should more than 50 percent of the top two rails or 33
Barricades shall percent of the total area of all the rails be covered by standard signs.
be crashworthy. Other signs, maps, or posters shall not be placed on barricades.
Homemade barriers,
All sides of barricades facing traffic should have retroreflective rail faces showing
such as sawhorses and and be visible from both directions.
wood posts do not meet Barricades shall be crashworthy. Homemade barriers, such as sawhorses
required standards. and wood posts do not meet the required standards. Anchor barricades with
appropriate ballast, such as sandbags or water jugs. Do not place ballast on
top of any striped rail. Do not use objects for ballast that will not deform in a
collision, such as rocks and concrete blocks.
Stripes on the rails should point downward toward the direction that road users
must turn or downward toward the barricade center when no turns are allowed.
Correct positioning of the rail stripes on Type 3 barricades is shown in chapter
4A, figure 4A-3.
4.5.2b Traffic Cones and Flares

Cones shall be predominantly orange and shall be made of a material that can
be struck without causing damage to the impacting vehicle. For daytime and
low-speed roadways, cones shall be not less than 18 inches in height. When
cones are used on freeways and other high-speed highways or at night on all
highways, or when more conspicuous guidance is needed, cones shall be a
minimum of 28 inches in height.
For nighttime use, cones shall be retroreflectorized or equipped with lighting

devices for maximum visibility. Retroreflectorization of cones that are 28 to 36
inches in height shall be provided by a 6-inch wide white band located 3 to 4
inches from the top of the cone and an additional 4-inch wide white band located
approximately 2 inches below the 6-inch band.
Night and/or freeway Day and low-speed

High-speed roadway roadway ( 40 mph)
( 45 mph)
Follow procedures in the MUTCD, section 6C.08 for proper cone placement
during planned activities, such as construction and maintenance operations.
For emergency cone deployment during incident operations, follow procedures

shown in chapter 4A, figure 4A-11.
Refer to the MUTCD, sections 6F.64 for more comprehensive information on

traffic cones. Refer to the MUTCD, figure 6F-7 for traffic cone dimensions.
November 2012
4.6 Typical Work Zone Temporary Traffic Control Sign

Applications
4.6.1 Road Closures

When the exclusion of public traffic is necessary for the safety of road users, a
regulatory ROAD CLOSED sign (R11-2) should be used. Refer to chapter 3A,
section 3A.5.
R11-2
If some uses are allowed, such as certain types of traffic (e.g., logging or
construction) or during certain periods (e.g., nights or weekends), a clear and
ROAD CLOSED appropriate message shall be part of the sign. The sign may describe the type of
TO PUBLIC USE traffic, the hours of the day, or the days of the week of the exclusion (R13-1b).
7 AM - 5 PM MON THRU FRI
Such signing should be provided when restricting noncommercial use of roads
R13-1b during periods of commercial haul in accordance with direction in FSH 7709.59,
chapter 60, section 64.41.
4.6.2 Logging Operations

Use the LOGGING OPERATIONS sign (FW11-10a), LOG TRUCKS (FW11-
10b), or LOG TRUCKS ENTERING ROAD (FW11-10c) to warn users of
hazards associated with logging activities, log hauling on or along a road, or
log trucks entering intersections. Cover or remove signs when the message is
not appropriate. Supplemental plaques, such as NEXT XX MILES, should be
used as appropriate. Refer to chapter 3B, section 3B.2.23a for information on
supplemental plaques.
LOG
LOGGING LOG TRUCKS
OPERATIONS TRUCKS ENTERING
ROAD
FW11-10a FW11-10b FW11-10c
4.6.3 Heavy Truck Traffic

Use the HEAVY TRUCK TRAFFIC sign (FW11-10d) to warn users of hazards
HEAVY associated with heavy truck traffic on or along a road. Cover or remove signs
when the message is not appropriate. Supplemental plaques, such as NEXT XX
TRUCK MILES, should be used as appropriate. Refer to chapter 3B, section 3B.2.23a for
TRAFFIC information on supplemental plaques.
FW11-10d
4.7 Typical Incident Management Temporary Traffic Control
Sign Applications
4.7.1 General
The MUTCD, chapter 2N and chapter 6I provide guidance for incidents that
impact roads and highways.
November 2012
Initial responders to incidents involving highways/roads should have TTC set

up within 15 minutes of on-scene arrival. Standard signs on hand may be used
as long as these signs and sign placements do not create unnecessary or
additional hazards.
The flashing lights on emergency vehicles are generally sufficient for minor or
short-duration traffic incidents (30 minutes or less), such as a “fender bender” or
a law enforcement pullover. Diversion of traffic into other road lanes often is not
needed or needed only briefly.
More serious or intermediate-duration (30 minutes to 2 hours) incidents, such

as a serious vehicle accident or vehicle rollover that blocks a road, may require
TTC. If necessary, a trained and properly equipped flagger may be assigned to
direct traffic.
Major, long-term (more than 2 hours) situations, such as hazardous material

spills, prescribed burns, wildfires, or other widespread or catastrophic events
could require a large number of traffic control devices, trained and properly
equipped flaggers, and other methods in order to warn and direct traffic through
the area impacted by the event. In addition, follow the TTC procedures and
use the devices set forth in other chapters of part 6 of the MUTCD for major
incidents.
Refer to chapter 4B, figures 4B-4 through 4B-11 for typical placement guidelines
for incident management signing. These signs are appropriate for both wildfire
incidents and managed burns.
4.7.2 TRAFFIC CONTROL POINT (EM-3) Sign

The TRAFFIC CONTROL POINT (EM-3) sign shall be used to designate a
location where an official traffic control point has been set up to impose such
controls as are necessary to limit congestion, expedite emergency traffic,
exclude unauthorized vehicles, or protect the public.
R1-1
The sign shall be installed in the same manner as the AREA CLOSED sign and
at the point where traffic must stop to be checked. Refer to the MUTCD, section
2N.04.
The standard STOP (R1-1) sign shall be used in conjunction with the TRAFFIC
CONTROL POINT sign. The TRAFFIC CONTROL POINT sign should be
EM-3 mounted directly below the STOP sign. Refer to chapter 4A, figure 4A-10.
4.7.3 FIRE TRAFFIC ENTERING ROAD (FW8-6a) Sign

FIRE Use the FIRE TRAFFIC ENTERING ROAD (FW8-6a) sign to warn approaching
TRAFFIC road users that incident traffic is entering and exiting at the intersection. Use
ENTERING of an Advisory Speed plaque is optional. Its use requires approval by the State
ROAD Department of Transportation if it is placed on State roads. Refer to chapter 4A,
figure 4A-4.
FW8-6a
November 2012
4.7.4 FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD (FW21-8) Sign

Use the FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD (FW-21-8) sign when incident operations are
FIRE
FIRE occurring adjacent to the road, such as initial attack engine, crew, or helicopter
ACTIVITY
ACTIVITY operations. Refer to chapter 4A, figures 4A-5 through 4A-8.
AHEAD
AHEAD The FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD sign may be omitted if the incident vehicle or
activity is behind a barrier, more than 24 inches behind a curb, or more than 15
FW21-8 feet from the edge of any roadway.
NEXT
NEXT For fire operations less than 30 minutes, signs are not required if the incident
vehicle uses activated high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe
55 MILES
MILES lights.
W7-3aP Incident management activities may occur throughout an incident zone over a
long section of road. Use the FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD (FW-21-8) sign with a
Distance plaque indicating the length of the traffic control zone as the first sign in
a series of incident management signs. Refer to chapter 4A, figure 4A-5.
Refer to chapter 3B, section 3B.2.23a for information on supplemental plaques.
END FIRE 4.7.5 END FIRE ACTIVITY (FG20-5) Sign

ACTIVITY Use the END FIRE ACTIVITY (FG20-5) sign to let road users know that they
may resume normal driving. Place the END FIRE ACTIVITY sign on the opposite
FG20-5 side of the road from the FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD sign warning road users
coming from the other direction.
If the incident activity occurs over more than 5 miles of road, install additional
FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD signs with the distance plaque, W7-3aP, at least every
5 miles. Refer to chapter 4A, figure 4A-5.
4.7.6 SMOKE LIMITED VISIBILITY (FW25-1) Sign

SMOKE
LIMITED The SMOKE LIMITED VISIBILITY (FW25-1) sign may be used to warn road
VISIBILITY users that smoke is reducing visibility along a section of road. A NEXT XX
MILES (W7-3aP) supplemental plaque may be mounted below the FW25-1 sign
to inform road users of the length of road that is experiencing the smoke.
FW25-1
4.7.7 ROCK AND ROLLING DEBRIS (FW25-3) Sign

ROCK The ROCK AND ROLLING DEBRIS (FW25-3) sign may be used in advance
AND of an area that is adjacent to a fire or other incident that is causing rocks and
ROLLING burning debris to fall onto the road.
DEBRIS
A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) supplemental plaque may be mounted below the
FW25-3 FW25-3 sign to inform road users of the length of road that is experiencing the
fallen rock and debris.
November 2012
4.7.8 HELICOPTER OPERATIONS (FW25-4) Sign

The HELICOPTER OPERATIONS (FW25-4) sign may be used in advance to
warn road users that helicopter operations are occuring over or adjacent to the
HELICOPTER road and may affect normal operation of the road. A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP)
OPERATIONS supplemental plaque may be mounted below the FW25-4 sign to inform road
users of the length of road impacted by the helicopter operations.

FW25-4
4.7.9 Incident Management Guide Signs (FG21 series)

INCIDENT Use guide signs at critical intersections to direct incident management traffic to
BASE destinations such as:
• Incident bases. • Spike camps.
FG21-1 • Incident command post (ICP). • Dip sites.

L
• Helibases. • Wash areas.
H
ROCK CREEK • Staging areas. • Fire information stations
FG21-10 When several incidents are in the same area, a nameplate (FG21-10) may help
incident responders locate the right incident. The name of the incident should be
on a separate sign mounted on top of the guide sign.
Refer to chapter 4A, figure 4A-4.
MANAGED
4.7.10 MANAGED BURN—DO NOT REPORT (FG21-11) Sign
BURN The MANAGED BURN—DO NOT REPORT (FG21-11) sign may be used to
DO NOT REPORT inform road users that a managed burn is in progress, and it does not need to
be reported. The sign typically is used when smoke from the managed burn is
FG21-11 visible to the road users.
DROP
6
POINT
4.7.11 DROP POINT Sign
DROP POINT signs direct incident personnel to specific destinations where they
can drop off or pick up supplies and crews. If drop points are accessed only
FG36a
from one direction, signs may be needed only on that side of the roadway.
Use the single DROP POINT (FG-36a) sign for individual drop points. Separate
arrow plaques (FG-35) are used to direct traffic to the right, left, or straight
ahead.
FG35 Use the multiple DROP POINT (FG-36) sign to direct traffic to several drop
points from a single intersection.
DROP POINTS
1, 2, 3 Refer to chapter 4A, figure 3A-9.
4, 5, 8
FG36
November 2012
4.7.12 Traffic Control Devices used within an Incident Base

Standard traffic control signs and devices should be used to direct traffic within
an incident base, such as ONE WAY, STOP, and NO PARKING. In addition,
signs may be used to assist in directing traffic to locations within incident bases,
such as LOGISTICS, GROUND SUPPORT, ENGINE PARKING, and CREW
PARKING. Refer to the “Incident Sign Ordering Catalog” (MTDC 1151-2811) for
a list of signs available for in-camp signing.
4.7.13 Additional incident management signs

Refer to chapter 4C and the “Incident Sign Ordering Catalog” (MTDC 1151-
2811, 2012) for a complete listing of signs available for incident management.
Additional signs may be developed as necessary for temporary conditions

related to an incident. Consult with the regional sign coordinator if additional
messages are needed.
4.8 Slow-Moving Vehicle Emblem

The slow-moving vehicle emblem consists of a fluorescent yellow-orange
triangle with a dark red retroreflective border. The yellow-orange fluorescent
color is highly visible in daylight. The retroreflective border defines the shape of
the triangle in the daylight and creates a hollow red triangle in vehicle headlights
at night.
The emblem is intended as a unique identification for, and only should be used
on, vehicles that by design move slowly (25 mph or less) on public roads. The
emblem is not a clearance marker for wide machinery nor is it intended to
replace the required lighting or marking of slow-moving vehicles.
Neither the triangle nor its backing shall be altered to permit use of advertising
or other markings.
Slow Moving Vehicle
Emblem The material, location, dimensions, and mounting of the emblem must be
in accord with the American Society of Agricultural Engineers emblem for
identifying slow-moving vehicles, ASAE R276, 1967, or ASAE S276.2 9 (ANSI
B114.1-1971). Refer to the U. S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and
Health Administration for more information (29 CFR 1910.145(d)(10)).
Chapter 4A Temporary Traffic Control Placement and Installation
4A.1 Introduction...........................................................................................................1
4A.2 Placement Distance for Advance Warning Signs.............................................2
4A.3 Placement Distance for Incident Guide Signs...................................................2

November 2012
4A.1 Introduction
Proper placement is critical to ensure that signs and other traffic control devices
are visible, do not present a safety hazard, to provide adequate perception and
reaction time for the driver, and to provide safety for the workers.
Temporary Traffic Control (TTC) sign-placement considerations include proper
supports, mounting height, lateral distance from the edge of the roadway, and
advance placement distance along the roadway.
Locate signs on the right side of the road.
Crashworthy permanent or portable sign supports and barricades are required
for all unshielded TTC signs located within the clear zone. Refer to chapter 3D,
section 3D.7 for crashworthy requirements.
Typically, signs should be mounted on posts, portable sign supports, or other
approved sign stands that meet the minimum height and lateral location
requirements shown in chapter 3D and the MUTCD, figure 6F-1.
Signs mounted on portable sign supports that do not meet the minimum
mounting heights should not be used for more than 3 days with the following
exceptions:
• Pedestrian series signs (R9-8 through R9-11a).
• Road closed series signs (R-11).
• Chevron series warning signs (W1-6 through W1-8).
Sign supports shall be • Detour series signs M4-10, E5-1 or similar signs.
crashworthy. • Incident signs where the duration or scope of the incident is unknown and
can change rapidly, (e.g., wildfires).
These signs shall be mounted at least 1-foot above the traveled way.
1 ft MIN. above
the traveled way
Signs mounted on portable supports or barricades may be placed within the

roadway.
Si gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 4A-1
November 2012
Signs with different or nonrelated messages typically are mounted on separate

posts. If necessary, an exception may be made to install an incident warning
sign on the same post as a noncritical existing warning or regulatory sign if the
message of the existing sign is not compromised and if no other option exists to
mount the sign. Refer to chapter 3, section 3.8 for sign priorities.
Mounting an incident directional sign on the same post with existing directional
or informational signs also may be allowed if the existing message will not be
compromised. Do not cover existing regulatory and warning signs with TTC
signs. However, if existing signage is conflicting or not applicable during the
management of the project or incident, cover the signs to prevent confusion.
Promptly remove all TTC signs when the project or incident is over or when the
signs are no longer applicable or needed.
Where mobile or short-duration operations occur on the road shoulders of low-
volume roads, such as weed spraying or sign maintenance, and the operation
will occur along extended segments of road, it is impractical to place stationary
TTC signs. The methods shown in figure 4A-1 may be used. For mobile
operations a sign may be mounted on a vehicle.
Refer to the MUTCD, chapter 6C, 6G, and 6H for more detail on TTC zones.
4A.2 Placement Distance for Advance Warning Signs

Advance warning signs must precede the TTC location by a distance sufficient
to warn traffic and allow for adequate perception and reaction time of the driver.
The recommended advance warning sign minimum distances are listed in table
4A-1. These numbers are intended for guidance purposes only and should be
applied with engineering judgment. Relocate signs if traffic congestion extends
past the original locations of the signs.
Table 4A.1—Recommended spacing of advance warning signs

Speed limit Distance from the TTC activity area to the first
or prevailing sign and between subsequent signs in a series
approach (feet)
speed (mph)
25 or less 100
30 to 45 350
45 to 50 500
Refer to the MUTCD, chapter 6C for State and county highways and speeds
greater than 50 mph.
4A-2 S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
4A.3 Placement Distance for Incident Guide Signs

Use table 4A-2 for advance placement distances along access roads for guide signs that direct traffic to
incident locations, such as an incident base, helibases, or staging areas.
Use engineering judgment to determine placement of signs on internal camp roads.
Table 4A.2—Advanced placement of guide signs at intersections

Speed limit or prevailing approach speed Distance from intersection
(miles per hour) (feet)
Less than 15 25
15 to 25 100
30 to 40 100 to 200
Over 45 200 minimum
Work zone
Flashing yellow light
or
(Optional)
SHOULDER
WORK
Figure 4A-1—Low-volume road with short-duration or mobile operation on shoulder.
November 2012
Low-volume Low-volume
unpaved road unpaved road
FEET
500 FEET
*** 500
500 FT AHEAD
WORK or WORK 500 FT AHEAD ***
ROAD ROAD WORK or WORK
ROAD ROAD
*
** is used) *
AHEAD (WORKERS) (When flagger
MACHINERY
ROAD ** Traffic cones, candlesticks,
or or channelizing devices
*
Culvert or other work in

W21-5
the roadway
Blading area On very low-traffic, low-speed
(1 day of work) roads, flagger may be here for
traffic in both directions if all
traffic can see the flagger.
Flagger, use on roads with

speeds >30 mph or high-
volume roads.
* *
ROAD or
MACHINERY
AHEAD
** W21-1 W20-7
** W21-3
(WORKERS) (When flagger
* is used)
*
ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD

WORK or WORK WORK or WORK
AHEAD 500 FT AHEAD 500 FT
*** W20-1 ***
500 500
FEET W16-2P FEET
* Obtain distance from table 4A-1.

* * These signs may be all that are required when traffic approach speeds are 25 mph or lower and the blading or
construction operations are visible.
** * Add these signs when traffic approach speeds are above 25 mph or blading or construction operations are not visible.
Specify correct distances on signs.as needed.
Figure 4A-2—Temporary traffic control devices for minor work on low-volume roads.
November 2012
De
to
ur
Work area
et
D
Suitable ou
r
turnaround area
ROAD
CLOSED DETOUR
AHEAD AHEAD
No turn—no traffic allowed beyond barricade Left turn—traffic can pass on the left
r Work area
ou
et
D
Work area
Parking lot
ur
to
De
DETOUR
AHEAD
Right turn—traffic can pass on the right Both left and right turn—traffic
can pass on both sides
Use appropriate advance warning sign(s) as determined by engineering judgement or engineering study.
Use appropriate advance warning sign(s) for return traffic.
Figure 4A-3—Type 3 barricade use.
November 2012
MPH
plaque (optional) XX
Advisory speed
ROAD
ENTERING
TRAFFIC *
FIRE
BASE
INCIDENT
**
Application Notes
Install a warning and guide sign at each
approach to the intersection. The warning sign
(sign 1) attracts attention. It is the most critical
sign and always takes precedence over the
guide sign (sign 2). ** Warning light (optional)
Use the FIRE TRAFFIC ENTERING ROAD
warning sign to warn approaching road users INCIDENT ROCK CREEK FG21-10
that incident traffic is entering and exiting at the BASE
or HELIBASE
intersection. (Sign 2)
If enforceable or advisory speed limits are FG21-1 FG21-5
necessary, work with the appropriate road * Warning light (optional)

agency that has jurisdiction.
FIRE
Use guide signs at critical intersections to direct TRAFFIC (Sign 1)
incident management traffic to destinations such ENTERING
ROAD
as:
FW8-6a
• Incident bases.
XX Advisory speed plaque
• Helibases. MPH (optional)
W13-1P
• Staging areas. *Obtain distance from table 4A-1.
• Helicopter bucket dip sites. **Obtain distance from table 4A-2.
• Washing stations.
When several incidents are in the same area, Use of the advisory speed plaque requires
a nameplate may help persons locate the right approval by the State Department of Transportation
incident. The name of the incident should be if it is placed on State roads.
on a separate sign mounted on top of the guide
Don’t use advisory speed plaques by themselves.
sign.
Figure 4A-4—Temporary traffic control signage for incident management activities at

intersections.
November 2012
Application Notes
Incident management activities may occur throughout an incident zone over a long section of road.
Use the FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD sign with a distance plaque indicating the length of the traffic control
zone as the first sign in a series of incident management signs.
Use the END FIRE ACTIVITY sign to let road users know that they may resume normal driving. Place
the END FIRE ACTIVITY sign on the opposite side of the road from the FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD sign
warning road users coming from the other direction.
If the incident activity occurs over more than 5 miles of road, install additional FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD
signs with the distance plaque at least every 5 miles.
5 MILES
NEXT
END FIRE
AHEAD ACTIVITY
ACTIVITY FG20-5
FIRE *
ROAD
ENTERING
TRAFFIC
FIRE *
management
activities
Incident
* FIRE
TRAFFIC
ENTERING
ROAD
FW8-6a
* FIRE
ACTIVITY
ACTIVITY AHEAD
END FIRE
FW21-8
N EXT
5 M I LES
W7-3aP
*Obtain distance from table 4A-1.

Figure 4A-5—Temporary traffic control signage for approaching and leaving fire activity zones.
November 2012
Application Notes
The FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD sign may be omitted if the incident vehicle or activity is behind a barrier,
more than 24 inches behind a curb, or more than 15 feet from the edge of any roadway.
For operations lasting less than 30 minutes, signs are not required if the incident vehicle uses activated
high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights.
Hazard-warning signals on vehicles may be used to supplement—but not replace—high intensity
rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights.
A HEA D
ACT IVIT Y
FIR E
Engine or crew activity

occurring near but not
in the roadway
*
F I RE
ACTI VI TY
A H EA D
FW21-8
Figure 4A-6—Temporary traffic control signage for initial attack engine or crew operations along
a roadway.
November 2012
Application Notes
Intermittent flagging operations AHEAD
ACTIVITY
may be needed during shift FIRE
*
changes or at other critical times
of the incident operation.
Use the BE PREPARED TO *
STOP and the flagger symbol
signs during all flagging
operations. Remove, cover, or turn
signs face down when traffic is not *
being flagged. Flagger
The advance warning sign ***

FIRE ACTIVITY AHEAD should (optional)
be visible at all times, even Buffer space
when flagging operations are

suspended.
Flight Path
Buffer space
(optional)
***
A flagger shall be trained and certified by a State-
Flagger
or Federal-approved training and certification
agency in safe traffic control practices and *
public contact techniques. Flaggers shall wear W20-7
high-visibility safety apparel that meets the

Performance Class 2 or 3 requirements of ANSI/ *
ISEA 107-2004 (or current edition). W3-4
The flagger should:
• Never stand in a lane used by moving traffic. *
FIRE
• Stand either on the shoulder adjacent to the ACTIVITY FW21-8
AHEAD
lane being controlled or in the closed lane
before stopping road users. *Obtain distance from table 4A-1.
• Only stand in the lane being used by moving ***Obtain distance from chapter 4, table 4-2.
traffic after road users have stopped.
• Only stand in the lane being used by moving traffic after road users have stopped.
• Be clearly visible to the first approaching road user at all times.
• Be visible to other road users.
• Be stationed sufficiently in advance of the flight path to allow vehicles time to stop. Refer to
chapter 4, table 4-1.
• Stand alone, away from other workers, work vehicles, or equipment.
Where adequate sight distance is available for the reasonably safe handling of traffic, the use of one
flagger may be sufficient.
Figure 4A-7—Temporary traffic control signage for flagging operations to stop traffic for
helicopter activities.
November 2012

**Obtain distance from table 4A-2.
AHEAD
Application Notes
ACTIVITY
***Obtain distance from chapter 4, table 4-2.

FIRE *
Intermittent flagging
operations may be needed
removed.
covered or
to stop traffic when
signs are
flagger
*
helicopter operations affect
Use when
road users. ROAD

ENTERING Or
TRAFFIC *
Use the BE PREPARED FIRE
TO STOP and the flagger

Flagger
symbol signs during

all flagging operations. ***
Remove, cover, or turn BASE (optional)
signs face down when

INCIDENT Buffer space
**
traffic is not being flagged.
The advance warning
sign FIRE ACTIVITY
AHEAD should be visible
**
Buffer space INCIDENT
(optional) BASE
at all times, even when flagging operations are
suspended.
***
FG21-1
A flagger shall be trained and certified by Flagger W20-7 FW8-6a

a State- or Federal-approved training and * FIRE
certification agency in safe traffic control Or
TRAFFIC
ENTERING
practices and public contact techniques. ROAD
Flaggers shall wear high-visibility safety apparel Use when
that meets the Performance Class 2 or 3 * flagger

signs are
covered or
requirements of ANSI/ISEA 107-2004 (or current removed
edition).
W3-4
The flagger should:
* FIRE
ACTIVITY
• Never stand in a lane used by moving traffic. AHEAD
• Stand either on the shoulder adjacent to the FW21-8
lane being controlled or in the closed lane

before stopping road users.
• Be clearly visible to the first approaching road user at all times.
• Be visible to other road users.
• Be stationed sufficiently in advance of the intersection to allow vehicles time to stop. Refer to
chapter 4, table 4-2.
• Stand alone, away from other workers, work vehicles, or equipment.
At spot lane closures where adequate sight distance is available for the reasonably safe handling of
traffic, the use of one flagger may be sufficient.
Figure 4A-8—Temporary traffic control signage for intermittent flagging operations at

intersections.
November 2012
Application Notes
DROP POINT signs are guide signs that direct incident personnel to specific destinations where they
can drop off or pick up supplies and crews.
Use the single DROP POINT sign for individual drop points. Use the multiple DROP POINT sign to
direct traffic to several drop points from a single intersection.
If drop points are accessed only from one direction, signs may be needed only on that side of the
roadway.
Multiple drop points Multiple drop points
**
POINT DROP POINTS

1, 2, 3
6 **
4, 5, 8
DROP FG36
Single drop point
DROP
**
6
POINT FG36a
FG35
**Obtain distance from table 4A-2.
Figure 4A-9—Temporary traffic control signage for incident drop points.
November 2012
Application Notes
Official traffic control points are established
plaque (optional) MPH to stop traffic, limit congestion, expedite
Advisory speed XX emergency traffic, exclude unauthorized
vehicles, and protect the public.
Locate the traffic control point so that road
users may safely turn around if they are refused
Guard
entry. Typically, road users coming out of the
Warning light (optional) * vehicle
temporary traffic control zone are not stopped.
If exit signs are needed, they should match the
approach signs.
Place a Type 3 barricade
de
Buffer space
in the lane where traffic is
si
g
(optional)
in
ss
***
pa
Warning light (optional)

being stopped.
fe
R1-1
Sa
Barricade stripes point to

Traffic TRAFFIC
CONTROL EM-3
the direction traffic is to
control
person POINT pass.
4 feet minimum
* Use the TRAFFIC
Type 3 Barricade
Warning light (optional) CONTROL POINT sign,
Stopped
vehicle
in conjunction with a
ROAD USE standard STOP sign.
PERMIT
AREA W3-4
CLOSED Install the signs at the

REQUIRED
FOR THRU point where traffic must
TRAFFIC EM-2
XX Advisory speed stop to be checked.
EM-5 * MPH plaque (optional)
W13-1P
Mount the TRAFFIC
CONTROL POINT sign
Use appropriate closure
Warning light (optional)
directly below the STOP
signs on the barricade. sign.
Do not post notices and W20-3
other information on the

barricade.
Increase distance if traffic congestion
extends beyond the sign.
***Obtain distance from chapter 4, table 4-2.
Traffic control personnel shall wear high-visibility safety apparel at all times. Refer to chapter 4, section
4.4.1.
Park the traffic control personnel vehicles out of traffic on the right side near the closure.
Traffic control personnel should not cross the open roadway to speak to approaching drivers.
Do not stand or sit in front of or behind the barricade.
Refer to chapter 4, section 4.5.2a for barricades.
Figure 4A-10—Temporary traffic control signage for staffed emergency road closure.
November 2012
To establish a taper using a ratio of 10:1

for cones (or flares):
• Walk along a safe pathway on the AHEAD
road shoulder. Place a cone on the ACTIVITY
FIRE
shoulder every 10 paces until reaching *
the farthest location where cone 1
is to be placed. Distance should be
approximately 40 paces or 120 feet.
Set cone 1 on the shoulder.
• Move back 10 paces toward the

incident scene along the shoulder.
Take 1 pace or 3 feet into the road
and place cone 2.
• Move back 10 paces toward the 10 feet

minimum
incident scene along the shoulder. 120 feet
Take 2 paces or 6 feet into the road or 40
paces
and place cone 3.
• Move back 10 paces toward the *

incident scene along the shoulder.
Take 3 paces or 9 feet into the road
and place cone 4. FIRE
ACTIVITY
AHEAD
• Move back 10 paces
toward the incident FW21-8
scene along the
shoulder. Take 4 paces *Obtain distance from
table 4A-1.
or 12 feet into the road
and place cone 5 near Use a lookout if traffic
the rear of the responder 5
is heavy for added
vehicle or the beginning safety. Also, take into
of the buffer space. 4
consideration weather,
3 sight distance, and any
visual obstructions, such
2 as hills and curves.
If using flares, ignite the
1 flares on the shoulder.
Cones and flares should be placed while facing oncoming traffic at all times. Do not enter the road to
place cones until it is safe to do so and immediately return to the shoulder after each cone placement.
The spacing between cones should not exceed a distance in feet equal to 1.0 times the speed limit in
mph when used for the taper.
Additional cones or flares may be used to establish a tangent along the incident area. The spacing
between tangent cones and flares should not exceed a distance in feet equal to two times the speed limit
in mph.
Figure 4A-11—Typical placement of cones for an incident.
Chapter 4B Temporary Traffic Control Sign Drawings
Warning sign (FW) (2-line)...........................................................................................1
Incident management warning signs (FW) (2-line)...................................................4
Incident management guide signs (FG) ENF FIRE ACTIVITY..................................7
Incident management guide signs (FG) Name Plate................................................7
Incident management guide signs (FG) (2-line)........................................................8
Incident management guide signs (FG) (3-line)........................................................9
Incident management guide signs (FG) DROP POINT...........................................12

November 2012
Text layout—Warning sign (FW) (2-line)
L
A
LOGGING LOG
OPERATIONS TRUCKS
L
FW11-10a FW11-10b
Dimensions (inches)
Sign A Text Border
Number Message L Spacing (upper case) Border Inset
LOGGING 30 22 4C d s
FW11-10a
OPERATIONS 36 3 5C d s
LOG 30 22 6D d s
FW11-10b
TRUCKS 36 3 7D d s
Notes
Center text on vertical and horizontal centerlines.
Text—ASA Series as noted.
For larger sizes, refer to the “Standard Highway Signs” book.
Colors
Black legend and border.
Retroreflective orange background.
References
For sign guidelines, see chapter 4, section 4.6.2.
Si gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 4B-1
November 2012
L A
HEAVY
TRUCK
TRAFFIC
L
FW11-10d
Dimensions (inches)
Sign A Text Border
HEAVY TRUCK 30 22 4C d s
FW11-10d
TRAFFIC 36 3 5C d s
Notes
Colors
References
4B-2 Si gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
L A
LOG
TRUCKS
ENTERING
ROAD
L
FW11-10c
Dimensions (inches)
Sign A Text Border
30 22 4C d s
FW11-10c LOG TRUCKS
ENTERING ROAD 36 3 5C d s
Notes
Center text on vertical and horizontal centerline.
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Incident management warning signs (FW) (2-line)
L
A
HELICOPTER
OPERATIONS
L
FW25-4
Dimensions (inches)
Sign A Text Border
FW25-4 HELICOPTER 36 3 5C d s
OPERATIONS
Notes
Colors
Retroreflective orange or pink background.
References
For sign guidelines, see chapter 4, section 4.7.
November 2012
L
A
FIRE SMOKE
ACTIVITY LIMITED
AHEAD VISIBILITY
L
FW21-8 FW25-1
Dimensions (inches)
Sign A Text Border

FW21-8 FIRE ACTIVITY

36 3 5C d s
AHEAD
FW25-1 SMOKE LIMITED

36 3 5C d s
VISIBILITY
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
L
FIRE A ROCK
TRAFFIC AND
ENTERING ROLLING
AHEAD DEBRIS
L
FW8-6a FW25-3
Dimensions (inches)
Sign A Text Border

FW8-6a FIRE TRAFFIC

36 3 5C d s
ENTERING ROAD
FW25-3 ROCK AND

36 3 5C d s
ROLLING DEBRIS
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Incident management guide signs (FG) ENF FIRE ACTIVITY

L
H
END FIRE
ACTIVITY
FG20-5
Dimensions (inches)
Sign A Text Border
Number Message L H Spacing (upper case) Border Inset
FG20-5 END FIRE 36 18 2 2 6C d s

ACTIVITY
Text layout—Incident management guide signs (FG) Name Plate

L
H
ROCK CREEK
FG21-10
Dimensions (inches)
Sign Text Border

Number Message L H (upper case) Border Inset
FG21-10 Specify incident name 36 12* 6C d s
Notes
* Height may be larger to accomodate longer names.
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Incident management guide signs (FG) (2-line)
L
HELIBASE FUEL
FG21-5 FG21-6
H
WASH AREA DIP SITE FILL SITE
A
FG21-3 FG21-7 FG21-7a
Dimensions (inches)
Sign A Text Border

Number Message L H Spacing (upper case) Border Inset
FG21-3 WASH AREA with arrow 36 24 3 6C d s
FG21-5 HELIBASE with arrow 36 24 3 6C d s
FG21-6 FUEL with arrow 36 24 3 6C d s
FG21-7 DIP SITE with arrow 36 24 3 6C d s
FG21-7a FILL SITE with arrow 36 24 3 6C d s
Notes
Specify arrow direction: left, right, up.
Colors
References
For arrow direction, see chapter 3E, section 3E.10.
November 2012
INCIDENT INCIDENT SPIKE STAGING

H
BASE BASE CAMP AREA
AHEAD
FG21-1 FG21-1a FG21-1b FG21-4
Dimensions (inches)
Sign A Text Border

Number Message L H Spacing (upper case) Border Inset)
FG21-1 INCIDENT BASE with arrow 36 36 3 6C d s
FG21-1a INCIDENT BASE AHEAD 36 36 3 6C d s
FG21-1b SPIKE CAMP with arrow 36 36 3 6C d s
FG21-4 STAGING AREA with arrow 36 36 3 6C d s
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
A
FIRE FIRE
H
INFORMATION INFORMATION
AHEAD
FG21-8 FG21-9
Dimensions (inches)
Sign A Text Border

Number Message L H Spacing (upper case) Border Inset)
FG21-8 FIRE INFORMATION AHEAD 54 36 3 6C d s
FG21-9 FIRE INFORMATION with arrow 54 36 3 6C d s
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
MANAGED A
H
BURN B
DO NOT REPORT
B
FG21-11
Dimensions (inches)
Text Text
Sign A B line 1 & 2 line 3 Border
Number Message L H Spacing Spacing (upper (upper Border Inset
case) case)
MANAGED BURN
FG21-11 36 36 3 6 6C 3C d s
DO NOT REPORT
Notes
Colors
References
November 2012
Text layout—Incident management guide signs (FG) DROP POINT
L L
FG36a
DROP
DROP POINTS
H
1, 2, 3
4, 5, 8
6
POINT
H
FG36
FG35
Dimensions (inches)
Sign Text Border
Number Message L H (upper case) Numbers Border Inset
DROP POINTS
FG36 Specify numbers and direction 24 18 3C 3C d s
or leave blank
FG36a DROP POINT 12 18 2C 6C d s

Specify number or leave blank
FG35 Arrow 12 12 NA NA d NA
Notes
Circle for FG36a is 9-inch diameter and w-inch thick.
Circle for FG35 is 10-inch diameter and w-inch thick.
Colors
References
5.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1
5.1.1 ROS Guidelines .................................................................................... 1
5.1.2 Accessibility............................................................................................. 3
5.1.3 Access and Travel Management............................................................ 3
5.1.4 Sign Planning.......................................................................................... 3
5.1.4a R
ecreational Studies, Engineering Studies, and Engineering
Judgment..................................................................................... 3
5.1.5 Coincident Routes................................................................................... 4
5.1.6 Requirements for Retroreflection.......................................................... 5
5.2 Regulatory and Warning Signs ......................................................................... 5
5.2.1 Regulatory Signs ................................................................................... 5
5.3 Guide Signs........................................................................................................... 7
5.3.1 Signing Rules for Guide Signs ............................................................. 8
5.3.1a Nonwilderness Trails................................................................. 8
5.3.1b Wilderness Trails........................................................................ 9
5.3.2 Guide Sign Layout................................................................................. 10
5.3.2a Arrows....................................................................................... 10
5.3.2b Arrow and Mileage Sequence................................................. 10
5.3.2c Message Sequence.................................................................. 11
5.3.2d Special Cases........................................................................... 11
5.3.2e Mileage Layout.......................................................................... 12
5.4 Sign Specifications............................................................................................. 13

5.5 Junction Identity Signs....................................................................................... 14
5.6 Locator Map Signs.............................................................................................. 15
5.7 Trail and Road Crossings.................................................................................. 15
5.8 Reassurance Markers......................................................................................... 16
5.9 Congressionally Designated Trails................................................................... 22
5.9.1 National Trail Systems.......................................................................... 22
5.9.1a National Recreation Trails....................................................... 22
5.9.1b National Scenic Trails.............................................................. 23
5.9.1c National Historic Trails............................................................ 23
5.9.2 National Trail System Signing............................................................. 23
5.9.2a Trailheads ................................................................................. 23
5.9.2b Road Crossings ....................................................................... 24
5.9.2c Guide Signs............................................................................... 24
5.9.2d Reassurance Markers.............................................................. 24
5.10 Summary of Standards and Guidelines by Trail Type.................................. 25

November 2012
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides standards and guidelines for the use of signs and posters
on National Forest System trails.
Chapter 5A contains typical sign placement and installation information for

common trail situations.
Chapter 5B contains standard drawings for common trail signs.
Use trail signage to provide opportunities for experiencing nature while

Use trail signage
engaging in outdoor recreation in an improved, aesthetic aTMOphere that is
to provide opportunities consistent with policy (FSH 2309.18) and forest plan direction.
for experiencing nature Select and use trail signs, posters, and markers to consistently provide the
while engaging in following:
outdoor recreation. • Route identification (number, name, or both).

• Guidance and distance to trail destinations and key points of interest.
• Safety features, such as snow shelters and resorts.
• Route reassurance and confirmation.
• User safety: warnings of known hazards.
• Notice of restrictions where use control is necessary.
• Protection of resources.
Additional locations and conditions for which signing may be needed include the
following:
• Trail termini.
• Junctions with other trails and roads.
• Administrative boundaries.
• Special management areas.
• L
akes, streams, and other features identified on maps, trail guides, or at
the trailhead.
• Interpretive opportunities.
Additional information on trail signage is located at:
Trail Matrix—<http://www.fs.fed.us/r3/measures/Inventory/Trails.htm>
5.1.1 ROS Guidelines

A key element for developing and managing a trail sign program is the
Recreation Opportunity Spectrum (ROS). ROS classes or similar management
guidelines have been adopted for each forest plan management area.
ROS offers a framework for understanding the relationships of signing and other
management actions in various settings to the kinds of experiences visitors
have. For example, hiking in a large, undeveloped area with difficult access
and few signs that provide limited information enhances the hiker’s feelings of
self-reliance with respect to orienteering skills, self-discovery, challenge, and
solitude. In contrast, walking easy interpretive trails outside a visitor center
November 2012
with numerous signs and information offers the visitor more comfort, security,
opportunities for learning, and social opportunities.
ROS guidelines may be found at <http://www.fs.fed.us/recreation/programs/

beig/beig6c.htm>.
Table 5-1 contains specific ROS information for trail signs.
In addition to the ROS, consider the following in determining the proper sign,
size, material, placement, and mounting requirements for trail signage:
• Managed uses for the trail.

• Scenic integrity objectives.
• Travel speed.
• Viewing distance.
• Clear-zone requirements (chapter 3A).
• Nighttime visibility needs.
Table 5-1—Recreation Opportunity Spectrum selection guide for materials, colors, and finishes
for trail signs, markers, and supports
Semiprimitive
Item Primitive Nonmotorized Motorized Roaded, natural Rural/urban
1. Sign materials Solid wood (or Solid wood (or Solid wood, Wood, metal, Wood, metal,
appearing so). appearing so). plywood, fiberglass, fiberglass,
limited use limited use synthetics.
of synthetics of synthetics
and metal and metal.
Color or finish Natural or Natural or Natural, stained, Stained or Painted, stained,

stained; stained; or painted painted. etched or with
preservative preservative applied decals.
not evident. not evident. Retroreflective Retroreflective. Retroreflective.
2. Sign support Tree or rustic Tree or rustic Post or tree; Wood, metal, or Wood, metal, or
materials post. post. limited use other synthetic other synthetic
of synthetics post. post.
Color or finish Natural or Natural or Natural, stained, Stained or Painted, stained,

stained; stained; or painted; painted. anodized, and
preservative preservative preservative so on.
not evident. not evident. may be evident
3. Reassurance Cut/painted Cut/painted Cut/painted or Cut/painted or Painted metal or

markers blazes; routed. blazes; routed synthetic blazes; synthetic blazes; synthetic wood,
and scorched, and scorched, routed and metal, and
or branded or branded scorched; or synthetic markers.
solid wood (or solid wood (or branded wood;
appearing so); appearing so); wood guide
limited use of limited use of poles or rock
synthetics synthetics cairns.
when a national when a national
standard; wood standard; wood
guide poles or guide poles or
rock cairns. rock cairns Retroreflective. Retroreflective.
November 2012
5.1.2 Accessibility
Where trails managed for hikers have been evaluated for accessibility, post
the following in addition to the standard message with the trail identity and
destinations at the beginning of the trail:
• Typical and maximum trail grade.

• Typical and maximum tread cross slope.
• Minimum clear tread width.
• Tread surface type and firmness.
• Any major height obstacles (as appropriate).
Forest Service accessibility guidelines, including the Forest Service Trails
Accessibility Guidelines and the Forest Service Outdoor Recreation Accessibility
Guidelines, can be viewed at: <http://www.fs.fed.us/recreation/programs/
accessibility/>.
5.1.3 Access and Travel Management

Consider the travel management direction for the trail system. Travel
management is crucial to help guide and manage visitors from the time they
first enter the forest, to the time they reach their destinations and then return to
the point of entry. Use appropriate guide signs for the traffic that is encouraged
(that is, the actively managed uses of the trail). To the extent possible,
accomplish travel management regulation through trail atlas use maps and/or
travel management signs at trail termini and junctions. Refer to chapter 6 for
information on access and travel management signage.
5.1.4 Sign Planning

Follow the direction in chapter 2 for developing, monitoring, and maintaining
a comprehensive sign plan for each trail or trail complex. Include all signing in
trail design and/or rehabilitation planning. Monitor signing effectiveness through
visitor contacts and observation of compliance. Provide the minimum signs
necessary to adequately and properly guide the user.
ecreational Studies, Engineering Studies, and Engineering

5.1.4a R
Judgment
Recreation plans or studies should be used to determine appropriate signing for
nonmotorized and nonmechanized trail systems and for guide signs on all trails.
Recreation studies or reviews should be used to determine appropriate warning

and regulatory signs and traffic control devices for motorized trails and bicycle/
mountain bike trails when use is entirely on NFS trail.
Engineering studies or judgment should be used to determine appropriate

warning and regulatory signs and traffic control devices for motorized trails and
bicycle/mountain bike trails when use is on National Forest System roads.
November 2012
Coincident routes that involve NFS road and NFS trail shall follow the Manual
on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and Forest Service standards for
roads.
Refer to section 3.8 for information on engineering judgments and engineering

studies.
5.1.5 Coincident Routes

A coincident route is defined as a single route that is managed as part of two
different inventoried routes in the forest transportation atlas. An example is a
NFS road that is also a NFS trail. There are two types of coincident routes:
1. Concurrent coincident route: A coincident route on which the uses are

simultaneous and must be managed for mixed traffic.
2. S
eparate coincident route: A coincident route on which the uses are not
simultaneous but separate, so the route is not managed for mixed traffic.
Separate use periods may occur by:
• Specific times, such as weekday and weekend.
• Seasons, such as a summer road and a winter snow trail.
Decisions to manage and sign coincident routes involving NFS road must be
based on engineering judgment or an engineering study. Routes shall be signed
before concurrent use occurs. Refer to section 3A.7.3 for information on proper
signing of coincident routes involving NFS road.
Coordinate the signing of coincident routes (road and trail or trail and trail) to
avoid confusion between types of users.
Where nonconcurrent seasonal or specific time use is allowed or designated

on system roads closed to standard highway vehicles, follow the appropriate
trail standards. Remove, fold up, or cover any road signs that are inappropriate
or distracting to the trail user. When the roads are open to highway vehicular
traffic and closed to the trail traffic, signing shall meet MUTCD and Forest
Service standards for roads. Remove, fold up, or cover any trail signs that
are inappropriate or distracting to the general driving public. Generally, trail
reassurance markers may be left in place.
When use is concurrent (that is, the road is open to highway vehicular and
trail traffic at the same time), signing shall meet MUTCD and Forest Service
standards for roads. Signs should be appropriate for both user groups. If signed,
destinations should be reachable by the road and trail traffic.
Where bicycle use occurs in conjunction with a road or where the bicycle trail is
paved, follow the guidelines in the MUTCD, chapter 9.
For coincident nonmotorized terra trails and snow trails with nonconcurrent
seasonal or specific time use, do not seasonally change the snow trail
reassurance blazers to the gray/white summer blazers unless necessary for
added visual contrast with dark summer backgrounds.
November 2012
5.1.6 Requirements for Retroreflection

Signs for roads, motorized trails, urban cross-country ski trails, paved bicycle
trails, and mountain bike trails as well as other signs intended to be seen at
night shall be retroreflective to show the same shape, color, and message both
day and night.
5.1.7 Sign Sizes

Signs should be sized according to the viewing distance and the normal rate of
travel or the desired speed of the trail vehicle.
For nonmotorized hiker/pedestrian and pack and saddle trails, 1-inch letters are
adequate for most viewing situations.
For motorized and other trail systems such as bicycle trails, determine adequate
sign sizes through appropriate studies or reviews. (See section 5.1.4a.)
For motorized, bicycle, and cross-country ski trails, see table 5-2 for
recommended minimum sizes for signs.
Letter size for interpretative, safety, and other informational signs or posters
is dependent upon the distance from which the message is to be viewed. See
chapter 10A for additional information.
Table 5-2—Minimum sign sizes for motorized, bicycle, and cross-country ski
trails
Minimum letter Minimum size Minimum size
size (inches) recreation symbol (inches) warning sign (inches)
2 12 12 x 12
5.1.8 Adopt-a-Trail Signs

Adopt-a-Trail Adopt-a-Trail signs may be used as needed to recognize cooperators’ help with
trails.
5.2 Regulatory and Warning Signs

For on-trail signing needs, use standard regulatory and warning sign messages,
shapes, and colors as found in the MUTCD and chapter 3A. Nonstandard
message signs shall be approved by the Washington Office Director of
Engineering. Table 5-3 gives specific trail regulatory and warning sign
information for the different types of trails.
HIGH DESERT
FOUR WHEELERS
5.2.1 Regulatory Signs
Provide regulatory information at the trailhead if possible. Stress education
approaches over restrictions. Compose regulatory sign messages that minimize
prohibitory language. Use a courteous tone and explain restrictions in terms of
easily understood resource or user benefits with which the public can relate.
November 2012
Table 5-3—Regulatory and warning sign requirements

Minimum size Shape or
Trail type Sign face (inches) Color sign type
Hiker/pedestrian Retroreflective not Warning: 12 x 12 If used, follow If used, follow
pack and saddle required; use for MUTCD colors MUTCD shapes
added emphasis
Wilderness Never Regulatory: limited NA NA
retroreflective use at trailhead
Warning: do not use NA NA
Cross-country ski, Shall be Warning: 12 x 12 Shall follow Shall follow
urban setting or night retroreflective MUTCD colors MUTCD shapes
skiing
Cross-country ski, Retroreflective not Warning: 12 x 12 If used, follow If used, follow
semi-primitive required; use for MUTCD colors MUTCD shapes
motorized and added emphasis
nonmotorized ROS
Bicycle, Shall be Shall follow MUTCD Shall follow Shall follow
paved or coincident retroreflective table 9B-1 MUTCD colors MUTCD shapes
with roads
Mountain bike Shall be Warning: 12 x 12 Shall follow Shall follow
retroreflective MUTCD colors MUTCD shapes
ATV/motorcycle Shall be Warning: 12 x 12 Shall follow Shall follow
Snowmobile Shall be Warning: 12 x 12 Shall follow Shall follow
Water Shall be Warning: 12 x 12 Shall follow
Shall follow retroreflective MUTCD colors
MUTCD shapes
Limit use of on-trail regulatory signs and posters to the minimum needed in
order to:
• Ensure consistent protection of the trail and adjacent resources.

• P
rovide for the safety and enjoyment of the user.
• Provide for enforcement of regulations.
The traffic management strategies of “discourage” and “eliminate” may be

preferable to the use of regulations in some cases.
Place regulatory signs at the point of regulation.
Larger signs may be used for increased visibility or strong emphasis when need
has been determined.
November 2012
5.2.2 Warning Signs and Markers

Consistent with the management plan for the trail or area, use warning signs
to alert users of known hazards that, relative to the ROS setting, are unusual,
unexpected, or not readily apparent to the typical visitor under conditions when
use normally occurs. Consider changing trail grade, alignment, or location or
taking other measures to mitigate the hazard before using a warning sign. Do
not use warning signs and markers in wilderness.
Use adequate advance placement distances for warning signs to allow time for
safe user response.
When a need has been determined, use standard object markers according to
the following direction and guidance in chapter 3 to identify obstructions within
or adjacent to the trail:
• T
ype II object markers are used to mark collision hazards adjacent to the trail,
such as dropoffs or culvert ends that coincide with abrupt alignment changes
or that are obscured by vegetation.
• Type III object markers are used to mark collision hazards within the trailway,
such as bridge railings or abutments narrower than the travel way.
5.3 Guide Signs

Use guide signs to identify the trail and its directions and for guidance to
destinations.
Signs shall be located either at the junction or in advance of the junction such
that trail junctions are evident.
Three types of guide signs are used on NFS trail (see figure 5-1).
TONTO RIM TR NO 169

JCT VERDE RIVER ROAD 8
BIG CREEK TR NO 147 Mountain View Tr No 2
PHOENIX TR NO 91 PIPERS CAMP Mountain View Tr Hd 5
JCT PHOENIX ROAD 7 HIEROGLYPHICS SPRINGS Moose Meadows Tr No 4
TD TDW FRD
Nonmotorized, primitive, and Wilderness use (optional) Motorized, bicycle, and cross-
wilderness use (routed) (routed) country ski use (retroreflective)
Figure 5-1—Trail directional signs.
November 2012
5.3.1 Signing Rules for Guide Signs
5.3.1a Nonwilderness Trails

1. Route identification (required)
• Route
identification (trail name, number, or both) and the trail direction(s)
are required for all system trail legs at all NFS trail junctions.
— Example: Great Ridge Tr. No. 458 #.
— Exception: Do not identify trail legs on which traffic is discouraged,
prohibited, or against one-way traffic flow.
• Use
only names and numbers that appear on the most current Forest
Service trail maps.
• Include national trail designations as appropriate.
• The
trail route identification and its direction(s) should always be signed
first and then followed by the destinations associated with that trail.
2. Destinations
Distances shall be • Required trail destinations
used when showing — Exit signing: At a minimum, show the direction and distance to the
destinations. trailhead or trail access point at the first junction from the trailhead or
access point.
• Optional trail destinations
— Facilities, such as trailheads, campgrounds, picnic areas, winter
shelters, rental cabins, and other key points of interest.
— Major geographic or natural features such as lakes, major rivers and
streams, passes, falls, and meadows.
— Administrative structures such as guard stations.
• S
ign only those destinations that can be readily accessed by the
intended trail user.
• If a destination has been identified on a guide sign, identify it on all
subsequent guide signs along the trail until the destination is reached.
• Identify destinations that previously appeared on guide signs so visitors
will know they have reached their destinations. The name of the
destination or feature, when reached, should be either (1) a single sign
panel or (2) a top-centered line when included on a sign containing route
and destination information, as shown in figure 5-2.
• L
isting a trail or road as a destination is not desirable. A junction with
another trail or road can be a destination and, if signed, should be
signed with its appropriate directional arrow and distance (for example:
JCT. WORMWOOD TR. NO. 222 5 #.)
• W
here clearer meaning will result on nonwilderness trails, use standard
Federal Recreation Symbols in lieu of words.
• W
hen words are used, complete words are preferable. Abbreviate
where message length causes excessive sign length and where the
abbreviation cannot be misunderstood. For standard abbreviations, refer
to chapter 1.
November 2012
W HITE RIVER P ASS
Feature or destination name only
W H I T E R I VER P ASS
S F K WH I T E R I VER T R N O 138
INDIA N CR EEK T R N O 211
Feature name and route and

destination information
Figure 5-2—Feature identification.
3. Distances
• Distances shall be used when showing destinations.
• S
how destination mileages for each destination as fractions to the
nearest 4 or 2 mile for destinations up to 3 miles; after 3 miles, show to
the nearest mile.
• O
nly cross-country ski trails are measured in kilometers. Use decimal
kilometers up to 1 kilometer (0.1 to 0.9). Distances shall be rounded to
the nearest kilometer with no decimal after 1 kilometer.
5.3.1b Wilderness Trails

Use signs within wilderness and primitive areas only when necessary to protect
the resource or to provide for visitor safety.
1. Route Identification
• Identify trail legs at all system trail intersections where necessary.
Route identification may include trail name, number, or both, or locally
identifiable destination. Include appropriate directional arrow(s).
• W
hen consistent with other trail markings, blazes or cairns may be used
in lieu of guide signs to indicate trail direction.
2. Destinations
• Show direction arrows only.
• Required trail destinations.
— E
xit signing: show the direction to the trailhead or trail access at the
first junction from the trailhead or access point.
• Prohibited destination signing.
— Do not sign major destinations at the destination location.
— Do not sign geographic or natural features.
November 2012
• Optional trail destinations

- Guide signs may be used to identify appropriate trail destinations.
- Administrative structures may have an identification sign.
3. Distances
• Do not provide mileages.
4. Prohibited signs
• Do not use standard Federal Recreation Symbol signs.
• Do not use interpretive information or locator signs.
5.3.2 Guide Sign Layout

Limit guide signs to four lines of text for best user comprehension, sign
readability, and stability. If more lines are needed, use two sign panels. Do not
use more than five lines of text on a sign.
5.3.2a Arrows
Arrow placement on signs is extremely critical to the functionality of the sign. As
a general rule, directional arrows should be horizontal or vertical, but at irregular
intersections, an oblique arrow may convey a clearer indication of the direction
to be followed. In some cases, especially trail junctions, combinations of arrows
may be needed.
5.3.2b Arrow and Mileage Sequence

Arrow placement controls the message sequence first, then mileages.
Standard arrow sequence with mileages is as follows:
1. Straight ahead (vertical) arrows, lowest mileage first.

2. Left arrows, lowest mileage first.
3. Right arrows, lowest mileage first.
Arrows pointing straight ahead and to the left shall be to the extreme left of the
line of text, while arrows pointing to the right shall be to the extreme right of the
text. These principles and guidelines are illustrated in figure 5-3.
COULEE GULCH TR NO 23
MIDDLE FORK TR NO 38
MIDDLE FORK RANCH 5
Figure 5-3—Standard arrow placement.
November 2012
5.3.2c Message Sequence

1. If at a destination to be named, centered name or destination or geographic
feature.
2. First trail (based on proper arrow sequence) identity and its direction(s).
3. Destinations and mileages for features on or accessed by first trail.
4. Second trail (based on proper arrow sequence) identity and its direction(s)
(if applicable).
5. Destinations and mileages for features on or accessed by second trail.
6. Additional trails and destinations as needed.
Text lines and arrows for route identities and destinations are to be left-justified
first and then right-justified if possible. (See figure 5-4.)
TONTO RIM TR NO 169

JCT VERDE RIVER ROAD 8
BIG CREEK TR NO 147 Mountain View
PHOENIX TR NO 91 PIPERS CAMP Mountain View
JCT PHOENIX ROAD 7 HIEROGLYPHICS SPRINGS Moose Meadows
TD TDW FRD
Figure 5-4—Typical sign layout.
5.3.2d Special Cases

Trail signs require that the trail route identification and its direction(s) be signed
first; the destinations associated with that trail are then listed under the trail
identification. L junctions require combinations of arrows that are an exception
to the standard arrow placement rules.
The sign shown in figure 5-5 is for a trail that has a right L junction. In order to
represent the trail and the destinations on that trail properly, the destination to
the right must be signed before signing the next trail leg and any destination to
the left.
Coulee Tr. No. 424

Coulee Gulch 5
Middle Fork Tr. No. 437
Middle Fork Trhd. 5
Figure 5-5—Trail sign with a right L junction.
November 2012
The sign shown in figure 5-6 is for a trail that has a left L junction. In order to
represent the trail and the destinations on that trail properly, the vertical arrow
must be placed on the right and, if signing a straight ahead destination, the up
arrow will be next under the left arrow in its proper position on the left of the sign.
Coulee Tr. No. 424

Coulee Gulch 5
Middle Fork Trhd. 5
Figure 5-6—Trail sign with a left L junction.
5.3.2e Mileage Layout

Mileage is not to be aligned in the same column as the trail numbers. There are
three options for displaying mileage on signs (figure 5-7):
1. Mileage for up and

Coulee Tr. No. 424 left directions may be
aligned in the same
C oulee Gulch 8 column with the right
arrows (right justified).
Middle Fork Trhd. 5
Coulee Tr. No. 424 2. All mileage may be

placed in a single
Middle Fork Tr. No. 437 column before the
Middle Fork Trhd. 5 arrows on the right.
Middle Fork Ranch 5
Coulee Tr. No. 424 3. Mileage may be

entered with the text
Middle Fork Tr. No. 437 line.
Middle Fork Trhd. 5
W. Fk. Ranch 5
Figure 5-7—Three options for mileage display.
November 2012
5.4 Sign Specifications

Select the sign material, color, size, and shape that best suit the trail purpose
and the ROS class (see table 5-1) or management prescription for the area.
Signs shall conform to the specifications in chapter 14.
Table 5-4 gives specific trail guide sign information for the different types of
trails. Text requirements are consistent with series established by the American
Standards Association (ASA).
Table 5-4—Guide sign requirements

Capital ASA
Trail type Sign face Series C text Color Shape
Hiker/pedestrian Typically routed 1 inch, routed Unfinished wood with scorched or TD
pack and saddle blackened legend or WPC material
Wilderness Routed only 1 inch, routed May be unfinished wood with TD

scorched or blackened legend or
TDW
Cross-country ski Shall be 2 inches, minimum White legend on brown background FRD
urban setting or retroreflective
night skiing
Cross-country ski May be routed 1 inch, routed May be unfinished wood with TD
semi-primitive scorched or blackened legend or
motorized and WPC material
nonmotorized ROS
Bicycle Shall be 2 inches, minimum White legend on brown background FRD

paved or coincident retroreflective
with roads
Mountain bike Shall be 2 inches, minimum White legend on brown background FRD
retroreflective
ATV/motorcycle Shall be Capital ASA Series C, White legend on brown background FRD
retroreflective 2 inches, minimum
Snowmobile Shall be 2 inches, minimum White legend on brown background FRD

retroreflective
Water Shall be 2 inches, minimum White legend on brown background FRD

retroreflective
November 2012
5.5 Junction Identity Signs

In a trail system where junctions are designated with numbers or letters, a
junction identity sign may be used. Signs should use “JCT” followed by the
number or letter of the junction.
With junction-numbered or junction-lettered systems, it is especially important to

ensure that trail maps or locator map signs are available either at the trailhead
or along the trail.
Use junction signs in conjunction with trail guide signs at the trail junction.
Mount above or below the guide sign on the same post (see figure 5-8). Table
5-5 gives specific trail junction identity sign information for the different types of
trails.
Table 5-5—Junction identity sign requirements

Capital ASA
Trail type Sign face Series C Text Color Shape
Hiker/pedestrian Typically routed 1 inch, routed Unfinished wood with Rectangle
pack and saddle scorched or blackened legend
or WPC material
Wilderness Routed only 1 inch, routed May be unfinished wood, TD or

scorched or blackened legend, TDW
or WPC material
Cross-country ski Shall be 2 inches, minimum White legend on brown FRD

urban setting or retroreflective background
night skiing
Cross-country ski May be routed 1 inch, routed May be unfinished wood TD

semi-primitive with scorched or blackened
motorized and legend, or WPC material
nonmotorized ROS
Bicycle Shall be 3 inches, minimum White legend on brown FRD

paved or coincident retroreflective background
with roads
Mountain bike Shall be 2 inches, minimum White legend on brown FRD

retroreflective background
ATV/motorcycle Shall be 2 inches, minimum White legend on brown FRD

Snowmobile Shall be 2 inches, minimum Black legend on orange 9 in x 12 in

retroreflective background diamond
TB-2
White legend on brown FRD

background
Water Shall be 2 inches, minimum White legend on brown FRD

November 2012
5.6 Locator Map Signs

Use of self-locator map signs is often appropriate at a trail junction to provide an
extra measure of orientation and security. At a minimum, the map should clearly
display the trail system and the user’s location, when at that particular map, with
a “You Are Here” arrow.
Depending on the type of trail system, other information may be needed, such
as groomed or ungroomed conditions. See figure 5-8.
JCT
A
Mountain View Tr. No. 2
Trailhead 5
Moose Meadows Tr. No. 4
YOU ARE HERE
Figure 5-8—Typical trail guide sign installation.
5.7 Trail and Road Crossings

When trails cross each other or roads, there is a potential for accidents.
When roads and trails cross, MUTCD and Forest Service standards shall be
followed. Determine the need for intersection control on the trail and/or the need
for crossing signs on the road by engineering judgment or in an engineering
study.
When trails cross each other, determine appropriate signing by a recreation

study or review. Consider the road or trail characteristics, sight distance,
stopping distance, traffic types, volumes, speeds, and applicable state traffic
laws. Refer to chapter 3A.
Crossing signs shall be located at the best possible sight and stopping distance
for both the road user and the trail user. Signs should be placed 10 to 15 feet
from the road shoulder or far enough back to be outside of snow berms when
roads or trails are plowed.
Road crossings and their related signing shall be coordinated with the governing
road agency.
November 2012
5.7.1 Regulatory and Warning Signs

Advance crossing or crossing warning signs (MUTCD Vehicular Traffic and
Nonvehicular Signs Series W11) may be used to warn the users driving on
roads of trail traffic crossing the road.
Regulatory and warning signs may also be needed on the trail to regulate or
control the trail users before they cross the road.
While STOP and YIELD signs are generally not needed where trails cross each
other, evaluate each crossing on a site-by-site basis.
Refer to figure 5A-1 for typical placement of regulatory and warning signs on the
road and on the trail.
5.7.2 Guide Signs

Retroreflective road guide signs may be used to identify trail access points where
trails cross a road or terminate on a road and where trailhead parking facilities
have not been developed. Use Federal recreation symbols as appropriate to mark
crossings. Refer to figure 5A-2 for typical placement of road guide signs.
Install road guide signs only where traffic safety will not be compromised by
slowing or stopping vehicles and where there are appropriate turnouts within
sight distance for safe parking. Guide signs shall not be installed where there
are no safe approaches and turnouts.
Refer to chapter 3C for sizing, placement, and mounting. As a general rule,

road signs should be placed before the intersection at a sufficient distance
as determined by engineering judgment or study that considers speed, sight
distance, traffic volume and type, season of use, and the location of other
possible conflicting intersections.
5.8 Reassurance Markers

Reassurance markers reconfirm the identity, location, or route of the trail. Use
appropriate standard route markers, blazers, cairns, or guide poles where needed
to reassure travelers that they are on the trail. Do not use where the trail is self-
defining under conditions in which use normally occurs, or if excluded under the
trail management plan.
Do not place access and travel management information on reassurance markers.

Access and travel management information needs to be displayed separately with
sufficient detail to show dates or reasons.
From the following markers, select those that are most appropriate for the trail
type and ROS Class (see table 5-1):
1. Route markers
A route marker provides the minimum information necessary to reconfirm
the trail identity. It should include the route number or letter, any specific
logos such as National Trail markers, and the appropriate trail blazer. Do
not place agency or cooperator logos on the route marker. See figure 5-9
for priority of placement of the different symbols on route markers.
November 2012
Route number
or letter 22
Trail marker
Blazer
Minimum
30 inches
Figure 5-9—Priority and placement of reassurance markers.
U
se the minimum number of route markers along the trail, at road
crossings, past trail junctions, and at termini as needed to reconfirm the
identity of the trail.
W
here vandalism is a problem, it may be advisable to place the route
marker a short distance along the trail, beyond and out of sight of trail
beginnings and crossings of roads or other trails.
a) Route number or letter.
lace the route identification number or letter at the top of post. The
P
following methods may be used:

• Number or letter routed and scorched, blackened, or branded into
wood post or sign.
• Number or letter on wood, aluminum, plastic, or fiberglass sub
strate, screw mounted to wood post.
• Number or letter decal affixed to fiberglass post.
On metal markers, white numbers or letters on brown background are
recommended.
b) Trail markers.
When the trail has a designated logo, such as a National Scenic
Trail, National Recreation Trail, or National Historic Trail, place the
appropriate marker beneath the route identification number or letter.
Follow ROS guidelines and the management direction established for
the trail. Table 5-6 gives specific trail marker information for the different
types of trails.
c) Snow trail difficulty levels.
Snow trail difficulty levels are used to provide general user information for
snow trails.
O NOT use these difficulty levels for hiking/pedestrian trails to indicate

D
degree of difficulty based on accessibility. (Refer to section 5.1.2.)
November 2012
Table 5-6—Reassurance marker requirements
Trail type Sign face Blazer Color Size (inches)
Hiker/pedestrian NA TB-1 Grey/white 5x7

pack and saddle Cut/painted/branded Natural
Wilderness NA Cut or branded Natural

Do not use plastic
Cross-country ski Shall be TB-1 Blue 5x7

urban setting or retroreflective
night skiing TB-2 with arrow 9 x 12
Cross-country ski May be TB-1 Blue 5x7

semi-primitive retroreflective
motorized and TB-2 with arrow 9 x 12
nonmotorized ROS
Bicycle Shall be Federal Recreational White legend on brown Minimum 12

paved or coincident retroreflective Symbol RL-090 background square inches
with roads
Mountain bike Shall be Federal Recreational White legend on brown Minimum 3

retroreflective Symbol RL-090 background square inches
ATV/motorcycle Shall be Federal Recreational White legend on brown Minimum 3

retroreflective Symbol RL-150 or RL-170 background square inches
Snowmobile Shall be TB-1 Orange or 5x7

retroreflective Fluorescent
TB-2 with arrow orange 9 x 12
Water Shall be Federal Recreational White legend on brown Minimum 3

retroreflective Symbol RW-020 background square inches

Difficulty levels are based on a national set of characteristics and
standards, not on a comparison of trails against one another. See FSH
2309.18 for policy concerning use and application of difficulty levels.
Use of signage or maps that indicate national trail difficulty standards is

necessary to ensure consistency. Consider site-specific signage or map
information that indicates the physical trail standards and maintenance and/
or grooming schedules.
S
implified difficulty symbol: This symbol (figure 5-10) indicates a generic
degree of difficulty. It is not site specific and often does not present the trail
user with enough information.

Signing difficulty levels with simplified difficulty symbols is optional. If these
symbols are used, they shall be used in accordance with the national trail
standards found in the Forest Service Handbook exhibits for trail activities.
When using a difficulty symbol, identify the difficulty level of the trail at the
information board, beginning of the trail, and where significant changes occur
in trail segments. Simplified difficulty symbols are shown in figure 5-10.
November 2012
Easiest More Difficult Most Difficult

DD-1 DD-2 DD-3
Figure 5-10—Simplified difficulty symbols.
2. Blazers
If the trail is well defined, very few blazer reassurance markers are needed
except for openings and road or trail crossings. For trails that are not well
defined, blazers may need to be intervisible during conditions under which
use normally occurs.
W
hen blazer reassurance markers are used, place them on posts or trees
at least 5 feet above tread level or expected snow level for winter trails.
Blazers generally are placed on the right side of the trail but should be
placed on the side that provides the most visibility and clearest indication of
direction.
U
se only cut, painted, or branded/scorched blazes in wilderness. Limit
painted blazes only to those wilderness trails identified in the National
Trails System Act, and associated intersecting trails where determined
necessary.
a) Colored diamonds
se the small TB-1 (5 by 7 inches) metal or plastic diamond marker
U
(see figure 5-11), retroreflective (for night use) or nonreflective when
called for in the trail management plan. Do not use colored diamonds
for wilderness trails.
ount on trees or, where properly positioned trees are not available, on
M
posts. When diamond markers are to be mounted on trees, aluminum
nails should be used. Leave a portion of the shank exposed to allow for
tree growth.
n arrow may be placed in the center of the TB-2 (9 by 12 inches; see
A
figure 5-11) to indicate the trail direction for additional visibility in open
areas or to indicate continuing direction or an unusual change in direction
that does not present a hazard. Do not use these markers in lieu of curve,
turn, or other warning signs where conditions require a standard warning
sign as determined by recreational studies or review or engineering study
or judgment. Use this method sparingly and not in place of a standard
blazer.
November 2012
5” x 7” 9” x 12”
TB-1 TB-2
Figure 5-11—Colored diamond blazers.
b) Cut blazes
se cut blazes when called for in the trail management plan. Cut
U
blazing is the preferred reassurance marking system in wilderness
areas where trees are available. Improper blazes cannot be corrected.
Cut blazes carefully and cleanly to conform closely to the dimensions
shown in figure 5-12.
c) Painted blazes
se painted blazes on trees or rocks only where specified in the trail
U
management plan. Do not paint without using a template and paint
carefully to specified dimensions and color.
d) Branded or routed and scorched blazes
ither branded blazes or routed and scorched blazes may be used
E
where specified in the trail management plan.
ield branding may be used on the face of the guide sign or on a
F
flattened portion of the tree or post that supports the guide sign.
he blaze may also be branded or routed and scorched in a shop on
T
the following:
• The face of the guide sign.
• A 6- by 10-inch piece of wood the same substrate as the guide sign.
• The support post for the guide sign.
irectional arrows may be branded or routed and scorched below the
D
blaze, indicating the direction(s) of the trail.
November 2012
Blaze trees
on both sides
4” Cut no
2 in. deeper than
2-4 in. necessary for
clear visibility.
8 in. Cut on both
sides, visible
from both
directions.
Figure 5-12—Cut blazes.
e) Federal recreational symbols

inimum 3-inch Federal recreation symbols such as RL-170 or RL-090,
M
may be used as reassurance blazers. Symbols shall be mounted to
posts such as flexible fiberglass. National recreation trail symbols shall
not be used as reassurance markers.
3. Cairns
R
ock cairns may be used through rocky, treeless areas as necessary for
guidance and safety. Base spacing on visibility conditions expected during
adverse weather.
S
ee figure 5-13 for typical details. Select and fit rocks for stability against
displacement. Construct cairns so they are high enough to appear above
vegetation. Where practicable, set guide poles or posts in cairns where
needed for winter travel guidance.
November 2012
3 feet
minimum
30 inches
minimum
Figure 5-13—Rock cairn.
4. Guide poles

Guide poles may be used to delineate the trail when the location is not
obvious. When used, set poles at the maximum intervisible distances required
for guidance through treeless areas, such as meadows and muskeg areas.
Select natural pole materials to harmonize with the environment except where
the management plan requires increased visibility (for example, snowmobile
and cross-country ski trails). To increase visibility, consider painting the poles
(colored to match the plastic blazer), mounting plastic trail blazers on both
sides of the poles, or wrapping retroreflective tape around the pole.
W
ooden guide poles shall have a minimum diameter of 4 inches and a
minimum height of 6 feet above ground or snow level. Where ground
conditions make the setting of wood poles impractical, the use of metal or
other materials is justified.
5.9 Congressionally Designated Trails

Congressionally designated trail signage must be consistent among administrative
units. Coordinate area and trail management plans as appropriate. Standardize
trail signing within areas that include more than one administrative unit.
5.9.1 National Trail Systems

National trails “provide for the ever-increasing outdoor recreation needs of an
expanding population and in order to promote the preservation of, public access
to, travel within, and enjoyment and appreciation of the open-air, outdoor areas,
and historic resources of the Nation…” (National Trails System Act of 1968).
5.9.1a National Recreation Trails

National recreation trails are designated under regional forester authority to
provide for a variety of outdoor recreation uses in or reasonably accessible to
urban areas.
November 2012
5.9.1b National Scenic Trails

National scenic trails are trails designated by Congress to provide for maximum
outdoor recreation potential and for the conservation and enjoyment of the
nationally significant scenic, historic, natural, or cultural qualities of the areas
through which they pass.
5.9.1c National Historic Trails

National historic trails are designated by Congress and follow as closely as
possible and practicable the original trails or routes of travel of national historic
significance. They identify and protect the historic route and its historic remnants
and artifacts for public use and enjoyment.
5.9.2 National Trail System Signing

Signing of trails in the National Trail System requires special emphasis to
denote their uniqueness and special qualities. Identify national scenic, historic,
and recreation trails with the appropriate national marker, such as those shown
in figure 5-14. Sign according to the management objective of each trail system.
The policy and criteria for signing and posting national trails are the same as for
other National Forest System lands, with the exceptions noted in the following
sections.
RE L DIV
L C TA I
A N
R
D
E
ON
EA
E
TIN
TR
U A
TIO
N AT I
CON
AIL
N
N AT
TRAIL I O NA L S C E N I C T R A I L
Figure 5-14—Examples of national trail markers.
5.9.2a Trailheads
At trailheads or developed recreation sites associated with the trail, mount the
9-inch national trail marker on the base of the site identification sign or on a
separate post in a prominent location.
November 2012
5.9.2b Road Crossings

To indicate the trail crossing a road, use the 9-inch marker along NFS road
when speeds are 35 mph or lower. Use the 18-inch marker on roads when
speeds are 40 mph and higher. Mount the markers 1-inch below the guide sign
identifying the trail or its destinations. If no other identification sign exists, the
marker should be mounted on a separate post to identify the trail. Its use is
intended only as a symbol associated with the trail. The words are not intended
to be read by motorists at highway speeds.
Larger signs may be produced and used for special situations on high speed
highways. Maintain the same shape and colors when ordering special size
signs.
5.9.2c Guide Signs

When the trail guide sign is located on the national trail, identify the national trail
designation by use of reassurance markers mounted below the guide sign. Use
the 32-inch national trail marker to identify the trail. Do not mount the national
trail marker directly on guide signs.
When the trail guide sign is not located on the national trail but is located at a
trailhead or junction when the national trail is identified on a guide sign as a
destination, use the directional arrow, the abbreviation JCT, the name of the
trail, and the distance to the junction. Do not abbreviate the trail name. Refer to
figure 5A-18.
5.9.2d Reassurance Markers

See section 5.12. Depending on the management plan for the national trail,
reassurance markers for national trails will consist of one of the following:
• Paint mark.
• 32-inch plastic or metal blazer with the official logo.
• Branded or routed official logo.
To keep travelers on course, use reassurance markers at all intersections and
locations where the trail location could be uncertain. Do not use the national
logo marker off the national trail.
Reassurance markers may be placed on a separate post or tree, or just below

a guide sign on the same support if mounted below a guide sign. They shall
be mounted or branded directly on the post or tree supporting the sign, or on a
separate board (approximately 6 by 10 inches) that is fastened to the support.
Directional arrows below the marker shall indicate the direction of the trail.
When mounted on a post or tree, reassurance markers shall be about 5 feet
above the level of the tread.
In wilderness, use the brand or routed marker; do not use the plastic or metal
marker. Use the branded or routed logo to identify the trail at junctions and other
decision points, and as needed to protect wilderness resources. Do not use it as a
general reassurance marker along the remainder of the trail within the wilderness.
November 2012
5.10 Summary of Standards and Guidelines by Trail Type

Tables 5-7 through 5-13 contain summaries of the standards and guidelines for each type of trail. Each
chart is for a specific trail type.
Table 5-7—Hiker/pedestrian and pack and saddle trails

Sign requirements
Minimum size
Sign type Sign face (inches) Color Shape
Regulatory Retroreflective not Warning: 12 x 12 If used, follow If used, follow

and warning required, consider MUTCD colors MUTCD shapes
using for added
emphasis
Guide Typically routed Text: Capital ASA Unfinished wood, TD

Series C, 1 inch, routed scorched or
blackened legend,
or WPC material
Junction identity Typically routed Text: Capital ASA Unfinished wood, TD

Series C, 1 inch, routed scorched or
blackened legend
Reassurance Nonretroreflective 5 x 7 Gray or white TB-1 plastic blazer

markers cut, painted, branded
blazers, logo brands, NA NA NA
rock cairns, natural
guide poles
Sign support and placement requirements
Sign supports Posts or trees
Minimum mounting height,

trail tread to bottom of sign 5 feet
Minimum lateral distance,

edge of trail tread 3-foot clearance for pack stock
to nearest edge of sign
Remarks:
November 2012
Table 5-8—Wilderness trails

Sign requirements

Sign type Sign face Text Color Shape
Regulatory Nonretroreflective NA NA NA
Warning NA NA NA NA
Guide Routed only Text: Capital ASA Unfinished wood TD or TDW

series C, 1 inch, with scorched or
routed blackened legend
Junction Routed only Text: Capital ASA Unfinished wood TD

identity series C, 1 inch, with scorched or
routed blackened legend
Reassurance Cut, painted, or branded NA NA NA

markers blazers, logo brands,
rock cairns, natural
guide poles
Minimum mounting height

Minimum lateral distance

edge of trail tread 3-foot clearance for pack stock
Remarks:
• S
pecific onsite signs necessary for resource protection or visitor management may be used if no other
means of protection or communication is suitable.
• Generally, do not use reassurance markers except in locations where the trail is difficult to locate.
• U
se only cut, painted, or branded/scorched blazes in wilderness. Limit painted blazes only to those
wilderness trails identified in the National Trails System Act, and associated intersecting trails where
necessary.
• Do not use Federal recreation symbols or plastic and metal national trail markers.
• Guide poles should be left natural with no markers, blazers, or tape.
• Do not use warning signs.
• Limit use of regulatory signs at the trailhead.
November 2012
Table 5-9—Cross-country ski trails, urban or night skiing

Sign requirements
Minimum size
Regulatory and Shall be Warning: 12 x 12 Shall follow Shall follow

warning retroreflective MUTCD colors MUTCD shapes
Guide Shall be Text: Capital ASA White legend on FRD

retroreflective series C, 2 inches brown background
Junction identity Shall be Text: Capital ASA White legend on FRD

Reassurance Shall be 5 x 7 Blue TB-1

markers retroreflective 9 x 12 Blue TB-2 with arrow
Minimum mounting height 40 inches above average maximum snow level

trail tread to bottom of sign No more than 84 inches above current snow
level
Minimum lateral distance, 2 to 6 feet

edge of trail tread to bottom of sign
Remarks:
• Destinations on guide signs should emphasize safety features such as shelters and warming huts.
• D
istances are measured in kilometers (km). Use decimal kilometers up to 1 kilometer (0.1 to 0.9).
Round to the nearest kilometer with no decimal after 1 kilometer.
• U
se locator maps on systems with multiple loops or where the trail system is complicated and can be
confusing.
• Guide poles may be painted blue or have a blue TB-1 blazer mounted on both sides.
• U
se the blue TB-1 on ski trails that serve hikers during the off season. Do not change the blazers to
gray/white unless needed for added visibility during the summer.
• Where wide variation in snow accumulations can be expected, periodic resetting may be necessary.
• In areas with heavy summer use, consider mounting the signs on removable posts on stationary bases.
This will improve esthetics and reduce vandalism and sign maintenance.
• W
hen trees are used for mounting signs, prune limbs well above the sign so limbs will not droop with the
weight of snow and obscure the sign.
November 2012
Table 5-10—Cross-country ski trails, semi-primitive motor or nonmotorized ROS

Sign requirements
Minimum size
Regulatory and Retroreflective not Warning: 12 x 12 If used, follow If used, follow

warning required, consider using MUTCD colors MUTCD shapes
for added emphasis
Guide May be routed Text: Capital ASA, May be unfinished TD

series C, 1 inch, wood with scorched
routed or blackened legend
or WPC material
Junction identity May be routed Text: Capital ASA, May be unfinished TD

series C, 1 inch, wood with scorched
routed or blackened legend
or WPC material
Reassurance May be retroreflective 5 x 7 Blue TB-1

markers 9 x 12 Blue TB-2 with arrow

level
Minimum lateral distance 2 to 6 feet

Remarks:
• Destinations on guide signs should emphasize safety features such as shelters and warming huts.
• D
istances are measured in kilometers (km). Use decimal kilometers up to 1 kilometer (0.1 to 0.9).
Round to the nearest kilometer with no decimal after 1 kilometer.
• U
se locator maps on systems with multiple loops or where the trail system is complicated and can be
confusing.
• Guide poles may be painted blue or have a blue TB-1 blazer mounted on both sides.
• U
se the blue TB-1 on ski trails that serve hikers during the off season. Do not change the blazers to
gray/white unless needed for added visibility during the summer.
• W
November 2012
Table 5-11—Bicycle trail, paved or coincident with roads

Sign requirements
Minimum size
Regulatory and Shall be Shall follow MUTCD Shall follow Shall follow
warning retroreflective table 9B-1 MUTCD colors MUTCD shapes
Warning: 18 x 18


Reassurance Shall be 12 inches White legend on Federal recreation
markers retroreflective brown background symbol RL-090
Sign supports Posts
Reassurance marker supports Posts or trees

trail tread to bottom of sign 4 feet with 5-foot maximum

edge of trail tread 3 to 6 feet
Remarks:
• Standards shall be in accordance with the MUTCD, part 9, Traffic Controls for Bicycle Facilities.
November 2012
Table 5-12—Mountain bike trails

Sign requirements
Minimum size


Junction identity Shall be Text: Capital ASA, White legend on FRD

Reassurance 3 inches White legend on Federal recreation

markers brown background symbol RL-090
Minimum mounting height 5 feet

trail tread to bottom of sign

Remarks:
November 2012
Table 5-13—ATV/motorcycle trails

Sign requirements
Minimum size



Reassurance Shall be 3 inches White legend on Federal recreation

markers retroreflective brown background symbol RL-150 or
RL-170


Remarks:
November 2012
Table 5-14—Snowmobile trails

Sign requirements
Minimum size


Junction identity Shall be Text: Capital ASA White legend on 9- x 12-inch

retroreflective series C, 2 inches brown background diamond or rectangle
(minimum 4 inch)
Reassurance Shall be 5 x 7 Orange or TB-1 plastic blazer

markers retroreflective 9 x 12 fluorescent orange TB-2 with arrow

level

Remarks:
• Destinations on guide signs should emphasize safety features, such as shelters and warming huts.
• U
se a location map showing the trail system, groomed or ungroomed conditions, and a “YOU ARE
HERE” arrow at each intersection for user orientation and security.
• G
uide poles may be painted orange, have an orange TB-1 blazer mounted on both sides, or be wrapped
with retroreflective orange tape.
• W
November 2012
Table 5-15—Water trails

Sign requirements
Minimum size



Reassurance Shall be 3 inches White on brown Federal recreation

markers retroreflective symbol RW-020

trail tread to bottom of sign 5 feet above high water level

Remarks:
Chapter 5A Trail Signing Placement and Installation
5A.1 Trail Sign Placement and Installation.............................................................. 1
5A.2 Placement .......................................................................................................... 1
5A.3 Supports and Mountings.................................................................................. 1

November 2012
5A.1 Trail Sign Placement and Installation

This chapter illustrates typical placement and installation of trail signs.
5A.2 Placement
Signs typically are mounted 2 to 6 feet from the right edge of the trail tread to
the nearest sign edge to provide adequate clearance for the trail traffic.
Place signs where they are clearly visible. Sign placement is especially critical
for winter signing when visibility can be at its worst. Sign for the unfamiliar user
in poor weather and light conditions and with no tracks to follow. To keep signs
free from snow and ice, and to increase visibility, place signs where they will be
protected from the prevailing wind if possible. Determine placement distances
based on adverse conditions.
Maximize opportunities to limit signs to one panel. Limit signing to:
• One installation (single post or tree) per junction.
• Two signs per installation.
As a rule, place signs perpendicular or parallel to trail direction.
Signs placed more than 82 feet above the trail tread may not be visible,
especially at night.
5A.3 Supports and Mountings

Order signs with predrilled holes and mount them with zinc-plated lag screws
or bolts. Use vandal-resistant hardware where sign theft is a problem.
Reassurance blazers should be mounted with aluminum nails.
When wood posts are used, position the top of the sign 2 inches below the
top of the post on the side in contact with the sign. Use unstained posts with
tops that are rounded or sloped at 45 degrees away from the sign face. At a
minimum, butt preservative treatment is recommended. When round wood posts
are used, consider notching the post to facilitate flat mounting of the sign.
When trees are used, prune limbs well above the sign, so limbs will not droop
with the weight of snow or ice and obscure the sign. When mounting on trees,
allow space for tree growth. Select trees that:
• Are close to the trail.

• A re in a direct line of sight from the trail.
• Have the best light exposure to improve visibility.
On snow trails where wide variations in snow accumulations can be expected,

consider special support extensions that allow for periodic resetting during the
use season. In areas with heavy summer use, consider mounting the snow trail
signs on removable posts on stationary bases or receptacles. This will improve
esthetics and reduce vandalism and maintenance on the snow trail signs.
S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 5A-1
November 2012
Table 5A-1—Trail sign support and placement requirements

Reassurance Minimum Minimum lateral
Sign marker mounting height distance (Edge of trail
Trail type supports supports (Trail tread to bottom of sign) tread to nearest edge of sign)
Hiker/pedestrian Posts or trees Posts or trees 5 feet 3 feet clearance

pack and saddle pack and saddle
for pack stock
Wilderness Posts or trees Posts or trees 5 feet 3 feet
Cross-country ski Posts or trees Posts or trees 40 inches above 2 to 6 feet

urban setting or average maximum
night skiing snow level
Cross-country ski Posts or trees Posts or trees 40 inches above 2 to 6 feet

semiprimitive motorized average maximum
and nonmotorized ROS snow level
Bicycle Posts Posts or trees 5 feet 3 to 6 feet

paved or coincident
with roads
Mountain bike Posts or trees Posts or trees 5 feet 2 to 6 feet
ATV/motorcycle Posts or trees Posts or trees 5 feet 2 to 6 feet
Snowmobile Posts or trees Posts or trees 40 inches above 3 to 6 feet

average maximum
snow level
Water Posts or trees Posts or trees 5 feet above 2 to 6 feet

high-water level
5A-2 Si gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
ail
Tr
3
5 2 1
Major highway or NFSR
5
1 2 3
Highway signs Trail signs

Trail
*WII series
500 2* R1-1 W3-1 5
W16-2
FEET 3 4
4
1*
*Use appropriate symbol/message designating managed trail use.
Figure 5A-1—Typical placement of regulatory and warning signs for motorized trail road crossings.
November 2012
No turnout or safe
parking area.
152 Do not sign.
Old Highway South Fork 301
or Tr. No. 152 or Tr. No. 246
246
FRD FRD 301
152
Turnout
Major road
Min
or
Turnout roa
d
152
Signs may be
Tur mounted back to
n out back on one post
246 for low-speed roads.
6
24
246
South Fork
Tr. No. 246
FRD
Use appropriate Federal Recreation Symbols for trail use.
Trail junctions should be signed with appropriate guide signs,
travel management signs, and reassurance markers.
Refer to page 7B-11 for arrow details below recreation symbols.
Figure 5A-2—Typical placement of road guide signs for trails crossing or beginning at roads.
November 2012
B a ss C r e e k
Trailhead
T R A I L HEAD
LOLO
No* No*
No*
B ass Cr Bass Cr
TRAILHEAD TRAILHEAD
Tr hd Tr hd
or B as s Cr or B as s Cr
*Signs in these locations block sight distance for the traffic

exiting the site and have no arrows indicating direction of turn,
which makes it difficult for drivers to determine appropriate action.
Correct location is where the site is being entered. Only one
site identification sign is needed for entry into the site.
Figure 5A-3—Site identification and site approach signs.
Middle Fork Ranch

(10 miles)
Middle Fork Trail #437
Coulee Trail #424
MIDDLE FORK TR. NO. 437

5 miles
JCT. COULEE TR. NO. 424 5

MIDDLE FORK RANCH 10
Trailhead
Figure 5A-4—Trail junction signing.
November 2012
Ripple Lake
(4 miles)
Ripple Lake Trail #402

RIPPLE LAKE T R . N O . 4 0 2
RIPPLE LAKE 4
ROCK CR. T R . N O . 3 1 3
Alternate location
Recommended location
Rock Creek Trail #313
Figure 5A-5—Trail junction signing.
Jerusalem Artichoke Camp

(9 miles)
Hungry Creek Trail #234
Retreat Camp
(4 miles)
H U N G R Y C R. T R . N O . 2 3 4
Hungry Creek Camp
HUNGRY CR. CAMP 1 > (1 1/2 miles)
RETREAT CAMP 4
JERUSALEM ARTICHOKE CAMP 9
Fish Creek Trail #224 Road 123

Fish Creek Meadows (3/4 mile)
(10 miles)
FISH CR. TR. NO. 224
FISH CR. MEADOWS 10
JCT. ROAD NO. 123 ?
Figure 5A-6—T junction trail signing.
November 2012
BIG LOG GULCH TR NO 252

KENNEDY SPRINGS 9
REFRIGERATOR CAN TR NO 259
Big Log Gulch Trail #252

BEAR PRAIRIE 4
or
BIG LOG GULCH TR NO 252

KENNEDY SPRINGS 9
REFRIGERATOR CAN TR NO 259
BEAR PRAIRIE 4
Big Log Gulch Trail #252 Refrigerator

Kennedy Springs Canyon Bear Prairie
(9 miles) Trail #259 (4 miles)
Figure 5A-7—Left L junction—trail signing.

Pioneer Loop Tail #90
Lambrecht Trail #226
L A M B R EC H T T R . N O . 2 2 6
B O B C AT L A K E S 2
DEMIJOHN CR.TR. NO. 143
J C T. P I O N E E R LO O P T R . N O. 950
Demijohn Creek Lambrecht Trail #226

Trail #143 Bobcat Lakes
(2 miles)
Figure 5A-8—Right L junction—trail signing.
November 2012
Faset Peak
(1/4 mile)
W FK TR NO 235
Declaration
CORRAL GULCH 4
Trail #416
RED MOUNTAIN 9
Declaration Trail #416

West Fork Trail #235
Declaration Trailhead Red Mountain
(7 miles) (9 miles)
West Fork
Trail #235
DECLARATION TR NO 416
FASET PEAK 1/4
DECLARATION TRHD 7
Corral Gulch
(4 miles)
Figure 5A-9—L-L junction trail signing.
Faset Peak
(1/4 mile)
Management B
Travel
* *
Travel Management A Travel Management C
Declaration Trail #416 * West Fork Trail #235
Declaration * Red Mountain
Trailhead (9 miles)
Travel Management D
(7 miles) W FK. TR. NO. 235

RED MOUNTAIN 9
*Note: Travel management strategies
will complicate any signing solution. TRAIL RESTRICTIONS
To keep the strategies clear to the

public and still follow the rules
for junction signing, place a separate To prevent damage to trails
guide sign with the appropriate travel

management sign on each trail leg. Other uses allowed.
For further information, contact the
Xxxxxxxx Xxxxx Xxxxx Phone: XXX-XXXX
Corral Gulch FOR

E ST SE RVIC
E
D EP
A RT M R
ENT OF AGRICULTU
(4 miles)
Figure 5A-10—L-L junction with different travel management strategies.
November 2012
Slough Lake
(4 miles)
Phantom Creek Trail #17

PHANTOM CR. TR. NO. 17
SLOUGH LAKE 4
FROZE TO DEATH LAKE 9
East Rosebud Trail #15 East Rosebud Trail #15
Phantom Creek Trail #17

Rainbow Lake Fossil Lake
(1 1/2 miles) E ROSEBUD TR. NO. 15 (16 miles)
RAINBOW LAKE 1 >
FOSSIL LAKE 16
Froze to Death Lake

(9 miles)
Figure 5A-11—X junction trail signing.

Middle Fork Trail #2
MIDDLE FK TR NO 2
WEST FK TR NO 108
DEER CR TR NO 5
West Fork Trail #108 Deer Creek Trail #5
Figure 5A-12—Three-way junction trail signing.
November 2012
s e)
ru
fi tte
ut
(o
O D E L L CR. T R . N O . 5 7 8
FST
n-N
No
Note: Do not identify nonsystem trails.
Odell Creek
Trail #578
Figure 5A-13—Junction with nonsystem trail signing.
Granite Butte Lookout

(9 miles)
GRANITE BUTTE TR NO 440

Granite Butte Trail #440
GRANITE BUTTE LOOKOUT 9

NEVADA MTN TR NO 465
National Scenic Trail
Continental Divide
L DI
TA V
ID
N
NE
E
C O NTI
T RA
IL
NA IL
TI O RA
N AL SC E NIC T
Nevada Mountain Trail #465 Continental Divide National Scenic Trail
Figure 5A-14—Designated national trail signing.
November 2012
Tamarack Trailhead
(2 3/4 miles) TAMARACK TR. NO. 171
Ta TAMARACK TRAILHEAD 2?
m PORTER RIDGE TR. NO. 111 1
ar
ac # 11
kT JOHNSTON LAKE 6 il
a
ra
il # Tr
e
17 idg
1 rR
te
P or
(Junctions are within sight

11 distance of each other) Ta
#1 m
ar
ail ac
Tr kT
d ge ra
r RI TAMARACK TR. NO. 171 il #
17
rte TAMARACK LAKE 1 < 1
Po
PORTER RIDGE TR. NO. 111
JOHNSTON LAKE 6
Johnson Lake Tamarack Lake
(6 miles) (1 1/4 miles)
Figure 5A-15—Signage for coincident trail segment.
Note: Difficult or complicated trail junctions may

301
require signing each trail leg separately.

525
XXX TR. NO. 301
Example
466 466
12
5
5
12
Figure 5A-16—Trail signing of multiple trail intersection.
November 2012
Forest A Forest B
White River Pass

South Fork River Indian Creek Trail #211
Trail # 138
WHITE RIVER PASS

1 S FK WHITE RIVER TR NO 138
INDIAN CREEK TR NO 211
or
e
li n
Ridge
HISTORIC WHITE RIVER PASS
2 S FK TR NO 138
INDIAN CR TR NO 211
or
WHITE RIVER PASS

3
S FK WHITE RIVER TR NO 138

INDIAN CREEK TR NO 211
Figure 5A-17—Feature identification, three methods of signing.
November 2012
U.S. Highway 324
CONTINENTAL DIVIDE TR. NO. 111

MORRISON LAKE 2
COYOTE CREEK 9 Trailhead
TR 111
L DIV
TA
ID
N
NE
E
C O N TI
T RA
IL
NA
TI O
N AL SC E NIC T
RA
IL
CONTINENTAL DIVIDE TR. NO. 111
JCT. HWY 324 2
L DIV
TA
ID
N
NE
E
C O N TI
T RA
n Lake
Morrison Lake
IL
NA IL
TI O RA
N AL SC E N IC T
rriso
L DIV
TA
ID
N
NE
E
C O N TI
T RA
Mo
IL
NA IL
TI O RA
N AL SC E N IC T
RD
(2 miles)
Trai inental
Con e Trail
Divi
392
l 11
3
t
d
9
1
Note:
Do not sign trail destinations 2
on roads when road traffic
cannot drive to that destination.
4
L DIV
TA
ID
N
NE
E
C O N TI
TRA
IL
S
NA
TI O AI L
N AL TR
C E N IC
CONTINENTAL DIVIDE TR. NO. 111 RD 392

4
COYOTE CREEK 5
L DIV
TA
ID
N
NE
E
C O N TI
T RA
(5 miles)
IL
NA IL
TI O RA
N AL SC E NIC T
Trail 11
1
reek
COYOTE CREEK o te C
CONTINENTAL DIVIDE TR. NO. 111 Coy
MORRISON LAKE 7
L DIV
TA
ID
N
NE
E
C O N TI
T RA
IL
NA IL
TI O RA
N AL SC E N IC T
Figure 5A-18—Designated national trail with trail guide signs and national trail markers.
November 2012
Two Top Mtn Tr No 45

Two Top Mtn 1
Two Top Mtn Tr No 45
South Plateau Tr No 107
South Plateau Tr No 107 JCT Jct Two Top Tr No 45 12
Jct Two Top Tr No 45 12
Two Top Tr No 45 C Two Top Tr No 45
Two Top Mtn 5
Two Top Mtn 5
107 JCT
JCT
B D
45
45.1
Two Top Mtn

45
45
Two Top Tr No 45
Two Top Mtn 18
Two Top Mtn 14 Two Top Tr No. 45
Two Top Trailhead 3 Two Top Mtn 17
JCT
45
A
Trailhead
Site Identification
Site Approach
Site Approach U.S. Highway 191
Figure 5A-19—Typical guide signing for motorized trails with signs at the junctions.
November 2012
7
10
Two Top Tr No 45 Two Top Tr No 45

Two Top Mtn 5 S Plateau Tr No 107
45
45
Two Top Tr No 45 Two Top Mtn
45
Two Top Mtn 5

S Plateau Tr No 107
Figure 5A-20—Typical guide sign location when signs precede a junction on a motorized trail.
November 2012
Washburn Junction
Rendezvous Loop
Loop Junction 1 km
Volunteer Loop
Washburn Jct 2 km
Rendezvous Trail
* W Yellowstone Trhd 1 km
*Bulletin board identifies Rendezvous Loop
this as Loop Junction. Washburn Jct 0.9 km
A separate site identification
sign is not needed.
Note:
Nordic signs give
metric distances.
Rendezvous Trail
W Yellowstone Trhd 0.8 km
Loop Junction 0.4 km
Kids Loop Trail

Legend
Rendezvous Trail
Direction of travel Loop Junction 0.6 km
One Way/Do Not Enter signs W Yellowstone Trhd 0.4 km
Degree of difficulty symbols;
Rendezvous Trail
follow national guidelines
Jct Kids Loop Tr 0.4 km
for appropriate use.
Loop Junction 1 km
West Yellowstone
Trailhead
Figure 5A-21—Typical guide signing for a Nordic system with one-way loops.
November 2012

JCT CONTINENTAL DIVIDE TR 1 \
HUNGRY CREEK LOOKOUT 5
HUNGRY CREEK LOOKOUT
Road 28
23
4
7
43
B
HUNGRY CR TR NO 234
HUNGRY CR LOOKOUT 1\ A
WHITE RIVER PASS 9
A MIDDLE FORK TR NO 437
TA
L DIV
JCT RD NO 28 1\
ID
N
NE
B
E
14
C O N TI
T RA
3
IL
NA IL
TI O RA
AL SC E N IC T
N
23
7 4
43

JCT CONTINENTAL DIVIDE TR 1
ke
LOST CREEK TR NO 143

La
WHITE RIVER PASS

le
HUNGRY CR TR NO 234
Ripp
RIPPLE LK TR NO 402 TA
L DIV
ID
N
NE
E
C O N TI
T RA
IL
NA IL
TI O RA
437
N AL SC E N IC T
RIPPLE LAKE
234
40
2
Nonsystem RIPPLE LK TR NO 402

trail MIDDLE FORK TR NO 437
MIDDLE FORK TRAILHEAD 2
JCT CONTINENTAL DIVIDE TR 10
7
43

Trailhead
G
JCT CONTINENTAL DIVIDE TR 12 Continental Divide

National Scenic Trail
Site approach
Site
Ro identification
ad
#6
8
Note:
Do not use national trail markers
on guide signs. See Section 5.9. Site approach
Figure 5A-22—Typical placement of nonmotorized guide signs and logo reassurance markers for
congressionally designated trails.
Chapter 5B Trail Signing Sign Drawings
5B.1 Trail Destinaion Signs (TD)................................................................................ 1
5B.2 Trail Directional—Wilderness Shape................................................................. 2
5B.3 Trail Blazer (TB)................................................................................................... 4
5B.4 Trail Degree-of-Difficulty Symbols..................................................................... 5
5B.5 National Trail Markers......................................................................................... 6

November 2012
5B.1 Trail Destinaion Signs (TD)
Text layout—Trail destination signs (TD)

Nonwilderness and wilderness applications
Text layout dimensions (inches)
Sign D*
L number H L C text E
C TD-1 5 Varies 2 1 1
D TESUQUE TR. NO. 78 H
TD-2 7 Varies 2 1 1
E TD-3 9 Varies 2 1 1
D SANTA FE TR. NO. 145 TD-4 11 Varies 2 1 1
C
TD-5 13 Varies 2 1 1
C E C *Dimension D, text size, refers to ASA
series C letters
One-line sign TD-1 Four-line sign TD-4
SANTA FE TR. NO. 145 TONTO RIM TR. NO. 169

VERDE RIVER 8
Two-line sign TD-2 PHOENIX TR. NO. 91
JCT. PHOENIX ROAD 7
TESUQUE TR. NO. 78
SANTA FE TR. NO. 145
Five-line sign TD-5
Three-line sign TD-3 SANTA BARBARA T R . N O . 2 1 8

BEATTY'S CABIN 6
TESUQUE TR. NO. 145 PECOS BALDY TR. NO. 78
LONG VALLEY TR. NO. 72 ROWE MOUNTAIN 15
BIG CR. TRAILHEAD 9 PENASCO LOOKOUT 7
Typical layout—Arrow details
3/4 in. 1 1/4 in. References

For sign guidelines, see chapter 5.
3/8 in. For panel construction, see chapter 14.
1”
1/4 in.
3/8 in.
1/2 in.
1/ in.
4
Horizontal Vertical
November 2012
5B.2 Trail Directional—Wilderness Shape
Text layout—Trail directional–wilderness shape (TDW-1 and 2) optional use

L3
R2
A 90°
1/3L1 B
90° D 3rd line of text
H1 R2 C Space
D 2nd line of text
H2 C Space
H3
D 1st line of text
R1 E Border R1
B B
L1
L2
TDW-1 examples
BIG CREEK TR. NO. 147

PIPERS CAMP
HIEROGLYPHICS SPRINGS

Sign D*
number H1 H2 H3 L1 L2 L3 A B C text E R1 R2
TDW 1 10 2 7 8 22 24 27 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2
TDW 2 14 2 11 12 22 24 27 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2
Notes
TDW-1 = Up to 3 lines of text with up to 25 characters per line.
For 1- and 2-line signs, center text lines in message box vertically.
TDW-2 = 4 or 5 lines of text with up to 25 characters per line.
Center text lines horizontally as a group in the message box.
Specify message.
No mileage is shown on Wilderness signs.
*Dimension D, text size, refers to ASA Series C letters.
Colors
Unfinished wood with scorched or blackened text.
November 2012
Text layout—Trail directional–wilderness shape (TDW-3 and 4) optional use
L3
R2
A 90°
1/3L1 B
90° D 5th line of text
R2 C Space
D 4th line of text
H1 C Space
D 3rd line of text H3
H2 C Space
D 2nd line of text
C Space
D 1st line of text
R1 E Border R1
B B
L1
L2
TDW-4 examples
SANTA BARBARA DIVIDE TR. NO. 218

BEATTY'S CABIN
PECOS BALDY _ ROCIADA TR. NO.78
ROWE MOUNTAIN
PENASCO LOOKOUT

Sign D*
number H1 H2 H3 L1 L2 L3 A B C text E R1 R2
TDW 3 10 2 7 8 34 36 40 w 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 12
TDW 4 14 2 11 12 34 36 40 w 3 2 1 1 1 (Series C) 2 1 1 2
Notes
TDW-3 = Up to 3 lines of text with 25 to 40 characters per line.
For 1- and 2-line signs, center text lines vertically in message box.
TDW-4 = 4 or 5 lines of text with lines 25 to 40 characters per line.
For messages longer than 40 characters, use 2 lines.
Do not use for more than 5 lines of message.
Center text lines horizontally as a group in the message box.
Specify message.
No mileage is shown on Wilderness signs.
*Dimension D, text size, refers to ASA Series C letters.
Colors
Unfinished wood with scorched or blackened text.
November 2012
5B.3 Trail Blazer (TB)
Text layout—Trail blazer (TB)
L
B
C
TB-1 TB-2

Blazer Text Most often
number H L B C arrows used on
TB-1 7 5 N/A N/A N/A Hiker, pack and saddle trails;
Nordic ski trails;
snowmobile trails
TB-2 12 9 a x 5 inch snowmobile trails
Notes
Use standard arrow—same as route marker arrow. Center in diamond.
When ordering, specify size, color, arrow, and direction (if desired), and
retroreflective (if desired).
Colors
Black border and arrow.
Trail type Background Color
TB-1 Hiker, pack, and saddle trails Gray/white (nonreflective) #27722
TB-1 Nordic ski trails Blue (retroreflective/nonreflective) #15187
TB-1 Snowmobile trails Orange or fluorescent orange
(retroreflective) #12473)
TB-2 Snowmobile trails Orange or fluorescent orange
(retroreflective) #12473
References
For panel construction, see chapter 14.
For arrow details and text arrows, see chapter 3D.
November 2012
5B.4 Trail Degree-of-Difficulty Symbols
Layout—Trail degree-of-difficulty symbols
Easiest More Difficult Most Difficult

DD-1 DD-2 DD-3
H A B H A B HA B
L L L

Sign
number H & L A B Federal color chip
2 1 s 8
DD-1 3 2 2 /
13 64 Green—#14109
3 2 2 d /
15 64
2 1 2 8
DD-2 3 2 2 /
13 64 Blue—#15090
3 2 2 w /
15 64
2 1 w 8
DD-3 3 2 s /
5 32 Black—#35042
3 2 3 11/64
Notes
Place light black line around blue and green symbols for contrast.
Symbols shall be centered on square.
Colors
Use standard FHWA retroreflective sign colors.
References
For specifications, see chapter 14.
For colors, see MUTCD, page 1A-9.
November 2012
5B.5 National Trail Markers
Layout—National Trail Markers
RE
L C
A
R
ON
EA
U A
TIO
N AT I
N
TRAIL
National Recreation Trail Marker—NRT National Historic Trail Marker—NHT
L DIV
TA I
N
D
E
E
TIN
TR
CON
AIL
N AT
I O NA L S C E N I C T R A I L
National Scenic Trail Markers—NST

Marker Size Hole size
NT-1 3 2 8
NT-2 9 8
NT-3 18 a
Notes
These markers are for trails under Forest Service jurisdiction. For other trail
markers, contact National Park Service or regional office trails specialist.
Art work and Federal standard colors will be furnished by the regional trails
specialist.
Specify trail symbol.
6.1 Travel Management—Introduction ........................................................................1
6.1.1 Travel Management Sign Plans ..............................................................1
6.1.2 Travel Management Definitions ..............................................................2
6.1.2a Restriction......................................................................................2
6.1.2b Closure ..........................................................................................2
6.1.2c Designated Road, Trail, or Area ..................................................2
6.1.2d Motor Vehicle.................................................................................2
6.2 Signs for Traffic Management Strategies .............................................................2
6.2.1 Encourage (Roads)/Manage (Trails) ........................................................3
6.2.2 Accept.........................................................................................................5
6.2.3 Discourage..................................................................................................6
6.2.4 Prohibit .......................................................................................................6
6.3 Restriction and Closure Methods ..........................................................................8
6.4 Regulatory Signs .....................................................................................................8
6.4.1 Portal Signs ...............................................................................................9
6.4.2 Travel Management Signs (TM) and Decals (TM-D) ............................10
6.4.2a Boundary Travel Management Signs and Decals...................12
6.4.2b Use of Travel Management Signs and Decals.........................13
6.4.2c Road Restrictions and Closures...............................................14
6.4.2d Trail Restrictions and Closures................................................14
6.4.2e Area Restriction and Closure Travel Management Signs......16
6.4.2f Special Situations.......................................................................17

6.5. Route Markers ......................................................................................................18
6.6 Reference Location Signs (Mile Post Markers)...................................................18
6.7 Information Signs...................................................................................................19
6.7.1 Visitor Information Boards .....................................................................19
6.7.2 Posters......................................................................................................20
6.7.3 Public Notices..........................................................................................21
6.7.3a Activities Behind Gate Notice ...................................................21
6.7.3b Advance Restriction/Closure Notice ........................................22
6.8 Accessibility ..........................................................................................................22
6.8.1 Clear Passage Around Gates/Berms and Other Restriction

Devices When Pedestrian Travel Is Permitted or Encouraged
Beyond Gate .....................................................................................................22
6.8.2 Wheelchair ...............................................................................................23

November 2012
6.1 Travel Management—Introduction

The travel management rule requires that motor vehicle use on National Forest
System roads, National Forest System trails, and areas on National Forest
System lands be designated by vehicle class, and if appropriate, by time of year.
Ensuring that the public clearly understands any travel management decision is
Agency-wide critical to successful implementation of that decision.
consistency and
One of the most effective methods of communicating travel management
uniformity in the use of information is through the use of appropriate signs and posters that are clear,
uniform, and consistent on all national forests and grasslands. Visitors should
signs to communicate
expect to encounter similar signing on all national forests and grasslands.
travel management Agency-wide consistency and uniformity in the use of signs to communicate
travel management decisions will provide the foundation for implementation
decisions will provide
and enforcement of those decisions. Lack of sign uniformity and consistency
the foundation for can lead to confusion, undermine public support, and make implementation and
enforcement difficult.
implementation and
enforcement of those
6.1.1. Travel Management Sign Plans
decisions.
Units should determine specific sign strategies to implement travel management
decisions. Sign plans for designated routes and areas should be developed prior
to issuing Motor Vehicle Use Maps (MVUM) and Over Snow Vehicle Use Maps
(OSVUM). Refer to chapter 2 for specific information on developing sign plans.
Assess travel management sign needs at a large scale considering forest-wide

objectives for implementation and resources available for sign installation,
replacement, removal, and maintenance. Units also should consider current
motor vehicle uses, mixed traffic designations, and areas of potential
enforcement challenges of motor vehicle designations.
A sign plan will result in signs that are consistent in appearance and placement;
help users better understand and follow the MVUM; and likely will result in
improved user compliance. An MVUM combined with a carefully planned
strategy to provide the minimum number of appropriate signs, will reduce the
burden on agency resources for maintenance and improve the recreational
experience for forest users through better understanding of travel management
rules and designations.
When a unit develops a travel management sign plan, they should focus on
the minimum signs needed to begin implementation, for example, the route
marker. Additional signs, such as portal signs or travel management signs may
always be installed at a later date, if the need arises. It is much easier to add
new signs than to remove signs that the public has become dependent on. If
a unit elects to use signs in addition to the route marker to help implement the
MVUM, they should be used consistently and be coordinated with adjacent
units as necessary. If a unit has existing travel management signs that do not
meet current sign standards, a schedule to remove or transition to the current
standards should be included in the sign plan.
November 2012
6.1.2 Travel Management Definitions

6.1.2a Restriction
A restriction precludes the use of the route or area by a type of vehicle or traffic,
or by a specified time period.
• Type of vehicle, such as motor vehicles, passenger cars, log trucks, all-
terrain vehicles, motorcycles, or snowmobiles.
• Type of traffic, such as nonmotorized, public, or commercial.
Nonrestricted traffic or vehicles are accepted.
6.1.2b Closure
A closure means the route or area is closed to ALL types of traffic, including
foot traffic. This option is seldom used except in emergencies, such as fire or
weather closures; special management situations, such as protection of an
eagle-nesting site; or public safety issues, such as active fire areas or hazard
tree removal in beetle kill areas. The term closed should not be used to refer to
routes that have been decommissioned or converted, or on routes where some
but not all uses have been restricted.
The R11-2 ROAD CLOSED sign shall not be used for long-term travel
management road restrictions. Refer to chapter 3A, section 3A.6 for direction on
the appropriate use of the ROAD CLOSED sign.
6.1.2c Designated Road, Trail, or Area

A NFS road, a NFS trail, or an area on National Forest System lands that is
designated for motor vehicle use pursuant to 36 CFR 212.51 on the Motor
Vehicle Use Map (MVUM). Motorized use may only occur on routes and in
areas that are displayed on the MVUM (36 CFR 212.1).
6.1.2d Motor Vehicle

For the purposes of the MVUM, a motor vehicle is defined as any vehicle which
is self-propelled, other than a wheelchair or mobility device as defined in 36
CFR 261.2 , including highway legal and off-highway vehicles (OHV). Aircraft,
watercraft, and over-snow vehicles are exempted from designations under
36 CFR 212.51.
6.2 Signs for Traffic Management Strategies

Traffic management strategies are employed where it is necessary to manage or
control any class or type of traffic. Refer to FSM 7731.11. These strategies also
are used to guide visitors from the time they first enter National Forest System
lands until they depart. Consistent and proper use of strategies should provide a
positive experience while traveling on system roads and trails.
Combinations of strategies may be used on a single route, such as:
• Discouraging passenger car traffic but encouraging high-clearance traffic on
an ML 2 road.
• Prohibiting snowmobile traffic on a groomed cross-country ski trail where
skiers are encouraged.
Strategies will affect the type of signs used on a route.
November 2012
6.2.1 Encourage (Roads)/Manage (Trails)

Traffic should be encouraged/managed only on routes that are designed,
managed, and maintained for the type of traffic desired (e.g., a snowmobile
Traffic should be trail that is groomed is being actively managed for snowmobiles). Encourage/
manage strategies should be consistent with the condition of the route during
encouraged/managed
the normal season of use.
only on routes that are
Use guide signs to encourage certain types of traffic to routes designated
designed, managed, for their use. Use site approach signs, recreational and cultural interest area
and maintained for the symbols, and destination signs to provide the public with information about
destinations, facilities, and opportunities located ahead. See figures 6-1 and
type of traffic desired. 6-2 for examples. Install appropriate route markers at intersections that are
consistent with the use on the route. Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.2.
Trout Creek
Recreation Area
JCT M2-1
NFSR Maintenance
Level 3, 4, or 5 Tr o u t C r e e k
R e cr e a t i o n 3 M1-7
Area
FRD M6-1
Major NFSR, county, or state road
JCT M2-1
Tr ou t C r e e k Tr o ut C r e e k
Recreation R e cr e a t i o n
Ar e a Area
FRD FRD
M1-7
M6-1
Figure 6-1—Implement an Encourage strategy for highway legal vehicles

by using destination signs, recreational and cultural interest area symbols,
and primary route markers.
November 2012
NFSR Maintenance Level 2
Barrier to low-clearance 3
vehicles 1
5
Turnaround/parking
Tizer Basin Tizer Basin
OHV Route or
NFSR Maintenance Level 3, 4, or 5
Tizer Basin or Tizer Basin FRD

OHV Route
FRD
RL-095 RL-150
Figure 6-2—This example shows a combination strategy. Implement an Encourage strategy

for OHV traffic by using guide signs with a specific message for OHV. It also is a Discourage
strategy for passenger cars by using the vertical route marker and entrance treatment.
November 2012
6.2.2 Accept
On routes where particular types or classes of traffic are accepted but not
encouraged, the route is signed only with the appropriate route marker. Refer
to figure 6-3. Other guide signs typically are not used. Traffic should only be
accepted on routes that are suitable for that type of traffic during the normal
season of use.
Assume that nonmotorized use is always accepted on roads unless the use is
specifically prohibited by a CFR order. Do not sign for accepted nonmotorized
uses on a road. For example, a road that accepts bicycle traffic (not coincident
with a managed bicycle trail) would not have any regulatory, warning, or guide
signs for bicycles along the length of the road.
NFSR Maintenance
Level 3, 4, or 5
8351
8351 FM1-7H
Major NFSR, county, or State highway
8351
Figure 6-3—Implement an Accept strategy for ML 3, 4 or 5 roads

designated for highway legal vehicles only by using route markers.
November 2012
6.2.3 Discourage
Traffic may be discouraged through entrance management techniques, such as
carrying cross ditches through intersections, barriers, and using warning signs,
maps, or other sources of information. Use appropriate route markers. For
example, do not use a horizontal route marker intended for ML 3-5 roads on a
ML 2 road. Do not place route markers on the approach road. Other guide signs
are not used, see figure 6-4.
Standard warning signs may be used to implement a discourage traffic

management strategy by informing the road or trail user of conditions that could
affect or discourage the use of the route by certain types of traffic.
Warning signs also may be used to notify road and trail users of the suitability
of the route for certain traffic types if the route conditions are a hazard to the
user that may not be apparent at the intersection. Refer to chapter 3B, section
3B.2.9.
Warning signs should not be used to discourage low-clearance vehicles or

passenger cars for every ML 2 road. Use engineering judgment to determine
the need for such signs on a case by case determination.
NFSR Maintenance 3
Level 2 1
5 FM1-7V
Note:
NOT SUITABLE FOR
Route markers are not PASSENGER CARS FW5-1e
placed along the approach
road.
Major NFSR, county, or State highway
Figure 6-4—Implement a Discourage strategy for passenger cars by using

a vertical route marker and a warning sign. This also is an Accept strategy
for high-clearance vehicles by use of the vertical route marker.
6.2.4 Prohibit
The Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) establishes two types of enforceable
prohibitions:
1. Travel Management Rule Designations
1a. Motor Vehicle Designations. Motor vehicles are automatically prohibited

under 36 CFR 261.13, unless the route or area is designated for motor
vehicles. Once motor vehicle designations are complete, an official MVUM
shall be published. This map is mandatory and is the only requirement
needed for enforcement.
November 2012
1b. Over-Snow Vehicle Restrictions and Prohibitions. Under 36 CFR

212.81 an administrative unit may establish restrictions and prohibitions
on over-snow vehicles and produce an Over-Snow Vehicle Use Map
(OSVUM). After publication of the OSVUM, over-snow vehicle use
inconsistent with the OSVUM is prohibited. The OSVUM is the only
requirement needed for enforcement.
Routes designated on either the MVUM or OSVUM should be marked clearly

with appropriate route markers. The MVUM or OSVUM, in conjunction with
route markers, should be sufficient to communicate clearly where motor
The MVUM, in
vehicle use is allowed and not allowed. Travel management signs are not
conjunction with required for enforcement.
route markers, should 2. Orders under 36 CFR 261.50, subpart B. Other vehicle or traffic
be sufficient to prohibitions not covered under 36 CFR 261.13, and 261.14, such
as restrictions on over-snow vehicles (if not producing a OSVUM) or
communicate clearly nonmotorized traffic, may be established under an order pursuant to 36 CFR
where motor vehicle 261.50, subpart B. Orders also may be issued to prohibit motor vehicles on
designated routes for short-term emergencies or resource issues. An order
use is allowed and not should not be issued applying a prohibition to a road, trail, or area unless it
allowed. is clearly needed and enforcement is feasible and intended. If enforcement is
not planned and/or feasible, access should be managed by physical methods
to eliminate the traffic.
Signing is required for the legal enforcement of an order issued under 36

CFR 261.50, subpart B. Place a copy of the order in the ranger district and
the forest supervisor’s offices. It is not necessary to post a copy of the order
on the ground or cite the CFR on the sign.
Sign the prohibition at the point of restriction or closure with appropriate

Travel Management (TM) signs. Refer to section 6.4.2b and figure 6-5.
Remove signs when the order has been terminated.
NFSR Maintenance
Level 1
3
1
5
FM1-7V
NFSR Maintanance Level 3, 4, or 5 road
ROAD RESTRICTION
NO MOTORIZED
VEHICLES YEARLONG
To protect wildlife habitat area
To prevent damage to roads 3
To prevent damage to vegetation
NON-MOTORIZED
1
USE ALLOWED
For more information, refer to the XXX Ranger
District Motor Vehicle Use Map or call xxx-xxx-xxxx.
5
(optional)
for MVUM
Traveled way
Figure 6-5—Implement a Prohibit strategy for all motorized vehicles

using the Travel Management (TM) sign on a gate.
October 2013
6.3 Restriction and Closure Methods

The extent and duration of restriction and closure methods vary and are a
function of road and trail management objectives. Appropriate signs, restriction
devices, barriers, or other methods should be installed as necessary to keep the
prohibited traffic from traveling the route.
Long-term restrictions or closures of a year or more typically are implemented by

installing or constructing physical barriers, such as gates, earth berms, and rocks
or more permanent methods, such as disking and ripping the roadbed. The
implementation method chosen for long-term restrictions or closures is based on
many factors, such as maintenance level and the risks involved with not using a
physical barrier.
Advance warning signs may be needed to advise the traveler of restrictions

ahead, such as the GATE CLOSED AHEAD sign. When restricting traffic,
turnarounds should be available at the point of restriction. Refer to chapter 3B,
section 3B.2.5.
Signs and markings of physical closures or barriers on roads shall meet

standards in chapter 3B, section 3B.3 and the MUTCD.
6.4 Regulatory Signs

There are several types of regulatory signs that are specific to implementing or
reinforcing travel management decisions. Where signing is necessary on roads,
it shall comply with the MUTCD and these guidelines. Refer to chapter 5 for
trail signing requirements. Refer to chapter 3A, section 3A.5 for road signing
requirements.
Regulatory signs may be used for notifying the public that travel restrictions
are in effect. All regulatory signs shall be supported by laws, ordinances, or
regulations. Signs should be used according to principles in chapter 3A and
the MUTCD, section 2B-39. Examples of regulatory signs that may be used to
support travel management decisions are shown in figure 6-6.
AUTHORIZED HIGHWAY
TRAFFIC LEGAL
ONLY VEHICLES
ONLY
FR5-11a R5-3
FR5-11b

RESTRICTION AREA
STAY ON DESIGNATED ROUTES
FR5-12b
Figure 6-6—Typical regulatory signs used for travel management.
November 2012
6.4.1 Portal Signs

Portal signs are a generic regulatory sign that may be used to inform the public
that they are entering an area with travel restrictions in effect. When used on
National Forest System roads, the portal signs shall be black and white. Refer to
figure 6-7.
Portal signs are optional and are not required for enforcement of the MVUM or
OSVUM. If a unit elects to use portal signs, they should be used consistently
over the entire area covered by the MVUM or OSVUM.
Portal signs should be used according to principles in chapter 3A, sections 3A.7
and 3A.7.1.
Messages may be modified, combined, or customized based on local

designations after review and approval by the regional sign coordinator.
ENTERING MOTOR VEHICLE ENTERING MOTOR VEHICLE

RESTRICTION AREA RESTRICTION AREA
STAY ON ROUTES DESIGNATED STAY ON DESIGNATED ROUTES
ON MOTOR VEHICLE USE MAP FR5-12b
FR5-12a
Figure 6-7—Regulatory portal signs used on NFS road.
If portal signs are used on roads under other jurisdiction such as State or county
highways, the signs may be brown and white and considered to be informational.
Refer to figure 6-8. Coordinate with other jurisdictions to install signs on non-
Forest Service routes.
NATIONAL FOREST VISITORS

STAY ON ROUTES DESIGNATED
ON MOTOR VEHICLE USE MAP
Figure 6-8—Information portal sign used on non-Forest Service roads.
November 2012
6.4.2 Travel Management Signs (TM) and Decals (TM-D)

Travel management signs (TM) and decals (TM-D) inform the public of the
A standard appearance types of travel prohibited on areas, roads, and trails as well as applicable dates
and other important information. Refer to figures 6-9 and 6-10. A standard
and sequence of appearance and sequence of the message allows for immediate recognition of
the message allows the sign and promotes understanding and acceptance by the public regardless
of the administrative unit traveled. Sign messages should support travel
for immediate management decisions displayed on the MVUM, OSVUM, or CFR order and
recognition of the should refer to the MVUM or OSVUM when appropriate. The more complex the
travel management decisions, the more difficult the signing will be.
sign and promotes
Refer to section 6.4.2b for proper use of travel management signs and decals.
understanding and
acceptance by the Refer to chapter 6A for suggested messages and placement sequence.
public.
ROAD RESTRICTION TRAIL RESTRICTION AREA RESTRICTION
NO MOTOR VEHICLES
5/1 – 8/15 UNAUTHORIZED
To protect wildlife habitat area
5/1 - 8/15
ROUTE
To prevent damage to roads Unauthorize
NO
YEARLONG
MOTOR VEHICLE
TO REDUCE USE YEARLONG
USER CONFLICTS For further information, refer to the
For further information, refer to XXX Ranger District Motor Vehicle Use Map
Bearclaw Ranger District Motor Vehicle
For more information, refer to the
XXX Ranger District Motor Vehicle Use Map or call XXX- XXX-XXXX Mount
or call xxx-xxx-xxxx.
Use Map or call XXX- XXX-XXXX ce
unauthorize
Figure 6-9—Sample travel management signs (TM).
R R
E E
S S
R T R T AREA AREA
O R O R RESTRICTION RESTRICTION
A I A I
D C
T D C
T NO NO
I I MOTOR MOTOR
O O VEHICLES
BEYOND
VEHICLES
BEYOND
N N THIS POINT THIS POINT
NO NO YEARLONG YEARLONG
MOTOR MOTOR To To
VEHICLES VEHICLES protect protect
YEARLONG YEARLONG resources resources
For information, For information, For information, For information,
contact the contact the contact the contact the
Beartooth Ranger Beartooth Ranger Beartooth Ranger Beartooth Ranger
District Office District Office District Office District Office
(XXX) XXX-XXXX (XXX) XXX-XXXX (XXX) XXX-XXXX (XXX) XXX-XXXX
Figure 6-10—Sample travel management decals (TM-D) for use on flexible

posts.
November 2012
The TM sign or decal clearly displays the prohibition, not the accepted traffic.
Accepted traffic/vehicle symbols should not be displayed on TM signs or other
guide signs for several reasons:
• It is not practical or efficient to sign for all possible combinations of

accepted traffic types, including motorized and nonmotorized.
• It implies encouragement.
Use word messages instead of recreational and cultural interest area symbols
for clearer understanding or if the symbol is not representative of the specific
vehicle designation. There are no symbols for many of the MVUM standard
designations or special vehicle designations. For instance, there are no symbols
for designating vehicle width, tracked OHV, UTVs, or special conditions, such as
snow depth or surface conditions.
Word messages can also be used to combine vehicle classes and simplify the
sign message such as:
• Highway Legal Vehicles and Standard Terra OHV—use MOTOR

VEHICLES.
The TM sign or decal
• Highway Legal Vehicles, Standard Terra OHV and motorized Over-Snow
clearly displays the
Vehicles—use MOTOR VEHICLES and SNOWMOBILES.
prohibition, not the
Consider combining messages for roads, trails, and areas on the same sign
accepted traffic. when possible to avoid sign clutter. Combining messages should be done
carefully to avoid confusing and misleading the public. Confusing signs limit the
ability of law enforcement to assist in the intended management of the route or
area.
Travel management sign messages can be customized for site-specific

prohibitions and situations or if unusual conditions or special vehicle
designations exist. Consult with the forest or regional sign coordinator for
assistance and approval as necessary.
The TM sign or decal shall be posted at the point the restriction takes effect. TM
signs and decals shall only be posted where motorized traffic is stopped by a
barrier or a gate or motorized access is not possible. The text size and number
of text lines on a TM sign or decal makes it unreadable when viewed from a
moving vehicle. Signs needed to be viewed by moving vehicles shall follow the
standards in chapter 3.
The TM sign may be mounted on a closed gate or other restriction devices. A

horizontal variation accommodates gate signing and helps avoid vandalism.
Refer to section 6A for sign standards. Another variation for seasonal
restrictions is to mount the TM sign or decal on a post next to the gate so it is
visible when the gate is open.
TM decals typically are mounted on flexible posts than can be located as

needed.
November 2012
Sign sizes may vary to accommodate needed symbols, special needs, or

placement requirements other than gates.
Sign substrates will vary depending on the need, length of restrictions, and
vandalism problems. TM signs may be printed or silk-screened on a durable,
corrugated plastic substrate with interchangeable decals to relay the desired
message, or they may be retroreflective on a more permanent substrate, such
as fiberglass or high density overlay (HDO) plywood.
6.4.2a. Boundary Travel Management Signs and Decals

Boundary or restriction travel management signs (TM) and decals (TM-D) may
be used to post the boundaries of restricted or closed areas and put the public
on notice that they are entering or leaving a designated Motor Vehicle Use
Area or Over Snow Vehicle Use Area. Boundary signs are optional and are not
required for enforcement of the MVUM or OSVUM. Refer to figure 6-11.
If the boundaries for designated Motor Vehicle Use Areas or Over Snow Vehicle
Use Areas are clearly delineated on the MVUM or OSVUM, then no signing is
required. Clearly delineated boundaries include major ridgelines, streams, and
roads and trails.
Area boundaries should be signed if boundaries are not clearly delineated by

natural features, potential for confusion exists, or if there are problems with
trespass or poor public compliance.
Signs should be spaced intervisibly to clearly delineate the boundary on the

ground. Install Entering and Leaving signs back-to-back. The area name should
correspond to the name on the MVUM, OSVUM, or other travel maps.
Use the area boundary TM sign or TM-D decal when entering the area and the
area restriction TM sign or TM-D decal when leaving the area.
AREA AREA
BOUNDARY RESTRICTION
ENTERING LEAVING
XXX XXX
MOTOR MOTOR
VEHICLE VEHICLE
USE AREA USE AREA
NO AREA BOUNDARY AREA RESTRICTION

MOTOR
VEHICLES MOTORIZED ENTERING LEAVING
ALLOWED VEHICLES XXXX XXXX
6/1 thru 10/1 BEYOND OHV USE AREA MOTOR VEHICLE
THIS POINT OFF-HIGHWAY USE AREA
For more information, For more information, MOTOR VEHICLES NO
refer to the
Helena Ranger District
refer to the
Helena Ranger District ALLOWED MOTOR VEHICLES
Motor Vehicle Use Map
or call 406-329-3312
or call 406-329-3312 YEARLONG BEYOND THIS POINT
For more information, refer to the For more information, refer to the
Helena Ranger District Helena Ranger District
Motor Vehicle Use Map Motor Vehicle Use Map
or call 406-329-3312 or call 406-329-3312
Figure 6-11—Sample boundary and restriction travel management signs

and decals.
November 2012
6.4.2b Use of Travel Management Signs and Decals

Travel management signs or decals are required for enforcement of Forest CFR
orders issued under subpart B, such as:
Travel management
• Short-term or emergency prohibitions on designated routes or areas.
signs or decals
are required for • Prohibitions on nonmotorized, mechanized, or over-snow vehicle use.
enforcement of Forest Travel management signs or decals are not required for enforcement for:
CFR orders issued • Motor vehicle designations shown on a MVUM.
under subpart B
• Motorized over-snow vehicle restrictions or prohibitions shown on an
OSVUM.
Travel management signs or decals may be used to draw attention to certain

motor vehicle or over-snow vehicle prohibitions:
• In trespass or other problem areas with poor compliance from the public
when other restriction methods are ineffective.
• For educational purposes when the prohibition is new to the public.
• When a route or area historically has been open to motor vehicles.

Travel management
• To avoid confusion with other prohibitions on nonmotorized, mechanized,
signs or decals are
or over-snow use.
not required for
Use of travel management signs and decals to supplement the MVUM
enforcement for motor or OSVUM is optional and should be well thought out in a sign plan that
vehicle designations considers long-term maintenance costs and consistency within and across unit
boundaries. While the use of travel management signs and decals may provide
shown on an MVUM. additional clarification in special situations, use of these signs and decals also
may cause confusion for users since not all restricted routes and areas will be
signed. Refer to section 6.1.1 and chapter 2.
A strategy of signing all routes as either open or restricted is not consistent with
current sign policy or guidelines and is unnecessary to fulfill the requirements
of the Travel Management Rule. Units are not to use this signing strategy.
Although some units have used this signing strategy to manage access in the
past, enforcing travel management decisions with this type of signing could be
problematic. In most cases, experience has shown this practice to be ineffective
in preventing the proliferation of unauthorized routes and results in additional
sign procurement, installation, and maintenance costs.
Following are several examples of travel management signs and their uses for
road, trail, or area restrictions or closures. The list is not all inclusive.
November 2012
6.4.2c Road Restrictions and Closures

Example 1: A ML 2-5 road is not designated for public motor vehicles and
ROAD RESTRICTION is not shown on the MVUM. Administrative motor vehicle use is allowed or
NO PUBLIC permitted.
MOTOR VEHICLE
USE YEARLONG
Motor vehicle use by
The sign may be used where the road allows administrative motor vehicle
permit only traffic and possible misunderstandings could occur when the public views
Public non-motorized use
allowed yearlong motor vehicle use occurring behind the gate. Only administrative use and use
Please do not block the gate
authorized with a written authorization, such as a special use permit, wood
cutting permit or grazing permit can use motor vehicles beyond this sign.
Example 2: A ML 2 road is seasonally designated for all motor vehicles.

ROAD RESTRICTION
The sign may be used for reinforcement of the motor vehicle designation
NO MOTOR VEHICLES
5/1 – 8/15 where the road is designated for seasonal motor vehicle use, violations are
To protect wildlife habitat area occurring outside the designated dates and posting the restriction would
To prevent damage to roads
improve enforcement. These signs only can be posted where the traffic is
MOTOR VEHICLES stopped by a barrier or gate since the text size and number of text lines makes
ACCEPTED 8/16 - 4/31 it unreasonable to be viewed from a moving vehicle.
For further information, refer to
Bearclaw Ranger District Motor Vehicle
Use Map or call XXX- XXX-XXXX
6.4.2d Trail Restrictions and Closures

TRAIL RESTRICTION Example 1: A trail is designated for motor vehicles less than or equal to 50
NO inches.
MOTOR VEHICLES
greater than The sign may used where the trail width physically may allow wider vehicles
50 inches in width
YEARLONG or violations are occurring. The sign may be modified to display any width
Stay on designated routes or designated on the MVUM. Seasonal dates may be used for seasonal
Bearclaw Ranger District
prohibitions.
or call xxx-xxx-xxxx
Example 2: Wilderness Trail—No forms of mechanical transport are

TRAIL RESTRICTION
allowed.
NO FORMS
OF MECHANICAL Place signs prior to the wilderness boundary and at suitable locations to allow
TRANSPORT
ARE ALLOWED mechanical transport vehicles to turn around. The sign may be used where
YEARLONG violations are occurring and reinforcement of the wilderness restrictions is
To protect wilderness values
Non-motorized and
necessary.
non-mechanized uses allowed
Bearclaw Ranger District or call xxx-xxx-xxxx
November 2012
Example 3: A trail seasonally designated for motorcycles only.

TRAIL RESTRICTION
The sign may be used where the trail width physically may allow wider vehicles
5/1 - 8/15
but the motor vehicle designation is for motorcycles only.
YEARLONG
TO REDUCE
USER CONFLICTS
For more information, refer to the
XXX Ranger District Motor Vehicle Use Map
or call xxx-xxx-xxxx.
TRAIL RESTRICTION
Example 4: A trail not designated for motor vehicles on the MVUM and a
CFR order prohibiting bicycles.
NO MOTOR
VEHICLES The prohibition to bicycles must be signed because it is under a CFR order.
OR BICYCLES Consider signing the motor vehicle prohibition with the bicycle prohibitions to
YEARLONG avoid confusing the public by signing only the prohibition to bicycles.
TO PROTECT
RESOURCES
TRAIL RESTRICTION Example 5: A groomed cross-country ski trail not designated for motor
vehicles or snowmobiles and a CFR order seasonally prohibiting
pedestrians to protect the groomed trail surface.
11/1 - 4/1
NO MOTORIZED The prohibition to pedestrians shall be signed because it is under a CFR order.
VEHICLES YEARLONG Consider signing the motor vehicle prohibition with the pedestrian prohibitions
TO PROTECT GROOMED
TRAIL SURFACE to avoid confusing the public by signing only the prohibition to pedestrians.
November 2012
6.4.2e Area Restriction and Closure Travel Management Signs

Example 1: Motor vehicle use is occurring on an unauthorized route.
Post the sign in the center of the unauthorized route. This is an AREA restriction
as the route is not a system road or trail. This sign also can be used in
conjunction with route decommissioning treatments.
AREA RESTRICTION
UNAUTHORIZED
ROUTE Existing road
Unauthorized trail or trail
NO
MOTOR VEHICLE
USE YEARLONG
or call XXX- XXX-XXXX Mount sign in
center of
unauthorized trail
Example 2: Motor vehicle use is occurring past a dispersed camping

AREA RESTRICTION corridor distance designated on the MVUM or other trespass areas.
NO The sign is placed at the end of the designated dispersed camping distance
MOTOR VEHICLE
to prevent further access beyond the designated corridor. This is an AREA
USE
YEARLONG restriction as the area past the dispersed camping corridor is not a system
road or trail. The sign also may be used in areas that have repeated trespass
problems off the designated routes.
or call XXX- XXX-XXXX
Example 3: A short-term emergency is in effect and all use is prohibited

AREA CLOSED for public safety.
EMERGENCY
CLOSURE The road, trail, or area is closed to ALL types of traffic, including foot traffic by
TO ALL TRAFFIC a Forest Order. The title should state ROAD or TRAIL or AREA CLOSED as
INCLUDING FOOT
TRAFFIC appropriate. The message should be specific as to the reason for the closure.
FOR PUBLIC SAFETY The red text highlights the safety issue. The temporary sign is in place until the
ACTIVE FIRE AREA emergency is over and the order rescinded.
The sign is required for enforcement as it is under a CFR Order.
Example 4: A seasonal area closure is in effect and all use is prohibited

AREA CLOSED for resource or habitat protection.
CLOSED
TO ALL USES The road, trail, or area is closed to ALL types of traffic, including foot traffic by a
INCLUDING FOOT Forest Order for a specified time period. The title should state ROAD or TRAIL
TRAFFIC or AREA CLOSED as appropriate. The message should be specific as to the
MAY 15 - JUNE 15
PROTECTION OF T & E reason for the closure. The sign is required for enforcement as it is under a
HABITAT CFR Order.
November 2012
Example 5: A CFR Order has been issued to prohibit motorized over-snow

AREA RESTRICTION vehicles seasonally for resource or habitat protection.
Motorized over-snow vehicles are prohibited by a Forest Order for a specified

time period. The message should be specific as to the reason for the closure.
The sign is required for enforcement as it is under a CFR Order. If covered by
11/1 - 4/1 an OSVUM, this restriction does not need to be signed to be enforceable. It
TO PROTECT
RESOURCES may be used to supplement the OSVUM if there are trespass problems.
6.4.2f Special Situations

Travel management signs may be modified to meet special situations with
approval of the regional sign coordinator and appropriate regional office staff.
Example 1: Trespass is occurring into designated wilderness or other

restricted areas by snowmobiles.
Standard black and white travel management signs may not be readily visible
during the winter. In order to bring attention to the wilderness or special area
prohibitions, the travel management signs are orange and black. For wilderness
boundaries, obtain approval of the wilderness manager before posting any
signs.
AREA RESTRICTION
NO NO
FORMS OF MOTOR VEHICLES
MECHANICAL AND SNOWMOBILES
TRANSPORT
YEARLONG
YEARLONG
TO PROTECT TO PROTECT
WILDERNESS VALUES RESOURCES
For further information, contact the For further information, contact the
Bearclaw Ranger Station, Phone: XXX-XXXX Bearclaw Ranger Station, Phone: XXX-XXXX
Signs may be hinged such that the orange is visible only during the winter
season for winter use only.
Open for winter use. Closed for summer use.
November 2012
6.5. Route Markers

Every reasonable effort should be made to ensure that all designated motor
vehicle routes have route markers that correspond with the MVUM upon
release of the MVUM or as soon as practical and that these route markers are
maintained.
Consistent use of appropriate route markers to identify the designated routes

is an important key to helping the public understand the MVUM and OSVUM
and know where they can legally use motor vehicles. Route numbers displayed
on signs must match the route numbers displayed on the MVUM and OSVUM.
Units should not use Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.2 for road route markers and chapter 5 for trail
any other marking route markers.
system in conjunction Install route markers on all National Forest System roads and trails regardless
of whether they are shown on the MVUM. There may be authorized routes that
with route markers
are open to administrative or permitted use that also require route markers
even though they will not be displayed on the MVUM. Route markers also
communicate the difference between closed system roads and unauthorized
or decommissioned roads. Give first priority to identifying routes shown on the
MVUM and OSVUM. Install route markers on other routes as resources and
needs allow.
Units should not use any other marking system in conjunction with route
markers or in addition to route markers to indicate MVUM or OSVUM
designations, such as red, green, and yellow symbols, white arrows, colored
posts, flagging, etc. These other marking systems are not enforceable, are
inconsistent with policy, and could be confusing to the public.
6.6 Reference Location Signs (Mile Post Markers)

Reference location signs (D10-1) are intended to serve as mile point location
guides for motorists and as a means to identify road locations. Reference
location signs may be erected on any NFS road or NFS trail. Reference location
signs should be used to reinforce travel management designations when:
• Changes in seasonal designations occur along a route and are noted on the
MVUM or other travel management maps by mile post tick marks.
• Dispersed camping is designated between certain mile posts.

D10-1
• It is not obvious as to where the designation actually begins or changes on
the ground.
Use the exact mile post number as shown on the MVUM or other travel
management maps.
Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.13.
November 2012
6.7 Information Signs
6.7.1 Visitor Information Boards

Travel management information can be included on visitor information boards
at trailheads and campgrounds or be displayed on a visitor information board
located at a forest entrance or at administrative offices such as district and
supervisor offices.
Visitor information boards provide important public information including:

• Recreation activities.
• Visitor registration provisions.
• Environmental awareness, safety, and emergency information.
• Travel management information, such as:
• Travel management rule requirements and local designations
• MVUM or OSVUM maps.
• “You Are Here” locations.
• Explanation of signing.
• Equipment requirements.
Consider the following when selecting locations for visitor information boards:
• Safety.
• Available parking without blocking the road.
• Approach sight distance to allow vehicles to get off and on the road.
Consider using advance guide signs (refer to chapter 3C) to notify the public of
travel management information locations as shown in figure 6-12.
VISITOR
INFORMATION
FOREST
INFORMATION
SA
TRAVEL
INFORMATION
FRD
Figure 6-12—Advance guide signs for travel management information.
Visitor information boards should be maintained to look professional and not

appear cluttered and disorganized. Follow direction in chapter 10 and the “Built
Environment Image Guide.”
November 2012
6.7.2 Posters
Posters may be used to display travel management information. All proposed
posters should be submitted to the regional sign coordinator for review. Custom
posters shall be ordered through the Government Printing Office. Refer to
chapter 10B for poster requirements.
These posters do not meet the requirements of the MUTCD and these
Guidelines for placement on roads.
Following are examples of posters that have been developed specific to the
travel management rule and the MVUM.
Poster #1 – Hunting Notice
This type of poster should be coordinated with the local State fish and game
office.
HUNTERS
Motor vehicle use off designated routes,
including use for game retrieval,
is prohibited
(36 CFR 261.13)
Motor vehicle use is restricted to

only those designated roads, trails and areas
as shown on the Motor Vehicle Use Map
For more information,

please contact your local
USDA Forest Service or Montana Fish, Wildlife and Parks office

Poster #2 – Generic Notice
This poster can be used in any location. It can be used with cooperators who
maintain OHV trails, OHV groups, or others. This type of poster might be very
useful where compliance with travel management decisions is difficult to enforce.

MOTOR VEHICLE USE
OFF DESIGNATED ROUTES
IS PROHIBITED UNDER 36 CFR 261.13
MOTOR VEHICLE USE IS RESTRICTED TO

DESIGNATED ROADS, TRAILS and AREAS
AS SHOWN ON THE MOTOR VEHICLE USE MAP
These restrictions are necessary

Cooperator
Logo to protect your National Forest resources.
For more information,

please contact your local USDA Forest Service office
November 2012
Poster 3 - Educational Posters
These posters can be used to reinforce the Travel Management Rule and the
MVUM or OSVUM requirements. Follow standards in chapter 10B for posters
and information boards.

6.7.3 Public Notices

Supplemental notices should be used to advise the public that short-term
administrative use or a private activity is ongoing or will occur by permit behind
a gate or restriction device. Posters also may provide advance notice that a
route is to be restricted at a future date. These types of notices are essential
to maintaining credibility and establishing good working relationships with the
public.
Posters may be made of cardboard, plastic laminated paper, or corrugated

plastic. Suggested colors are black letters on a bright yellow or orange
background. Notices should be no smaller than 12 by 18 inches.
6.7.3a Activities Behind Gate Notice

Notify the public when road or trail use prohibitions restrict public traffic but allow
administrative, commercial, or other use by permit, and when short-term use is
occurring behind a gate. The notice should include the type and specific times
of the activity and the vehicles involved. This notice should be removed upon
completion of the planned activity.
When long-term use is occurring, the restriction order should be revised to

reflect the level of use for that time period. Long-term use should be indicated
on the TM sign.
NOTICE
A permit has been issued for activities
behind this gate. Road restrictions
are still in effect.
Purpose:______________________________________________
Vehicle:_______________________________________________
Dates:_____________________ to_________________________
Days: Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
Times:_____________________ to_________________________
Please do not block the roadway—

and thank you for your cooperation.
For information, contact the __________________District Ranger
at _____-________
October 2013
6.7.3b Advance Restriction/Closure Notice

Many routes that historically have been open to the public may be restricted
or closed in the future to meet management objectives. Place advance notices
at the beginning of the route during NEPA planning efforts to solicit responses
from the route users. The notice below is an example of the type of information
to be included.
NOTICE
This road is being considered for yearlong
restrictions to all motorized traffic.
Your comments are welcome
Please contact the

___________ District Ranger
at ____-____________ for
further information.
6.8 Accessibility
6.8.1 Clear Passage Around Gates/Berms and Other Restriction Devices

When Pedestrian Travel Is Permitted or Encouraged Beyond Gate
The legal requirements of Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 impact
roads and trails with restriction devices, such as gates and berms. Section 504
states that no person can “be excluded from participation” in a Federal agency
opportunity solely because of a disability. Under these regulations, a wheelchair
that meets the legal definition of a wheelchair as detailed in section 6.8.2, is
permitted anywhere pedestrian traffic is permitted.
When pedestrian traffic The issue arises when gates, berms, or other barriers are placed on a route
to prohibit vehicular traffic, but pedestrian traffic is encouraged beyond the
is encouraged beyond
restriction device. In these situations, the USDA Office of General Counsel
a restriction device, a has determined that 36 inches of clear passage shall be available around that
device to ensure that a person who uses a wheelchair can also participate in
minimum of 36 inches
the encouraged opportunity behind the restriction device. A space of 36 inches
of clear passage shall has been deemed sufficient because it is the minimum width required for a
door under the current Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural
be available around
Barriers Act (ABA) accessibility guidelines.
that device.
When pedestrian traffic is encouraged beyond a restriction device, a minimum
of 36 inches of clear passage shall be available around that device to ensure
that a person who uses a wheelchair can also participate in the encouraged
opportunity behind the restriction. The following constitute encouragement:
• Destination signing.
• A pedestrian recreation symbol without a slash.
• A Forest Service map that highlights an opportunity behind the restriction
device.
• A TMO or RMO stating that pedestrian use is encouraged.
November 2012
In areas where pedestrian traffic is not encouraged, but occasional pedestrian

use is accepted before and after installation of the restriction device, individuals
who use wheelchairs may raise a concern about access at those restriction
devices to reach remote destinations, such as hunting areas. In these cases,
the Forest Service unit must work with the individual to provide access around
the restriction.
6.8.2 Wheelchair
According to Forest Service Manual 2353.05 and ADA Title V, section 508c, a
wheelchair is “a device designed solely for use by a mobility-impaired person for
locomotion that is suitable for use in an indoor pedestrian area.”
The phrase “designed solely for use by a mobility-impaired person for

locomotion” means that the original design and manufacture of the wheelchair
were solely for use for mobility by a person with a disability. Thus, this term
does not include after-market retrofit of a motorized unit to make it useable by a
person with a disability. “Suitable for use in an indoor pedestrian area” has been
legally determined to mean useable inside a home, mall, courthouse, or other
indoor pedestrian area.
A wheelchair or mobility device that meets this definition, including a battery

powered wheelchair or mobility device, is not categorized as a motorized
vehicle, or a mechanical device. A device that meets this definition is
categorized as comparable to foot travel.
A person whose disability requires use of a wheelchair or mobility device may

use a wheelchair that meets this definition anywhere foot travel is permitted, in
accordance with 36 CFR 212.1, Forest Service Manual 2353.05, and Title V,
section 508c of the ADA.
Chapter 6A Travel Management Sign (TM) Sign Drawings
6A.1 Travel Management Sign (TM)..........................................................................1
6A.2 Travel Management Decal (TM-D).....................................................................2
6A.3 Travel Management Sign Messages.................................................................3

November 2012
6A.1 Travel Management Sign (TM)
Text layout—Travel Management sign (TM)
AREA CLOSED A
L
CLOSED
TO ALL USES
INCLUDING
B TRAIL RESTRICTION A
H FOOT TRAFFIC B
MAY 15 - JUNE 15 C
H JUNE 1 - MARCH 5 C
PROTECTION OF T&E HABITAT
To protect wildlife habitat
For further information, contact the D To reduce user conflicts
Bearclaw Ranger Station, Phone: XXX-XXXX To protect water quality D
Stay on routes shown on maps
E
E
TM1 and TM2 TM3 and TM4
Text and symbol dimensions (inches)

A B C D E
Restrictions Reasons,
B1 Contacts
Word B2 Dates and Shield
Messages Symbols or Optional and
Title (Prefered) (Optional) Conditions Messages Logos
Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
text text Maximum text text
size size Minimum number size size
Sign (upper (upper symbol of (upper (sentence Minimum

number L H case) case) size symbols case) case) size

TM-1
12
18 1 1 3 3 s s l 2
TM-2 18 24 1 2 1 2 3 5 1 s 2

TM-3
18
12 1 1 3 4 s s l 2

TM-4
24
18 2 2 3 6 1 1 2
Notes Colors
Letter height may be larger depending on importance Black lettering, symbols, and borders on white
and length of message. background.
Word messages are preferred over symbols for the Red slash on symbols—from upper left to lower right.
restriction message. Red letters may be used to highlight safety messages
Restricted word messages should reflect the or other important messages, see chapter 6, section
appropriate travel management decision. 6.4.2e, example 3.
For examples of message inserts, see section 6A-3.
References
Text layout for Area Boundary signs is similar to text For sign guidelines, see chapter 6
layout for Area Closed signs. Refer to chapter 6,
For Forest Service shield, see chapter 8C, section
section 6.4.2a.
8C.7.
November 2012
6A.2 Travel Management Decal (TM-D)
Text layout—Travel Management decal (TM-D)

L
R L
E
S
R T AREA
A
O R RESTRICTION
I A
A
D C
T NO B
I MOTOR
O VEHICLES
H
BEYOND
N THIS POINT
NO H
YEARLONG C
MOTOR B To
VEHICLES protect
YEARLONG C resources D
For information, For information,
contact the
Beartooth Ranger
D contact the
Beartooth Ranger
District Office District Office
(XXX) XXX-XXXX (XXX) XXX-XXXX
E E
TM-D1 TM-D2
Text and symbol dimensions (inches)

A B C D E
Restrictions Reasons,
B1 Contacts
Word B2 Dates and Shield
Messages Symbols or Optional and
Title (Prefered) (Optional) Conditions Messages Logos
Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
text text Maximum text text
size size Minimum number size size
Sign (upper (upper symbol of (upper (sentence Minimum

number L H case) case) size symbols case) case) size
TM-D1 3 V* 1 s 2 4 2 2 2
TM-D2 3 V* 2 s 2 4 2 2 2
*V = variable
Notes Colors
Letter height may be larger depending on importance and Black lettering, symbols, and borders on white background.
length of message. Red slash on symbols—from upper left to lower right.
Word messages are preferred over symbols for the restriction Red letters may be used to highlight safety messages or other
message.
important messages (see section 6.4.2e, example 3).
Restricted word messages should reflect the appropriate
travel management decision.
References
For examples of message inserts, see section 6A.3.
Text layout for Area Boundary signs is similar to text layout
for Area Closed signs. Refer to chapter 6, section 6.4.2a.
November 2012
6A.3 Travel Management Sign Messages
A—Title (upper case)

• ROAD RESTRICTION or ROAD CLOSED
• TRAIL RESTRICTION or TRAIL CLOSED
• AREA RESTRICTION or AREA CLOSED
• Combination (ROAD and TRAIL, ROAD and AREA)
The following lists are examples of possible messages that may be needed on
Travel Management signs. The lists are not all inclusive and other messages
may be used as appropriate.
B(1)—Restricted Traffic Word Message (upper case)

Use word messages instead of recreational and cultural interest area symbols
for clearer understanding or if the symbol is not representative of the specific
vehicle designation.
• NO MOTOR VEHICLES
• NO MOTOR VEHICLES AND SNOWMOBILES or NO MOTORIZED

VEHICLES
• NO PUBLIC MOTOR VEHICLES
• NO MOTORIZED AND MECHANIZED VEHICLES
• NO MOTOR VEHICLES GREATER THAN XX INCHES WIDE
• CLOSED TO ALL TRAFFIC, INCLUDING FOOT TRAFFIC
B(2)—Restricted Traffic Symbols

For a complete list of recreational and cultural interest area symbols, refer to
chapter 3E, section 3E.11 and the MUTCD, chapter 2M. When used, symbols
should be placed in the following order from left to right for consistency.
• RG-010R—Automobiles
• RS-067—Off-Road Vehicle Trail (4-wheel drive)
• RS-095—All-Terrain Trail (ATV)
• RL-150R—Motorcycle
• RS-052—Snowmobiling
• RL-090R—Bicycle
• RS-064—Horse Trail
• RS-068—Hiker Trail
• RS-046—Cross Country Skiing
November 2012
C—Dates or Conditions (upper case)

• The FROM and THRU dates of the restriction
• YEARLONG
• WHEN SNOW IS xx INCHES OR DEEPER
• UNTIL SURFACE DRIES
D—Optional Explanations for the Restriction/Closure (sentence case or

upper case)
A brief explanation of why the restriction or closure is in effect often helps the
public understand why the restriction is in effect.
• To protect wildlife habitat
• To protect calving habitat
• To protect nesting habitat
• To protect winter range
• To protect summer range
• To protect migration corridors
• To provide wildlife security
• To protect threatened or endangered wildlife habitat
• To protect grizzly bear habitat
• To protect caribou habitat
• To protect eagle habitat area
• To protect aquatic habitat
• To prevent sedimentation
• To prevent temperature increase
• To provide aquatic security
• To protect water quality
• To protect municipal water supply
• To reduce invasive species
• To reduce maintenance costs
• To reduce user conflicts
• To reduce sound levels
• To protect facilities
November 2012
• To prevent damage to vegetation
• To prevent damage to (road/trail) surfaces
• To return (road/trail) to its original condition
• Due to unsafe conditions
• To protect special areas
• To protect special interest area
• To protect wild and scenic river area
• To protect the wilderness environment/values
• To protect research natural area
• To protect roadless areas
• To protect a natural meadow
• To provide a nonmotorized recreation experience
• To protect __________ habitat
• To protect __________ quality
• To protect __________ area
• For public safety
D—Optional Messages (sentence case or upper case)

• Open to all other uses
• Foot travel allowed yearlong
• Non-motorized use allowed yearlong
• Above uses allowed outside these dates
• Administrative use by permit
• Timber harvest activities allowed
• Please do not block gate
• Motor vehicles restricted to designated routes
November 2012
E—MVUM and/or Contact Message for the responsible office (sentence

case)
• For further information, refer to the XXX Motor Vehicle Use Map or call
____ Ranger District at (phone number).
• For further information, call ____ Ranger District at (phone number).
• For further information, contact the nearest Forest Service office.
F—Shields and Logos

The Forest Service shield shall be at the bottom of the sign. Insert logos from
other cooperating agencies, organizations or programs as appropriate.
All cooperative agencies should be shown. The Forest Service shield and logos
shall be the same size.
7.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 1
7.1.1 Privately Provided Recreation Opportunities on National Forest

System Lands ........................................................................................... 1
7.1.2 Developed Recreation Site Sign Plans................................................... 2
7.1.2a Sign Plans for Privately Provided Recreation Opportunities

on National Forest System Lands............................................... 2
7.1.3 Accessibility............................................................................................... 3
7.2 Traffic Control Devices for Roads and Parking Areas ....................................... 4
7.2.1 Regulatory Signs....................................................................................... 4
7.2.1a Speed Limits................................................................................. 4
7.2.2 Warning Signs........................................................................................... 4
7.2.3 Guide Signs................................................................................................ 5
7.2.3a Destination Signs ........................................................................ 5
7.2.3b Recreation and Cultural Interest Area Symbols........................ 6
7.2.3c Camping Unit Markers................................................................. 7
7.2.3d Campground Host Units.............................................................. 8
7.3 Pavement Marking................................................................................................... 8
7.4 Site Identification Signs ........................................................................................ 9
7.4.1 Site Identification Signs for Forest Service Sites.................................. 9
7.4.1a Size of Site Identification Signs ............................................... 10
7.4.1b Materials for Site Identification Signs ..................................... 10
7.4.1c Colors for Site Identification Signs.......................................... 11
7.4.1d Use of Proclaimed Names on Site Identification Signs ........ 11

7.4.1e Modification of Site Identification Signs ................................. 11
7.4.2 Site Identification Signs for Privately Owned Recreation

Facilities on NFS Lands ......................................................................... 12
7.5 Registration and Payment.................................................................................... 13
7.6 Waste Disposal...................................................................................................... 14
7.6.1 Sanitary Dumping Station Signs .......................................................... 14
7.6.2 Pack It In/Pack It Out .............................................................................. 15
7.7 Signing of Natural Hazards.................................................................................. 16
7.7.1 Flood Signs ............................................................................................. 16
7.7.1a High Water Mark Sign................................................................ 17
7.7.1b Flash Flood Hazard Signing...................................................... 18
7.7.1c General Awareness Signing for Slow Rising Floods.............. 20
7.7.1d Flood Signs for Areas Below Dams ........................................ 22
7.7.1e Other Flood Related Warning Signs for Access Roads......... 22
7.8 Miscellaneous Signs and Posters....................................................................... 23
7.8.1 Forest Service Regulations ................................................................... 23
7.8.1a Closure Signs ............................................................................ 23
7.9 Self-Locator Maps ................................................................................................ 24

November 2012
7.1 Introduction
Signing direction in this chapter applies only to developed recreation sites. A
developed recreation site is a recreation site that has a development scale of 3,
4, or 5. Refer to FSM 2330, section 2330.3.
Signs and posters are used to support effective management of developed

recreation sites, such as campgrounds, trailheads, picnic areas, and visitor
centers. Signs and posters are used to support recreation program objectives,
minimize impacts on resources, and provide information regarding regulations,
safety, environmental awareness, user etiquette, and local area services. Signs
Signs and posters and other traffic control devices are used to regulate, warn, or guide traffic on
are used to support roads within developed recreation sites and in parking areas.
effective management All developed recreation sites under the jurisdiction of the Forest Service and
operated by the Forest Service shall follow the Guidelines of this chapter.
of developed recreation
Government-owned improvements operated by concessioners are subject to the
sites. Guidelines of this chapter and Forest Service Manual (FSM) 2340.
Cooperator signs may be used to acknowledge the concessioner’s operation

of a Forest Service developed recreation site, as shown in figure 7-1. Refer to
chapter 9 for additional information on cooperator signs. Adopt-a-Trail
WALHALLA NATIONAL
FISH HATCHERY Campground Operated By
BUREAU OF SPORT FISHERIES AND WILDLIFE
CHATTOOGA
High Mtn. Camping Inc.
RECREATION AREA Under Permit From
SUMTER
INYO
Figure 7-1—Example of a cooperator sign for a Forest Service

campground operated by a concessioner. HIGH DESERT
FOUR WHEELERS
7.1.1 Privately Provided Recreation Opportunities on National Forest
System Lands
The Forest Service regulates the operation of privately built and owned
commercial and nonprofit recreation services, facilities, and activities located on
National Forest System lands and operated under a special use authorization.
Refer to FSM 2340.
Commercial recreation opportunities include resorts, lodges, hotels, motels,

group camps, trailer courts and camps, marinas, campgrounds, ski areas,
tramways, target ranges, beaches, swimming sites, day use facilities,
bathhouses, outfitter and guide services, caves, and caverns.
Nonprofit organizations, institutions, or other governmental agencies also may

provide public recreational facilities and services, such as organizational camps,
lodges, and shelters. Refer to FSM 2345.
Privately owned developed recreation sites and facilities located on NFS

lands and operated under a special use authorization shall follow the signing
guidelines of this chapter and FSM 2340.
Si gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 7-1
November 2012
7.1.2 Developed Recreation Site Sign Plans

All signs and posters needed to manage a developed recreation site and to
guide and inform the user should be included in a comprehensive sign plan.
Follow direction in chapter 2 on developing, monitoring, and maintaining a sign
All signs and posters
plan for each developed recreation site. The primary uses for which a site is
managed should determine the signing appropriate for the site. The sign plan
needed to manage a for a developed recreation site can be a part of the operating plan or it may be
developed recreation
incorporated by reference into that document.
site and to guide Consider factors, such as site design, site development scale, recreation
opportunity spectrum (chapter 5, section 5.1.1), environmental setting,
and inform the user architectural style, scenic integrity objectives, user safety, traffic patterns,
should be included in road design, access routing, use of traffic control devices, travel speed,
viewing distance, clear-zone requirements, and nighttime visibility needs when
a comprehensive sign determining sign and poster needs.
plan.
Keep site signing to a minimum while still considering user needs and
appropriate safety messages for visitor awareness. Place emphasis on the
needs of the first-time visitor. Avoid providing more signing than users can read
at the entrance to the developed recreation site without stopping. Set signing
priorities based on direction in chapter 3, section 3.8. Lower priority messages,
such as camping limits, should not be road signs and should be relocated to
visitor information boards.
Sign plans should be developed when developed recreation sites are

originally designed. Good-quality site design that considers users needs, the
environmental setting and hazards, and how the facility fits the terrain will
minimize the need to rely on signing for users to understand how to travel
through and use the site. Collaboration between engineering and recreation
specialists will facilitate development of a good sign plan and a properly signed
site. Site plans and designs that are completed without careful consideration
of vehicular and pedestrian traffic patterns often result in site layouts that are
confusing for users and difficult to sign.
Revise or update sign plans for developed recreation sites that are scheduled
for renovation or reconstruction. All signs should meet current standards.
New and existing signs not meeting current standards should be included in a
replacement plan as part of the project.
Furnish Forest Service
policy, general signing 7.1.2a Sign Plans for Privately Provided Recreation Opportunities on
guidelines and National Forest System Lands
requirements, and Develop a sign plan with the permit holder that is consistent with the direction
in section 7.1.1 and incorporate it into the special use authorization as an
sign standards to the appendix. Furnish Forest Service policy, general signing guidelines and
holder early in the requirements, and sign standards to the holder early in the planning process.
planning process. Ensure that exterior advertising signage conforms to FSM 2340 and is included
in the sign plan for the facility.
Require that all signs be maintained in good condition.
November 2012
Ensure that the special use authorization or operating plan requires the holder
to be responsible for the sign plan and for all costs associated with purchasing,
installing, and maintaining the signs.
The forest sign coordinator should review the sign plan to ensure that traffic
control devices (TCD) meet all applicable standards and to determine if any
additional traffic control devices are necessary. The sign plan shall be approved
by the Forest Service before any signs are installed.
Authorize all signs and posters as a part of the special use authorization for the
entire facility consistent with FSM 2340 and FSM 2720. Follow formal special
use authorization procedures in establishing FSM standards and in approving
sign designs, placement, and installation.
7.1.3 Accessibility
Refer to chapter 1, section 1.7.4 for accessible sign and marking requirements.
Use caution when posting the International Symbol of Accessibility (ISA) at

the entrance to a developed recreation site. Posting this sign indicates that
the entire site meets all applicable requirements in Federal and Forest Service
accessibility guidelines. Do not post the ISA if any of the facilities or services at
the site does not comply with applicable accessibility guidelines.
An accessible parking space posted with the ISA is required when five or more
designated parking spaces are provided. The requirements for the number and
size of those parking spaces and the width of access aisles between accessible
parking spaces are specified in the “Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility
Standards” (ABAAS) table 208.2 and section 502. If only one accessible parking
space is required, it must comply with the van accessible technical requirements
and must be signed “Van Accessible” in addition to being signed with the ISA.
Do not use the word “handicapped” on any sign.
Signage at accessible parking spaces shall comply with the Manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices” (MUTCD), section 2B.47. When the accessible parking
space is paved, it is to be marked, as shown in the MUTCD, sections 2B.47,
3B.19, and 3B.20.
If not all camping units at a campground are accessible and the camping units
are not assigned upon arrival or through a reservation system, the accessible
camping units must be identified at an entrance kiosk, on a bulletin board, or on
a sign at the registration area. The following type of statement is appropriate on
the registration information sign: “Sites 2, 4, 6, and 10 are accessible. If no one
in your group needs accessible facilities, please do not use these sites unless
all other sites are filled.”
Individual camping units shall not be signed at the site as accessible, using the
ISA or by any other means.
November 2012
7.2 Traffic Control Devices for Roads and Parking Areas

Design, content, shape, size, color, retroreflectivity, and placement of all
TCD needed to regulate, warn, or guide traffic on roads and parking areas
within developed recreation sites shall meet the requirements of the MUTCD
and these Guidelines. Refer to chapters 3 through 3E for TCD standards.
Coordinate use of all TCD with the forest sign coordinator.
Exercise engineering judgment or conduct an engineering study to determine

All TCD needed to the TCD needed along roads and in parking areas within the developed
recreation sites. Refer to chapter 3, section 3.10.
regulate, warn, or
Placement of road signs takes precedence over placement of other signs and
guide traffic on roads
posters. Nonroad signs shall not interfere with road operations and safety.
and parking areas
within developed 7.2.1 Regulatory Signs

recreation sites shall Regulatory signs inform road users of applicable traffic laws, regulations,
meet the requirements and other legal requirements. Regulatory signs shall not be used unless
enforcement is feasible and planned and a corresponding order has been
of the MUTCD and issued under 36 CFR Part 261, Subpart B. Refer to chapter 3A, section 3A.1.
these Guidelines.
Do not use regulatory signs such as ONE-WAY and DO NOT ENTER within
a developed recreation site unless there is a documented safety issue with
vehicles going the opposite direction and the need has been determined by an
engineering study or engineering judgment. If the signs are intended for general
guidance, use a destination sign with an appropriate message and direction,
such as CAMPING, EXIT. Refer to section 7.2.3a and figure 7-2, and chapter
3C, section 3C.4.
7.2.1a Speed Limits

Speed limits typically provide poor traffic control at developed recreation sites.
Speed limits shall be established at developed recreation sites only after an
Regulatory signs shall engineering study has been conducted in accordance with traffic engineering
not be used unless
practices. The posting and enforcement of established speed limits, including
statutory speed limits, requires issuance of an order under 36 CFR 261.54(d).
enforcement is feasible A speed limit less than 15 mph shall not be posted except under special
and planned.
circumstances as determined by an engineering study. Refer to chapter 3A,
section 3A.3 for more information on speed limits.
Warning signs, such as a sign displaying the pedestrian symbol with an

advisory speed plaque, may provide better speed control than a speed limit sign
at developed recreation sites. Refer to chapter 3B, section 3B.2.16.
7.2.2 Warning Signs

Use warning signs to alert road users to conditions not readily apparent or
normally associated with typical use of the roads within developed recreation
sites. Consider mitigating these situations through other available means before
using a warning sign.
November 2012
The decision to place warning signs for motor vehicle use shall be based on
either engineering judgment or an engineering study. Follow the standards for
warning signs in chapter 3B.
Evaluate the need for flood warning signs on approach roads to developed
recreation sites and roads and parking areas within developed recreation sites.
Refer to section 7.7.1 and chapter 3B, sections 3B.2.17 through 3B.2.19 for
guidance.
Figure 7A-1 illustrates placement of typical regulatory and warning signs within
developed recreation sites.
7.2.3 Guide Signs

Evaluate the need for guide signs within developed recreation sites. Guide signs
provide direction to and identification of activities and physical facilities, such
as camping units, toilets, amphitheaters, drinking water, and boat ramps. Guide
signs typically are rectangular and include destination signs, recreational and
cultural interest area signs, camping unit markers, and other information signs.
Provide guide signs only where facility location or function is not obvious. Follow
the standards for guide signs in chapter 3C.
7.2.3a Destination Signs

Use Forest Road Destination (FRD) signs to provide information concerning
destinations, destination distances as necessary to help orient the visitor, and
directions within a developed recreation site. Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.4.
Refer to figure 7-2 for examples of destination signs used within developed
recreation sites. The lettering for proper names of places within developed
recreation sites shall be title case, in which each word is capitalized.
All other word legends shall be in upper-case letters, such as an action message
—NEXT LEFT, EXIT; ENTERING, or LEAVING; a distance message—1 MILE;
or a generic activity message such as CAMPING, BOAT RAMP, or TRAILHEAD.
Refer to chapter 3D and table 3D-3 for guidance on proper placement of

destination signs.
CAMPING CAMPING CAMPING

LOOP A TRAILHEAD TRAILHEAD
UNITS 1 - 5 BOAT LAUNCH BOAT LAUNCH
Figure 7-2—Examples of destination signs.
August 2013
Refer to figure 7A-2 for placement of typical destination signs within a

developed recreation site.
Refer to chapter 3C, sections 3C.4 and 3C.5, for information on destination
signs and site approach signs used on access roads to guide visitors to
developed recreation sites. When developed recreation sites are seasonally or
temporarily closed, destination and site approach signs for developed recreation
sites along access roads should be removed, covered, or marked with
appropriate site closure signs at important decision points to the site. Post a site
closure sign at any gate or restriction device at the developed recreation site.
Refer to section 7.8.1a for additional guidance on use of site closure signs.
7.2.3b Recreation and Cultural Interest Area Symbols

Recreational and cultural interest area symbols may be used on roads within
developed recreation sites to direct visitors to facilities, structures, and places;
and to identify services available to the public. Recreational and cultural interest
area symbols may be used separately or in combination with destination signs.
Standard recreational and cultural interest area symbols are preferable to word
messages wherever their meanings are applicable to a recreational activity or
facility. Use of these symbols can reduce the number of larger, more expensive
FRD signs. Figure 7A-3 illustrates placement of typical recreational and cultural
area interest symbol signs within a developed recreation site.
Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.3 for guidance on recreational and cultural
interest area symbols. Symbol sizes shall conform to the Guidelines in chapter
3C, table 3C-1.
Standard recreational
A complete listing of nationally approved symbols and typical arrangements of
and cultural interest
those symbols are contained in the MUTCD, section 2M. Chapter 3E, section
area symbols are 3E.11 shows symbols that are most common for Forest Service applications
and additional symbols approved for Forest Service use on National Forest
preferable to word
System roads and facilities only. Use of other recreation symbols shall be
messages approved by the Washington Office Director of Engineering.
Use individual recreation symbols to differentiate between different types of the

same activity within a developed recreation site. For example, both the tent and
trailer camping symbols may be used to distinguish units that separate the two
types of camping methods. However, if all types of camping all allowed, only
use the tent symbol.
Use these symbols for signing nonvehicular amenities, such as restrooms, trails,
and structures.
These symbols are used for guidance and informational purposes and not as
warning or regulatory signs. Warning and regulatory signs and symbols require
a specific color and guidance for their use.
August 2013
with red prohibition symbol, as shown in figure 7-3.
* *
* Educational plaques are optional
Figure 7-3—Recreational and cultural interest area symbols used for
regulatory messages.
7.2.3c Camping Unit Markers 7

3
Use guide signs to mark individual camping units consistently within
2
each
developed recreation site. The camping unit marker for drive-in units shall be
retroreflective for nighttime visibility when the site is not closed at night and
users have access to the camping units at any time. Place markers so that they
30 in.
to lowest 30 in.
can be easily viewed from the road before turning into the unit. Numbers may
be placed directly on pavement, but this method may benumber unsatisfactory where
leaves, needles, dust, or snow could obscure the number. Figure 7-4 shows
several acceptable examples of camping unit markers. Road Road
surface surface
7 Plan view
3 of paved
2 road and spur
30 in.
to lowest 30 in.
number 23
Road Road Plan view of paved
surface surface road and spur
Figure 7-4—Examples of camping unit markers.
23
Plan view of paved
road and spur
November 2012
7.2.3d Campground Host Units

Identify campground host units with a retroreflective guide sign to direct traffic to
the host unit, as shown in figure 7-5. Remove or cover the sign when the host is
not available, or use a sign that is hinged and can be opened when the host is
occupying the site or closed when the host is not available.
CAMPGROUND CAMPGROUND
HOST HOST
HOST UNIT XX
Figure 7-5—Examples of host site signs.
Posters or small signs may be used at the host unit if they are not intended to
be visible by moving traffic, such as those shown in figure 7-6. Many hosts have
their own name signs. These signs shall be approved by the Forest Service
before use. Allow use only if the sign does not serve a traffic control function
and does not interfere with other signs.
Campground
Campground Host Your Hosts
Host H ost Names H ere
Unit
Figure 7-6—Examples of host site posters.
7.3 Pavement Marking

When determined by an engineering study or engineering judgment, pavement
markings may be used instead of or in support of regulatory signs; and arrow
markings may be used for directional guidance instead of guide signs.
Care should be taken in using pavement markings instead of signs when the
markings might become hidden by leaves, needles, dust, or snow. Pavement
arrows and alphabets can be found in Chapter 10, “Standard Highway Signs”
book. Develop maintenance plans to maintain visibility of pavement markings.
November 2012
Centerline and edge markings generally are not needed within developed
recreation sites.
Paved parking lot patterns should be marked by striping. Parking area stripes
are not required to be retroreflective.
7.4 Site Identification Signs

Use site identification signs to identify developed recreation sites. These signs
invite or encourage visitors to enter a developed recreation site.
Site identification signs are not traffic control devices and are inappropriate
for use in lieu of retroreflective destination and site approach signing. Refer to
chapter 3C, sections 3C.4 and 3C.5.
Site identification signs
Site names on site identification signs should match current recreation maps so
are not traffic control
visitors can locate and recognize sites.
devices.
Place site identification signs along and perpendicular to the site entry road
as illustrated in figure 7A-4. Consider topography, safety, cost, environmental
impacts, and visibility in determining the appropriate sign for the site.
Supports and bases for site identification signs vary according to specific needs,
site location, the applicable visual management systems, BEIG, availability of
materials, and local factors.
Crashworthy posts shall be used when signs are placed within the clear zone
along roads as determined by an engineering study or engineering judgment.
Placement of all solid base installations requires an engineering study. Solid
bases shall be placed either outside the clear zone or behind crashworthy
barriers if within the clear zone. Refer to chapter 3D, section 3D.2 for clear zone
and chapter 3D, section 3D.7 for breakaway requirements. Consult with the
forest sign coordinator to determine correct placement.
7.4.1 Site Identification Signs for Forest Service Sites

Standard site identification signs shall be used at Forest Service developed
recreation sites, including those Government-owned facilities operated by
concessioners. The sign design shall include nationally approved Forest Service
logotypes without modification. Refer to chapter 1, section 1.7.3b for guidance
on logotypes.
Use the Recreation Site (RS) sign for most developed recreation sites. The sign
requires both the Forest Service shield and the USDA credit line as part of the
installation.
November 2012
Use the optional Recreation Site Entrance (RSE) sign within a recreation
corridor with multiple developed recreation sites where full Forest Service
recognition has been previously identified by an RS sign or where other Forest
Service recognition is in the area, such as a forest boundary sign. The Forest
Service shield and USDA credit line are not required.
Use signs, such as the National Recreation Area-Recreation (NRA-REC)

site entrance sign, for developed recreation sites within a congressionally
designated special area. The sign requires both the Forest Service shield and
the appropriate logotype and USDA credit line as part of the installation. Other
than the criteria governing the shape of the sign, the congressionally designated
area signing criteria in chapter 8B, section 8B.3 applies.
7.4.1a Size of Site Identification Signs

The size of site identification signs are determined by:
• The speed of travel on the approach road.
• The message to be displayed on the sign.
• Site characteristics, such as site capacity and amount of use.
Chapter 7B contains sign sizes for use on roads with various prevailing speeds.
Sign designs come in standard sizes. Standard sizes shall be used unless the
message requires that the standard be modified to accommodate longer or
hyphenated names.
7.4.1b Materials for Site Identification Signs

Site identification signs may be routed or retroreflective. If the sign needs to be
visible to the traveling public both day and night, use retroreflective materials or
illuminate the routed sign. Adding glass beads to the paint on routed signs does
not meet minimum retroreflectivity requirements and is not acceptable. Refer to
chapter 3, section 3.3.2 for more information on retroreflective sheeting.
Refer to chapter 14 for guidance on materials for site identification signs and
factors for determining the proper substrate. Sign support structures should be
designed to be compatible with the site. Refer to the “Built Environment Image
Guide” for more information on site compatibility.
November 2012
7.4.1c Colors for Site Identification Signs

Colors for site identification signs shall be as shown in chapter 7B. Site
identification signs for congressionally designated special areas may employ
colors fitting the character of the area, provided they have prior written approval
from the regional forester (refer to chapter 8B, section 8B.3).
7.4.1d Use of Proclaimed Names on Site Identification Signs

Use the proclaimed name of the administrative unit in which a developed
recreation site is located when:
• Two or more units have been combined into one administrative unit without
changing the proclaimed names.
• Portions of one unit are administered by another.
For example, the Bridger National Forest and the Teton National Forest have
been combined into an administrative unit. A campground located on the Bridger
National Forest will be signed “Spring Creek Campground, Bridger National
Forest.” It will not be signed as “Spring Creek Campground, Bridger-Teton
National Forests.” Only administrative sites, such as the forest headquarters, will
use the hyphenated name Bridger-Teton National Forests.
7.4.1e Modification of Site Identification Signs

Modification of standard site identification signs, such as signs for
congressionally designated special areas, requires prior written approval from
Modification of the regional sign coordinator. After approval, submit a detailed drawing to the
standard site
sign manufacturer when ordering modified signs. Specify shape; letter size,
series, and spacing requirements; overall dimensions; and color scheme.
identification signs
Modifications of standard designs should ensure that:
requires prior written
approval from
• Features, such as size, contrast, color, shape, composition, and lighting or
retroreflectivity, are combined to draw attention to the sign.
the regional sign
• Shape, size, colors, and simplicity of message combine to produce a clear
coordinator. meaning.
• Legibility and size combine with placement to permit adequate time for
viewing and response.
November 2012
7.4.2 Site Identification Signs for Privately Owned Recreation Facilities on

NFS Lands
Requirements for site identification signs for privately owned recreation facilities
on NFS lands operated under a special use authorization are shown in table
7-1. Do not use Forest Service sign shapes for site identification signs for private
facilities located off NFS lands.
Table 7-1—Site identification signs for privately owned recreation facilities

on NFS lands
Site Identification Signs for Privately Owned
Recreation Facilities on NFS Lands
Do not use Forest
Service sign shapes for

Color Use colors compatible with the site and applicable ROS.
Shape Use Forest Service sign shapes or a shape that is compatible
site identification signs
with the site and applicable ROS.
for private facilities Size Use sign sizes appropriate for the situation and comparable to
located off NFS lands. Forest Service site identification signs for developed recreation
sites or administrative sites.
Wording Limit wording to type of business and services and facilities
available.
Lighting Neon signs are prohibited except for “open,” “closed,” or
“vacancy” signs. Flashing lights are prohibited under all
circumstances. Signs may be retroreflective or illuminated for
nighttime visibility.
Placement The special use authorization holder must obtain prior written
approval from the agency that has jurisdiction over the road to
install a sign within the road right-of-way. Refer to chapter 3D,
section 3D.1. Do not attach site identification signs to buildings.
Agency
identification “Under Permit From XXX National Forest or Grassland” or “In
Cooperation With XXX National Forest or Grassland” shall be
used on or with all site identification signs. The Forest Service
shield shall be part of the design. The USDA credit line should
not be used.
Private logos Private logos may be incorporated into site identification signs.
November 2012
Figure 7-7 shows an example of a site identification sign for a privately owned
recreation site located on NFS land and administered under a special use
authorization.
Under Permit From

Lewis and Clark
National Forest
Figure 7-7—Example of a site identification sign for a privately owned

recreation site.
7.5 Registration and Payment

Recreation fee signs shall be posted to inform visitors where recreation fees are
charged, the amount of the fees, and how fees are spent to improve recreational
opportunities. Information also is needed as to where to obtain passes and
which passes are honored.
Post the U.S. Fee Area sign at all entrances to recreation fee areas to notify
visitors that payment is required. The U.S. Fee Area sign may be used in
combination with Forest Service fee signs.
Consider using centralized payment stations in an area with multiple recreation

sites or complexes to minimize the number of signs. Do not locate registration
and payment stations where visitors stopping to register will cause traffic
congestion or other safety problems.
National Guidelines for recreation fee signs and posters are found at <http://
fsweb.wo.fs.fed.us/rhwr/recfee/products-signs.shtml>.
November 2012
7.6 Waste Disposal
7.6.1 Sanitary Dumping Station Signs

Use signs as illustrated in figure 7-8 at appropriate points at sanitary dumping
stations.
DUMPING STATION Drinking

1
CONNECT
WATER
your hose to trailer
holding tank
2
INSERT
hose end securely into
drain, holding cover open with
foot...open trailer drain valve
3
WASH
any spillage into the
drain using water
provided
Use this hose for filling
DANGER fresh water tank only:
Not to be used not to be used for
for drinking or
domestic purposes flushing waste tanks.
Figure 7-8—Sanitary dumping station signs.
November 2012
7.6.2 Pack It In/Pack It Out

Pack it in/pack it out signs may be used at small nonfee sites to encourage
visitors to carry their own solid waste to a central disposal point or to their
homes. The basic component of the pack it in/pack it out system is a series of
complementary signs and posters, see figure 7-9.
DISPENSER AND POSTER
COMBINATION REMINDER SIGN
FOR YOUR
INFORMATION
FOREST SERVICE
Trash Bags
SW-2
SW-1 with dispenser box
DEVELOPED OR
UNDERDEVELOPED
SITE SIGN TRAILSIDE SIGN
Please! Pack out all trash Please! Pack out all trash
you don’t burn. Don’t bury you don’t burn. Don’t bury
trash. Animals trash. Animals
will dig it up. will dig it up.
SW-3 SW-4
Colors:
Dark = Brown
Shaded = Yellow-cream
Background = White
Figure 7-9—Pack it in/Pack it out signs.
Bag Dispenser Sign SW-1. This sign is equipped with a box (DB-1) that
dispenses trash bags. The sign also has a small visitor information board for
posting messages. These signs should be located at strategic points near the
entrances to designated pack it in/pack it out sites. Other possible locations
include trailheads and boat ramps.
Reminder Sign SW-2. This highly visible sign is placed at small campgrounds,
occupancy spots, developed recreation sites on islands, and trailheads in a pack
it in/pack it out area as a reminder that the system is in operation.
Developed or Undeveloped Site Sign SW-3. This sign is placed at developed or

undeveloped sites in a pack it in/pack it out area as a reminder that the system
is in operation.
November 2012
7.7 Signing of Natural Hazards

When identified in the developed recreation site plan or if identified as an
appropriate mitigation measure in a safety inspection or annual site inspection,
use signs within developed recreation sites to warn or inform visitors of safety
issues, such as floods, falling rocks, landslides, animal hazards, tree hazards,
or other natural conditions.
Figure 7-10 is an example of a wildlife hazard sign developed for developed

recreation sites located within grizzly bear habitat with documented problems.
WARNING
BEARS ARE
CURRENTLY ACTIVE
IN THIS AREA
POSTED:
Unless otherwise
specified, the signs in For more information, call

Bozeman Ranger District- at 522-2520
this section shall not GALLATIN

United States Department of Agriculture
be placed on roads P-4615 J. L. DARLING CORP.

(253) 922-5000
intended for motor

Figure 7-10—Example of wildlife hazard sign.
vehicle use because

they do not meet the
Use signs consistently across an administrative unit for similar situations or
requirements for road
conditions. Refer to FSM 2330. Unless otherwise specified, the signs in this
signs. section shall not be placed on roads intended for motor vehicle use because
they do not meet the requirements for road signs.
Coordinate with the regional sign coordinator and appropriate regional office
recreation staff if new signs or posters need to be developed to mitigate specific
hazards. Regional supplements may be developed as necessary to respond to
specific situations or conditions or to insure consistency across a region.
7.7.1 Flood Signs

The following guidance applies to posting flood signs at developed recreation
sites, i.e., recreation sites with a development scale of 3, 4, or 5. Refer to FSM
2330, section 2330.3. Do not post flood signs in recreation sites with lower
development scales or undeveloped areas. While some redundancy in signing
is acceptable and reinforces the message, avoid saturating the site with signing.
November 2012
7.7.1a High Water Mark Sign

The High Water Mark sign shall be posted at a developed recreation site if:
1. Agency hydrologists believe they have accurate documentation of the high

water level.
2. There is a known, documented history of significant flood damage to

facilities used by the public or the developed recreation site is located in an
identified flood hazard area.
For purposes of this section, significant flood damage to facilities has occurred
if the forest or grassland supervisor has requested regional or national funding
to restore facilities affected by flooding at the developed recreation site. Posting
of the high water mark sign is not warranted where flood damage has not
significantly damaged infrastructure and only debris cleanup is needed.
For purposes of this section, a developed recreation site is in an identified

flood hazard area if it is located in a Federal Emergency Management Agency
Special Flood Hazard Area (SFHA) on a National Flood Insurance Program
(NFIP) map. Relevant NFIP maps should be consulted during site selection
and development of developed recreation sites that are located in the base
floodplain (the floodplain for a flood that has a 1 percent or greater chance
of occurring in any given year). Relevant NFIP maps should be consulted
periodically to verify whether a developed recreation site is located in an SFHA.
Post the High Water Mark sign shown in figure 7-11 in at least one conspicuous
place to indicate the maximum known flood level at the developed recreation
site. Posting should occur as described above regardless of whether the
high water was from a flash flood or a slow-rising flood. Posting of signs may
occur at local discretion where slow-rising floods occur at reservoirs subject to
controlled water levels.
The High Water Mark sign is not a road sign and shall not be posted where the
intent is for it to be viewed from a moving vehicle.
Blue, black and red on light grey

HIGH WATER MARK (HWM-1) 18” x 12” (minimum)
The red line marks the highest-known flood
level at this location. Future flood levels
could be higher or lower.
Figure 7-11—High water mark sign.
November 2012
7.7.1b Flash Flood Hazard Signing

A flash flood is a flood that occurs in a short interval (minutes to hours) and for
which there may be insufficient time for persons on site to become aware of the
flood and safely evacuate.
7.7.1b.1 Flash Flood Hazard Site Sign or Poster
The Flash Flood Hazard site sign or poster shown in figure 7-12 should be
posted at all developed recreation sites that the Forest Service has determined
are vulnerable to flash flooding. Hydrologists and recreation managers should
advise on the need for Flash Flood Hazard site signs or posters. Flash flood
hazard site signs or posters should be posted on information boards and/or at
other prominent locations so that the signs are likely to be seen by all visitors.
The Flash Flood Hazard sign or poster is not a road sign and shall not be posted
where the intent is for it to be viewed from a moving vehicle.
FLASH FLOOD
HAZARD
Flash floods may occur in this area day
or night. The storm causing the flood Black on yellow (FFH-1)
may be here or far upstream.
10” x 14” (minimum)
• Monitor conditions; be prepared to act
quickly.
• Do not rely on others to warn you.
• Even large vehicles can be swept away
in floods; many flood-related fatalities
occur in vehicles.
• Know where you can climb on foot to
high ground.
YOUR SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY
Figure 7-12—Flash Flood Hazard site sign or poster.
November 2012
7.7.1b.2 FLASH FLOOD AREA Road Sign (FW8-18a)
The FLASH FLOOD AREA (FW8-18a) warning sign should be posted at

appropriate locations along roads within and/or at the entrance to developed
recreation sites that the Forest Service has determined are vulnerable to flash
flooding. Hydrologists and recreation managers should advise on the need and
locations for FLASH FLOOD AREA warning signs posted along roads or parking
lots. This sign is intended to be read from a moving vehicle, and posting of this
sign shall be based on application of engineering judgement. Refer to chapter
3B, section 3B.2.18.
The FLASH FLOOD AREA warning sign may be used at the entrance to a
developed recreation site when much of the site is vulnerable to flash flooding,
at the entrance to a single loop in a campground when only that portion of
the campground is vulnerable to flash flooding or in other locations within a
developed recreation site vulnerable to flash flooding.
The FLASH FLOOD AREA warning sign may also be posted at appropriate
locations along roads for areas within long stream corridors outside of
developed recreation sites when the Forest Service has determined these areas
are vulnerable to flash flooding. Hydrologists and recreation managers should
advise on the need and locations for these signs and the posting of these signs
shall be based on application of engineering judgement.
A supplemental distance plaque may be added to a FLASH FLOOD AREA

warning sign when appropriate, such as when entering or within a long stream
corridor subject to flash flooding. Refer to chapter 3B, section 3B.2.23a.
FLASH
FLOOD
AREA
FW8-18a
Figure 7-13—FLASH FLOOD AREA warning sign for roads.
November 2012
7.7.1b.3 Access Road Subject to Flooding Site Sign or Poster
The Access Road Subject To Flooding sign or poster shown in Figure 7-13a
may be posted on information boards in developed recreation sites that are
accessed by roads subject to flash flooding. This sign or poster should be
posted on information boards in developed recreation sites that are accessed
by low water crossings subject to flash flooding and/or there is a history of
visitors being delayed in departing due to roads blocked by flash flooding. The
need and locations for this poster should be based on professional judgment.
This poster is not to be used in lieu of a road warning sign that was determined
necessary based on application of engineering judgment. Refer to chapter 3B,
section 3B.2.18.
ACCESS ROAD
Black on yellow (ARF-1) SUBJECT TO
10” x 14” (minimum) FLOODING
Roads accessing this recreation area
may become impassable due to
flash floods.
Monitor conditions and expect delays

in departing until flood waters recede.
YOUR SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY
Figure 7-13a—Access Road Subject To Flooding sign or poster
7.7.1c General Awareness Signing for Slow Rising Floods

Use of general awareness signs for developed recreation sites located in areas
that are subject to slow rising floods is generally not warranted where there is
a reasonable expectation that the public will be aware of and safely respond to
slow-rising flood conditions, such as at most day use areas where visitors have
ready access to their vehicles and areas vulnerable to major tropical storms or
similar weather events that are publicized sufficiently in advance to allow public
notification and safe evacuation.
7.7.1c.1 Slow Rising Flood Awareness Signs for Sites
General awareness signs for slow rising floods at developed recreation sites
vulnerable to slow-rising floods may be posted where visitors may leave their
property for extended periods such as parking lots, trailheads, or boat launches.
Use the sign shown in figure 7-14 if one is necessary.
This sign is not a road sign and shall not be posted where the intent is for the
sign to be viewed from a moving vehicle.
November 2012
AREA SUBJECT
TO FLOODING
White on brown (AF-1)
You are responsible for monitoring
18” x 12” (minimum) conditions and taking precautionary measures.
Figure 7-14—Slow Rising Flood Awareness site sign.
7.7.1c.2 Slow Rising Flood Awareness Road Sign
General information signs with messages, such as THIS AREA SUBJECT TO

FLOODING or RECREATION AREA MAY FLOOD as shown in figure 7-15
may be posted along roads accessing developed recreation sites that are
prone to slow-rising floods. Posting of signs along roads shall be determined
by engineering judgment. Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.11 for guidelines
on using information signs along roads. Messages on these signs should be
approved by the regional sign coordinator on a case-by-case basis. Refer to
chapter 3E, section 3E.11 for sign drawings.
RECREATION THIS AREA

AREA MAY SUBJECT TO
FLOOD FLOODING
FLD1 FLD2
FLD1 FLD2
Figure 7-15—Examples of a slow rising flood awareness road signs.
November 2012
7.7.1d Flood Signs for Areas Below Dams

Signs may be posted at developed recreation sites located along streams that
are subject to rapidly changing water levels due to scheduled or unexpected
dam releases. Coordinate with the agency that has jurisdiction of the dam to
determine appropriate signing. The flood awareness sign shown in figure 7-14
or signs developed in coordination with the local dam authority may be used for
this purpose, such as the sign shown in figure 7-16. Coordinate with the regional
sign coordinator for assistance in designing new signs. These signs should be
approved by the regional sign coordinator on a case-by-case basis.
These are not road signs and they shall not be posted where the intent is for
them to be viewed from a moving vehicle.
Figure 7-16—Example of a sign posted below a dam.
7.7.1e Other Flood Related Warning Signs for Access Roads

Standard warning signs may be posted along roads accessing developed
recreation sites that are prone to slow-rising floods. Refer to figure 7-17 for
examples of flood warning signs for roads. Refer to chapter 3B, section 3B.2.17
through 3B.2.19, for additional guidance on flood warning signs along roads.
Posting of signs along roads shall be determined by engineering judgment.
IMPASSABLE
DURING
HIGH WATER
FW8-18B W8-18
W8-19
Figure 7-17—Flood warning signs for roads.
August 2013
7.8 Miscellaneous Signs and Posters

Signs and posters can convey a variety of messages to the public. Follow
guidance in chapters 10, 10A, and 10B for visitor information signing on bulletin
boards and at kiosks and interpretative sites. Signing shall be appropriate for
the managed uses of the site. Do not sign for uses that are not managed at
Do not sign for uses
the site. For example: sign for lifeguard availability if the site has a managed
that are not managed at swimming facility. Do not sign for lifeguard availability if the site is located next
to a body of water, but no swimming facilities are provided and swimming is not
the site.
managed at the site.
If standard signs and posters are not available, consult with the forest or
regional sign coordinator before procuring and installing new signs and posters
not shown in the MUTCD or these Guidelines.
7.8.1 Forest Service Regulations

Developed recreation sites are subject to Forest Service regulations in 36 CFR
part 261, subpart A, and may be subject to orders issued under 36 CFR part
261, subpart B, including restrictions on site availability, food storage, shooting,
camping limits, and waste disposal. Where deemed necessary to assist in
enforcement of these regulations and orders, black-and-white regulatory signs
shall be used. Consult with the local law enforcement and investigations staff
and the forest, or regional sign coordinator before procuring or installing any
regulatory signs not shown in the MUTCD or these Guidelines. If regulatory
signs are to be installed along roads, the signs must meet the standards in
chapter 3A.
If enforcement is not feasible or planned, do not use a black-and-white

DAY US E AREA regulatory sign. Instead, use a brown-and-white miscellaneous information sign.
OPEN Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.11, for guidance on miscellaneous information
7 AM - 9 PM signs.
7.8.1a Closure Signs

Use regulatory closure signs to inform the public of seasonal or time-related
closures at developed recreation sites. Refer to figure 7-18 for examples of
closure signs. Consult with the forest or regional sign coordinator for assistance
in developing site-specific closure signs.
CAMPGROUND
VISITOR CENTER DAY USE AREA CLOSED
CLOSED CLOSED 10PM - 7AM
OCT 1 - MAY 31 9PM - 7AM EXCEPT FOR CAMPERS
Figure 7-18—Closure signs.
August 2013
Do not use standard ROAD CLOSED signs for site closures unless the site is
closed to all use, including foot traffic. Refer to chapter 3A, section 3A.5.
Closure signs may be placed on gates, other restriction devices, kiosks, or

buildings as necessary. If access to developed recreation sites is controlled
by a gate or restriction device, ensure that all safety signs on gates are in
conformance with chapter 3B, section 3B.3 and chapter 3D, figures 3D-25
through 3D-27.
7.9 Self-Locator Maps

At major or more complex developed recreation sites, use professionally
designed and manufactured park-and-read self-locator signs with “You Are
Here” messages or symbols. Refer to figure 7-19 for of a self-locator sign.
Figure 7-19—Self-locator map.
Chapter 7A Developed Recreation Site Signing Placement and
Installation
7A.1 Introduction.........................................................................................................1
November 2012

Installation
7A.1 Introduction
This chapter illustrates typical placement and installation of signs within
developed recreation sites. For additional placement and installation information
on roads, follow the guidelines in chapter 3D. Obtain the advice of the forest
sign coordinator for special situations.
W1-11
R1-2
R7-8
20
One-way loop
W13-1
R6-1 or R6-2
Large
Parking
campground
loop
Lake R6-1 or R6-2
Single-lane road
-way
On e
R6-1 or R6-2
15 R2-1
lane road
35
e- gl
Sin
R2-1
R6-1 or R6-2
R1-1 R5-1
Main Highway
R6-1 or R6-2
Refer to chapters 3A and 3B for

R5-1 regulatory and warning signs.
Figure 7A-1—Placement example for regulatory and warning signs in a recreation site with one-way
traffic and speed control.
November 2012

Installation
VISITOR CENTER
AMPHITHEATER
L AU N C H RAM P
P IC N IC AREA
P
C H RAM
LAUN KING
PA R I C A R E A
PICN
Launch ramp
H
AC
Information
BE
center
Amphitheater
Cedar h
Pat
Parking
Springs
lake Picnic
area
VI UN UND
CA
LA GRO
SI CH
Beach Campground
MP
TO
R RAM
CE P
NT
ER
Refer to chapter 3C for Guide

signing.
Figure 7A-2—Placement examples for destination signs within a recreation site.
November 2012

Installation
Launch ramp
Information
center
Amphitheater
Cedar h
Pat
Parking
Springs
lake Picnic
area
Beach Campground
Refer to chapter 3C for Guide

signing.
Figure 7A-3—Placement examples for recreational and cultural interest area symbols within a
recreation site.
November 2012

Installation
Trailhead
Trout Creek
Trail TRAILHEAD
RSE
**
Trout Creek
BOAT LAUNCH
RSE
**
Launch ramp
Trout Lake
Campground
**
Parking
Trout Creek
CAMPGROUND
RSE
*Do NOT put Recreation Site

Identification signs in these Trout Creek
locations. Leave intersection RECREATION AREA
clear of signs WINEMA
**25 to 100 feet

** U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
RS
* *
Trout Creek
Trout Creek RECREATION Recreation Area
Recreation Area 4
AREA
Trout FRD Trout Creek
FRD SA Creek Use SA or FRD Recreation Area 5
FM6-1 Site Approach Sign
FRD
Note: Approach signs shown in reduced shading.

Refer to chapter 3C.
Figure 7A-4—Placement examples for site identification signs.
Chapter 7B Developed Recreation Site Signing Sign Drawings
7B.1 General Layout.................................................................................................... 1
7B.2 Recreation Site Identification Signs.................................................................. 2
7B.3 National Recreation Area Signs......................................................................... 6
7B.4 Sanitary Dumping Site Signs............................................................................. 7
7B.5 Forest Service Fee Area Sign............................................................................. 8
7B.6 Solid Waste Disposal Signs............................................................................... 9

November 2012
7B.1 General Layout
Trout Creek
CAMPGROUND
Aspen Ridge
ROGUE RIVER
CAMPGROUND
RS RSE
Margin
Notes
Margin shown shall typically be one-half the capital letter height of the forest or unit name.
Each line of text shall be centered between the edges of the sign and shall not extend into the margin.
Use for facilities such as campgrounds, visitor centers, picnic grounds, and trailheads.
See chapter 1, section 1.7.3b for logotypes.
Specify names, site type, and sign number when ordering.
For manufacturing specifications, refer to chapters 14 and 14A.
S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 7B-1
November 2012
7B.2 Recreation Site Identification signs
Text layout—Recreation Site Identification sign (RS)
Trout Creek
CAMPGROUND H
E
D ROGUE RIVER
C
B
A

Facility
Facility Forest
name type name
Sign (title (upper (upper NF
number
L H A B C D E case) case) case) Logotype
RS-1 48 30 4 10 15 17 23 2 4D 4D 3D 4
RS-2 63 40 5 13 20 23 31 2 5D 5D 4D 5
RS-3 78 50 6 2 16 25 29 39 2 6D 6D 5D 6
RS-4 93 60 7 19 30 35 47 2 7D 7D 6D 7
Notes
Text – ASA series as noted. USDA Road
Shield and credit line are required with this sign. Sign credit speed
number Shield line (mph)
Painted, Routed Colors
Top – Brown (#20059) legend on yellow-cream (#23695) RS-1 S-10 P-37 0-15
background. RS-2 S-12 P-43 20-25
Bottom – Yellow-cream (#23695) legend on brown (#20059)
background. RS-3 S-12 P-52 30-45
RS-4 S-15 P-68 50+
Fully Retroreflective Colors
Top – Brown legend on white background.
Bottom – White legend on brown background.
References
For sign guidelines, see chapters 7 and 7A.
For horizontal text placement, see section 7B.1.
For Forest Service shield, see chapter 8C, section 8C.7.
For USDA credit line, see chapter 8C, section 8C.6.
For National Forest logotype, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3b.
7B-2 S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
Text layout—Recreation Site Identification sign (RS M1) modified layout, two-line site type
Fish Creek
WILDLIFE
OBSERVATION SITE H
F
E
D
ROGUE RIVER
C
B
A

Facility Facility Forest
name type name
number L H A B C D E F case) case) case) Logotype
RSM1-1 48 30 3 8 2 13 2 15 2 20 24 2 4D 3D 3D 4
RSM1-2 63 40 4 11 2 18 4 21 27 33 5D 4D 4D 5
RSM1-3 78 50 5 14 2 23 26 2 34 41 2 6D 5D 5D 6
RSM1-4 93 60 6 17 2 27 w 32 41 50 7D 6D 6D 7
Notes
USDA Road
Text – ASA series as noted. Sign credit speed
Shield and credit line are required with this sign. number Shield line (mph)
Painted, Routed Colors RSM1-1 S-10 P-37 0-15
Top – Brown (#20059) legend on yellow-cream (#23695)
background. RSM1-2 S-12 P-43 20-25
Bottom – Yellow-cream (#23695) legend on brown (#20059) RSM1-3 S-12 P-52 30-45
background.
RSM1-4 S-15 P-68 50+
References
November 2012
Text layout—Recreation Site Identification sign (RS M2) modified layout, two-line forest name
Grizzly Flat
CAMPGROUND
F
BEAVERHEAD- H
E
D DEERLODGE
C
B
A

name type name
Sign (title (upper
(upper NF
number L H A B C D E F case) case) case)
Logotype
RSM2-1 48 36 4 10 2 16 2 21 2 23 2 29 w 4D 4D 3D 4
RSM2-2 63 48 5 13 2 21 2 28 2 31 2 39 w 5D 5D 4D 5
RSM2-3 78 60 6 16 2 26 2 35 2 39 2 49 w 6D 6D 5D 6
RSM2-4 93 72 8 19 2 31 2 42 2 47 2 59 w 7D 7D 6D 7
Notes
Text – ASA series as noted. USDA Road
Shield and credit line are required with this sign. Sign credit speed
number Shield line (mph)
RSM2-1 S-10 P-37 0-15
Top – Brown (#20059) legend on yellow-cream (#23695)
background.
RSM2-2 S-12 P-43 20-25
background. RSM2-3 S-12 P-52 30-45
Fully Retroreflective Colors RSM2-4 S-15 P-68 50+

References
November 2012
Text layout—Optional Recreation Site Identification (RSE) sign
Aspen Ridge
H
C
B
A
CAMPGROUND

Facility Facility
name type Road
Sign (title (upper speed
number L H A B C case) case) (mph)
RSE-1 30 14 3 7 s 9 8 3D 3D 0-15
RSE-2 48 20 3 w 10 w 13 2 4D 4D 20-25
RSE-3 60 24 5 13 16 4 5D 5D 30-45
RSE-4 72 28 5 15 18 2 6D 6D 50+
Notes
Text – ASA series as noted.
Shield and credit line are not required with this sign.

Top – Brown (#20059) legend on yellow-cream (#23695) background.
Bottom – Yellow-cream (#23695) legend on brown (#20059) background.

References
November 2012
7B.3 National Recreation Area Signs

Text layout—National Recreation Area (NRA-REC) sign
Digger Bay
CAMPGROUND
H
F
E
D
C
B
A

Facility Facility
Sign name type NRA
number L H A B C D E F (title case) (upper case) Logotype
NRA-Rec-1 48 36 3 2 9 2 15 2 21 2 23 2 29 w 4D 4D 4
NRA-Rec-2 63 48 4 2 12 2 20 2 28 2 31 2 39 w 5D 5D 5
NRA-Rec-3 78 60 5 2 15 2 25 2 35 2 39 2 49 w 6D 6D 6
NRA-Rec-4 93 72 6 2 18 2 30 2 42 2 47 2 59 w 7D 7D 7
Notes
Text – ASA series as noted. NRA Road
Shield and NRA credit line are required with this sign. Sign credit speed
number Shield line #2 (mph)
Yellow-cream and white colors may be changed to colors
fitting the character of the area when approved by the NRA-Rec-1 S-10 NRA-P10 0-15
Regional Forester. Color of the credit line and shield must
match color of the site identification sign. NRA-Rec-2 S-12 NRA-P12 20-25
Top – Brown (#20059) legend on yellow-cream (#23695) NRA-Rec-3 S-12 NRA-P12 30-45
background.
NRA-Rec-4 S-15 NRA-P12 50+
background.
Fully Retroreflective Colors References

Top – Brown legend on white background. For sign guidelines, see chapters 7 and 7A.
Bottom – White legend on brown background. For horizontal text placement, see section 7B.1.
For NRA USDA credit line, see chapter 8C, section 8C.9.
For NRA logotype, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3b.
November 2012
7B.4 Sanitary Dumping Site Signs

Text layout—Sanitary Dumping Site signs (SDS)
C C
D D
DUMPING STATION Drinking

CONNECT
1 WATER
your hose to trailer
holding tank
2
INSERT
hose end securely into
H drain, holding cover open with H
foot...open trailer drain valve
3
WASH
any spillage into the
drain using water
provided
Use this hose for filling
DANGER fresh water tank only:
Not to be used not to be used for
for drinking or
domestic purposes flushing waste tanks.
L L
Dimensions (inches)
Sign
number L H C D
SDS 10 22 a 1
Colors
Fully retroreflective white legend and border
on brown background.
November 2012
7B.5 Forest Service Fee Area Sign
Text layout—Forest Service Fee Area sign (FA)
A
D
H
B
C
Mounting holes are 1/8 inch
inset 3/4 inch
L
Dimensions (inches)
Sign Hole Outside Circle
number L H A B C D size border border
FA-1 9 9 5 s 4 w 7 n 8 4 8
FA-2 18 18 11 4 8 1 2 15 a 8 2 4
Colors
Background and shield background – gold transparent ink (PMS 130).
Background circle – white retroreflective sheeting (engineer grade).
Borders, figures, and type – midnight blue (PMS 282).
Colors are Pantone Matching System (PMS).
November 2012
7B.6 Solid Waste Disposal Signs
Text layout—Solid Waste Disposal sign (SW-1) Pack it in/Pack it out with bag dispenser
FOR YOUR
INFORMATION
FOREST SERVICE
Trash Bags COLOR SCHEME

Brown
Yellow (Cream)
White
November 2012
Text layout—Solid Waste Disposal sign (SW-2) Pack it in/Pack it out reminder sign
C
F
F
60” C
E
typ
COLOR SCHEME
Brown
Yellow (Cream)
White
Dimensions (inches)
Sign
number L H C D E F
SW-2 30 18 2 2 a 1 2 1
November 2012
Please! Pack out all trash

you don’t burn. Don’t bury
trash. Animals
will dig it up.
Dimensions (inches)
Sign
number L H C D E Location
SW-3 13 18 1 1 2 a Site sign
SW-4 8 11 1 w w a Trailside sign
Colors
Black legend on white background.
8.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................1
8.2 Sign Design...............................................................................................................1
8.2.1 Shape .........................................................................................................2
8.2.2 Sizes ..........................................................................................................2
8.2.3 Materials ....................................................................................................2
8.2.4 Colors ........................................................................................................3
8.2.5 Use of Proclaimed Names .......................................................................3
8.2.6 Sign Supports and Bases.........................................................................3

November 2012
8.1 Introduction
Use forest identification signs to identify National Forest System administrative
sites, such as district offices, forest and regional headquarters and other
Place forest facilities, and administrative boundaries.
Identification signs at
Place forest identification signs at the location that best identifies the facility or
the location that best boundary, with consideration of topography, safety, cost, environmental impacts,
and visibility.
identifies the facility or
boundary. Modification of standard signs requires approval from the regional sign
coordinator. After approval, submit a detailed drawing or artwork to the sign
manufacturer when ordering modified signs. Include shape detail, letter size,
series and spacing requirements, overall dimensions, and color scheme.
8.2 Sign Design

Standard designs have been developed for forest identification signs and should
be used whenever possible. The standard designs include national distinctive
logotypes that shall be used without modification. Refer to chapter 1, section
1.7.3b for logotypes.
Modifications to standard designs, such as those approved for special

congressionally designated areas, should ensure that:
• Features such as size, contrast, color, shape, composition, and lighting or

retroreflectivity are combined to draw attention to the sign.
• Shape, size, colors, and simplicity of message combine to produce a clear

meaning.
• Legibility and size combine with placement to permit adequate time for
viewing and response.
Site names on signs should match current administrative maps so visitors can
locate and recognize the site.
November 2012
8.2.1 Shape
Sign shapes for the different types of forest identification signs shall be in
accordance with figure 8-1.
• Rural Administration • Research Station • Urban Administrative

Site Laboratory Site
• Project Work Center • Project Work Center • Project Work Center
• Forest Entrance • Other permanent • Airfield
facilities • Heliport
Figure 8-1—Typical shapes and associated types of forest identification

signs.
8.2.2 Sizes
Sizes of forest identification signs are determined by the following factors:
• Speed of travel on approach road.
• The message that is to be displayed on the sign.
• Site characteristics such as site capacity and amount of use.
Chapter 8C shows sign sizes for use on roads with various prevailing speeds.
Sign designs come in standard sizes. Standard sizes shall be used unless the
message requires that the standard be modified to accommodate longer or
hyphenated names.
If the sign is not along a road but is mounted on or in front of a building, it should
be sized appropriately for exterior display to meet local conditions and the
approved site plan.
8.2.3 Materials
Signs may be routed or retroreflective. If the sign needs to be visible to the
traveling public in the day and night, use retroreflective signs or illuminate
the routed signs. Adding glass beads to the paint on routed signs is not an
acceptable alternative to provide retroreflectivity. Refer to chapter 3, section
3.3.2 for more information on retroreflectivity.
See chapter 14 for material options and factors that may help in determining
what substrate to use. Sign support structures should be designed to be
compatible with the site. Refer to chapter 7 and the “Built Environment Image
Guide” for more information on site compatibility.
November 2012
8.2.4 Colors
Colors for forest identification signs shall be as shown in chapter 8C.
Congressionally designated special areas may use colors fitting the character of
the area when approved by the regional forester (see chapter 8B, section 8B.3).
8.2.5 Use of Proclaimed Names

Boundaries shall be signed with the proclaimed name of the unit.
When two or more national forests have been combined into one administrative
unit without changing the proclaimed names or when portions of one forest are
administered by another forest:
1. The headquarters of a combined unit shall be identified with the name of

each forest. Use a hyphen or “and” between the names. Examples:
• Bridger-Teton National Forests.
• Arapaho and Roosevelt National Forests.
Boundaries shall
be signed with the 2. When all national forests in a State are administered by one headquarters,
use a name such as “National Forests in Texas.” Place the State name
proclaimed name of last.
the unit.
3. Where forest names are used on signs for ranger district offices, forest
headquarters, or work centers the forest on which the site is located shall
be used. Example: Afton Ranger District, Bridger National Forest (not
Bridger-Teton National Forests).
8.2.6 Sign Supports and Bases

Breakaway (crashworthy) posts shall be used when signs are placed within the
clear zone as determined by an engineering study or application of engineering
judgment. Placement of all solid base installations, such as the one shown in
figure 8-2 require an engineering study and shall be placed either outside the
clear zone or behind protective barriers if within the clear zone. Refer to chapter
3D for clear zone and breakaway requirements.
Figure 8-2—Solid bases outside of clear zone.
Chapter 8A Forest Identification Signing Administrative Sites
8A.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 1
8A.2 Traffic Control Devices....................................................................................... 1
8A.2.1 Site Approach Signing .......................................................................... 1
8A.3 Forest or Regional Headquarters and Ranger Station Identification Signs .2
8A.3.1 Rural Locations ..................................................................................... 2
8A.3.2 Urban Locations .................................................................................... 3
8A.3.3 Collocated Forest Service Offices ....................................................... 3
8A.4 Collocated Interagency Offices ......................................................................... 4
8A.4.1 USDA Offices ......................................................................................... 4
8A.4.2 Collocated Forest Service and BLM Offices ...................................... 5
8A.4.3 Collocated USDA and Other Federal or State Offices ....................... 6
8A.5 Work Center and Other Permanent Facility Signs .......................................... 7
8A.6 Research Signs.................................................................................................... 7
8A.6.1 Research Station Signs, Research Laboratory, and

Technology and Development Center Signs...................................... 8
8A.6.2 Experimental Forest Signs ................................................................... 8
8A.6.2a Inside National Forest ............................................................. 8
8A.6.2b Outside National Forests ........................................................ 9
8A.7 Human Resource Signs ..................................................................................... 9

November 2012
8A.1 Introduction
A variety of signs are used to identify national forest facilities and to direct users
to, from, and within those facilities. Signing to and within administrative sites
should meet HOST program objectives. Refer to FSM 1521, Host Program.
Administrative sites include:
• District office, forest headquarters, and regional headquarters.
• Work centers and research facilities.
• Experimental forests.
All traffic control • Human resource sites, such as Job Corps (JC) or Youth Conservation
Corps (YCC).
devices on roads
• Airfields and heliports.
needed to regulate,
warn, or guide • Do not include phrases such as, “Land of Many Uses,” State boundaries,
or words other than those shown in these Guidelines on forest identification
traffic leading to or signs.
within administrative
sites shall meet the 8A.2 Traffic Control Devices

requirements of the All traffic control devices on roads needed to regulate, warn, or guide traffic
MUTCD and these leading to or within administrative sites shall meet the requirements of
the MUTCD and these Guidelines. This includes the design, shape, color,
Guidelines. retroreflectivity, and installation. Refer to chapter 3 for traffic control device
standards. Coordinate use of all traffic control devices, including those within the
administrative site, with the forest sign coordinator.
8A.2.1 Site Approach Signing

Install retroreflective site approach signs where necessary, such as those shown
in figure 8A-11, to direct visitors to the site. Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.5
for detailed information.
VISITOR
CENTER
INFORMATION < MILE
Figure 8A-11—Example of site approach signs.
November 2012
Site approach and other guide signs should be removed, covered, or marked
“Closed” or “Closed Until (Date)” at important decision points to the site when
administrative sites, project work centers, research stations, or labs are
seasonal or temporarily closed. Site approach and other guide signs should be
removed when the site is permanently closed.
8A.3 Forest or Regional Headquarters and Ranger Station

Identification Signs
The type of sign used to identify the facility depends on whether the office
or headquarters is located in an urban or rural area. In some cases, local
ordinances or stipulations in lease or rental agreements may limit signing design
for headquarters, and decisions must be made based on these requirements.
Offices may be part of other commercial buildings, such as a strip mall or a
combined Federal or governmental facility. In these situations, Forest Service
standards may need to be modified. The sign requires both the Forest Service
shield and the USDA credit line as a part of the installation.
Both the Forest Service
shield and the USDA

Use the following terminology to identify the facility:
Credit line are a part of
the installation.
• District ranger office RANGER STATION
• Supervisor’s office FOREST HEADQUARTERS
• Regional office REGIONAL HEADQUARTERS
8A.3.1 Rural Locations

The sign illustrated in figure 8A-1 is the standard for identifying rural
administrative sites such as forest headquarters and ranger stations.
Darby
RANGER STATION
BITTERROOT
Figure 8A-1-Basic design of rural sign for major administrative sites.
November 2012
8A.3.2 Urban Locations

The rectangular sign shown in figure 8A-2 is the standard for identifying urban
administrative sites, such as regional headquarters, forest headquarters, and
ranger stations. A separate USDA Credit line plaque is not required with this
sign.
U NORTH FORK U FOREST

S RANGER STATION S HEADQUARTERS
D SALMON D SMN T.O QBUAAKLEMRI-E
A A
Figure 8A-2—Basic design of urban signs for administrative sites.
8A.3.3 Collocated Forest Service Offices

For collocations of When Forest Service administrative offices are collocated, the administrative
ranger district(s) and site sign should be as generic as possible to limit the amount of information on
the sign and help avoid confusion. Specific office names can be individually
forest headquarters, do posted on main doors or at separate entrances. Figures 8A-3, 8A-4, and 8A-5
not distinguish between show appropriate signing for several possible office combinations.
the two administrative For collocations of ranger district(s) and forest headquarters, do not distinguish
between the two administrative offices. This sign may be used for collocations
offices.
of zone offices also.
Use the plural form (forests) for the administrative collocation of two or more
forests. Sign sizes may need to be modified from the standard sizes to
accommodate large name combinations.
DISTRICT OFFICES U DISTRICT

NICOLET S OFFICES
D SANTA FE
A
Rural Urban
Figure 8A-3—Combination of two or more ranger districts on same forest.
November 2012
FOREST OFFICES U FO R EST

KISATCHIE S O F F I C ES
D SANTA FE
A
Rural Urban
Figure 8A-4—Combination of ranger district(s) and forest headquarters on

same forest.
DISTRICT OFFICES U FOREST

HURON-MANISTEE S HEADQUARTERS
HURON-
D MANISTEE
A
Rural Urban
Figure 8A-5—Administrative combination of two or more forests.
8A.4 Collocated Interagency Offices
8A.4.1 USDA Offices

Comply with the requirements of Department of Agriculture Regulation 5160-
Agency logos may be 3, Identification Signs when collocating USDA offices. Agencies may be listed
shown on the sign or
alphabetically or by other local factors. Agency logos may be shown on the sign
or mounted on the base. The sign requires both the Forest Service shield and
mounted on the base. the USDA credit line as a part of the installation.
Figure 8A-6 shows the appropriate sign for collocated USDA offices.
November 2012
U FARMERS HOME ADMINISTRATION
S FOREST HEADQUARTERS
UMPQUA
D
NATURAL RESOURCES
A CONSERVATION SERVICE
Figure 8A-6—Administrative site sign for combination of USDA agencies.
8A.4.2 Collocated Forest Service and BLM Offices

An agreement has been made with the Bureau of Land Management (BLM)
to use the sign shown in figure 8A-7 when the Forest Service and BLM have
collocated offices. The sign will be retroreflective when purchased by the BLM
and either retroreflective or routed and illuminated when purchased by the
Forest Service.
Forest Service shield/BLM logo and USDA/USDI credit lines are required with
this sign.
Use of the sign is required for new offices. Use of the sign at existing
collocated offices is encouraged when existing signs become due for repair or
replacement.
INTERAGENCY OFFICE U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT
Sioux Ranger District

Custer
Camp Crook Fire Station
Eastern Montana / Dakotas District
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
Figure 8A-7—Forest Service and BLM combined office sign.
November 2012
8A.4.3 Collocated USDA and Other Federal or State Offices

Signs for USDA offices collocated with other Federal or State offices present
unique challenges. These are not standard signs and their design needs to be
coordinated with the regional sign coordinator. Figure 8A-8 shows examples of
signs for multiagency collocations. These signs require the Forest Service shield
as a part of the installation. The Forest Service shield and other agency shields
or logos should be the same size.
Figure 8A-8—Administrative site signs for multiagency combinations.
November 2012
8A.5 Work Center and Other Permanent Facility Signs

Sign size is dependent on the site’s importance and accessibility. Minor facilities
may be identified with a simple, small feature sign (refer to chapter 3C, section
3C.11.1, or a routed sign attached to the building if the facility is isolated. For
important high public interest facilities, such as tree nurseries and major work
centers a large sign may be appropriate (figure 8A-9). The sign requires both
the Forest Service shield and the USDA credit line as a part of the installation.
Catahoula
WORK CENTER
KISATCHIE
Figure 8A-9—Major work center sign.
8A.6 Research Signs

These signs identify research stations and laboratories, technology and
development centers, experimental stations, and supplemental study areas as
part of the Forest Service and the U.S. Department of Agriculture. The sign
requires both the Forest Service shield and the USDA credit line as a part of the
installation.
To identify research facilities and sites, use the rectangular urban design
(figure 8A-2) or the research sign design (figure 8A-10). Research signs are
specialized signs and do not have a sign number because of the variety of sizes
and messages that are required. Their design needs to be coordinated with the
regional sign coordinator.
When marking experimental areas and boundaries, use the program area signs
shown in chapter 12.
November 2012
8A.6.1 Research Station Signs, Research Laboratory, and Technology and

Development Center Signs
Research station, laboratory headquarters, and technology and development
center signs should include the name of the station, laboratory, or center.
The Forest Service shield and the USDA credit line are installed on the sign
assembly as shown in figure 8A-10.

Figure 8A-10—Example of an administrative sign for forest laboratories
and technology and development centers.
If the research station is a complex of several buildings, sign the principal

building with the organizational identification. The remaining buildings may
be signed with the name of the facility if needed. Garages, warehouses,
greenhouses, and other auxiliary buildings are not ordinarily identified with signs.
8A.6.2. Experimental Forest Signs

Signing to differentiate between experimental forests and national forests
requires careful planning and coordination of sign design and placement to
avoid confusing the general public. Sign experimental forest headquarters and
principal research facilities as appropriate. Erect major identification signs at
locations where these facilities can be easily recognized by the public.
8A.6.2a Inside National Forest

Identify each experimental forest with a headquarters sign that includes the
experimental forest name, experimental station name, and the standard Forest
Service shield.
November 2012
8A.6.2b Outside National Forests

Identify each experimental forest with a headquarters sign that includes the
experimental forest name, experimental station name, the standard Forest
Service shield, and the USDA credit line.
8A.7 Human Resource Signs

Job Corps and Youth Conservation Corps signs relate to the human resources
program. Unique site identification signs have been developed for each of these
facilities as shown in figure 8A-11.
ANGEL
ANGEL
JJob
JobCorps
Job
o b Corps
Corps
Corps CAMP
CIVILIAN
CIVILIAN NAME
CCONSERVATION
O N S E R V A T I O N CENTER
CENTER
OOPERATED
P E R A T E D F FOR O R UU.S.
. S . DEPARTMENT
D E P A R T M E N T OOF
F LABOR
LABOR YOUTH CONSERVATION CORPS
BBYY
SSIUSLAW
I U S L A W NNATIONAL
A T I O N A L FFOREST
OREST FOREST SERVICE
UU.S.
. S . DEPARTMENT
D E P A R T M E N T OF O F AGRICULTURE
AGRICULTURE U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
Figure 8A-11—Examples of Job Corps and Youth Conservation Corps

signs.
The standard Job Corps and Youth Conservation Corps symbols and logotypes
shall be used on all interior signs that are not traffic control devices.
Job Corps and Youth Conservation Corps symbols shall be used without
modification and shall be the prescribed mandatory colors. When the YCC
symbol is used on signs, do not include the wording around the perimeter of the
symbol.
Symbol artwork with color descriptions is available from the Washington Office,
Human Resources.
Sign drawings are shown in chapter 8C.
Chapter 8B Forest Identification National Forest, Grassland, and
Signing Other Administrative Boundaries
8B.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 1
8B.2 Forest, Grassland, and Other Administrative Units’ Entrance

and Leaving Signs ............................................................................................ 1
8B.3 Designated Special Areas ................................................................................ 3
8B.3.1 Special Area Entrances on Unit Boundaries ..................................... 4
8B.3.2 Special Area Entrances Not on Forest Boundaries........................... 5
8B.3.3 Minor Special Area Entrances ............................................................ 6
8B.4 Wilderness and Primitive Areas ....................................................................... 6
8B.4.1 Wilderness and Primitive Area Portal Signs ..................................... 6
8B.4.2 Wilderness and Primitive Area Boundary Signs................................ 8
8B.5 National Wild and Scenic Rivers System ...................................................... 10
8B.6 Experimental Forests and Research Area Boundaries ............................... 11
8B.7 Supplemental Study Areas ............................................................................. 11

November 2012

8B.1 Introduction
The following categories of entrance and leaving boundary signs are included in
this chapter:
• National forests and grasslands.
• Congressionally designated special areas, including:

o National recreation areas.
o National monuments.
o Glacier viewing areas in Alaska.
o National scenic areas.
o National tallgrass prairies.
o Protection areas.
• National Landmarks designated by the Secretary of the Interior.
• Wilderness and primitive areas.
• Research natural areas and experimental forests.
• National Wild and Scenic River Systems.
8B.2 Forest, Grassland, and Other Administrative Units’

Entrance and Leaving Signs
Identify entrances to national forests, grasslands, and other administrative units
with appropriate signs along principal access routes. The high point of the sign
always faces to the road.
Use a national forest boundary entrance (FE) and leaving (FL) sign (figure 8B-1)
on Federal and State highways and major county roads. The sign installation
shall include the Forest Service shield and the USDA credit line.
FE FL
Leaving
UMPQUA UMPQUA
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
Road Road
Front Back
Figure 8B-1—Signs for entering and leaving National Forest entrances.
November 2012

Sign bases that do not meet breakaway requirements should be located out of
the clear zone or shielded behind barriers. See chapter 3D.
Entrance and leaving signs should be retroreflective.
Use minor national forest boundary entrance (MFE) and leaving (MFL) signs
(figure 8B-2) on trails, minor public highways, and National Forest System
roads with low traffic volumes. The sign also may be used on major interior
boundaries. Place the shield on the minor entrance and leaving sign assembly.
A Forest Service shield is required with this sign. A separate USDA credit line
plaque is not required.
MFE MFL
Leaving
PAYETTE PAYETTE
U.S. DEPARTMENT U.S. DEPARTMENT

OF AGRICULTURE OF AGRICULTURE
Road Road
Front Back
Figure 8B-2—Signs for minor forest entrance and leaving and major
interior boundary.
Use an entering (NFL-E) or leaving (NFL-L) land sign (figure 8B-3) when it is
desirable to inform visitors that they are entering and leaving private lands within
a national forest or grassland. There are two sizes: 27 by 27 inches and 18 by
18 inches. Use the smaller sign on low-volume, ML 2 roads with travel speeds
less than 20 miles per hour or on trails. This smaller sign may be mounted on
objects, such as fence lines, eliminating the need for additional posts. A Forest
Service shield and USDA credit line is not required with these signs.
NFL-E NFL-L
ENTERING LEAVING
Road Road
LAND LAND
Figure 8B-3—Entering and Leaving Land signs.
8B-2 Si gn and P os t er G ui del ines for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012

Consider safety first when determining placement of boundary signs. Placing

the sign at the actual boundary is a secondary consideration. Select the first
Consider safety first
acceptable site for the sign that is at or inside the property line of a national
when determining forest or other administrative unit. In the case of private tracts of land inside the
unit boundary, place the minor entrance sign at or near the interior property line
placement of boundary
where identification is desirable.
signs.
If topography or other considerations require an installation on the left side
of the road, signs must be ordered with the high point opposite that shown in
figures 8B-1, 8B-2, and 8B-3.
8B.3 Designated Special Areas

This direction ONLY applies to areas that have been recognized by special
designations as follows:
• National Monuments designated by the President under the authority of the

Antiquities Act.
• National landmarks designated by the Secretary of the Interior.
• Areas within the National Forest System individually designated by special

act of Congress including:
o National recreation areas.

o National scenic areas.
o National tallgrass prairies.
o Protection areas.
o Glacier viewing areas in Alaska.
o National Volcanic Monuments.
To be effective and to denote the prestige and unique attributes of these areas,
signing may require special emphasis.
Signs may utilize specific designs and colors that portray the special
Signs may utilize characteristics of the designated area. While they may be distinctive in
materials, colors, and design, these signs should achieve the same visitor
specific designs and
utility objectives and clearly display the agency relationship as for standard
colors that portray the identification signs, including the Forest Service shield and the USDA credit line
as standard identification signs. Refer to chapter 8A, section 8A.3.
special characteristics
of the designated The sign colors may be changed to harmonious selections fitting the character
and natural setting of the special area. The colors used for the sign background
area. and message must be of high contrast so that the lettering and field can be
distinguished by an ordinary driver as well as the visually impaired. The use of
white on blue background is strongly discouraged. Those colors are designated
for use on freeways, county route guide signs, evacuation routes, road-user
service signs, and accessibility symbols.
November 2012

Any variations to standard size, shape, colors, or material must be submitted to

the regional forester for approval as part of the unit management plan and must
be strongly justified as to the need for a change from standard identification
signs. Approval requests for nonstandard signs must be supported by the Built
Environment Image Guide ((BEIG, Publication FS-710). Signs should be used
consistently throughout the area. An approved sign example of specific design
and colors is shown in figure 8B-4.
Figure 8B-4—Adapted sign for the Midewin National Tallgrass Prairie

boundary.
The distinctive logotype and selected color scheme for the special area may be
used sparingly for identification on items such as cooperative plaques, visitor
information boards, interpretive signs, special posters, and pamphlets, providing
that priority and adequate identity are given to the use of the national forest
and U.S. Department of Agriculture. The features of the Forest Service and
USDA may be strongly accentuated within the special area by a variety of other
methods.
Do not use the special area logotype and color scheme on administrative site
signs or on any other signs or posters that deal with regulations, authority, and
administration.
The policy and criteria of signing and posting these areas are the same as for
other National Forest System lands, except as shown below.
8B.3.1 Special Area Entrances on Unit Boundaries

When the boundary of the special area is common with the unit boundary
of National Forest System land, use the appropriate boundary sign for the
special area. The name of the special area and the logotype are the dominant
messages. The National Forest System unit name and USDA credit line, and
the Forest Service shield shall be placed on the base of the structure. Typical
installations are shown in figures 8B-4 and 8B-5.
November 2012

NRA
WHISKEYTOWN-
SHASTA-TRINITY
SHASTA-TRINITY NATIONAL FORESTS

Road U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
Figure 8B-5—Typical signage for national recreation area entrances on

forest boundaries.
8B.3.2 Special Area Entrances Not on Forest Boundaries

When the boundary of the special area is inside the forest or unit boundary,
each is signed unless they are so close together that sign clutter will result. In
such cases, sign only the special area as shown in figure 8B-6.
Leaving
EVERGLADES EVERGLADES
NRA-BDY-Entering
NRA-Bdy-F NRA-BDY-Leaving
NRA-Bdy-B
Figure 8B-6—National Recreation Area sign for entrances not on forest

boundary.
November 2012

8B.3.3 Minor Special Area Entrances

Use minor special area entrance (MSA-E) and leaving (MSA-L) signs (figure
8B-7) on trails, minor public highways, and NFS road with low traffic volumes.
The sign may also be used on major interior boundaries. Place the shield on
the minor entrance and leaving sign. A separate USDA credit line plaque is not
required.
ROAD ROAD
Leaving
SPRING SPRING
MOUNTAINS MOUNTAINS
MSA-E MSA-L
Figure 8B-7—Signs for minor special area entrance and leaving and major
interior boundary.
8B.4 Wilderness and Primitive Areas

Sign wilderness and primitive areas in a manner appropriate to maintaining
and perpetuating their unique primitive recreational opportunities and scientific,
educational, historic, and natural values and features in accordance with policy
(FSM 2320) and forest plan direction. Standardize signing within areas that
include more than one administrative unit.
8B.4.1 Wilderness and Primitive Area Portal Signs

Along perimeter roads and trail or water access routes, install standard routed
wood portal sign assemblies at boundaries, nearby trailheads, or other points
nearest the boundary where a suitable site exists. The standard sign-assembly
components are shown in figure 8B-8. (Note: the wilderness USDA credit line
has a different shape than the one for nonwilderness.).
November 2012

TRAIL
BRISTOL CLIFFS
GREEN MOUNTAIN
WPH-R (install on right side of trail)
TRAIL
SISKIYOU One-line PINE Two-line

name CREEK name
SIX RIVERS CLEVELAND
WPV-R WPV-R
(both to be installed on right side of trail)

WP-P Routed USDA Credit Line (optional use)
WP-S
Figure 8B-8—Signs for wilderness and primitive areas.
Use either the horizontal or vertical panel style that is best suited to the
character of the trail facility and the natural setting. Larger panels shall be used
The Forest Service where major trails cross a wilderness boundary. Use the smaller panels where a
minor trail crosses a wilderness boundary. The Forest Service shield is required
shield is required
in all portal sign installations. Use of the USDA credit line is optional.
in all portal sign
Sign mountings should be designed to visually complement the natural
installations. surroundings. Figure 8B-9 shows examples of mounting concepts for different
settings. Where available, use stable natural landscape features such as rock
outcrops or boulders as support structures. The high point of the sign shall face
the travelway.
November 2012

Figure 8B-9—Examples of mountings for wilderness and primitive area

entrance signs.
8B.4.2 Wilderness and Primitive Area Boundary Signs

Use the applicable program area signs shown in figure 8B-10 to mark
boundaries of wilderness and primitive areas. Space signs only as close as
necessary to inform the public and protect the resource.
Try not to locate boundary signs within sight of portal signs. Use a boundary
sign at the portal if there is no other sign at that point.
Install boundary signs approximately 4 feet high unless snow depth dictates
higher placement. Use stained or unstained wood posts, treated or untreated, or
mount on appropriate trees.
If wilderness area and forest boundaries coincide, use the current boundary
line marking system with a wilderness or primitive area boundary sign installed
above the standard boundary line location sign as shown in figure 8B-10.
November 2012

WILDERNESS
WILDERNESS Closed to motor vehicles,
motorized equipment,
hang gliders and bicycles
Closed to motor vehicles, Area back of this sign is managed and protected
under Public Law (16U.S.C. 551; 16U.S.C. 1131-1135)
motorized equipment, Violations Punishable
hang gliders and bicycles

Area back of this sign is managed and protected
under Public Law (16U.S.C. 551; 16U.S.C. 1131-1135)
Violations Punishable PROPERTY
BOUNDARY
27-6A
PRIMITIVE AREA land behind this sign
Closed to motor vehicles,

and motorized equipment 54-2
The area back of this sign
is classified under regulations
of the Secretary of Agriculture
to preserve its primitive envi-
ronment. (36C.F.R.-293.17)
Violations Punishable
27-6
Figure 8B-10—Wilderness and primitive area program area signs.
November 2012

8B.5 National Wild and Scenic Rivers System

Place the National Wild and Scenic River logo (WSR-L) on all guide,
identification, and information signs within the river corridor. Use the WSR
sign to mark entry points to the corridor, consistent with direction in the
comprehensive river management plan. Sign installation shall meet the
classification (wild, scenic, or recreational), objectives for the river or river
segment, and the standards shown in figure 8B-11. Refer to chapter 3D for
information on placement and installation. The use of all regulatory, warning,
and guide signs shall follow the guidance in chapters 3 through 3E.
Middle Fork WSR-L WSR-L

Clearwater Along roads, use Along trails and at trailheads,
non
use nonretroreflective logo.
o.
retroreflective logo.
River
NATIONAL
WILD AND SCENIC
NATIONAL RIVERS NATIONAL NATIONAL
WILD AND SCENIC WILD AND SCENIC WILD AND SCENIC
RIVERS RIVERS
RIVERS
WSR WSRa TD
WSR-L
Rogue Along roads, use Rogue tra and at trailheads,
Along trails
retroreflective brown
own use routed
rout wood.
River background with
white letters and border.
River Wilderne
Wilderness-weathered gray
(optiona
(optional)
4-inch weathered 4-inch weathered

gray post gray post
ROAD TRAIL
Figure 8B-11—Identification signs for wild and scenic rivers.
November 2012

8B.6 Experimental Forests and Research Area Boundaries

Boundaries of experimental forests and research areas may require marking

with program area signs. Use Boundary Experimental Area (40-2), or Boundary
Research Natural Area (40-4). Refer to chapter 12. Use of these signs should
inform the public without detracting from the national forest identification signs.
Perimeter signs should be intervisible if possible. Posters to identify other
research activity boundaries as well as help control vandalism and trespass are
found in chapter 10B, section 10B.4.1.
8B.7 Supplemental Study Areas

Use program area signs (numbers 40-1 and 40-3, chapter 12) and standard
posters (chapter 10B, section 10B.4.1) to identify plots and record data and
other information that are of primary interest to research personnel. These areas
may be more temporary than experimental forests; however, if a study area
develops into an important research demonstration area, sign it accordingly.
Chapter 8C Forest Identification Signing Sign Drawings
8C.1 General Layout.................................................................................................... 1
8C.2 Administrative Site Signs................................................................................... 2
8C.3 National Forest Boundary Signs........................................................................ 5
8C.4 Minor Forest Boundary Signs............................................................................ 7
8C.5 National Forest Land Signs................................................................................ 9
8C.6 USDA Credit Line............................................................................................... 10
8C.7 Forest Service Shield........................................................................................ 11
8C.8 BLM/FS Interagency Office Signs.................................................................... 12
8C.9 National Recreation Area Signs....................................................................... 13
8C.10 Wilderness/Primitive Area Signs................................................................... 21
8C.11 Wilderness/Primitive Area Shield.................................................................. 24
8C.12 Wilderness/Primitive Area Credit Line.......................................................... 24
8C.13 National Wild and Scenic River Signs........................................................... 25
8C.14 National Wild and Scenic River Logo............................................................ 26
8C.15 Job Corps Site Identification Sign................................................................. 27
8C.16 YCC Site Identification Sign........................................................................... 28
8C.17 YCC Emblem.................................................................................................... 29

October 2013
8C.1 General Layout
Cobalt OKANOGAN
EVERGLADES
RANGER STATION
SALMON
U.S. DEPARTMENT
OF AGRICULTURE
margin
Notes for AS, FE, FL, and MFE signs

Completed signs shall be similar to typical sign layouts shown above, including
shape, text, Logotype, line spacing, and letter and word spacing.
The margin shown typically shall be one half the capital letter height of the unit
name. Each baseline of text shall be centered between the edges of the sign
and shall not extend into the margin. The top line of text may be offset towards
the high point of the panel and shall not extend into the margin.
The high point of the sign shall always face the road.
Entrance and Leaving sign points always match each other.
If sign is to be placed on left side of road, order “for left side of road placement.”
Use for administrative sites and boundaries, such as national forests, national
grasslands, national recreation areas, and monuments.
General Notes
All text is ASA series Highway Gothic as noted.
Specify names, site type, and sign number as applicable when ordering.
For Logotypes, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3b.
S i gn and P os t er G ui de l i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 8C-1

November 2012
8C.2 Administrative Site Signs
Text layout–Administrative Site Signs (AS)
Darby Facility name
ROAD H
RANGER STATION Facility type
E
DC
BITTERROOT Forest name
B NF Logotype
A

name type name
number L H A B C D E case) case) case) Logotype
AS-1 54 36 5 4 12 18 4 20 2 27 4D 4D 4D 5
AS-2 72 48 7 4 16 4 24 2 27 2 35 4 5D 5D 5D 6
AS-3 108 72 10 2 24 2 36 2 40 2 53 2 8D 8D 8D 10
AS-4 144 96 11 2 30 48 53 2 70 11D 11D 12D 14
Notes USDA Road

The high point of the sign shall always face the road. Sign FS credit speed
Text – ASA series as noted. number Shield line (mph)
FS shield and USDA credit line are required with this sign. AS-1 S-10 P-43 0-15
AS-2 S-12 P-52 20-25
Top – Brown (#20059) legend on yellow-cream (#23695) AS-3 S-18 P-80 30-45
background. AS-4 S-24 P-110 50+
background.

References
For horizontal text placement, see section 8C.1.
For NF Logotype, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3b.
For FS shield, see section 8C.7.
For USDA credit line, see section 8C.6.
8C-2 Si gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
Text layout–Forest/District Administrative Site sign (A) for urban location

Layout for one-line facility name
L
E
U FO R EST Facility type
H
S HEADQUARTERS
D
C
D SALMON I
J
K
Forest name
NF Logotype
B
A
A F
G
Center USDA of
vertical centerline S
Text layout dimensions for USDA area (inches)

Sign USDA Road
number L H A B C D E (upper case) speed (mph)
A1 34 18 1 w 5 w 9 w 13 w 5 2 2 2E *
A2 54 30 2 w 9 4 15 w 22 4 9 5E 0-25
A3 94 46 4 14 24 34 16 8E 30+
Text layout dimensions for facility and unit area (inches)

Facility Forest Road
Sign type name NF FS speed
number F G I J K S (upper case) (upper case) Logotype Shield (mph)
A1 2 w 6 8 w 11 14 2 2 2E 2D 2 6 *
A2 3 2 9 2 13 2 17 23 4 4D 4D 4 10 0-25
A3 6 13 21 26 35 6 6D 6D 6 15 30+

Text – ASA series as noted. Left side – Legend brown on white background.
* A1 is for building placement only. Right side – Legend white on brown background.
Painted, Routed Colors References

Left side – Legend brown (#20059) on yellow- For sign guidelines, see chapters 8 and 8A.
cream (#23695) background. For horizontal text placement, see section 8C.1.
Right side – Legend yellow-cream (#23695) on For NF Logotype, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3b.
brown (#20059) background. For FS shield, see section 8C.7.

November 2012
Text layout–Forest/District Administrative Site sign (A) for urban location

Layout for two-line facility name
L
E
U FO R EST Facility type
H
S HEADQUARTERS
MT. BAKER-
D
C
D SNOQUALMIE J
K
M
Forest name
A
I
B G NF Logotype
A F
Center USDA on
vertical centerline S
Text layout dimensions for USDA area (inches)

Road
Sign USDA speed
number L H A B C D E (upper case) (mph)
A4 34 18 1 w 5 w 9 w 13 w 5 2 2 2E *
A5 54 30 2 w 9 4 15 w 22 4 9 5E 0-25
A6 94 46 4 14 24 34 16 8E 30+
Text layout dimensions for facility and unit area (inches)

Facility Forest
type name Road
Sign (upper (upper NF FS speed
number F G I J K M S case) case) Logotype Shield (mph)
A4 2 w 5 2 7 w 8 w 11 14 2 2 2E 1 2D 2 6 *
A5 3 2 8 w 12 2 13 2 17 23 4 4D 2 2D 4 10 0-25
A6 6 13 19 21 26 35 6 6D 4D 6 15 30+

Text – ASA series as noted. Left side – Legend brown on white background.
* A4 is for building placement only. Right side – Legend white on brown background.
Painted, Routed Colors References

Left side – Legend brown (#20059) on yellow- For sign guidelines, see chapters 8 and 8A.
cream (#23695) background. For horizontal text placement, see section 8C.1.
Right side – Legend yellow-cream (#23695) on For NF Logotype, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3b.
brown (#20059) background. For FS shield, see section 8C.7.
November 2012
8C.3 National Forest Boundary Signs
Text layout–National Forest Boundary Entrance sign (FE)
ROAD SITGREAVES Forest name
C NF Logotype
B
A

Forest USDA Road
Sign name NF FS credit speed
number L H A B C (upper case) Logotype Shield line (mph)
FE-1 54 36 5 13 4 22 5D 6 S-10 P-43 0-15
FE-2 72 48 7 2 18 2 30 6D 8 S-12 P-52 20-25
FE-3 108 72 9 4 26 2 44 10D 12 S-18 P-80 30-45
FE-4 144 96 11 34 59 12D 18 S-24 P-110 50+
Notes
Follow text layout on page 8C-14 for two-line unit names.
FS Shield and USDA credit line are required with this sign.
Yellow-cream (#23695) legend on brown (#20059) background.

White legend on brown background.
References
For sign guidelines, see chapters 8 and 8B.
For USDA credit line, see page 8C.6.

August 2013
Text layout–National Forest Boundary Leaving sign (FL)
ROAD
Leaving
SITGREAVES H
Forest name
D
C NF Logotype
B
A

Forest Leaving USDA Road

Sign name NF (title FS credit speed

number L H A B C D (upper case)
Logotype case) Shield line (mph)
FL-1 54 36 3 w 11 w 20 2 27 4D 6 3D S-10 P-43 0-15
FL-2 72 48 5 2 16 26 36 6F 8 5D S-12 P-52 20-25
FL-3 108 72 7 2 23 38 2 54 10D 12 7D S-18 P-80 30-45

FL-4 144 96 9 32 55 74 12F 18 10D S-24 P-110 50+
Notes
Follow text layout on page 8C-16 for two-line unit names.
FS Shield and USDA credit line are required with this sign.


References
For USDA credit line, see page 8C.6.
November 2012
8C.4 Minor Forest Boundary Signs
Text layout–Minor National Forest Boundary Entrance sign (MFE)
ROAD/TRAIL OKANOGAN Forest name
H
NF Logotype
F
E
D C U.S. DEPARTMENT
OF AGRICULTURE USDA Credit line
B
A

Forest USDA
name credit line
Sign (upper NF (upper FS
number L H A B C D E F case) Logotype case) shield
MFE-1 (Trails) 18 18 1 2 3 4 w 6 9 12 2 2D 2 2 d *
MFE-2 (Roads) 27 27 2 4 4 2 7 9 14 19 2 2D 4 1 4D *
Notes
FS Shield is required with this sign.
* Mount shield on post below sign. Minimum 4-inch size recommended.
On single post installation, decals may be used for the FS shield.

References

November 2012
Text layout–Minor National Forest Boundary Leaving sign (MFL)
Leaving ROAD/TRAIL
Forest name OKANOGAN
H
NF Logotype G
F
U.S. DEPARTMENT E
USDA Credit line D
OF AGRICULTURE BC
A

USDA
Forest Credit
Leaving name NF line
Sign (title (upper
logo- (upper FS
number L H A B C D E F G case) case) type case) shield
MFL-1 (Trails) 18 18 1 2 3 4 w 5 w 8 w 11 s 14 2 1 2C 2D 2 2 dD *
MFL-2 (Roads) 27 27 2 4 4 2 7 8 2 13 17 2 21 2 2C 2 2D 3 2 1 4D *
Notes
The high point of the sign shall always face the road or trail.
FS shield is required with this sign.
* Mount shield on post below sign. Minimum 4-inch size recommended.
On single post installation, decals may be used for the FS shield.

References
November 2012
8C.5 National Forest Land Signs
Text layout–National Forest Land–Entering/Leaving sign (NFL-E and NFL-L)
ROAD/TRAIL ROAD/TRAIL
Entering Leaving
H
NF Logotype
D
C
B LAND LAND
A
NFL-E NFL-L
Entering/
Sign Leaving NF LAND
number L H A B C D (title case) Logotype (upper case)
NFL-E-1,
NFL-L-1 18 18 2 2 5 w 8 w 12 4 2D 2 2 2D
(trails)
NFL-E-2,
NFL-L-2 27 27 3 w 8 w 13 2 18 d 3D 4 3D
(roads)
Notes
The high point of the sign shall always face the road or trail.
FS shield and USDA credit line are not required with this sign.


References

November 2012
8C.6 USDA Credit Line
Text layout–USDA Credit Line (P)
H U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

L
H U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

Sign Text
number L H (upper case) Border
P-37 37 3 2 1 2C 4
P-43 43 5 2 2C a
P-52 52 5 2 2C a
P-68 68 6 2 3C 2
P-80 80 6 2 3D 2
P-110 110 7 2 4D s
Notes
Center text on panel.
Border is optional.
Color should match colors on FS shield and parent sign.


References
For sign guidelines, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3a and chapters 8A and 8B.
For Wilderness/Primitive area USDA credit line, see section 8C.12.
For NRA USDA credit line, see section 8C.9, page 8C-20.
November 2012
8C.7 Forest Service Shield
Text layout–Forest Service Shield (S)
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number H
S-8 8
S-10 10
S-12 12
S-15 15
H S-18 18
S-24 24
S-28 28
S-32 32
Notes
Outer line depicts edge of shield. No outside border.
Also available in decals sizes 2, 22, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 8 inches.
Color should match USDA credit line and parent sign.
Use colors to match the approved parent sign when different from yellow-creme
and brown. For example, use black and white when used for regulatory signs.
For FS shield artwork use the image shown above.


White legend and border on brown background.
References
For wilderness shield, see page 8C-22.
For FS shield guidelines, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3a.

November 2012
8C.8 BLM/FS Interagency Office Signs
Text layout–BLM/FS Interagency office sign (BLM/FS)

L
R INTERAGENCY OFFICE U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT
R A Office
B
Sioux Ranger District C
FS Unit name
H
Custer Forest name
D
Camp Crook Fire Station C
BLM Unit name
R Eastern Montana / Dakotas District BLM name

E
R
F U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR

Interagency Forest
Office FS and and
text BLM unit BLM name
Sign (upper name (title

number L H A B C D E F R case) (title case) case)

BLM/FS-1 72 27 5 2 2 2 s 3 9 7 2C 3C 2C
BLM/FS-2 96 36 7 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 w 12 7 3C 4D 3C
BLM/FS-3 120 45 8 3 a 2 4 a 4 w 15 7 4C 5D 4C
BLM/FS-4 144 54 10 4 3 4 5 4 5 w 18 7 5D 6D 5D
Notes
FS USDA
Text is ASA series as noted.
Shield and
Center names and BLM modified triangle emblem and USDI Road
on the vertical centerline of the sign and center Sign BLM credit speed
"INTERAGENCY OFFICE" on the horizontal and number Emblem line (mph)
vertical centerline of the white panel.
BLM/FS-1 10 P-43 0-15
FS shields and USDA/USDI credit lines are required
with this sign. BLM/FS-2 14 P-52 20-25
Place FS shield and BLM emblem in the top right and BLM/FS-3 16 P-80 30-45
left corners, but do not extend into margins.
Painted, Routed Colors BLM/FS-4 20 P-110 50+
Bottom—Yellow-cream (#23695) legend on brown
(#20059) background. References
Top—Brown (#20059) legend on yellow-cream For sign guidelines, see chapters 8 and 8A.
(#23695) background. For horizontal text placement, see section 8C.1.
Bottom—White legend on brown background.
For USDA credit line, see section 8C.6.
Top—Brown legend on white background. For BLM modified triangle emblem, contact the BLM
National Sign Center.
November 2012
8C.9 National Recreation Area Signs
Text layout–National Recreation Area Entrance sign (NRA-E), One-line
ROAD
H
SMITH RIVER NRA name
C NRA Logotype
B
A

NRA NRA,USDA Road
name NRA FS credit speed
Sign number L H A B C (upper case) Logotype shield line #2 (mph)
NRA-E-1 54 36 5 12 19 w 5D 4 2 S-10 NRA-P10 0-15
NRA-E-2 72 48 6 15 2 26 6D 6 S-12 NRA-P10 20-25
NRA-E-3 108 72 10 23 w 39 2 10D 10 S-18 NRA-P12 30-45
NRA-E-4 144 96 12 31 52 12D 12 S-24 NRA-P12 50+
Notes Painted, Routed Colors

The high point of the sign shall always face the Yellow-cream (#23695) legend on brown
road. (#20059) background.
Yellow-cream and white colors may be changed Fully Retroreflective Colors
to colors fitting the character of the area when White legend on brown background.
approved by the regional forester. References
FS shield and NRA USDA credit line are required For sign guidelines, see chapters 8 and 8B.
with this sign. For horizontal text placement, see section 8C.1.
Color of the NRA, USDA credit line #2 and FS For NRA Logotype, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3b.
shield must match the color of the site identification For FS shield, see secton 8C.7.
sign. For NRA, USDA credit line #2, see page 8C-20.

November 2012
Text layout–National Recreation Area Leaving sign (NRA-L), One-line
Leaving ROAD
SMITH RIVER H
NRA name
D
C NRA Logotype
B
A
Text layout dimensions (inches) One-line National Recreation Area (back)

NRA,USDA Road
Sign ‘Leaving’ NRA NRA FS credit speed
number L H A B C D (title case) name Logotype shield line #2 (mph)
NRA-L-1 54 36 4 11 18 w 26 3D 5D 4 2 S-10 NRA-P10 0-15
NRA-L-2 72 48 5 14 2 25 35 5D 6D 6 S-12 NRA-P10 20-25
NRA-L-3 108 72 8 21 w 37 2 53 7D 10D 10 S-18 NRA-P12 30-45

NRA-L-4 144 96 10 29 50 73 10D 12D 12 S-24 NRA-P12 50+
Notes
Yellow-cream and white colors may be changed to colors fitting the character
of the area when approved by the regional forester. Color of the NRA, USDA
credit line #2 and FS shield must match color of the site identification sign.
FS shield and NRA, USDA credit line #2 are required with this sign.
t

References
For NRA Logotype, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3b.
For NRA, USDA credit line #2, see page 8C-20.
November 2012
Text layout–National Recreation Area Entrance sign (NRA-E), Two-line
ROAD
WHISKEYTOWN- NRA name
H
SHASTA-TRINITY
D NRA Logotype
C
B
A

NRA NRA,USDA Road
name NRA FS credit speed
Sign number L H A B C D (upper case) Logotype shield line #2 (mph)
NRA-E-5 54 36 3 9 2 17 4 12 w 3D 5 S-10 NRA-P10 0-15
NRA-E-6 72 48 4 12 22 28 4D 6 S-12 NRA-P10 20-25
NRA-E-7 108 72 7 19 2 33 42 2 7D 8 S-18 NRA-P12 30-45
NRA-E-8 144 96 9 25 43 55 9D 11 S-24 NRA-P12 50+
Notes
Yellow-cream and white colors may be changed to colors fitting the character of
the area when approved by the regional forester. Color of the NRA, USDA credit
line #2 and FS shield must match color of the site identification sign.


References

November 2012
Text layout–National Recreation Area Leaving sign (NRA-L), Two-line
Leaving ROAD
NRA name
WHISKEYTOWN-
SHASTA-TRINITY H
E
D
NRA Logotype C
B
A

Leaving
NRA name NRA,USDA Road
Sign (title (upper NRA FS credit speed

number L H A B C D E case) case) Logotype
shield line #2 (mph)
NRA-L-5 54 36 3 9 2 17 4 21 w 27 2D 3D 5 S-10 NRA-P10 0-15
NRA-L-6 72 48 4 12 22 28 37 3D 4D 6 S-12 NRA-P10 20-25
NRA-L-7 108 72 7 19 2 33 42 2 55 4D 7D 8 S-15 NRA-P12 30-45
NRA-L-8 144 96 9 25 43 55 75 7D 9D 11 S-24 NRA-P12 50+
Notes
Yellow-cream and white colors may be changed to colors fitting the character of
the area when approved by the regional forester. Color of the NRA, USDA credit
line #2 and FS shield must match color of the site identification sign.


References
November 2012
Text layout–Minor Special Area Entering and Leaving sign (MSA-E and MSA-L)
Leaving
Area Name
SPRING SPRING
MOUNTAINS MOUNTAINS
H
G
F
NRA logotype E
D
C
B
ROAD ROAD
A

Leaving
(title Area NRA FS
Sign number
L H A B C D E F G case) name
Logotype
shield
MSA-E 27 27 1 2 2 2 6 2 10 2 15 18 2 — — 2 2C 3 4
MSA-L 27 27 1 2 2 2 6 2 10 2 15 18 2 22 2 1 2 2 2C 3 4
Notes
Increase Area name letter size for shorter one-line names.
Text-ASA series as noted.
Standard colors may be changed to colors fitting the character of the area when
approved by the regional forester.
NRA, USDA credit line #2 is not required with this sign.


References

November 2012
Text layout–National Recreation Area Entering Boundary sign (NRA-BDY)
EVERGLADES Area name
H
E
NRA Logotype
D
C
B A
S

Area
name NRA

Sign number L H A B C D E (upper case) Logotype
NRA-BDY-2 63 48 3 6 16 2 27 38 6D 8
NRA-BDY-3 78 60 3 7 20 33 2 48 7D 10
NRA-BDY-4 93 72 4 8 23 2 39 58 2 8D 12
NRA-BDY-5 108 84 4 2 9 27 45 68 9D 14
Notes
NRA, USDA Road
Yellow-cream and white colors may be changed Sign FS credit speed
to colors fitting the character of the area when number S Shield line #2 (mph)
approved by the regional forester.
Color of the NRA, USDA credit line #2 must match NRA-BDY-2 14 S-10 NRA-P-10 0-15
color of the site identification sign.
Text – ASA series as noted. NRA-BDY-3 17 S-12 NRA-P-12 20-25
NRA, USDA credit line #2 is required with this sign.
NRA-BDY-4 20 S-15 NRA-P-12 30-45
Yellow-cream (#23695) legend on brown (#20059) NRA-BDY-5 23 S-18 NRA-P-12 50+
background.

References
November 2012
Text layout–National Recreation Area Leaving Boundary sign (NRA-BDY)

L
Leaving
EVERGLADES Area name
H
F
E NRA Logotype
D
C
B A
S

Leaving Area name
(title (upper NRA
Sign number L H A B C D E F case) case) Logotype
NRA-BDY-2L 63 48 3 2 6 14 2 23 33 42 4D 6D 6
NRA-BDY-3L 78 60 4 7 18 29 41 2 52 4D 7D 8
NRA-BDY-4L 93 72 4 2 8 21 2 35 50 62 5D 8D 10
NRA-BDY-5L 108 84 5 9 25 41 58 2 72 6D 9D 12
Notes
NRA, USDA Road
Yellow-cream and white colors may be changed to Sign FS credit speed
colors fitting the character of the area when approved number S Shield line #2 (mph)
by the regional forester.
Color of the NRA, USDA credit line #2 must match NRA-BDY-2L 14 S-10 NRA-P-10 0-15
color of the site identification sign.
Text – ASA series as noted. NRA-BDY-3L 17 S-12 NRA-P-12 20-25
NRA, USDA credit line #2 is required with this sign.
NRA-BDY-4L 20 S-15 NRA-P-12 30-45
Painted, routed colors
Yellow-cream (#23695) legend on brown (#20059) NRA-BDY-5L 23 S-18 NRA-P-12 50+
background.
Fully Retroreflective vinyl colors

References

November 2012
Text layout—National Recreation Area – USDA Credit Line #2 (NRA-P)
H
U S DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE D
C
R L
typical
without border
H
U S DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE D
C
R L
typical
with border

Fits
Sign Text panel
number L H C D R Border (upper case) lengths
NRA-P10 Varies 10 2 6 1 2 a 2C Up to 63
NRA-P12 Varies 12 2 7 1 2 2 3C 78+
Notes
Yellow-cream and white colors may be changed to colors fitting the character of the area approved by
the regional forester. Color of the credit line and shield must match color of the site identification sign.
Actual sign length will be determined by the message.


White legend and border on brown background.
References
For sign guidelines, see chapter 7 and chapter 8.
November 2012
8C.10 Wilderness/Primitive Area Signs
Text layout–Wilderness/Primitive Area Entrance sign (WPH) (Horizontal)
L
TRAIL
BRISTOL CLIFFS Wilderness name

H
Wilderness Logotype
D
C B* GREEN MOUNTAIN Forest name
A NF Logotype
WPH-R

Wilderness
Sign name Wilderness Forest NF FS
number L H A B* C D (upper case) Logotype name Logotype shield
WPH-1 40 20 2 2 5 2 7 2 12 2 2D 3 1 2D 2 WP-S-8
WPH-2 60 30 4 4 9 4 12 4 18 2 3 2D 4 2 4D 3 WP-S-10
Notes References
*To center of separation line, which is 2-inch wide For sign guidelines, see chapters 8 and 8B.
on WPH-1, and w-inch wide on WPH-2. For horizontal text placement, see page 7B-1.
Install high point of sign nearest to trail. For NF and Wilderness Logotype, see chapter 1,
Specify right panel (R) for installation on right side section 1.7.3b.
of trail, or left panel (L) for installation on left side For routing details, see chapter 14, section 14.7.
of trail. For FS shield, see section 8C.11.
Text – ASA series as noted. For USDA credit line (optional) use WP-PH, see
FS shield is required with this sign. section 8C.12.
Colors
Painted, routed unfinished or black finish legend
on unfinished or uniform gray transparent stain
(matching Federal Standard Color 36357)
background.
Unstained natural wood is preferred. Available
options include a clear preservative such as a
50-50 mixture of linseed oil and turpentine or a
gray stained finish.

November 2012
Text layout–Wilderness/Primitive (Vertical) Area Entrance sign (WPV)

One-line wilderness name
L
TRAIL TRAIL
SISKIYOU SISKIYOU Wilderness name
Wilderness Logotype
H
F SIX RIVERS SIX RIVERS Forest name
E
D NF Logotype
C
B
A
WPV-R WPV-L

Wilderness
Sign name Wilderness Forest NF FS
number L H A B C D* E F (upper case)
Logotype name Logotype shield
WPV-1 13 18 1 2 3 2 5 2 7 w 9 w 12 w 1 wD 1 w 1 4D 1 w WP-S-8
WPV-2 24 36 3 7 11 4 15 19 2 26 3D 3 2D 3 WP-S-10
Notes References
*To center of separation line which is 2-inch wide For sign guidelines, see chapters 8 and 8B.
on WPV-1, and w-inch wide on WPV-2. For horizontal text placement, see chapter 7B,
Mount on right side of trail. Reverse shape for section 7B.1.
mounting on left. For NF and Wilderness Logotype, see chapter 1,
Install point of sign pointing to the trail. section 1.7.3b.
Specify right panel (R) for installation on right side For routing details, see chapter 14, section 14.7.
of trail, or left panel (L) for installation on left side For FS shield, see section 8C.11.
of trail. For USDA credit line (optional) use WP-PV, see
Text – ASA series as noted. section 8C.12.
FS shield is required with this sign.
Colors
background (matching Federal Standard Color
36357).
November 2012
Text layout–Wilderness/Primitive (Vertical) Area Entrance sign (WPV)

Two-line wilderness name
L
TRAIL TRAIL
PINE PINE Wilderness name

CREEK CREEK
Wilderness Logotype
H
G
F SIX RIVERS SIX RIVERS Forest name
ED
NF Logotype
C
B
A
WPV-R WPV-L

Wilderness Forest
name name
Sign (upper Wilderness
(upper NF FS
number L H A B C D* E F G case) Logotype case) Logotype shield
WPV-1 13 18 1 2 3 2 5 2 7 w 8 w 11 4 13 w 1 wD 1 w 1 4D 1 w WP-S-8
WPV-2 24 36 3 7 11 4 15 17 2 23 2 28 3D 3 2D 3 WP-S-10
Notes References
*To center of separation line which is 2-inch wide For sign guidelines, see chapter 8.
on WPV-1, and w-inch wide on WPV-2. For horizontal text placement, see chapter 7B,
Install point of sign pointing to the trail. section 7B.1.
Specify right panel (R) for installation on right side For NF and Wilderness logo, see chapter 1,
of trail, or left panel (L) for installation on left side section 1.7.3b.
of trail. For routing details, see chapter 14, section 14.7.
Text – ASA series as noted. For FS shield, see section 8C.11.
FS shield is required with this sign. For USDA credit line (optional) use WP-PV, see
section 8C.12.
Colors
(matching Federal Standard Color 36357)
background.

November 2012
8C.11 Wilderness/Primitive Area Shield
Text layout–Wilderness/Primitive Area shield (WP-S)

Sign number To be used with Shield
WP-S-8 WPV-1 and 2 8
WP-S-10 WPH-1 and 2 10
Note
For sign guidelines, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3a and chapter 8B.
Use of shield is required at wilderness and primitive area entrance sign locations.
For FS shield artwork, use the image shown in section 8C.7.
Colors
Painted, routed unfinished or black finish legend on unfinished or uniform gray transparent stain
background (matching Federal Standard Color 36357).
Unstained natural wood is preferred. Available options include a clear preservative such as a 50-50
mixture of linseed oil and turpentine or a gray stained finish.
8C.12 Wilderness/Primitive Area Credit Line
Text layout–Wilderness/Primitive Area USDA credit line (WP-PV and WP-PH)
R (typical)
H U . S . D E PA RTME NT O F AG R IC U LT U R E A
L
WP-PH or PV
Notes Text layout dimensions (inches)

Use of USDA credit line is optional at wilderness
and primitive area boundary sign locations. Sign Text
Text – ASA series as noted. number L H A (uppercase) R
WP-PV 22 3 1 8 wD 8 to x
Colors
Painted, routed unfinished or black finish legend WP-PH 42 3 2 1 1 2D 8 to x
background (matching Federal Standard Color
36357).
options include a clear preservative such as a References
50-50 mixture of linseed oil and turpentine or a For sign guidelines, see chapter 1, section 1.7.3a
gray stained finish. and chapter 8B.
November 2012
8C.13 National Wild and Scenic River Signs
Text layout—National Wild and Scenic River sign (WSR)

L
A B A
Middle Fork C
H CL
NATIONAL
Clearwater C
River
WILD AND SCENIC
RIVERS SYSTEM
A A
R (typical)
L
A B
H CL
Rogue D
NATIONAL
WILD AND SCENIC
RIVERS SYSTEM River
A A
D
R (typical) A
Dimensions (inches)
River Road
Sign ** name WSR FS speed
number L H A B C D R Border (title case) Logo Shield (mph)
WSR-1 * 18 3 3 1 2 2 4 1 2 2 3C WSR-L1 3 0-15

WSR-2 * 24 3 3 2 3 1 2 s 4C WSR-L2 5 20-25
WSR-3 * 30 3 3 w 3 3 w 1 2 w 5D WSR-L3 6 30-45
WSR-4 * 36 3 4 2 4 4 2 1 2 1 6D WSR-L4 8 50+
Notes Colors
*Variable length—determined by the river name. Fully retroreflective white legend, border, and FS
**For 2-line signs only. shield on brown background.
Center text on horizontal centerline. See section 8C.14 for National Wild and Scenic
Text—ASA series as noted. River logo specifications and colors.
References
For sign guidelines, see chapter 8B, section 8B.5.

November 2012
8C.14 National Wild and Scenic River Logo
Text layout—National Wild and Scenic River logo (WSR-L)
Green 34108
Black 37038
White 37875
H (Waves, inset, and text)
NATIONAL Blue 35193

WILD AND SCENIC B
RIVERS SYSTEM
A
L
WSR-L
Dimensions (inches)
Black White Text * Road
Sign border inset (upper speed
number L H A B case) (mph)
WSR-L1 10 4 12 8 2 aB NA
WSR-L2 15 2 18 4 w sB 0-15
WSR-L3 20 w 24 a 1 dB 20-25
WSR-L4 25 w 30 2 1 4 1B 30-45
WSR-L5 31 36 s 1 2 1 4B 50+
R
A
Dimensions (inches)
H
Rogue
Text Road
A
River Sign (title speed
number L H A Border R case) (mph)
L
WSRa-1 18 12 2 s 1 2 3C 0-15
WSRa
WSRa-2 24 16 2 2 s 1 d 4C 20-25
WSRa-3 30 20 3 w 2 4 5D 30-45
WSRa-4 36 22 3 2 1 3 6D 50+
Notes
WSRa length and height may be adjusted to
References
accommodate longer names.
For sign guidelines, see chapter 8B, section 8B.5.
*Road speed for stand alone WSR logo signs only.
WSR logo artwork may be downloaded from
Colors http://www.rivers.gov/publications.html#reports
WSR-L—Fully retroreflective colors are Federal
Standard 595B.
WSAa—Fully retroreflective white text and border
on brown background.
November 2012
8C.15 Job Corps Site Identification Sign
Text layout–Job Corps Site Identification sign (JC-1)
D
ANGEL E
F
Job Corps
Job Corps
H J
CIVILIAN M
K
CONSERVATION CENTER M
OPERATED FOR U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR

BY N
SIUSLAW NATIONAL FOREST
G

Job
Sign FS Corp

number H L C D E F G M J K N* Shield symbol
JC-1 60 80 6 6D 2 5 4 5D 3 4 2 2C S-12 12
Notes
Contact the Washington office for the Job Corps symbol specifics and Logotype.
Colors
Painted, routed yellow-cream (#23695) legend on brown (#20059) background.


November 2012
8C.16 YCC Site Identification Sign
Text layout–YCC Site Identification sign (JC-1)
L
C C C R3
R4
D E
C
S
T F
CAMP G
P
NAME G
H F
N YOUTH CONSERVATION CORPS K
P
Q FOREST SERVICE
M Q
P
C
R2 R1

Sign
number L H C D E F G P J K Q M N T S
YCC-1 48 32 1 18 27 5 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2
YCC-2 72 48 1 2 27 32 2 7 5 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 2 w
Radius dimensions (inches)

Notes
Specify camp name when ordering. Sign
number R1 R2 R3 R4
Contact the Washington office for the
YCC Emblem specifics. YCC-1 6 7 2 1
YCC-2 8 2 11 3 1 2
November 2012
8C.17 YCC Emblem
Text layout–YCC Emblem
Colors
Background – white No. 17875
Blue – No. 15080
Green – No. 14187
Colors are Federal Standard 595.
E D S TA
I T T
N E
S
U
•
•
R P S
Y O U T H
C O
N
C
O
N
S E T IO
R VA

9.1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 1
9.1.1 Agreements .............................................................................................. 1
9.1.2 Design and Location ................................................................................ 1

November 2012
9.1 Introduction
Federal, State, municipal, or other public agencies and private, religious, and
civic entities, and special use authorization holders often cooperate in activities
or manage programs and facilities with the Forest Service.
The Forest Service may enter into agreements with these entities to erect
and maintain appropriate cooperator signs and posters to acknowledge the
cooperator’s participation with the Forest Service.
9.1.1 Agreements
Signing activities with cooperators shall be documented. Documentation may
be by an Interagency Agreement, Memorandum of Understanding (MOU),
Challenge Cost Share Agreement, or Special Use Authorization. Documentation
should include the planning, design, manufacture, installation, and maintenance
requirements and responsibilities. Review FSM 1530 and FSM 2300 and any
regional supplements for existing agreements. Develop supplemental or new
agreements as appropriate.
9.1.2 Design and Location

Review designs and working drawings of cooperator signs and posters with
the cooperating entity to ensure that the cooperator’s interests are considered.
Signs should be in accordance with a unit sign plan. Refer to chapter 2.
The Forest Service
Cooperator signs should be appropriate to the environment and compatible with
shield shall be used
existing signing.
for Forest Service
The size of the sign should be appropriate for the project or activity considering
identification. The viewing distance, site importance, location, and other local factors.
size of a cooperators’
Signs should include appropriate identification of all cooperators. The Forest
logo shall not exceed Service shield shall be used for Forest Service identification. Use cooperators’
logos as their identification symbol. The size of a cooperators’ logo shall not
the size of the Forest
exceed the size of the Forest Service shield.
Service shield.
Locate the sign to be consistent with the placement criteria listed in the chapter
that relates to the specific type of sign to be erected.
Figures 9-1 and 9-2 show several examples of cooperator signs and posters.
For signs acknowledging cooperative work on roads, refer to chapter 3C, section
3C.11.4 for information on Acknowledgement Signs and Adopt-A-Road signs.
For signs acknowledging cooperative work on trails, refer to chapter 5 for Adopt-
a-Trail signs. For signs acknowledging concessionaire operations of a Forest
Service developed recreation site, refer to chapter 7, section 7.1.
November 2012
Figure 9-1—Examples of Cooperator signs.
November 2012
San Ysidro Trail Safe use of front country trails requires all users to follow
common trail etiquette. You will likely encounter others
on the trail and a little courtesy goes a long way.
Elevation: 3,463
Welcome to the Santa Barbara Front Country Trails System

All Trail Users
• Be courteous and polite.
• Pack out what you pack in.
• Stay on designated trails.
• Pass others only when it is safe to do so.
YIELD
• Do not use muddy trails. • Never cut switchbacks or create shortcuts.
TO
Hikers and Runners Equestrians
• Always yield to equestrians. • Know the level of difficulty of the trail.
• Be alert for approaching bicyclists. • Know your riding ability and horse’s
• Do not camp or make campfires. trail ability.
• I nform encountered users of the safest
way to pass.
Mountain Bikers
• Scatter manure on trails and away
• Always yield to all other trail users.
from trailheads.
• Always use a bike bell.
• Control your speed at all times
Trail Users with Dogs LOGO
• Anticipate others at turns.
• Dogs allowed off leash, but under control ?
• Avoid skidding.
at all times. www.sbtrails.org HERE
www.fs.fed.us/r5/lospadres/
• Do not allow your dog to chase wildlife.

• Carry a leash in case you need it. LOGO LOGO LOGO
? ? ?
• Always clean up after your dog! HERE HERE HERE
Figure 9-2—Examples of Cooperator posters.
10.1 Introduction..................................................................................................1
November 2012
10.1 Introduction
Reading a sign is the most common one-on-one interaction that occurs between
the Forest Service and the visitor. In many ways, signs, especially in recreation
areas, are the face of the Forest Service. Signing serves to orient, direct,
educate, and answer questions, and can enhance or diminish the quality of
a visitor’s experience. Signing affords the Forest Service the opportunity to
engage and communicate with the public in a very cost-effective manner.
Signs, especially in
Appropriate sign planning includes both information delivery requirements, such
recreation areas, as what information needs to be delivered to whom, in what format (language,
are the face of the visual, or both), and where; and the physical setting before decisions about
sign type, design, materials, quantity, quality, and placement are made. Legally,
Forest Service. signs must also comply with the applicable accessibility guidelines. See the
“Accessibility Guidebook on Outdoor Recreation and Trails.”
Remember that a sign is a fabricated, necessary element placed into a natural

environment. For this reason, base all sign planning decisions on good site
planning and regard for the area’s setting and character. For overall guidelines,
consult the The “Built Environment Image Guide for the National Forests and
Grasslands.” Refer to chapter 2 for information on developing sign plans.
Interpretive, visitor information, and fire management signs and posters

communicate specific educational, behavioral, emotional, and managerial
objectives and messages to visitors. These signs and posters vary in content
and design since they must relate to resource and management objectives and
goals of the site.
Use resource inventory and audience research to help determine the key
messages and how to communicate them effectively. Employ these fundamental
principles to reach the intended audience:
• Provoke the attention or curiosity of the visitor.
• Relate the message to the everyday life of the visitor.
• Present information and interpretation thematically.
• Show the connection between the site’s tangible resources and the
intangible concepts these resources illustrate and embody.
• Define what you want the visitor to know, understand, think about, and
remember after leaving the area.
• Answer questions visitors may have about the site, area, or management
practice.
• Encourage resource understanding, respect, awareness, and ethical

behavior.
• Aid in defining the site as primitive, rustic, or urban.
Chapter 10A provides information on interpretative signs. Chapter 10B provides

information on visitor information signing, such as information boards, posters,
fees, and registration. Chapter 10C contains information on specific signs for
notifying the public about general wildfire danger.
Chapter 10A Visitor Information Signing Interpretive
10A.1 Introduction.........................................................................................................1
10A.2 Guidelines ..........................................................................................................3
10A.2.1 General Sign Guidelines......................................................................4
10A.2.2 Interpretive and Education Plan..........................................................7
10A.2.3 Exhibit Plan ..........................................................................................9
10A.3 Planning .............................................................................................................9
10A.3.1 Special Considerations......................................................................14
10A.4 Designing .........................................................................................................16
10A.4.1 Text .....................................................................................................17
10A.4.2 Layout and Graphics .........................................................................17
10A.5 Fabricating .......................................................................................................20
10A.5.1 Sign Face Materials ...........................................................................20
10A.5.2 Sign Support (Base)...........................................................................24
10A.6 Installing............................................................................................................30
10A.7 Evaluate and Monitor Effectiveness ..............................................................31
10A.8 Other References and Resources ..................................................................32

November 2012
10A.1 Introduction
Interpretive signs are the single most popular form of interpretation in the Forest
Service, and are commonly used on self-guided trails, scenic byways, and other
points of interest, such as overlooks and resource management areas. See
figures 10A-1 and 10A-2.
Figure 10A-1—Low profile sign at a national grassland. Middle Spring,

Cimarron National Grassland. Great Plains BEIG Province.
Figure 10A-2—Digital laminate signs on a native stone base. Deschutes

National Forest. North Pacific BEIG Province.
November 2012
Interpretation is purposeful, and at the same time enjoyable, relevant,

organized, and thematic (Ham 1992). Signs can inform, guide, and act as
connectors, thereby giving meaning to the visitor’s experience by creating an
impression and setting a tone. Interpretive signs can encourage visitors to
discover the resource or site by engaging the five senses—sight, smell, taste,
hearing, and touch. Interpretive signs convey information about local cultural or
natural resources by telling a story that holds emotional and intellectual meaning
and interest for visitors. See figure 10A-3.
Figure 10A-3—Interpretation at the Camp Wildcat Civil War Battlefield.

Daniel Boone National Forest. Southeast Mountain BEIG Province.
Effective interpretation inspires visitors to: (1) respect others and the natural
landscape, (2) learn more about resource issues and become informed,
participatory stewards, and (3) reduce their environmental footprint and
implement sustainable operations at home and in their communities.
Interpretation can save lives, reduce vandalism, decrease wildfires, protect
wildlife and cultural artifacts, and enable visitors to become more appreciative of
an area’s natural and cultural resources. See figure 10A-4.
November 2012
Figure 10A-4—The title “Wetland or Wasteland” and the frog drawing draw
the reader in and begin to tell a story. Taylor Creek Visitor Center, Lake
Tahoe Basin Management Unit. North Pacific BEIG Province.
10A.2 Guidelines
Interpretive signs are part of the Forest Service interpretive services program.
Signs engage the visitor, appeal to different learning styles, and are accessible.
Strive to use the best available science and current professional industry
standards. Cultivate partnerships with interpretive associations and other
community partners to assist with the development of interpretive and education
materials, to build community support and engagement, and to reach under-
represented populations.
Oversight and coordination of interpretive services takes place at three

organizational levels within the agency. First, the interpretive services program
manager, recreation and heritage resources, Washington office, sets national
policy and guidance. Second, the interpretive specialist in each regional office
serves as the regional liaison between the Washington office and the field units.
Note that the regional interpretive specialist is the technical expert on matters
pertaining to planning, designing, and implementing interpretive media products
(signs being one form of media) and presentations. Topics include natural
and cultural resources and land management issues. Third, the interpretive
specialists located on some forests and districts develop local themes and
designs.
November 2012
Many, if not most, interpretive signs are approved by the district ranger or forest
supervisor. Depending on the cost, plans for scenic byways and interpretive
trails may require approval from the region and/or the Washington office. Dollar
limits for the regional and Washington office approval processes are as follows:
a. Permanent and temporary exhibits costing $100,000 or more—factoring

in inflationary costs—are reviewed by regional office interpretive services
program manager or designee. The regional forester submits proposals
for these permanent and temporary exhibits to the Deputy Chief, National
Forest System for Washington office written approval through the
Washington office interpretive services program manager.
b. Permanent and temporary exhibits costing from $25,000 to $99,999

are reviewed and approved by the regional office recreation director, in
consultation with the regional office interpretive services program manager
or program designee.
c. Permanent and temporary exhibits costing less than $25,000 are approved
by the forest supervisor in consultation with the regional office interpretive
services program manager, forest interpretive specialist or program
designee.
Additional information pertaining to interpretive services is contained in FSM

2300, chapter 2390, section 2390.1.
10A.2.1 General Sign Guidelines

Best practices for interpretive signing call for each sign to be based on one
central theme (a message expressed in a complete sentence) that links the
site’s tangible resources to intangible, universal concepts. See figure 10A-5.
Figure 10A-5—This sign’s theme is the origin of the area’s water.

Deschutes National Forest. North Pacific BEIG Province.
November 2012
The recreation experience objectives for a site influence decisions on where

to provide interpretive signs. For example, if a dimension of the experience is
unassisted discovery of the natural history of an area, interpretation may be
appropriate at the trailhead but not along the trail.
Do not use interpretive signs in designated wilderness.
Use the following to develop interpretive signs:
• Accurate information based on a solid theme and central message.
• Detailed information. Refine the level of detail until it has relevance to your
audience.
• Stories or descriptive events to teach concepts. Stories are more effective

than simply identifying and providing straight facts. Don’t tell everything.
Leave something for the visitors to discover. Avoid “encyclopedias on the
walls.” See figures 10A-6 and 10A-7.
Figure 10A-6—The theme or story is life after fire. Digital laminate sign
made of phenolic resin. Payette National Forest.
November 2012
Figure 10A-7—Perhaps there is one too many themes in this interpretive

sign. It includes two themes or stories. The first story is “Case Number
1: The Nation’s First Timber Sale.” The second story is “Which Tree Is
Older?” Black Hills National Forest. Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
• The 3-30-3 rule. A person should be able to skim the bold titles on the sign
and understand the key message in 3 seconds. He/she should be able to
read the mid-sized text and get some details in 30 seconds, and be able
to read the entire text and look at the graphics in 3 minutes. The overall
appearance of the sign, as a result of the combination of graphics, colors,
layout, and titles, contributes to a visitor’s decision to read the sign.
• Graphics, poetry, or other art forms to illustrate the central theme. A

general rule is to make 1/3 graphics, 1/3 text, and 1/3 empty space. See
figure 10A-8.
November 2012
Figure 10A-8—Display of 3-30-3 rule and the balance of text and graphics.
Headings are easily read. Natural Arch Scenic Area, Daniel Boone National
Forest.
10A.2.2 Interpretive and Education Plan

An interpretive and education plan defines goals and interpretive media
developed to convey core thematic messages of a Forest Service unit, area,
or site that meet diverse audience needs. It focuses on the interpretive and
educational components. It guides the development, production, and delivery
of interpretive and educational products including the media, programs, and
services. A plan may span any reasonable geographic area from a recreation
complex to an entire forest or grassland, and includes architectural and site
information. It helps guide the process and ensures complementary themes and
messages for telling a story or describing the special qualities of the national
forest or grassland. The plan also ensures that facilities and programming are
accessible and free of barriers for both physical passage and communication,
i.e., visual, hearing, and language. See figure 10A-9.
November 2012
Figure 10A-9—Interpretive sign regarding porcupines on an accessible

trail. San Juan National Forest. Southwest BEIG Province.
Read the forest or grassland’s interpretive and education plan. Extract mission,
purpose, and significance statements, as well as primary and secondary
interpretive themes from a variety of planning documents and tools to ensure
consistency of priorities, messages, and measureable outcomes. Use the
following reference documents:
• “Forest Land and Resource Management Plan.”
• “Accessibility Guidebook on Outdoor Recreation and Trails.” See section

10A.3.1 Special Considerations
• “Scenery Management System” (SMS).
• “Recreation Opportunity Spectrum” (ROS).
• “Built Environment Image Guide” (BEIG).
• Specific forest or regional design guidelines, and/or any previous work that
has established design themes.
Find out if the forest or grassland has a current (within 2 to 3 years) interpretive
and education plan. If the plan is more than 5 years old, write a new plan before
proceeding with a sign plan or creating any new interpretive signs.
November 2012
10A.2.3 Exhibit Plan

Create exhibit plans specifically for scenic byways and interpretive trails. Use
an exhibit plan to give precise direction to a contractor or fabricator for exhibit
completion. Wayside exhibits fall within the scope of an exhibit plan. The
plan includes goals and objectives for each exhibit and specific text outlines,
recommendations for graphics and images, and cost estimates. Depending on
the scope and complexity of the plan, it may include draft text and conceptual
designs. Exhibit plans are tiered to a larger interpretive and education plan to
ensure consistency of themes, objectives, and design guidelines.
Since wayside exhibits are located outdoors and close to the features they
interpret, visitors receive information at the times and places they want
information. Include explanatory signage near a point of interest, often along a
trail, walk, parking area, or road. Do not include objects on wayside exhibits.
The next sections explain the four steps for producing interpretive signs. These
steps include:
1. Planning.
2. Designing.
3. Fabricating.
4. Installing.
Whether the project is small or large, the process is the same. All steps are
important and closely related; do not begin one step without full consideration of
the others. In a large project, each step is a major phase within the process.
10A.3 Planning
Interpretive planning for signs occurs prior to exhibit design and addresses the
theme, message, and goals of any interpretive sign. Interpretive sign planning is
a problem-solving, decisionmaking process that blends management needs and
site considerations with resource stories to enhance the visitors’ experiences.
It is an exacting process that requires an interdisciplinary approach. It also
includes a site plan for the panel location.
Appoint a project leader early in the process. The project leader assembles a
sign development team that includes subject matter experts, such as biologists
or archeologists, and, if the leader is not one, an interpretive specialist,
landscape architect, and recreation planner. The team evaluates the planning
and designing processes at several stages. This is essential to avoid pitfalls.
Before designing the sign always determine the how, who, where, and when for
a site. Do a brief analysis, and answer these questions:
• Is a sign the best medium to convey the interpretive message?
• Will there be enough visitors to make the sign worthwhile? (If the site is
very sensitive, having even a few readers is valuable.)
• What is the expectation of the visitors? Why are they there? Has an
audience analysis been done?
November 2012
• Does this make one too many signs for the area?
• Who will maintain the sign? Are there funds or sources to maintain it?
Decide on the location of the interpretive sign during the planning stage of the
project. Site interpretive signs in close proximity to the area or feature being
interpreted so visitors can readily view and contemplate the importance of the
natural or cultural resources or management practices being highlighted. See
figure 10A-10.
Figure 10A-10—This low profile sign looks out over a meadow in a moose
habitat; it displays a moose foot, and the sign frame is similar in color to
the tree bark in the area. Gallatin National Forest. Rocky Mountain BEIG
Province.
Interpretive sign development requires expertise in many areas including: site

specific subject matter, interpretive message and text development, and graphic
layout and design. Most units will need to contract for at least some of this
expertise and/or service. Consider contracting with an interpretive sign design
firm, an enterprise unit, or a regional design center, such as the Rocky Mountain
Region (R2) Center for Design and Interpretation. When under contract, it
remains the responsibility of the unit staff to oversee the planning and designing
processes, as well as to provide the necessary reviews and approvals for the
project to move forward.
November 2012
Three critical components create an intellectual and emotional experience. They

are:
1. Message: An interpretive theme statement forms the message. This is a

single, succinct statement that summarizes, articulates, and distills what
is significant about the resource and/or site. This statement also links the
tangible resource to a learning concept or idea. For example, figure 10A-11
asks, “Can you imagine living here?” It puts the reader in the scene.
Figure 10A-11—Archaeological interpretation that explains what was

found and asks the reader to think of what else might have been found.
Scenic Byway 12, Dixie National Forest. Southwest BEIG Province.
2. Audience: Audience and market research are important for knowing

who is visiting the site and how to communicate effectively with them.
Find useful information on visitors in the National Visitor Use Monitoring
(NVUM) database, the National Survey on Recreation and the Environment
(Southern Research Station), as well as from State tourism offices or local
convention and visitor bureaus, and from onsite observations.
3. Resources: The knowledge and expertise of personnel and the funding

available for creating interpretive signs influence the kinds of media
selected. See figure 10A-12.
November 2012
Figure 10A-12—This panorama interpretive plaza is well defined, has low

profile signs so one can see what is being interpreted, and a bench. The
base is native stone. Molas Pass, San Juan Scenic Skyway, San Juan
National Forest. Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
Consider which locations best capture the visitors’ attention and connects them
with the sites or landscapes. In accordance with the interpretative and education
plan, select few sign sites to optimize the effectiveness of the interpretation
rather too many sign sites, which can have the effect of overwhelming visitors.
Consider the following for locating and installing an interpretive sign:
• Proximity of the sign to the resource or feature it addresses. Would a sign

detract from the viewing experience or block the feature being interpreted?
See figure 10A-13.
November 2012
Figure 10A-13—Text, “This lake contains approximately 30 acres and has

a maximum depth of 9 feet. The highway at this point is on an old Indian
trail.” The highway is on one side of this sign and the lake on the other.
The lake is visible just beyond the right edge of the sign support. Native
stone base, timbers, and routed planks sign. Deschutes National Forest.
North Pacific BEIG Province.
• Position of the reader. Will the sign be read by a person on foot, bicycle,
horse, or in a vehicle; from a trail, overlook, or pullout? See figure 10A-14.
Figure 10A-14—Signs are legible from a vehicle in the pullout; one can
park and read the low-profile signs as well. Hospital Hill, Cloud Peak
Skyway, Big Horn National Forest. Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
• Accessibility. Involve the proper professionals in the planning. See section
10A.7.
• Sun, wind, glare, shadows, traffic and visitor circulation, and safety.
November 2012
10A.3.1 Special Considerations

To make signs accessible as possible, consult with the national, regional, or
unit accessibility coordinator, and review plans to ensure compliance with
accessibility guidelines. See the U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service
accessibility guidelines and the U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park
Service, Wayside Exhibit Design. See figures 10A-15 and 10A-16.
Figure 10A-15—Interpretation on an accessible trail. While there is no

required mounting height for signs, mounting the lower front edge at 32 to
36 inches above the travel surface works well for most people. Northeast
BEIG Province.
Figure 10A-16—This drawing illustrates the importance of considering

viewing height differences, and shows where typical cones of viewing
overlap.
November 2012
Many visitors are non-English speakers. Serving a non-English speaking

audience requires special expertise in translation, use of international symbols,
and development of strong graphics that convey messages over text. In an
area heavily used by a non-English speaking population(s), post bilingual
or multilingual signs. Where translation is necessary, translate the primary
language and dialect(s). Always have the English translated by a professional
translator and have the translated text back translated. The back translation
is important to show that the translated meaning is consistent with what was
intended. (The Spanish Colonial Research Center of the National Park Service,
in partnership with the University of New Mexico, provides a low-cost Spanish
translation service.) See figure 10A-17.
Figure 10A-17—Bilingual sign made of a plastic embedment that has been

in the tropical climate since 2004 (for 6 years). El Yunque National Forest.
Southeast Coastal BEIG Province.
November 2012
10A.4 Designing
It is important to keep in mind that interpretive panel design requires
professional assistance. The pointers discussed below are intended to give an
idea of the items to discuss with your contractor.
Like planning, designing is a problem-solving, decisionmaking process. The

critical components of planning dictate the design elements and vice versa.
Therefore, it is important to think of planning and designing as complementary
processes that share equally in the quality and effectiveness of the
interpretation. See figure 10A-18.
Figure 10A-18—The objects of interpretation, the meadow in the

foreground, and the lake and mountain in the background, are immediately
visible to the reader. Deschutes National Forest. North Pacific BEIG
Province.
Several design aspects are considered during this stage. The layout of the
interpretive sign needs to ensure a focal point, movement, balance, unity, and
proportion. The selection of the sign material requires an understanding of the
color and graphic needs, the long-term durability, permanence, maintenance,
and vandalism risk of the sign. It is critical to retain professionals, such as
graphic designer/illustrators, interpreters, and other experienced personnel for
these purposes.
Good sign design includes these basic elements: text size and font, layout and
graphics including colors, sign materials, and sign supports.
November 2012
10A.4.1 Text
• Use a sans, slab, or simple serif typeface, upper and lower case, with a
minimum of 24 point type size on signs.
Titles: 90 to 108 point.
Subtitles: 40 to 48 point.
Body Text: 30 to 36 point.
Captions: 24 point (DOI 2009).
• Break continuous blocks of text into sections with subtitles interspersed with
graphics or images. Do not make entire blocks of text all capital letters.
• Make titles bold, with fonts and colors, to draw attention.
• Write text to convey a simple message.
• Focus on only one theme per sign with one to two related topics.
• Research the topic thoroughly. Check and recheck facts. Edit, edit, edit.
• Bring extra “eyes” in for review.
• Be concise. Use few words, and write as simply as possible. If possible limit
text to 125 to 150 words or less. Make the sign face no more than one third
text.
• Write directly to a wide range of visitors in terms they readily can

understand. Avoid scientific facts, bureaucratic jargon, and acronyms.
10A.4.2 Layout and Graphics

• Use a single graphic to replace many words, focus the attention of the
viewer, and lead eyes through a sequence. Graphics add beauty and
interest to the sign face.
• Make the sign the right size. Avoid perfectly square panels; rectangular
shapes are more appealing and cost effective.
• Use new materials and technology to create a variety of sign shapes. While
varied shapes may cost more, they can enhance the appeal of the signs
and the delivery of the message. See figures 10A-19 and 10A-20.
November 2012
Figure 10A-19—This bilingual sign is cut to accentuate the shape of the

white ginger flowers. El Yanque National Forest. Southeast BEIG Province.
Figure 10A-20—This sign is cut to reveal the shape/silhouette of the

mountains at its top and to fit with the shape of its simulated-granite
support. Taylor Creek Visitor Center, Lake Tahoe Basin Management Unit.
North Pacific BEIG Province.
November 2012
• Make signs no larger than necessary, avoid billboards.
• Allow the right amount of space around the text, graphics, and headings.
Do not crowd the text; keep the sign face simple and uncluttered. Leave
room for the frame and mount.
• Incorporate appropriate colors into the design that reflect the surrounding
environment and theme. Use color to provide variety, emphasis, and unity.
For sample colors, see the BEIG sign colors in the Wilderness.net signs
and posters toolbox. Click on III. Examples. Do not use garish colors,
awkward designs, or unusual symbols or words unless they are related
directly to the theme of the message.
• Select artwork that is appropriate, professionally executed, and realistic. Be

sure graphics are clear, easy to identify, and complement the text.
• Use high-contrast graphics that can be read easily by all populations.
• Do not use graphics to decorate the sign face.
• Be cautious when using illustrations and photographs on the same sign.
• Do not overdo the number and size of photographs. Make sure accurate
credit captions are included for all proprietary images. See figure 10A-21.
Figure 10A-21—The illustration explains the water system supported by a

verbal explanation. Courtright reservoir, Sierra National Forest.
November 2012
10A.5 Fabricating
Fabricating includes sign face and base material selection, and base construction.
Base the final selection of the sign and sign base material on analysis and
research. When choosing materials, consider such factors as their ability to convey
the interpretive message, their durability and future maintenance needs, and their
ability to reflect the BEIG and ROS of the area. Consider the type of use they will
receive. Refer to chapter 10B, section 10B.5.5. See figure 10A-22.
Figure 10A-22—Interpretation mounted on a native stone base. Deschutes

National Forest. North Pacific BEIG Province.
10A.5.1 Sign Face Materials

Sign face material choices continue to improve. Materials hold colors for many
years and are more resistant to vandalism. Because material choices are
constantly evolving, it is important to research current industry standards. Table
10A-1 compares the current (2010) interpretive sign materials.
Use digital technology. In digital printing, choices of earth tone blending colors are
infinite, duplicates can be procured in the initial order, digital files can be saved
for future use (always ask about the company’s policy), and digital files can be
changed easily for updates. Products are well suited for digital signs include:
1. Digital high-pressure laminate (DHPL). DHPL signs greater than 1/2-inch thick
can stand alone without backing and bullets pass through without shattering
the sign. See figure 10A-23.
2. Porcelain enamel. Use only indoors and in well-protected sites.
Table 10A-1—Comparison of popular interpretive sign materials
Sign materials Digital Digital

performance Porcelain Anodized high pressure embedded Sandblasted Stone Vinyl
factors (below) enamel aluminum laminate fiberglass wood etching materials
Graphics and Color
Chapter 10A
S i gn
Graphics capability/ Excellent Good, Very good Very good Fair to Good Good, Fair,
resolution line art only line art line art
and
Color retention over time Excellent N/A 10 yr. warranty Unknown Fair N/A Poor
P os t er
Range of colors Excellent Poor to fair Very good Very good Poor N/A Poor
Photo reproduction Excellent Good, Very good Very good N/A Good Poor
capability halftones halftones
Material durability
G ui del i nes
Life expectancy in Excellent Excellent Good Good Fair Excellent Poor to fair
for
serviceable condition 40 yrs+ 40 yrs+ 10 to 12 yrs 8 to 10 yrs 5 to 7 yrs 40 yrs + 2 to 3 yrs
the
Scratch/abrasion Excellent Poor Very good Very good Poor Poor Poor
resistance
For est
Cracking/peeling/warping Excellent Excellent Very good Fair to good Excellent Excellent Excellent
Visitor Information Signing
resistance
Ser vi ce
Maintenance Annual Annual Bi-annual Bi-annual Stain None Replace
•
wash/wax wash wash wash every 3 yrs
EM
Impact resistance Poor Poor Very good Very good Poor Poor Poor
(Hard blows—gun shots)
Graffiti removal Excellent Poor Very good Very good Poor Poor Fair to good
7100- 15
Replacement/duplication Poor Poor Very good Excellent Poor Poor Excellent
November 2012
Interpretive
10A-21
10A-22
Table 10A-1—Comparison of popular interpretive sign materials (continued)
Sign materials Digital Digital

performance Porcelain Anodized high pressure embedded Sandblasted Stone Vinyl
factors (below) enamel aluminum laminate fiberglass wood etching materials
November 2012
Typical applications
Chapter 10A
Si gn
Development niche-natural, All Rural/ All All Natural/ Natural/ Rural/
and
rural, urban urban rural rural urban
Framing needed Flats-yes, No ⅜-in, yes, Yes No No Yes +

Return edge-no ½-in +, no backing
P os t er
Trail waysides Good to Good Very good Very good Poor Good Poor
very good
Highway/scenic byway Excellent Good Very good Very good Poor Good Poor
G ui del i nes
waysides
for
Site and facility identification Good Excellent Good Good Excellent Poor Poor
the
Information/bulletin boards Poor Poor Poor Poor Poor Poor Very good
Memorials/plaques Poor Excellent Poor Poor Fair Very good Poor
For est
Visitor Information Signing
Vegetation/artifact labels Good Excellent Very good Good Very good Good to
very good Fair
Ser vi ce
Overall Assessment
•
EM
Advantages/benefits Durability/ Professional Durability/ Durability Rustic Rustic/site Economics
resolution image cost look blending
Drawbacks/disadvantages Chipping/ Scratching is New-years UV damage Dents/ Graffiti is UV damage
7100- 15
rusting permanent of service? fading permanent warping
Value for the money Very good Good to high Excellent Good Fair/special Good/special Fair
application application
Relative cost Very high Moderate Low low to Very high High Low
moderate
Interpretive
November 2012
3. A variety of changing product materials including aluminum, glass, and

other materials that are constructed using heat, pressure, and a mix of
materials.
Certain sign types, such as vinyl sheets and wood routing, require Government
Printing Office (GPO) approval or printing through a GPO-approved printer
already under contract. Refer to chapter 15 for procurement information.
The Orchard
Harvested produce was washed, stored, and On the floodplain below are the remnants of the Mills Canyon Enterprise, established in
cooled in the small rock building on the flood- 1881by Melvin Mills, an influential attorney and political figure in New Mexico. The orchard
plain below. The produce was hauled out of the covered hundreds of acres along
canyon by wagon and sold to the communities the Canadian River. Thousands
in the surrounding area. of fruit trees produced tons of
peaches, pears, apples, plums, LOCATION OF
ORCHARD
apricots, cherries, walnuts,
chestnuts, and almonds.
Photo credit: New Mexico State University Library Archives and Special Collections.
The wagon road roughly follows

Forest Road 600 and was extremely
slow going as well as dangerous to
man and animal. To speed the Photo credit: Maxwell Land Grant Company Photograph Collection, 1870-1920, PICT 000-147; Center for Southwest Research, University Libraries,
process, Mills attempted to haul

University of New Mexico.
In the fall of 1904 the Rio Grande, Pecos, and
the produce to the rim by way of a Canadian Rivers flooded. Agricultural fields
cable with a lift bucket. He reluctantly agreed not to ride to the top with the first load; and even some small towns were destroyed.
Mills narrowly escaped death as the cable failed and the bucket came crashing down the The Mills Canyon Enterprise was one of the
canyon wall. casualties. Efforts to make it profitable again
failed and the last harvest was in 1912.
Photo credit: New Mexico State University Library Archives and Special Collections.
Figure 10A-23—This high density laminate sign illustrates a former use of

the land. Cibola National Forest.
Consider these factors when choosing the sign material:
• The amount of presence or agency patrol at the site. Generally, remote

sites have greater potential for vandalism than do high-investment or
popular, highly visited sites, such as scenic byways and overlooks.
• Whether the sign is sheltered or not.
• Cost versus benefit. For example, how long is the sign expected to be in
serviceable condition for the budget available? In certain locations, it is
logical to invest in a higher cost material because the sign will not need to
be maintained or replaced as often.
• The ease with which the sign can be replaced when it has been damaged,
degraded by the weather, or there is a need to change the message.
• The capability of the sign medium for graphic resolution and color, such as
crisply and clearly displaying text and graphics.
November 2012
• Routed signs. Use recycled plastic or fiberglass routed signs to mimic wood
routed signs; these materials are very durable with an extended service
life, and are maintenance free. Fiberglass can be patched if damaged. Both
products are fabricated in multiple colors from digital files.
• The ability of the material to reflect the interpretive and design themes of the
site.
• The likelihood that the material will produce glare.
10A.5.2 Sign Support (Base)

Give as much consideration to sign support as to the sign face itself. Sign
supports are aesthetically pleasing only when they relate to the sign’s purpose
and the surroundings. Sometimes the site application will suggest a specific sign
support design of native materials. See figures 10A-24 and 10A-25. Pay attention
to how supports blend the sign into the site’s setting and natural features. Make
sure that the support structure complements the interpretive message and
theme. See figures 10A-26 and 10A-27. This also implies permanence and
respect for the site, and can provide a link to the site’s character based on ROS
and the BEIG design themes. See figures 10A-24 through 10A-27.
Figure 10A-24—This kiosk uses colors reflected in the landscape and

appropriately sized lumber for the area. Nebo Loop National Scenic Byway,
Unita National Forest. Rocky Mountain BEIG Provence.
November 2012
Figure 10A-25—Local stone and timbers were used to build this kiosk and
overlook. Logan Canyon Scenic Byway, Wasatch-Cache National Forest.
Rocky Mountain BEIG Provence.
Figure 10A-26—The sculptures support the Chief Joseph Scenic Byway

theme and the subject matter. Native timber and stone are used for the
support structure. Nez Perce Entry Portal, Chief Joseph Scenic Byway, Big
Horn National Forest. Rocky Mountain BEIG Provence.
November 2012
Figure 10A-27—Native timber supports fit this sign interpreting the Lochsa
Historic Ranger Station. Clearwater National Forest. Rocky Mountain BEIG
Provence.
In many situations, a standard commercial support base will suffice. Low-profile,

diagonal-faced signs are appropriate for trails and overlooks. Signs may be
more readable from a vehicle if vertical at a 90 degree angle. Do not place
vertical signs between the reader and the interpreted subject matter. See figures
10A-28 through 10A-30.
Figure 10A-28—Stock low-profile base. San Juan National Forest.

Southwest BEIG Province.
November 2012
Figure 10A-29—Low-profile signs are attached to a railing. Santa Fe

National Forest. Southwest BEIG Province.
Figure 10A-30—The base design reflects the mountainous terrain. Le

Conte Divide, Sierra National Forest. North Pacific BEIG Province.
November 2012
More examples of sign supports. See figures 10A-31 through 10A-36.
Figures 10A-31 and 32—The sign supports are designed to look like the
reeds seen in the visitor center area. They continue from the sign face to
the ground. Taylor Creek Visitor Center, Lake Tahoe Basin Management
Unit. North Pacific BEIG Province.
Figure 10A-33—This kiosk commemorates the work of the Civilian

Conservation Corp in the Soapstone Basin, Uinta-Wasatch-Cache National
Forest. Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
November 2012
Figure 10A-34—This support uses local stone, and continues the design
theme from the nearby building in size of wood and color at Hewlett
Gulch. Arapaho-Roosevelt National Forest. Rocky Mountain BEIG
Province.
Figure 10A-35—Use of this sized timber and the steel straps continue a
forest theme. Falls Campground and Day Use Area, Shoshone National
Forest. Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
November 2012
Figure 10A-36—Rustic sign supports match the environment. Chaco

Great House and Pueblo Trail, San Juan National Forest. Southwest BEIG
Province.
10A.6 Installing
Provide drawings and specifications for the sign and the sign supports to the
installer. Involve the designer and interpreter in the installation to maintain
overall design integrity. If environmental factors or other considerations prevent
the sign from being installed in the chosen location, it’s convenient to have the
specialists on the ground to salvage the installation.
Install signs for permanence and take every precaution against vandalism. Use
lock washers when mounting signs, set posts in concrete, and/or insert anchors
or cross-pieces into buried portions of posts to make them harder to remove.
Leave 1/8- to 1/4-inch tolerance where edges abut and do not secure washer
and screws or tighten firmly into laminate to allow for expansion and contraction
of the materials. Tighten to snug only, to allow for expansion and contraction of
the material.
November 2012
10A.7 Evaluate and Monitor Effectiveness

Periodically, evaluate the effectiveness of a sign or major installation, such as
a scenic byway installation. Through site observation, evaluate which signs are
read and by whom. Notice if a sign is vandalized or has other problems. Over
time, the sign may need to be updated or the audience may change suggesting
the need for a foreign language.
Contract with Forest Service research station social scientists for formal surveys.
A formal survey is quite technical, and survey questions must be approved by
the Office of Management and Budget. The Lake Tahoe Basin Management
Unit participated in a student study to survey the effectiveness and visitor
satisfaction of the wayside exhibits at the Taylor Creek Visitor Center. This
survey, done by the Pacific Southwest Research Station and California State
University, Humboldt, found the visitor retention rate to be 40 percent of the
subject material compared to the norm of 13 percent at most visitor center sites
(King 2010). See figure 10A-37.
Figure 10A-37—The reed-theme is continued; the watershed as a puzzle.

Taylor Creek Visitor Center, Lake Tahoe Basin Management Unit. North
Pacific BEIG Province.
November 2012
10A.8 Other References and Resources
Books
Brochu, Lisa; Merriman, Tim. 2008. Personal communication: connecting your
audience to heritage resources. National Association for Interpretation.
2nd Edition. Singapore. ISBN: 978-1-879931-24-4.
Caputo, Paul; Lewis, Shea; Brochu, Lisa. 2008. Interpretation by design:

graphic design basics for heritage interpreters. National Association for
Interpretation. InterpPress.
Edwards, Curtis. 1994. A region 6 interpretive service aid: interpretive project

guide book. Portland, OR: U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest
Service, Pacific Northwest Region. <http://www.fs.fed.us/outdoors/
naturewatch/start/planning/Interp-Guidebook.pdf>, <http://www.fs.fed.us/
r2/cdi/interp_plan_tools/pdfs/interpretive_project_guide.pdf>.
Gross, Michel; Zimmerman, Ron; Buchholz, Jim. 2006. Signs, trails and wayside
exhibits-connecting people and places. UW-SP. Stevens Point: WI:
Foundation Press, University of Wisconsin, Stevens Point.
Ham, Sam H. 1992. Environmental interpretation: a practical guide for people

with big ideas and small budgets. Fulcrum Press, Golden.
Ostergaard, Richard F. 2001. Draft. Sign sense: principals [sic] of planning,

design, fabrication, and installation. Durango, CO: U.S. Department of
Agriculture, Forest Service, San Juan National Forest, Center of Design
and Interpretation. <http://72.41.119.75/Library/Signage/sign_sense.pdf>.
Sharpe, Grant W. 1982. Interpreting the environment. New York: John Wiley and
Sons.
Tilden, Freeman. 1977. Interpreting your heritage. Third Edition. Chapel Hill, NC:
University of North Carolina Press.
Yamada, Alan; Ostergaard, Dick; Jilbert, Mari; Brunswick, Nancy. 2002. Scenic
byways: a design guide for roadside improvements. Washington DC:
U.S. Department of Transportation. <http://www.fs.fed.us/eng/pubs/pdf/
fhwa02001.pdf>.
Videos
U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service. 1992. Interpreting watchable

wildlife. Missoula, MT: U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service,
Northern Region, Public Affairs Office.
November 2012
Web sites
Accessibility Guidebook on Outdoor Recreation and Trails. 2006. <http://www.

fs.fed.us/recreation/programs/accessibility>.
U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service. 2011. Interpretive

planning: tools you can use. 2009 Rocky Mountain Region.
<http://www.fs.usda.gov/wps/portal/fsinternet/!ut/p/c4/04_
SB8K8xLLM9MSSzPy8xBz9CP0os3gjAwhwtDDw9_AI8zPyhQoY6BdkOy
oCAGixyPg!/?ss=1102&navtype=BROWSEBYSUBJECT&cid=stelprdb51
76447&navid=091000000000000&pnavid=null&position=Not%20Yet%20
Determined.Html&ttype=detail&>
U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service, Office of Communications

<www.usda.gov/oc>.
U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service, Office of Communications.

Visual Information Standards. <http://www.usda.gov/documents/Visual_
Standards_04.pdf>.
U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. 2010. Interpretive

development program. <http://www.nps.gov/idp/interp/>.
U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. 2009. Programmatic

accessibility guidelines for national park service interpretive media.
wayside exhibits: a guide to developing outdoor interpretive exhibits.
Harpers Ferry, WV: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park
Service, Ferry Center, Center for Media Services. <http://www.nps.gov/
hfc/products/waysides/way-guide.htm>.
Bulletin Boards, Posters,
Chapter 10B Visitor Information Signing Fees, Registration
10B.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................1
10B.2 Traffic Control Devices....................................................................................5
10B.3 Registration and Fees......................................................................................5
10B.4 Bulletin Boards.................................................................................................7
10B.4.1 Posters...............................................................................................10
10B.4.1.1 Poster Series ......................................................................11
10B.4.1.2 Woodsy Says Poster (P19 Series).....................................11
10B.4.1.3 Environmental Management Posters (P21 Series) .........11
10B.4.1.4 Recreation Management Posters (P23 Series) ...............11
10B.4.1.5 Timber Management Posters (P24 Series) ......................11
10B.4.1.6 Watershed Management Posters (P25 Series) ...............11
10B.4.1.7 Wildlife Management Posters (P26 Series) .....................11
10B.4.1.8 Fire Management Posters (P51 Series) ...........................12
10B.4.1.9 Law Enforcement Posters (P53 Series)............................12
10B.4.1.10 Lands Posters (P54 Series) ............................................12
10B.4.1.11 Safety Posters (P61 Series).............................................13
10B.4.1.12 Property Posters (P64 Series) ........................................13
10B.4.1.13 Volunteer Program Posters (P65 Series) ......................13
10B.4.1.14 Water System Posters (P74 Series) ...............................13
10B.4.1.15 Take Pride in America Posters (TPAS series) ..............13
10B.4.2 Site identification..............................................................................14
10B.4.3 VIS Content.......................................................................................15

10B.5 Sign: Face Design, Materials, Mounting, Supports, and Installation........20
10B.5.1 Sign Face Design..............................................................................20
10B.5.2 Sign Dimensions...............................................................................21
10B.5.3 Sign Face Materials .........................................................................23
10B.5.3a Digital Technology...............................................................23
10B.5.3b Routed Signs........................................................................23
10B.6 Trailhead VIS...................................................................................................30
10B.6.1 Introduction and Orientation ..........................................................33
10B.7 Designated Wilderness Trailhead Messages...............................................41

November 2012

10B.1 Introduction
Signs and bulletin boards typically are used at recreation sites to communicate
important information that visitors need for a safe and enjoyable experience.
Signs and bulletin boards are often the only “official” contact visitors have
with the agency during their outings. Along with safety, orientation, and
regulation information the bulletin board is often the location for fee collection
or registration requirements and instructions. These messages may have
information combined into one sign, with specific messages targeting various
issues. It is also important to note that trailhead or visitor information signing
(VIS) signage is different from interpretive signage. VIS signs address
requirements, rules, and specific behaviors for visitors on a specific land area.
These signs direct human behaviors for land management purposes.
To be effective, VIS needs to be attractive, well maintained, have relevant

information, present a professional image, and be accessible to all visitors.
Homemade materials, uncoordinated color schemes, and posting information in
a clutter manner hinder the communication effort and present an unsatisfactory
impression of the agency to the public. Refer to figures 10B-1 through 10B-5.
Figure 10B-1—Professional looking VIS bulletin board at Bear Lake

Campground; posters are legible and neatly arranged, and the sign
structure is well kept. Routt National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG
Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-2—What’s wrong with this picture?
• The site identification information is illegible and the shield is

missing.
• Poor maintenance can send the wrong message. The motorized and
wheeled vehicle symbols across the top had red slashes through
them. These have mostly worn off, so the sign indicates that these
vehicles are allowed at this site.
• The posters and brochures are arranged in a cluttered manner.
• Brochures do not belong on bulletin boards; put them in a dispenser

designed to go with the bulletin board.
• Laminate maps before posting.
• Think about what information is important and where it should be

posted.
• Do not post duplicate and/or conflicting messages.
• Posting a wilderness poster and a program area wilderness sign is

confusing. Use one poster with the correct information on it.
November 2012

Figure 10B-3—A rustic look is sometimes suitable, but this board is not
appropriate. The large hand-lettered poster says that the area is provided
by the Grand Mesa Nordic Council and the Forest Service. Be a good
partner and share your expertise and the Forest Service posters.
Figure 10B-4—Homemade and illegible posters and ill maintained

bulletin boards detract from a professional image—even at remote
sites. There is no site or Forest Service identification. It is better to have
nothing than VIS that looks like this.
November 2012

Figure 10B-5—Example of homemade VIS. It appears that this sign is to

be read from a moving vehicle; this is not appropriate for VIS. Do not post
VIS information next to a road. On these signs, there is too much text, it
is too small, and it cannot be read from a moving vehicle. Sign placement
could cause safety problems; drivers must stop to read the information.
Information needed to be read from a moving vehicle, such as the speed
limit, shall meet all of the requirements and standards in Chapter 3—
Traffic Control Devices.
Post bilingual or multilingual signs and posters in an area heavily used by a

non-English speaking population(s), such as immigrants or tourists. Translate
the primary language and dialect(s). Always have the English translated by a
professional translator and have the translated text back translated. The back
translation is important to show that the meaning is consistent with what was
intended. (The Spanish Colonial Research Center of the National Park Service,
in partnership with the University of New Mexico, provides a low-cost Spanish
translation service.)
Check the Built Environment Image Guide (BEIG) theme for the area as
indicated by the BEIG Province before installing a new bulletin board, sign
structure, or changing an existing sign, always. Select a VIS structure that
reflects the appropriate BEIG theme, fits the Recreation Opportunity Spectrum
(ROS) class of the site, and harmonizes with the characteristic landscape. If a
theme has not been adopted, refer to FS-710, BEIG, and chapter 4, as a general
guide for considering site character, context, design themes, and materials.
November 2012

10B.2 Traffic Control Devices

Use traffic control devices to direct visitors to onsite information, activities, and
facilities locations. Follow standards in chapter 3C, section 3C.4 for design and
placement requirements of destination signs. Refer to figure 10B-6.
Figures 10B-6—Destination signs.
10B.3 Registration and Fees

Clearly inform visitors of any site requirements for registration or payment. Post
the requirements at all entrances to the site and strategically locate the VIS.
Install the registration and/or payment structure in a central area immediate to
the use. Place signs on the right-hand side of the road when entering the site
for safety and to facilitate traffic flow. Locate registration/payment stations in
turn outs or parking areas so that stopped vehicles will not obstruct the flow of
traffic. Add a roof over the pay station if needed because of weather conditions.
Refer to figure 10B-7.
Figure 10B-7—A roof is provided over this VIS pay station. Shawnee
National Forest, Northeastern BEIG Province.
November 2012

Use Forest Service guidelines for signs at fee sites managed by the forest. See
the National Guidelines for Recreation Fee Signs at <http://fsweb.wo.fs.fed.us/
rhwr/recfee/products-signs.shtml>. Refer to figure 10B-8.
Figure 10B-8—Example of a predesigned poster for a U.S. Fee Area.

Posters describe how to make the payment.
November 2012

10B.4 Bulletin Boards

Bulletin boards provide essential information on orientation, recreation
opportunities, safety, ethical use, regulations, and visitor responsibilities. The style
of bulletin boards can showcase a forest theme and support the BEIG; there is no
one set style. Where appropriate, provide a space on bulletin boards for visitors to
leave messages for one another. Refer to figures 10B-9 through 10B-13.
Figure 10B-9—Trailhead VIS is built to complement the adjacent building.

Rock barriers prevent vehicles from encroaching into the space. Arapaho-
Roosevelt National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
Figure 10B-10—The kiosk in front of Sewee Visitor and Environmental

Education Center has a map of the area showing nature trails and so on.
Francis Marion National Forest and Cape Romain National Wildlife Refuge,
November 2012

Figure 10B-11—This bulletin board includes regulations in English and

Spanish, posters, and information on how to use the recreation site called
Sliding Rock. Pisgah National Forest, Southeast Mountain BEIG Province.
Figure 10B-12—Neatly arranged posters on bulletin boards. Kisatchie

National Forest, Southeast Coastal BEIG Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-13—OHV information, map, posters, and brochures at the

trailhead for the Claiborne Multiple Use Trail. Kisatchie National Forest,
November 2012

10B.4.1 Posters
Post standard and local posters in an organized manner. Display only legible
posters in good condition. Remove posters when no longer needed. When
custom posters are created have them designed by graphics professionals,
and always state the desired behavior. In certain cases, state how the desired
behavior has improved the site. For example, “By packing out their own trash,
backpackers have reduced trash removal costs by ___% in the last 6 months.”
Such statements encourage others to follow suit. Temporary or seasonal
conditions and closures are most often displayed using standard posters.
Posters meet
seasonal and When using symbols on posters, use only approved international symbols.
Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.3 for recreational and cultural interest area
temporary, symbols and chapter 3E, section 3E.10 for a comparison of 2003 and 2009
nonpermanent symbols.
needs. Standard posters approved for servicewide use typically are listed in numerical
order for each category. Standard posters are at <http://fsweb.wo.fs.fed.us/eng/
roads_trails/signs_05/posters/index.htm> or may be available from approved
vendors. New posters or those for special applications should be submitted
to the regional offices for approval. Such proposals may be forwarded to the
Washington Office for consideration of servicewide use. Refer to figure 10B-14.
Figure 10B-14—Approved posters screened onto one board.
November 2012

10B.4.1.1 Poster Series

Posters are grouped into various management series.
WOODSY OWL SAYS........

10B.4.1.2 Woodsy Says Poster (P19 Series)
GIVE A HOOT...DON'T POLLUTE!
Use this poster for antipollution messages.

EST SERVICE
FOR
DE
PA
R TMENT OF AGRICU L T U R
E
LEAVE FORESTS CLEAN
10B.4.1.3 Environmental Management Posters (P21 Series)

Use these posters for temporary identification. If pesticides are in storage
longer than 3 months, use a permanent sign.
P21-3 10B.4.1.4 Recreation Management Posters (P23 Series)

Use these posters in conjunction with visitor information board displays.
Change posters during the season to emphasize rules or guides that are most
applicable. Some posters allow the message to be customized to correspond
with local situations.
Permit Required 10B.4.1.5 Timber Management Posters (P24 Series)

To Cut or Remove Firewood Most posters in the P24 series are intended for use in timber operations areas,
P24-10
such as cutting boundaries and payment units. Like other functional activity
posters, some posters are used only during a particular season, such as P24-
23 Cutting Christmas Trees Prohibited. Use larger posters for greater visibility
along roads with higher travel speeds.
...for a healthy enviroment 10B.4.1.6 Watershed Management Posters (P25 Series)

Use these posters as constant seasonal reminder to “Keep Your Forests
KEEP YOUR FORESTS GREEN Green.” Two sizes are available for posting along roads with different speeds.
P25-01
Rise to the 10B.4.1.7 Wildlife Management Posters (P26 Series)

FUTURE Use wildlife management posters to indicate wildlife management areas or
activities. Additional posters may be available through State fish and game
departments. Posters from other series may be used as appropriate.
Fish Your National Forests
P26-6
November 2012

10B.4.1.8 Fire Management Posters (P51 Series)

EXTREME FIRE DANGER
Use the largest posters (54 by 44 inches) sparingly, only on high-speed
Please be careful!
highways and in situations where the scale of the country dwarfs their effect.
P51-02 Place them far enough apart to avoid appearing repetitious.
Use medium-sized posters (42 by 34 inches) on roads with speeds of 40 to 50

miles per hour. Limit their use to essential locations.
Use the 44- by 16-inch poster on most low-speed, low-volume National Forest
System roads. When it’s no longer fire season, use the mounts for other types
of posters, such as Woodsy Owl - Give a Hoot Don’t Pollute and noxious
weeds and other invasive species.
Use smaller posters, such as 14 by 12 inches and 11 by 9 inches, for

pedestrian traffic, trails, campgrounds, trailheads, visitor information boards,
or roadside rests. When properly placed, the largest of these generally have
adequate visibility and small message content to be suitable for low-speed, low-
volume roads where such messages are needed (for example, P51-17.1, No
Campfires).
THIS IS MARIJUANA
10B.4.1.9 Law Enforcement Posters (P53 Series)
Regulatory posters are not required to cite CFR authority.
GROWING IT IS ILLEGAL!
Help stop this illegal use of your lands.
Report any sign of cultivation.
All information kept confidential.
Phone:
P53-01
10B.4.1.10 Lands Posters (P54 Series)
PB Use these posters to identify national forest, national grassland, and wilderness
RO boundaries.
P OU
PN
5 ED
4 RA
TR
- YY
2
BEHIND
THIS SIGN
November 2012

10B.4.1.11 Safety Posters (P61 Series)

Use these posters to warn of health dangers associated with Forest Service
activities. Additional posters containing general safety messages are available
P61-01 through the National Safety Council or other companies who stock OSHA and
other safety posters.
10B.4.1.12 Property Posters (P64 Series)

Use these posters to identify government property.
P64-03
10B.4.1.13 Volunteer Program Posters (P65 Series)
T SERV Only one poster in this series is available. It is adhesive backed.
ES
R
IC
FO
O
R
V
LU E
NTE
p65-10
WATER SYSTEM
CLOSED
10B.4.1.14 Water System Posters (P74 Series)
Use these posters to notify visitors about problems with water systems.
Drinking water may be obtained at:
For further Information contact
P74-1
10B.4.1.15 Take Pride in America Posters (TPAS series)
Use these posters to notify visitors about Take Pride in America projects.
November 2012

10B.4.2 Site identification

Forest Service developed recreation sites and administrative sites should be
identified appropriately with site identification signs according to directions
located in chapter 7, section 7.4 and chapter 8A. This typically includes the site
name, site type (i.e., campground, trailhead), forest name, the Forest Service
shield and the USDA credit line.
Site identification information may or may not appear on the VIS. At large or
major sites where there are site identification signs, forest boundary signs, or
other identification signs, the VIS does not need to restate the site identification
information.
At minor sites, the site identification sign and the VIS may be combined into one
sign. This reduces costs and prevents rustic or small scale sites from becoming
overwhelmed or cluttered with signs. Basic information to accompany the VIS
information includes the site name, site type, forest or administrative unit name,
Forest Service shield, and USDA credit line. Refer to figure 10B-15.
Figure 10B-15—Forest identification and VIS are combined neatly for

a professional look. Gallatin National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG
Province.
The site identification information should not overwhelm the VIS. Incorporate
all the identifying information into the sign via the items attached to the bulletin
board or use the sign structure’s header and footer. Do not increase the sign size
or create a second sign just to accommodate site identification.
November 2012

10B.4.3 VIS Content

VIS content varies according to the recreation site and the predominant
activities. Provide helpful information specific to the site and the activities
visitors are most likely to participate in. Take care not to overwhelm the visitor
with too much information. Strike a careful balance considering how much one
person can retain and what information is most helpful. The following list of
topics is commonly found on VIS bulletin boards and signs.
1. Recreation activity information:

• Recreational opportunities.
• Points of interest.
• Area map with “You Are Here” label. Refer to figure 10B-16.
• Distances and average travel times for trails and roads.
• Explanation of symbol system.
• Special designation logos (National Recreation Trail, Scenic Byway, Wild

and Scenic River).
• Wilderness message.
• Facilities information, such as a snow trail grooming schedule.
• Public gathering areas.
2. Visitor registration information:

• Fees.
• Permit requirements.
3. Environmental awareness:
• Tread Lightly!—outdoor ethics, stewardship.
• Leave-No-Trace (LNT).
• Overview of the LNT message.
• Appropriate one-liners “Minimize your impact on Wilderness: Take only

pictures, Leave only footprints,” “Challenge yourself to Leave-No-Trace.”
• Illustrate correct or expected behaviors with LNT symbol sets. Refer to

figure 10B-17.
4. Regulations and restrictions:

• A complete listing of regulations and their references is available at
district offices.
• Post only the most important or likely violations at the site.
o Illustrate these with approved posters. Refer to figure 10B-18.
November 2012

5. Travel management information:

• Trail difficulty levels.
• Motor Vehicle Use Map (MVUM), which includes any motorized mixed-
use designation of an National Forest System (NFS) road for use by both
highway legal and non-highway legal vehicles.
• Non-motorized mixed-use messages. Refer to figure 10B-19.
• Fire or weather closures.
• Activity restrictions.
• Equipment requirements.
• Geographic information and/or seasonal conditions.
“You
Are
Here”
label
Figure 10B-16—Area map with “You Are Here” label.
November 2012

Figure 10B-17—Leave No Trace logo.
Figure 10B-18—Recreation poster with CFR cited.
Figure 10B-19—Non-motorized mixed use yield sign.
November 2012

6. Safety and emergency information:

• Current recreation conditions.
• Nearest telephone.
• 911 or a State’s equivalent emergency services number or other

appropriate communications.
• Forest-operated traveler information radio station.
• Inherent risks, especially for wintertime activities, such as hypothermia and

avalanche information.
• Recommended or required licenses or safety equipment.
• Patrol schedules.
• Motorist service information, such as gas stations, food, and lodging.
7. Assumptions of risk:
• YOU ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY. Travelers on
national forests and grasslands may encounter a variety of dangerous
conditions. It is your responsibility to inform yourself about these inherent
risks and take precautions.
– The use of this statement does not relieve the Forest Service of its
normal responsibility to mitigate known hazards or to warn visitors
about known hazards that are unusual, unexpected, or not readily
identifiable by the average visitor during the normal use season.
• The Forest Service can not be knowledgeable about all possible hazards.
• It is the visitors’ responsibility to assume the normal risks associated with

use of the forest, inform themselves about potential hazards, and take
appropriate actions to prevent injury or damage.
Refer to figures 10B-20 through 10B-22.
November 2012

Figure 10B-20—Digital laminate VIS. This sign identifies two agencies,

gives the site name, displays a map with the “You Are Here” label,
and lists rules, responsibilities, and safety information including local
telephone numbers. San Juan National Forest and BLM partnership,
Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
Figure 10B-21—Minor site sign with site name, visitor information, and
Forest Service shield all on one board. San Juan National Forest, Rocky
Mountain BEIG Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-22—VIS for a three-panel bulletin board includes site name,

visitor information, payment information, and Forest Service identification.
Dowdy Lake and Campground, Arapaho and Roosevelt National Forest,
Rocky Mountain BEIG Province. This same theme is repeated throughout
the recreation site, on trailheads, boat launches, and the day use site for
VIS and interpretive signage. Note: use standard fee posters.
10B.5 Sign: Face Design, Materials, Mounting, Supports, and

Installation
10B.5.1 Sign Face Design

Include the forest name and Forest Service shield on all signs. A well designed
sign catches the attention of the reader and is easily and quickly understood.
In a glance the visitor decides whether to read a sign based on the overall
appearance and perceived effort it will take to understand it. Keep messages
short and simple.
When developing text apply the 3-30-3 rule. A person should be able to skim the
bold titles on the sign and understand the key message in 3 seconds, should be
able to read the mid-sized text and grasp some details in 30 seconds, and should
be able to read the entire text and look at the graphics in 3 minutes. Refer to
chapter 10A.
Be sure that text is large enough for persons to read in an outdoor setting.
• Headers: use capital letters no less than 1-inch tall.
• Body text: use capital letters no less than 5/16-inch tall; lower case is
smaller.
November 2012

The capital letter size for VIS is dependent upon the distance from which the
message is read. Important dates should be 1/2-inch larger than the text. Refer
to table 10B-1.
Table 10B-1—Body text sizes for VIS

Distance from where Text size
viewed (ft) (in)
1 ,
2 to 4 or less s
5 to 7 or less w
8 to 12 or less 1
13 to 20 or less 2
Over 20 3
10B.5.2 Sign Dimensions

Make signs rectangular, not square. Use a 5 to 3 or 5 to 4 ratio. It is a
cost effective practice to use a standard 24- by 36-inch to 24- by 42-inch
format. Refer to figure 10B-23. Where more information is necessary, larger
proportionate signs are acceptable. Refer to figures 10B-24 and 10B-25.
Figure 10B-23—Three-panel display in a standard size format. Target

Tree Campground, San Juan National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG
Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-24—This sign’s proportions are appropriate for its setting.

Black Hills National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
Figure 10B-25—This sign’s proportions and materials are appropriate

for the mountain character on Guanella Pass, Silver Dollar Road and
Trailhead. Arapahoe and Roosevelt National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG
Province.
November 2012

10B.5.3 Sign Face Materials

Refer to chapter 10A, table 10A-1, section 10A.5 for a comparison of sign
materials.
Check with the forest printing specialist in the public affairs or public and
governmental relations office for any printing requirements when creating signs.
Certain sign types, such as vinyl sheets, require Government Printing Office
(GPO) approval or printing through a GPO-approved printer already under
contract. Refer to chapter 15 for procurement information.
10B.5.3a Digital Technology

Use digital technology, and consider including all information on a single
surface or sign face. In digital printing, choices of earthtone blending colors are
infinite, duplicates can be procured in the initial order, the digital files can be
saved for future use (always ask about the company’s policy), and the digital
files can be changed easily for updates. These products are well suited for
digital signs:
1. Digital laminate (phenolic resin).
2. Digital embedded fiberglass.
3. Vinyl sheets.
10B.5.3b Routed Signs

Use recycled plastic or fiberglass routed signs to mimic wood routed signs;
they are very durable with an extended service life, and are maintenance free.
Fiberglass can be patched if damaged. Both products are fabricated in multiple
colors from digital files.
10B.5.4 Installation
Generally, digital laminate material thicker than 1/2 inch is self-supporting and
attaches directly to the sign support using a metal “L-bracket” and nonreversible
screws. Refer to figure 10B-26.
High-pressure laminate signs also can be ordered with predrilled threaded

screw inserts that allow them to be mounted to a frame or kiosk post without a
frame system. Fiberglass embedded signs require standard framing or drilled
holes for mounting.
If the sign face is medium density overlay plywood (MDO) or Medex, order
prepunched holes larger than the specified screw size for mounting to the
backboard. Avoid tightening the mounting screws onto the setting washers to
the point of binding to allow for the expansion and contraction of the materials.
This will reduce the chance of warping the sign face. Refer to figures 10B-27
and 10B-28.
November 2012

Figure 10B-26—Metal “L-bracket.”
Figure 10B-27—Noncorrosive
metal screw and brass or stainless
steel setting washer.
Figure 10B-28—The digital

laminate sign is attached to MDO
by adhesive and metal screws.
November 2012

10B.5.5 Sign Structures

Sign structures, supports, stanchions, or bases are designed to compliment
the sign design and site character, and in accordance with the BEIG Province
and forest theme. Square or round, 6- by 6-inch or 8- by 8-inch treated timbers
serve well. Metal tubing with a rusted or patina finish is appropriate for some
settings. The following are examples of sign structures; many provide cover in
inclement weather. Refer to figures 10B-29 through 10B-34.
Figure 10B-29—This bulletin board structure is made of steel pipes,

which is appropriate in this off-highway vehicle (OHV) site. Shawnee
National Forest, Northeastern BEIG Province.
Figure 10B-30—Trailhead VIS structure built with round timbers

appropriate for its setting. Santa Fe National Forest, Southwest BEIG
Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-31—Indian Gulch Trailhead VIS made with timber that matches
the scale of the surrounding trees. Rocks match colors in the soil.
Arapahoe and Roosevelt National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
Figure 10B-32—Side view of structure at Indian Gulch Trailhead. Arapahoe

and Roosevelt National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-33—This kiosk has heavy timbers that fit well in this forested
environment; the rock anchors the structure. The kiosk is a combination
of VIS and interpretive information. Byers Creek Campground, Arapaho
and Roosevelt National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
Figure 10B-34—This VIS has information about the Bell Rock Pathway.
The structure incorporates the surrounding rock to tie it to the setting.
Coconino National Forest, Southwest BEIG Province.
November 2012

The modular panel sign system, using two, three, or more panels, is a simple
and universal design that works well and is adaptable to most VIS sites.
Complex or major recreation sites warrant two or three panel combinations while
secondary and remote sites or trailheads often will need only one panel. Refer to
figures 10B-35 through 10B-37.
Figure 10B-35—Three-panel VIS structure for a campground with

information on digital laminate. Posts have the same motif and can vary
in height. San Juan National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
Figure 10B-36—Two-panel VIS structure uses the same motif as the three-
panel structure in figure 10B-40. The center post is facing a different
direction. San Juan National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-37—This VIS structure easily can be made longer or shorter

to hold more or fewer panels. There are two VIS and one interpretive
fiberglass embedded panels all addressing wilderness values, use, and
scenic views. Maroon Bells Recreation Area, Aspen Ranger District,
White River National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
November 2012

10B.6 Trailhead VIS

The preceding information also applies to trailhead VIS. In dispersed areas, such
as trailheads, VIS is an important communication tool especially in the absence
of official personal contact. Quality trailhead signs provide essential information
about such topics as appropriate conduct and important safety concerns in a
concise and easily understood manner.
Trailhead signs orient the visitor. Major trailhead signs include the forest or
administrative unit name, Forest Service shield, USDA identification, trailhead
name, a map of the trail, and mileage to destinations and other trails. Other
important messages include LNT information, rules and regulations, and safety
information. Minor trailhead signs are condensed versions of a major trailhead
sign and may only state the trail name and miles to a destination. Refer to figures
10B-38 through 10B-40.
Figure 10B-38—This VIS displays information about trail ethics, user

safety, two maps, and contact telephone numbers. It is located along
the South Platte River corridor, a popular recreation area for urban
Denverites. South Platte Ranger District, Pike and San Isabel National
Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-39—Minor site trailhead sign. Wasatch-Cache National

Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-40—Information overload!
These signs are posted at the entrance to an OHV trail. Visitors are required to stop and try
to read all this information, which effectively blocks the access to and from the trail. There
are a variety of signs and posters tacked here and there, which is distracting. The visitor
doesn’t know what is most important and could easily miss a sign. The signs have too much
text, which discourages visitors from reading the signs, and in many cases the information is
duplicated. Required safety signs for the gate and cattle-guard are missing and yet are more
critical than most of the information posted.
Just to the right of the entrance (not shown in the photo) is a new VIS station with very little
information posted. The posters and signs shown in this picture should be consolidated to
eliminate duplicate and conflicting messages and relocated to the VIS station. Entrances to
trails should be kept clear of clutter and unnecessary signs to allow critical safety signs to be
installed and be seen.
November 2012

10B.6.1 Introduction and Orientation

The same ideas apply to trailhead VIS in that the information provided is only
useful to the reader if it can be retained. Place the trail name in a bold header
at the top of a panel. Use a simple and uncluttered map in schematic form
that includes only the major elements, such as trails, trail numbers, major
land marks, elevations, land ownership boundary lines, and water bodies. For
example, “hillshading” can give the viewer a feel for the topography without
adding visual confusion to a map. Each site map needs to include what is most
important for that site; certain sites may require complex maps. Refer to figures
10B-41 through 10B-45.
Incorporate the following in trailhead VIS:

• Use easily recognized symbols, such as dashes in a bright contrasting
color.
• Display the map scale in a mile/kilometer bar.
• Make the map large enough to be easily read from a minimum of 18

inches.
• Make the map 30 to 60 percent of the sign face or place it on a single

panel.
• Use a recognizable “You Are Here” symbol on each map.
Figure 10B-41—Planning a hike. This board shows a map of a Civil War

battlefield including trails, and lists behaviors that are allowed and not
allowed, and emergency telephone numbers. Daniel Boone National
Forest, Southeast Mountains BEIG Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-42—Non-motorized mixed use trailhead includes cross-

country skiing information. Post up-to-date seasonal posters. Remove
seasonal posters as there is probably no need for a “no campfire” poster
in winter. Black Hills National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
Figure 10B-43—This bulletin board is for a canoe/kayak run, and comes

with a warning about alligators. Juniper Creek, Ocala National Forest,
November 2012

Figure 10B-44—Wilderness VIS. Hickory Creek Wilderness trailhead VIS

in the Hearts Content scenic area. Allegheny National Forest, Northeast
BEIG Province.
Figures 10B-45—These three panels show a variety of creative trailhead

sign styles. Arapaho and Roosevelt, San Isabel, and Pike National
Forests.
November 2012

For motorized use areas, use the Motor Vehicle Use Map (MVUM) or other maps
as appropriate on VIS bulletin boards. Refer to figure 10B-46.
Figure 10B-46—This interagency OHV trailhead sign includes a map, the

expected behavior of the rider, Tread Lightly! information, an explanation
of the multiagency program, and contact telephone numbers. Pike and
San Isabel National Forest, Rocky Mountian BEIG Province.
10B.6.2 Leave No Trace (LNT)

Provide a brief overview of the Leave No Trace Principles.
Use logos and short statements, such as:
• Pack It In, Pack It Out
• Use of established camp sites
• Stay on established trail.
On wilderness trailhead signs include statements, such as:
• Minimize your impact on Wilderness
• Take only pictures—Leave only footprints
• Challenge yourself to Leave-No-Trace!
Refer to figures 10B-47 and 10B-48.
November 2012

Figure 10B-47—Leave No Trace information chosen for a particular site.
Figure 10B-48—Another way to present Leave No Trace information.
November 2012

10B.6.3 Rules and Regulations Subhead

• Note that a complete listing of regulations and their references is available
at the unit or district office.
• Display only the highest priority rules and regulations using logos and short
statements.
10B.6.4 Safety and Trip Planning

• Display appropriate messages pertaining to the climate and area. List
constants of geographic information and/or seasonal conditions that may
affect travel and safety.
• Use logos and short statements for appropriate trip planning and safety
concerns.
• Post 911 or a State’s equivalent emergency services number.
Refer to figure 10B-49.
SAFETY
Wilderness travel involves and inherent degree of risk.
Safety is your responsibility.
Bring appropriate
equipment and
Plan your route, bring a provisions.
map and compass, and
let others know your
travel plans. Be prepared
for emergencies
Stay off high ridges Purify drinking water. Even
and peaks during water that looks clean may
lightening storms. carry parasites such as Giardia.
NATIONAL WILDERNESS PRESERVATION SYSTEM
Figure 10B-49—Digitally created safety sign for a wilderness trailhead.
November 2012

10B.6.5 Special Messages

Display special messages key to resource concerns, behavioral goals, and
seasonal or current restrictions, such as horse use, emergency or special
restrictions, closures, and fire restrictions.
Where there is a need to offer a specific message, such as how to protect

food from bears, provide a space on the sign face for posting notices. Use a
seperate panel at major trailheads if necessary. Refer to figures 10B-50 through
10B-54.
Figure 10B-50—A portal sign with route-finding, safety, and what-to-

expect-along-the-drive information. Wyoming Centennial Scenic Byway;
a Forest Service and multiple organization and community effort.
Figure 10B-51—Bear aware message.
November 2012

Figure 10B-52—Rules of the trail for packers and riders.
Figure 10B-53—An interagency message about packing in only weed-seed

free forage and bedding. Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-54—A sign designed for changing information on short

notice.
10B.7 Designated Wilderness Trailhead Messages

Most of the information in section 10B.6, Trailhead VIS, applies to designated
wilderness trailhead VIS with some special considerations. To protect primitive
and wilderness characteristics and values, signs within these boundaries are
discouraged. There is no VIS in designated wilderness. Guide signs are used
sparingly to provide basic route information for visitor safety.
VIS signs are posted at entry point trailheads and are the last visitor information
point of contact with travelers before they enter the wilderness. VIS structures
should meet the BEIG theme for the area and include important messages,
such as it is the responsibility of all visitors to preserve and protect the
wilderness experience. Include the following on all designated wilderness
trailhead signs or kiosks:
• Name of the designated wilderness, its acreage, when this wilderness
was created.
• Map.
• Leave No Trace (LNT) information.
• Rules and regulations.
• Safety and trip planning.
• Special messages and wilderness interpretation.
Refer to figures 10B-55 through 10B-57.
November 2012

Figure 10B-55—Two-panel trailhead VIS. The panel to the left includes

information on this wilderness’s history, the numbers of acres, a map
with a “You Are Here” label, and Leave No Trace, safety, and regulations
information. The panel to the right displays information on a dam and the
State of Colorado’s and the Forest Service’s efforts to improve wildlife
habitat. San Juan National Forest, Rocky Mountain BEIG Province.
Figure 10B-56—Trailhead VIS about the Rawah Wilderness. Arapaho and

Roosevelt and Routt National Forests.
November 2012

Figure 10B-57—This wilderness sign from the Dixie National Forest

describes what wilderness is, lists use restrictions, and several Leave
No Trace principles.
It is not necessary to show the entire designated wilderness area on the map;
focus on the area that the majority of visitors travel from that trailhead. Use
a small inset of the entire wilderness to orient the viewer to the extent of the
wilderness.
Wilderness interpretation and education is a vital part of wilderness VIS.

Share brief statements of the 1964 Wilderness Act (P.L.88-577), such as, The
Wilderness Act of 1964 established the National Wilderness Preservation
System to “secure for the American people of present and future generations
the benefits of an enduring resource of wilderness.” Wilderness is part of our
history and legacy. It is land that is special; wild places where on can retreat
from civilization, reconnect with the Earth; and find healing, meaning, and
significance. Refer to <www.wilderness.net> for more information, instructions,
and templates for creating wilderness signs. Navigate to Tools for Managers,
Toolboxes, Signs and Posters, III. Examples, FS Sign Templates—San Dimas
Technology and Development Center.
Refer to figures 10B-58 and 10B-59.
November 2012

Figure 10B-58—This is an example of a 24- by 18-inch wilderness trailhead

sign from the wilderness.net signs and posters toolbox <http://www.
wilderness.net/index.cfm?fuse=toolboxes&sec=signsPosters>. Go to
III. Examples. The sign colors are based on the Rocky Mountain BEIG
Province.
November 2012

Figure 10B-59—VIS wilderness and recreation outside a restroom on

the Maroon Bells Recreation Area. Aspen Ranger District, White River
National Forest. The VIS in figure 10B-58 is in the same recreation area
and has the same theme in VIS style and sign structure. Rocky Mountain
BEIG Province.
10B.7.1 Graphic Identity and Continuity

The National Preservation System Logo shown in figure 10B-60, is the
multiagency logo. Use it on all wilderness VIS on the bottom of sign panels.
On smaller signs write the wilderness theme statement on either side of the
arched-portion of the logo instead of a written paragraph in the body of the
sign. Refer to <http://www.wilderness.net/index.cfm?fuse=NWPS&sec=logos>.
Figure 10B-60—The National Preservation System logo.
Chapter 10C Visitor Information Signing Fire Rating
10C.1 Introduction........................................................................................................ 1
10C.2 Smokey Bear Fire Rating Sign ....................................................................... 1
10C.3 Fire Wheel Rating Sign..................................................................................... 5

November 2012
10C.1 Introduction
Use signs and posters to inform visitors of current fire hazard and use
restrictions. Erect Smokey Bear or Fire Wheel Rating signs where the public
needs to be informed of potentially dangerous fire conditions. The typical
locations for the placement of these signs are at ranger stations, near forest
boundaries and recreation complexes, and along roads in extreme fire hazard
areas.
Remove or cover the signs when the restrictions or hazards are no longer
in effect. Refer to chapter 3D for guidelines on placing signs along roads
and highways. See chapter 10B, section 10B.4.1.8 for information on fire
management posters.
10C.2 Smokey Bear Fire Rating Sign

The color decal reproduction of Smokey and the fire danger adjectives are
available from:
• The Cooperative Fire Prevention (CFFP) Materials Catalog. Contact the
Regional Fire Coordinator or State Forester for the CFFP catalog.
• The Smokey Item Cache, Symbols COE Cache, Grand Rapids, MN 55744
www.symbols.gov or 218-327-4282.
• UNICOR (Federal Prison Industries).
Sign manufacturers can make the FIRE DANGER TODAY and PREVENT
WILDFIRES panels of the sign. Signs should be ordered as retroreflective white
on retroreflective brown mounted on HDO plywood. Manufacturers can also cut
the HDO plywood panels for the fire danger adjectives and the Smokey decal,
which is cut to the Smokey shape, and mount the adhesive-backed Smokey and
fire danger adjectives on these panels.
Figures 10C-1, 10C-2, and 10C-3 give construction and installation details for
the Smokey Bear Rating sign.
Note:
Smokey colors not
reproduced here.
PREVENT WILDFIRES
SBR
Si gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 10C-1
November 2012
4 in.
3 in.
A Color w in. HDO

reproduction plywood
4 in. of Smokey
30 in.
48 in.
Hasp
and lock
Storage area 2 in.
for extra 17 2 in. 2 in. diameter
panels bolts with nut
5 w and washer
in. 68 in.
countersunk
Grooves 2-in.
deep to receive 12 in.
4 in. masonite 58 in.
panels
18 2 in.
s in. diameter
62
bolts with nuts in.
and washers
countersunk
s in. diameter
bolts with nuts
10 in. w
3 in. in. and washers
22 in. countersunk
81 in.
12 in.
13 in. 30 in. 24 in. 14 in.
4 in. x 6 in. posts
A
Section A-A Elevation Right end elevation
Note: For single-face sign, make modifications
as required, but maintain box-frame construction.
Text layout colors are reversed for clarity. For text dimensions, see figure 10C-3.
1 in.
28 in.
5 2 in. 4 in.
36 in.
4 48 in. 27 in. 2 in.
in.
81 in.
Plan
Figure 10C-1—Smokey Bear Fire Rating sign detail.

The Fire Danger and Prevent Wildfires panels can be HDO and retroreflective, MDO routed or
dimension lumber. If other than HDO or MDO, increase width dimensions to match materials used.

Legend – Yellow-cream (#23695)
Background – Brown (#20059)
Legend – White
Background – Brown
10C-2 S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
Color Sign Color Legend size

reproduction
number/ & series
of Smokey
side Background Legend (inches)
Color SBR-2 Front Red White 6C

reproduction
of Smokey
SBR-2 Back Orange Black 6C
SBR-3 Front Yellow Black 6E
SBR-3 Back Blue White 6C
SBR-4 Front Green White 6E

Fire Rating
Assembled Smokey insert
SBR-4 Back Blank – –
Center all text on panel

Fire Rating 1234
Assembled Smokey insert qwe
asd
Colors
zxc
Panel colors are the standard highway colors given in the MUTCD for retroreflective sheeting.
12
Smokey
qw
Sign manufacturer to mount Smokey reproductions on w-inch HDO plywood cut to shape.
30 in.
as
Put reproduction on48the
in.
plywood as per requirements 32 in.
included with the reproduction. zx
4 in. 8 in. radius
R 13 in. (typical)
30 in.
48 in. Fire Rating inserts
32 in.
48 in. Hole cut for
12 in. panels
4 in. 8 in. radius
R 13 in. (typical) 2 in.
2 in.
Fire Rating inserts 8 in. - x in.

18 2 10 in. 2 in. radius
48 in.
in. Hole cut for radius
12 in. panels
2 in. 2 in.
2 in.
81 in. radius
Fire Rating sign Base
18 2 10 in. 2 in. radius 8 in. - x in.
in. radius
Fabricate these pieces out of w-inch HDO plywood. Cover face of fire rating signs and base with brown
retroreflective sheeting and place white retroreflective legends as indicated81
inin.
figure 10C-1. 2 in.
radius
Put retroreflective sheeting in the colors and with the legends as shown above on fire rating inserts.
Fire Rating sign Base
Fabricate these pieces out of w-inch HDO plywood. Cover face of fire rating signs and base with brown
retroreflective sheeting and place white retroreflective legends as indicated in figure 10C-1.
Put retroreflective sheeting in the colors and with the legends as shown above on fire rating inserts.
Figure 10C-2—Smokey Bear Fire Rating sign detail.
November 2012
6”
8”
4”
PREVENT WILDFIRES
Figure 10C-3—Smokey Bear Fire Rating Sign detail.
10C-4 S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
10C.3 Fire Wheel Rating Sign

The Fire Wheel Rating sign is a less expensive sign that may be suitable for many locations. It gives a
more visual representation of the ratings to the public.
Construction and installation plans are shown in figure 10C-4.
Notes
TODAY’S FIRE DANGER 1. Arrow is slotted with a moveable bolt to secure in each
rating segment.
HIGH
VE
D
IU
M RY
H
IG
2. Embed threaded nut in each segment for arrow bolt.
E
3. Use “hanging” version for double-sided sign with
M
H
EX
message and arrow on both sides.

TR
LOW
EME
4. It is suggested the sign board be w-inch HDO plywood

and sign face be retroreflective sheeting.
PREVENT WILDFIRES 5. Use standard highway colors given in the MUTCD.
L
Sign Traffic Post Today’s Prevent Wheel Letters in

size speed dimensions Fire Wildfires/Forest size wheel
(inches) Danger Fires radius segments
H L (mph) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches)
24 48 25 and less 4 x 4 4 3 12 w
36 60 30 to 45 4 x 4 5 4 18 1
48 72 50+ 4 x 6 6 4 24 12
(6 parallel to road)
Installation details
Use 4 in. x 4 in.

6 in.
frame for
rigidity and
stability
6 in.
Use corner
braces
4 feet 4 feet
minimum minimum
Double faced sign Single

faced sign
3 feet 3 feet
minimum minimum
Figure 10C-4—Fire Wheel Rating sign.
12.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................1
12.2 Sign Substrate......................................................................................................1
12.3 Program Area Signs Series ................................................................................2

November 2012
12.1 Introduction
Program area signs are used by specific management areas to provide
information on a long-term basis to the public related to that specific program
area. The use of program area signs shall conform to all appropriate Forest
Service Manual and Forest Service Handbook program area direction.
When program area signs are used they should be installed correctly in
accordance with standard procedures and maintained to look fresh and
professional at all times.
Program area signs approved for servicewide use are shown in section 12.3 in
numerical order for each category. Legend color, size, type, layout and spacing,
and background color should match the examples shown in section 12.3.
Dimensions for the program area signs shown in section 12.3 are the typical
and minimum dimensions for these signs.
New program area signs or those for special applications shall be submitted
to the regional office through the regional sign coordinator for approval. The
regional sign coordinator may forward these proposals to the Washington Office
for consideration of servicewide use.
Remove program area signs when no longer needed.
For short-term needs posters should be used instead of signs. Refer to chapter
10B, section 10B.4.1 for information on posters.
For interpretive signs refer to chapter 10A.
12.2 Sign Substrate

The most commonly used substrates are:
Aluminum—Minimum thickness should be 0.032 inch for signs that will be
laid flat with adequate support for the sign surface. Signs mounted where
their surface is not adequately supported, such as on posts and trees
should have a minimum thickness of 0.063 inch to help prevent damage and
bending at the sign edges. The typical thickness for 4 ½ x 5 inch signs is
0.032 inch and for 10 x 7 inch signs it is 0.04 inch.
Corrugated plastic (also known by the brand names coroplast, corex,
corflute and plasticor)—Minimum thickness should be 0.157 inch (4 mm).
These signs may bow or bend if not laid flat on a surface that adequately
supports their surface area. This substrate is more suited for temporary
signs.
Polyethylene or polycarbonate flexible plastic—Minimum thickness
should be 0.023 inch. Typical thickness is 0.055 inch or greater. These signs
may bow or bend if not laid flat on a surface that adequately supports their
surface area. This substrate typically does not last as long as aluminum.
Aluminum is the recommended substrate for long-term mounting on posts
where the sign will not be laid flat with support for the entire sign surface.
Silk screening the message on the substrate is the recommended method to
maximize the life of the sign. When the message is applied using an adhesive
backed film the addition of a protective overlay film is recommended. Refer to
chapter 14, section 14.3.5.
November 2012
Chapter 12 Program Area Signs NOTICE

THE AREA BEHIND THIS SIGN IS
12.3 Program Area Signs Series
CLOSED TO
ALL GRAZING
Program area signs that are approved for Forest Service use are grouped by
management series and are shown as follows:
• Range—Series 22 DO NOT TRESPASS
Program area signs
should be installed
correctly and
NOTICE
NOTICE
maintained to look
fresh and professional CLOSED TO CLOSED TO

at all times.
ALL GRAZING SHEEP GRAZING
DO NOT TRESPASS DO NOT TRESPASS
Black on yellow (22-1) 10” x 7” Black on yellow (22-2) 10” x 7”
NOTICE
NOTICE
CLOSED TO TRANSECT LOCATION MARKER
SHEEP GRAZING
THIS MARKS THE
BOUNDARY BETWEEN
RANGE CONDITION CLUSTER NO.
BEARING TO TRANSECT NO.
DO NOT TRESPASS DISTANCE TO TRANSECT NO.

RANGE ALLOTMENTS BY DATE
CLOSE THE
ALLOTMENT ALLOTMENT US DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
FOREST SERVICE
GATE
NOTICE
Black on yellow (22-4) 10” x 7” Black on yellow (22-7) 5” x 4 2“
THIS USE OF NATIONAL FOREST LAND

IS AUTHORIZED BY FOREST SERVICE-
CLOSE THE
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF
AGRICULTURE PERMIT LEAVE GATE
GATE OPEN
Black on yellow (22-9) 10” x 7” Black on yellow (22-9B) 10” x 7”
12-2
LEAVE GATE
OPEN
S i gn and P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
DO NOT LIVESTOCK - WILDLIFE
OPEN FENCE FORAGE PLOT
PLEASE
USE GATE
PLEASE DO NOT DISTURB

WATER
NOT TESTED
• Recreation—Series 23
BOIL FOR 5 MINUTES
Developed Recreation Site Boundary Sign (23-2)
DevelopedBEFORE USE
recreation site boundary signs may be used where there is a need
to inform visitors of the boundary of a developed recreation site. Developed
recreation site boundary signs may be used to mark the entire boundary or
segment of the boundary, such as where the boundary is not clearly defined
by a constructed or natural feature. Boundary signs should inform the public
without detracting from the natural environment or other administrative signs. If
multiple signs are needed, they should be intervisible. Do not locate boundary
signs within sight of portal signs or recreation site identification signs. Install
developed recreation site boundary signs approximately 4 feet high unless snow
depth necessitates higher placement. Face signs away from the developed
recreation site, and ensure that they are clearly visible. Mount signs on wood
posts or on appropriate trees.
BOUNDARY
DEVELOPED
RECREATION SITE
BOUNDARY
Black on yellow (23-2) 10” x 7”
NATIONAL
RECREATION AREA
Si gn and
BOUNDARY
P os t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 12-3
November 2012
Chapter 12
BOUNDARY
Program Area Signs
DEVELOPED
NOTICE
RECREATION SITE
Discrimination because of race, color, sex,

religion or national origin is not permitted
BOUNDARY
in any aspect of the operation of this
Federal Outdoor Recreation Facility.
NATIONAL
Address complaints of violations to:
Chief, Forest Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture
Washington, D.C. 20250
RECREATION AREA
Blue on light yellow (23-4) 14” x 11”
BOUNDARY
EXPERIMENTAL
AREA
• Wildlife—Series 26
Tan on reddish brown (26-3) 5

” x 42”
FOREST DO NOT REMOVE
RESEARCH SURVEY STAKES
November 2012
Chapter 12 EXPERIMENTAL
Program Area Signs
VIOLATORS SUBJECT TO PROSECUTION
UNDER REGULATIONS OF SECRETARY
AREA OF AGRICULTURE
PLEASE DO NOT DISTURB!

• Land Use—Series 27
ADMINISTRATIVE WITHDRAWN FROM

NOTICE
SITE
THIS THIS
LAND HAS BEEN THE
SELECTED
MINERAL LOCATION
THIS AREA HAS BEEN WITHDRAWN FROM
MARKS LOCATION AND ENTRY UNDER THE U.S. MINING
FOR ADMINISTRATIVE USE OF LAWS, BY PUBLIC LAND ORDER. COPIES OF
BOUNDARY BETWEEN
THE FOREST SERVICE
THE ORDER DESCRIBING THE LAND MAY BE
RANGE ALLOTMENTS EXAMINED AT THE OFFICE OF THE FOREST

SUPERVISOR, THE REGIONAL FORESTER, OR
THE LOCAL U.S. LAND OFFICE.
ALLOTMENT ALLOTMENT
Violations Punishable by Fine and/or Imprisonment
Black on yellow (27-1) 10” x 7” Black on yellow creme (27-4) 10” x 7”
NOTICE PRIMITIVE AREA

CLOSED TO MOTOR
VEHICLES AND
THIS USE OF NATIONAL FOREST LAND MOTORIZED EQUIPMENT
IS AUTHORIZED BY FOREST SERVICE- THE AREA BACK OF THIS SIGN IS CLASSIFIED
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF UNDER REGULATIONS OF THE SECRETARY OF

AGRICULTURE TO PRESERVE ITS PRIMITIVE
AGRICULTURE PERMIT ENVIRONMENT. (36C.F.R.-293.17)
VIOLATIONS PUNISHABLE BY LAW.
Black on yellow (27-5) 10” x 7” Black on grey (27-6) 7” x 10”
Violations Punishable by Fine and/or Imprisonment
Black on grey (27-6A) 10” x 7”
PRIMITIVE AREA
CLOSED TO MOTOR
VEHICLES AND
MOTORIZED EQUIPMENT
THE AREA BACK OF THIS SIGN IS CLASSIFIED
UNDER REGULATIONS OF THE SECRETARY OF Reddish brown on light grey (27-7)
11” x 14”
AGRICULTURE TO PRESERVE ITS PRIMITIVE
ENVIRONMENT. (36C.F.R.-293.17)
VIOLATIONS PUNISHABLE BY LAW.
November 2012
ATTENTION
The area behind this sign is classified under
Secretary of Agriculture Regulation 36 CFR
294.1 to protect its special features.
A map and description of the classification
are on file in the office of the Forest
Supervisor.
Black on yellow creme (27-9) 14” x 11”
Black on yellow (27-10) 12”x18”
NOTICE
Discharging a firearm or any other
implement capable of taking
human life, causing injury, or
damaging property is prohibited
behind this sign.
Shooting Notice Sign (27-11)
Shooting notice signs may be used to mark the limits of areas where the
discharging of a firearm or any other implement capable of taking a human life,
causing injury, or damaging property is prohibited. When used, shooting notice
signs shall be placed 150 yards in advance of a residence, building, campsite,
developed recreation site, or occupied area. If multiple shooting notice signs are
needed, they should be intervisible. Install shooting notice signs approximately
4 feet high unless snow depth necessitates higher placement. Face signs away
from the residence, building, campsite, developed recreation site, or occupied
area, and ensure they are clearly visible. Mount signs on wood posts or on
appropriate trees.
BOUNDARY
DEVELOPED
November 2012
Chapter 12 Program Area Signs RECREATION SITE
• Research—Series 40
FOREST BOUNDARY
RESEARCH
EXPERIMENTAL
CAUTION
NATIONAL
RECREATION
FORESTRY STUDYAREA
AREA
AREA PLEASE DO NOT DISTURB TREES, SHRUBS AND
PLEASE DO NOT DISTURB! OTHER VEGETATION: ALSO STAKES, MARKERS
AND OTHER EQUIPMENT. THEY ARE PART OF AN
IMPORTANT FORESTRY EXPERIMENT. THANK YOU!
ADMINISTRATIVE BOUNDARY
SITE
CAUTION
THIS LAND HAS BEEN SELECTED
BOUNDARY
EXPERIMENTAL
FOR ADMINISTRATIVE
FORESTRY STUDY
THE FOREST SERVICE
USE OF
AREA RESEARCH
AREA
NATURAL AREA
PLEASE DO NOT DISTURB TREES, SHRUBS AND
OTHER VEGETATION: ALSO STAKES, MARKERS
AND OTHER EQUIPMENT. THEY ARE PART OF AN
IMPORTANT FORESTRY EXPERIMENT. THANK YOU!
BOUNDARY
RESEARCH
Fire – Series 51
NATURAL AREA
NOTICE
DO NOT CLIMB
Observation point is only for
detection of forest fires
August 2013
• Boundary—Series 54
LAND SURVEY
PROPERTY
MONUMENT BOUNDARY
PLEASE DO
NOT DISTURB
THIS MONUMENT WAS LOCATED
AS PART OF AN OFFICIAL LAND
SURVEY. IT HELP’S DEFINE LAND
OWNERSHIP LINES. LAND BEHIND THIS SIGN
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
CONTACT THE LANDOWNERS OR
THE REGISTERED LAND SURVEY
OR WHERE STATE REGISTRATION
APPEARS ON THE MONUMENT.
Black on yellow (54-2) 7” x 10” Black on yellow (54-2A) 22” x 15”
LAND SURVEY
PROPERTY
MONUMENT BOUNDARY
PLEASE DO
NOT DISTURB
THIS MONUMENT WAS LOCATED
AS PART OF AN OFFICIAL LAND
SURVEY. IT HELP’S DEFINE LAND
OWNERSHIP LINES. LAND BEHIND THIS SIGN
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
CONTACT THE LANDOWNERS OR
THE REGISTERED LAND SURVEY
OR WHERE STATE REGISTRATION
APPEARS ON THE MONUMENT.
PROPERTY OF
THE UNITED STATES
November 2012
ALL PERSONS ARE PROHIBITED
Chapter 12 Program Area Signs UNDER PENALTY OF THE LAW
FROM COMMITTING TRESPASS
REWARD: FOR INFORMATION LEADING TO ARREST AND
CONVICTION OF ANY PERSON SO CHARGED PARTICULARS
AVAILABLE FROM THE FOREST SUPERVISOR
Property—Series 64
PROPERTY OF PROPERTY OF
THE UNITED STATES THE UNITED STATES
ALL PERSONS ARE PROHIBITED ALL PERSONS ARE PROHIBITED
UNDER PENALTY OF THE LAW UNDER PENALTY OF THE LAW FROM
FROM COMMITTING TRESPASS COMMITTING DAMAGE OR THEFT
CONVICTION OF ANY PERSON SO CHARGED PARTICULARS REWARD: FOR INFORMATION LEADING TO ARREST AND
AVAILABLE FROM THE FOREST SUPERVISOR CONVICTION OF ANY PERSON SO CHARGED PARTICULARS
Black on yellow (64-1) 10” x 7” Black on yellow (64-1A) 10” x 7”

PROPERTY OF
THE UNITED STATES
DO NOT REMOVE
ALL PERSONS ARE PROHIBITED
UNDER PENALTY OF THE LAW FROM PROPERTY OF
SURVEY STAKES
COMMITTING DAMAGE OR THEFT
THE UNITED STATES
PROPERTY OF
VIOLATORS SUBJECT TO PROSECUTION UNAUTHORIZED REMOVAL OF THIS
UNDER REGULATIONS OF SECRETARY WOOD PROHIBITED UNDER PENALTY
THE UNITED STATES
OF AGRICULTURE OF THE LAW
UNAUTHORIZED REMOVAL OF THIS AVAILABLE FROM THE FOREST SUPERVISOR
WOOD PROHIBITED UNDER PENALTY

OF THE LAW
WITHDRAWN FROM PROPERTY OF
MINERAL LOCATION THE UNITED STATES

PROPERTY OF
THIS AREA HAS BEEN WITHDRAWN FROM
LOCATION AND ENTRY UNDER THE U.S. MINING
LAWS, BY PUBLIC LAND ORDER. COPIES OF
UNAUTHORIZED REMOVAL OF THIS
THE UNITED STATES
THE ORDER DESCRIBING THE LAND MAY BE
EXAMINED AT THE OFFICE OF THE FOREST
SUPERVISOR, THE REGIONAL FORESTER, OR
OF THE LAW
THE LOCAL U.S. LAND OFFICE.
UNAUTHORIZED REMOVAL OF THIS
OF THE LAW
Black on yellow (64-3A) 10” x 7”
13.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 1
13.1.1 Colors..................................................................................................... 1
13.2 Safety Signs ........................................................................................................ 2
13.2.1 Sign Shapes .......................................................................................... 3
13.2.2 Wording ................................................................................................. 3
13.2.3 Materials ................................................................................................ 3
13.2.4 Sign Placement and Mounting ............................................................ 3
13.3 Accident Prevention Tags.................................................................................. 4
13.3.1 Wording.................................................................................................. 4
13.3.2 Tag Categories...................................................................................... 5
13.4 Hazardous Materials Signs ............................................................................... 6
13.4.1 Hazardous Material Storage Building ................................................ 6
13.4.2 Hazardous Materials Containers ........................................................ 7
13.4.3 Radioactive Material Signing .............................................................. 7
13.5 Biological Hazard Signing ................................................................................. 8
13.6 Explosives Signs ................................................................................................ 8
13.7 Work Area Signing.............................................................................................. 9
13.7.1 Shops .................................................................................................... 9
13.7.2 Gasoline and Automobile Service Stations ....................................... 9
13.7.3 Lookouts ............................................................................................... 9
13.7.4 Laboratories......................................................................................... 10
13.7.5 Buildings and Administrative Sites .................................................. 10
13.7.6 Rappel Towers and Communication Towers................................... 10
13.7.7 Piping Systems.................................................................................... 10

November 2012
13.1 Introduction
Accident prevention and safety signs, tags, decals, and banners are
designed to help prevent accidents, to restrict access to dangerous
areas, and to increase awareness of safe practices in places, such as
offices, worksites, shops, warehouses, lookouts, and storage facilities.
Signs, tags, decals, and banners draw attention to safety equipment
and define specific hazards of a nature such that failure to designate
Accident prevention them may lead to accidental injury to workers or the public, or both, or to
property damage.
and safety signs are
designed to help
These signs, tags, decals, and banners must conform to Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) specifications (29 CFR
prevent accidents. 1910.145) and the FSH 6709.11, Health and Safety Code Handbook.
While primarily designed for use at offices and work centers, these
signs, tags, decals, and banners may be adapted to specific projects.
Employees shall be trained in the identification of accident prevention
signs and tags.
Several commercial sources publish catalogs with various signs, tags,

decals, and banners that comply with OSHA requirements. Contact the
Safety and Occupational Health or OSHA coordinator on your unit for
assistance. The unit sign coordinator shall approve all signing.
13.1.1 Colors
Red. Use red as the basic color to identify:
a. Fire protection equipment and apparatus, including fire alarm

stations, hydrants, standpipe valves, fire extinguishers or boards
on which they are mounted, hose boxes, pumps, firetool and
ladder markings, buckets, pails, and water barrels.
b. Safety cans and other portable containers of flammable liquids.

Use additional visible identification in yellow, such as a yellow
band around the can or the name of the contents clearly painted
or stenciled on the can in yellow.
c. Emergency stop bars, stop buttons, and electrical stop switches.
Yellow. Use yellow as the basic color to designate caution and for
marking physical hazards. Parallel diagonal bars of yellow and black
have strong attention-getting values. Examples include:
a. Physical hazards, such as striking against, stumbling, falling,

tripping, slipping, and caught between.
b. Edges of unguarded platforms, wells, open pits, and aisle

markings around hazards.
c. Projections, protruding parts, low beams and pipes, low or

impaired clearances, and coverings or guards for guy wires.
November 2012

Signing
d. Conveyor parts or other fixtures suspended at hazardous levels
from the ceiling or walls and extending into normal operating
areas.
e. Elevation changes, such as stairway approaches, top and

bottom steps, risers on nonstandard steps, raised doorsills, and
curbings.
f. Pillars, posts, columns, and aisle obstructions that may be

hazards if located in or near passageways.
g. Frames of elevator doors and gates; lips of horizontally closing

doors.
h. Handrails and guardrails in storage areas.
13.2 Safety Signs

There are several categories of safety signs, each of which is designed
for a specific purpose. Select signs based on OSHA requirements for
each work area. Choose colors from the opaque glossy samples as
specified in OSHA 1910.145.
These do not include safety signs designed for roads, recreation sites,
trails, railroads, and marine regulations, nor do they include safety signs
applied to work area bulletin boards or safety and education posters.
DANGER Danger signs. DANGER denotes a hazardous situation with a high
AUTHORIZED probability of death or severe injury. Danger signs should not be
PERSONNEL considered for property damage accidents unless personal injury is
ONLY
possible. Danger signs indicate immediate danger and that special
precautions are necessary.
WA R N I N G
Warning signs. WARNING denotes a hazardous situation with some
LOOK OUT probability of death or serious injury. Warning signs should not be
FOR FORK LIFTS considered for property damage accidents unless personal injury is
possible.
Caution signs. CAUTION denotes a hazardous situation that may

result in minor or moderate injury. Caution should not be used where
there is a possibility of death or serious injury. Caution signs should not
be considered for property damage accidents unless personal injury is
possible.
Notice signs. NOTICE is used to state company policy directly or

indirectly regarding personnel safety or property protection. Notice signs
should not be associated directly with a hazard or hazardous situation
and must not be used in place of danger, warning, or caution signs.
General safety signs. General safety signs (SAFETY FIRST, BE

CAREFUL, THINK) should provide general instructions on safe work
practices, provide reminders of proper safety procedures, or mark the
location of safety equipment.
November 2012
13.2.1 Sign Shapes
Most accident prevention and safety signs are rectangular. Standard

sizes are 10 inches by 7 inches, 14 inches by 10 inches, and 20 inches
by 14 inches.
All signs shall have rounded or blunt corners and be free from sharp
edges, burrs, splinters, or other sharp projections.
13.2.2 Wording
Messages on accident prevention and safety signs should be concise

and easy to read. They should contain enough information to be
understood easily. The wording should make a positive rather than
negative suggestion and should be factually accurate.
Various commercial sources offer standard messages that cover

most situations. Messages may also be custom designed to meet
individual needs. Contact the Safety and Occupational Health or OSHA
coordinator for assistance in selecting the required message.
13.2.3 Materials
Materials for signs may vary. Options include plastic; fiberglass; high-
density overlay plywood with reflective or non-retroreflective sheeting;
aluminum substrate with reflective or non-retroreflective sheeting; and
ABS thermoplastic with silk-screened symbol, copy, and border. Posters
of similar design may be used where permanent signs are not needed.
13.2.4 Sign Placement and Mounting
Post signs conspicuously. Avoid cluttering signs in one location or where

objects may obscure them. Mount signs at the appropriate viewing
height. Place the ends or heads of bolts or other fastening devices in
such a way that they do not constitute a hazard.
November 2012

Signing
13.3 Accident Prevention Tags
Accident prevention tags identify hazardous conditions and provide

a message to employees with respect to hazardous conditions
according to OSHA 1910.145. A “tag” means a device usually made
of card, paper, pasteboard, plastic, or other material used to identify a
hazardous condition.
Use tags to prevent accidental injury or illness to employees who are

exposed to hazardous or potentially hazardous conditions, equipment
or operations which are out of the ordinary, unexpected, or not readily
apparent. Tags shall be used until such time as the identified hazard
is eliminated or the hazardous operation is completed. Tags need not
be used where signs, guards or other positive means of protection are
being used. Affix tags as close as safely possible to their respective
hazards by a positive means, such as string, wire, or adhesive that
prevents their loss or unintentional removal.
Do not use tags for construction, maritime, or agriculture facilities or

activities.
All employees shall be informed as to the meaning of the various

tags used throughout the workplace and what special precautions are
necessary.
13.3.1 Wording
Tags shall contain a signal word and a major message. The signal word
and the major message shall be understandable to all employees who
may be exposed to the identified hazard.
The signal word shall be either “Danger,” “Caution,” or “Biological

Hazard,” “BIOHAZARD,” or the biological hazard symbol. The signal
word shall be readable at a minimum distance of 5 feet or such greater
distance as warranted by the hazard.
The major message shall indicate the specific hazardous condition or

the instruction to be communicated to the employee. The tag’s major
message shall be presented in either pictographs, written text, or both.
November 2012
13.3.2 Tag Categories
Danger tags. Danger tags shall be used in major hazard situations

where an immediate hazard presents a threat of death or serious injury
to employees. Danger tags shall be used only in these situations.
Warning tags. Warning tags may be used to represent a hazard level

between “Caution” and “Danger,” instead of the required “Caution” tag,
provided that they have a signal word of “Warning,” and an appropriate
major message.
Caution tags. Caution tags shall be used in minor hazard situations

where a nonimmediate or potential hazard or unsafe practice presents a
lesser threat of employee injury. Caution tags shall be used only in these
situations.
Biological hazard tags. Biological hazard tags shall be used to identify

the actual or potential presence of a biological hazard and to identify
BIOHAZARD
equipment, containers, rooms, experimental animals, or combinations
thereof, containing or contaminated with hazardous biological agents.
HAZARD IDENTITY
Signed
Date
Other tags may be used in other situations provided that they do not
detract from the impact or visibility of the signal word and major message
of any required tag.
November 2012

Signing
13.4 Hazardous Materials Signs
Identification and warning signs must be posted on rooms, buildings,
and fences in permanent and temporary facilities that are used to store
hazardous materials including:
• Pesticides.
• Antifreeze.
• Paints.
• Bituminous materials.
Flammable materials including:
• Gasoline.
• Diesel fuel.
• Motor oil.
Vehicles used to transport hazardous materials must meet labeling and

placarding requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation and
FSH 2109.11 and FSM 2150.
The lower portion of the signs shown in section 13.2 may be used to
relate safety considerations for hazardous material storage.
13.4.1 Hazardous Material Storage Building
A 15- by 15-inch National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Hazard

Classification Guide placard (figure 13-1), numbered for the highest risk
or most hazardous material for each hazard category, shall be placed
on the outside front of the hazardous material storage building. Similar,
smaller numbered labels or decals should be placed in each separate
storage area within the building. The wording and numbering on the
signs should comply with NFPAs standard system for identifying the fire
hazards of materials (NFPA No. 704-1975). Refer to FSH 2109.12 and
FSH 6709.11 for information relating to the NFPA standard system and
labeling requirements for packages to be transported.
November 2012
Health hazard Health hazard
3
4 Deadly 4 Below 73°F
3 Extreme danger 3 Below 100°F
2 Hazardous 2 Above 100°F
1 Slightly hazardous 1 Above 100°F
4 2
0 Normal material not exceeding 200°F
0 Will not burn
Specific hazard Reactivity

ACID Acid 4 May detonate
ALK Alkali 3 Shock and heat may
COR Corrosive detonate
OXY Oxidizer 2 Violent chemical change
P Polymerization 1 Unstable if heated
Radioactive 0 Stable
W Use no water
Figure 13-1—NFPA hazard classification guide.
13.4.2 Hazardous Materials Containers
Label each pesticide container with the names of the active ingredients
and appropriate hazard warnings that clearly describe the primary health
and physical hazard(s) of the material. List the name and address of
the manufacturer or other responsible party. In a location where they
can be easily read, post Material Safety Data Sheets that include the
manufacturer’s antidotes for the hazardous materials.
13.4.3 Radioactive Material Signing
Place signs according to OSHA regulations (29 CFR 1910.1096). Use

warning signs to identify storage areas for radioactive equipment, such
as nuclear gauges. Warning signs are essential because individuals
might otherwise be unaware of the presence of a radiation field. Post
rooms or areas where radioactive material is stored with a sign reading
CAUTION—RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL. Radioactive material signs shall
use the conventional radioactive caution colors of magenta or purple
and yellow. The symbol shown in figure 13- 2 is the conventional three-
bladed design. Radioactive material signs are available from commercial
sources.
Figure 13-2—Conventional radiation symbol.
November 2012

Signing
In addition to the signs listed in this chapter, provide any additional
information that may aid in minimizing exposures to radiation or
radioactive materials.
13.5 Biological Hazard Signing

The biological hazard warning symbol shown in figure 13-3 shall be
used to signify the actual or potential presence of a biohazard and to
identify equipment, containers, rooms, materials, experimental animals,
or combinations thereof, which contain, or are contaminated with, viable
hazardous agents. “Biological hazard,” or “biohazard,” includes only
those infectious agents presenting a risk or potential risk to the well-being
of man.
Figure 13-3—Biological hazard symbol.
13.6 Explosives Signs

Post red-on-white warning signs at sites where explosives are stored.
If storing explosives temporarily for a small job or if storing fireline
explosives in the field, post the explosives with red-on-white warning
signs reading DANGER EXPLOSIVES in letters at least 4 inches high.
Refer to figure 13-4. Post permanent storage sites (magazines) with
signs reading EXPLOSIVES—KEEP OFF.
D A NG E R E X P L OS IV E S
EXPL O S IV E S KE E P OF F
Figure 13-4—Explosives signs.
Do not erect signs on magazines in areas where bullets fired at the

signs could strike the magazines. See “Guide for Using, Storing, and
Transporting Explosives and Blasting Materials,”Missoula Technology
and Development Center, current version, for information on signing.
November 2012
See the MUTCD, chapter 6F for information on blasting area signing.
13.7 Work Area Signing
13.7.1 Shops
• Post instructions for power tool and machinery operation at a

location where they are readily available to the operator.
• Post OUT OF ORDER warning signs when tools or equipment

are not operating, showing when, why, and whom to contact until
repairs are completed.
• Incidental storage areas for flammables and combustibles in

shop areas must be labeled FLAMMABLE-KEEP FIRE AWAY.
• Post DANGER—NO SMOKING signs inside and outside

buildings and at locations where flammables are stored, and in
rooms where spray guns are operated.
13.7.2 Gasoline and Automobile Service Stations
• Post NO SMOKING signs outside gasoline stations.
• Post signs that prohibit starting engines while refueling and

smoking within 50 feet of the dispensing station.
13.7.3 Lookouts
• Post occupancy load limits at lookout structures.
• Post instructions for telephone and radio use during electrical

storms in exposed structures.
• Post at least one scaled evacuation plan that shows escape

routes and other information as required in the Health and Safety
Code, FSH 6709.11.
• Where necessary, use directional arrows in conjunction with exit

signs to point the way to the exit.
• Post instructions for proper safety measures when lightning

hazard is imminent.
• When a liquefied petroleum gas system or equipment is

used, document the servicing and post the documentation of
certification of all tests, adjustments, repairs, or alterations near
the appliance in plain view of users as required in the Health and
Safety Code, FSH 6709.11, section 39.33c-7.
November 2012

Signing
13.7.4 Laboratories
• Near each phone in laboratory work areas post the telephone numbers
for emergency assistance and the names and numbers of those trained
in first aid.
• Mark high-voltage equipment with warning signs indicating the

approximate voltage.
• Post proper warnings near equipment that emits nonionizing radiation,

such as atomic absorption spectrophotometers, ultraviolet lamps, and
lasers.
13.7.5 Buildings and Administrative Sites
• Post at least one scaled evacuation plan that shows escape routes
and other information as required in the Health and Safety Code, FSH
6709.11.
• Where necessary, use directional arrows in conjunction with exit signs to

point the way to the building exit.
13.7.6 Rappel Towers and Communication Towers
• Post Danger sign for authorized personnel use only.
• Post instructions for proper safety measures when lightning hazard is

imminent, such as the sign shown in figure 13.6.
WARNING
LIGHTNING
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD
This tower is never to be used during
any storm event or potential threat of a storm.
Immediately evacuate if:

Storm clouds are visible within 10 mile radius
Thunder is heard
Lightning is seen
Remain evacuated 45 minutes after:

Storm clouds are more than 10 miles away
Last thunder is heard
Last lightning is seen
Figure 13-6—Warning sign for rappel tower.
13.7.7 Piping Systems
• Use proper pipe identification to inform employees of potential hazards in

accordance with the latest edition of ANSI A13.1-1981.
14.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 1
14.2 Applicable Documents and References ......................................................... 1
14.2.1 U.S. Government Documents ............................................................. 1
14.2.2 Nongovernment Publications ............................................................ 2
14.3 Retroreflective Signs ........................................................................................ 2
14.3.1 Description ........................................................................................... 2
14.3.2 Substrate .............................................................................................. 2
14.3.3 Sheeting ............................................................................................... 3
14.3.4 EC Film ................................................................................................ 4
14.3.5 Protective Overlay Film ...................................................................... 4
14.3.6 Edge Film ............................................................................................. 4
14.3.7 Fonts ..................................................................................................... 4
14.3.8 Paint ...................................................................................................... 4
14.3.9 Silk-Screen Inks ................................................................................... 5
14.3.10 Manufacturing Requirements ........................................................... 5
14.3.10a Sign Panel Preparation ........................................................ 5
14.3.10b Beveling ................................................................................. 5
14.3.10c Corner Radius ....................................................................... 5
14.3.10d Drilling ................................................................................... 5
14.3.10e Preliminary Edge Finishing (HDO) ...................................... 5
14.3.10f Sheeting, Legend, Border, and Symbol Application ......... 5
14.3.10g Silk-Screening........................................................................ 7
14.3.10h Final Trimming and Edge Finishing ................................... 7
14.4 Routed Signs ..................................................................................................... 7
14.4.1 Description ........................................................................................... 7
14.4.2 Substrate .............................................................................................. 7

14.4.3 Adhesive ............................................................................................... 9
14.4.4 Hardware .............................................................................................. 9
14.4.5 Primer, Paint, and Stain....................................................................... 9
14.4.6a Medium-Density Overlay (MDO) Plywood .......................... 10
14.4.6b Lumber .................................................................................. 11
14.5 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Signs .................................................. 12
14.5.1 Design Requirements ....................................................................... 12
14.5.2 Materials ............................................................................................. 12
14.5.3a Single-Faced Signs Construction ....................................... 14
14.5.3 b Double-Faced Signs Frame Construction......................... 14
14.5.3c Solid Sign Construction ....................................................... 16
14.5.4 Sign Message .................................................................................... 16
14.5.5 Maintenance ....................................................................................... 16
14.6 Flexible Banner Signs...................................................................................... 16
14.7 Legend, Layout, and Tolerances—All Signs ................................................ 16
14.7 .1 Routing .............................................................................................. 17
14.8 Finishing Operations ...................................................................................... 17
14.9 Maker’s Mark ................................................................................................... 18
14.10 Materials Certification.................................................................................... 18
14.11 Packaging and Shipping .............................................................................. 19
14.11.1 Packaging ......................................................................................... 19
14.11.2 Shipping ........................................................................................... 19
14.11.3 Receiving Inspection ...................................................................... 19
14.12 Method of Measurement ............................................................................... 19
14.13 Basis of Payment .......................................................................................... 19

November 2012
14.1 Introduction
These specifications apply to all Forest Service sign manufacturing, whether
by Federal or State prison industries, commercial sign shops, or force account
operations.
14.2 Applicable Documents and References

Unless otherwise specified, the following applicable documents and references
contained in these documents are those in effect on the date of the sign
requisition, invitation to bid, or request for proposal.
14.2.1 U.S. Government Documents

USDA Forest Service
• Engineering Management series, EM-7100-15 “Sign and Poster Guidelines

for the Forest Service.”
U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration (FHWA)
• “FP-03—Standard Specification for Construction of Roads and Bridges on

Federal Highway Projects” (latest edition), Section 718 Traffic Signing and
Marking Material, and Section 633 Permanent Traffic Control, ISBN No.
0-16-051430-4. FP-03 is available from the Superintendent of Documents,
U.S. Government Printing Office, www.bookstore.gpo.gov or phone (866)
512-1800.
• MUTCD—“Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and

Highways” (latest edition). The MUTCD is available from the FHWA at
http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/and by sale from organizations, such as the
American Traffic Safety Services Association (ATSSA). 1-800-272-8772 or
http://www.atssa.com
• “Standard Highway Signs,” Stock No. 950-044-00000-4 or latest edition.
Federal Standards and Specifications
• MMM-A-181D—Adhesives, Phenol, Resorcinol, or Melamine Base (latest

edition).
• TT-P-19D(1)—Paint, Latex (Acrylic Emulsion, Exterior) superseded by.
• A-A-3183—Paint, Latex, Exterior, (For Wood and Masonry), (latest edition).
• A-A-2336—Primer Coating (Alkyd, Exterior Wood, White and Tints), (latest

edition).
• FED-STD-595—Colors Volume 1 (latest edition)

Color Numbers (all).
Color Number 20059 Brown Stain.
Color Number 36357 Gray Stain.
November 2012

• FED-STD 595B—Color Chips—Fan Deck, Stock Number 7690-01-162-
2210.
The above documents and Federal color chips are available from the General
Services Administration, Federal Supply Service FSS Acquisition Management
Center, Environmental Programs and Engineering Policy Division (FCOE),
Washington, DC 20406.
14.2.2 Nongovernment Publications

APA The Engineered Wood Association
• PS1-95—“Construction and Industrial Plywood” available from, APA U.S.

Headquarters and International Marketing Division, 7011 South 19th Street,
P.O. Box 11700, Tacoma, WA 98411-0700.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
• D4956—“Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic

Control,” (latest edition). This specification covers various types of
retroreflective sheeting. Refer to the section on sheeting in this chapter.
• B209 “Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate,” (latest

edition), 5052-H38 Aluminum Plate, 6061-T6 Aluminum Plate
Copies of these specifications are available for purchase from ASTM, 100 Barr
Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.
14.3 Retroreflective Signs
14.3.1 Description
All materials, labor, tools, equipment, and supplies used to manufacture
retroreflective signs as well as their packaging and shipment to the designated
Workmanship shall be destination shall comply with this specification, drawings, and other specifics of
the requisition. Workmanship shall be high quality with no visible defects in the
high quality with no finished product.
visible defects in the

14.3.2 Substrate
finished product. Dimensions for sign panels shall be as shown on the detail drawings, with a
tolerance of ±4 inch.
Aluminum—The aluminum substrate shall be alloy 5052-H38 or 6061-T6 from

flat sheet stock conforming to the requirements of ASTM B209 and FP-03
section 718.05. Clean, degrease, and properly prepare the panels according to
methods recommended by the sheeting manufacturer. Conversion coatings will
conform to ASTM B-921 or ASTM B-449.
Minimum thickness shall be 0.08 inch for panels up to 30 inches in any

dimension and 0.125 inch for panels 30 inches and larger in any dimension. It is
not required to paint the back side of the sign.
November 2012

Aluminum panels should not come in direct contact with wood posts treated
with alkaline copper quaternary (ACQ) preservatives. Allow ¼-inch minimum
spacing between treated wood and aluminum sign panels or coat the back of
the sign that will be in contact with the post.
Corrugated Plastic (also known by the brand names Coroplast, Corex,

Corflute, and Plasticor)—An extruded polypropylene plastic sheet with fluted
construction or corrugations that provide strength and minimizes weight. Use
a minimum thickness of 0.157 inch (4 mm) for signs 36 inches and under in
any dimension, and 0.394 inch (10 mm) for signs greater than 36 inches in any
dimension.
Fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP)—Fiberglass reinforced plastic shall

comply with the recommendations of the Fiberglass Reinforced Panel Council
publication “Recommended Traffic Control Sign Panel Specification.” Unless
otherwise specified in the contract, the color of the material shall be brown,
matching Federal Standard 595a, color #20059, or an alternative brown color
approved by the contracting officer. Refer to FP-03, section 718.06(b) for
additional requirements.
Use a minimum thickness of 0.08 inch for signs 12 inches and under, 0.125 inch
for signs with the largest dimension between 12 and 24 inches, and 0.135-inch-
thick panels for signs exceeding 24 inches in any dimension.
High Density Overlay (HDO) plywood—Overlay color may be either black

or buff unless otherwise specified. Minimum ½-inch plywood shall be used for
signs less than 24 inches in longest dimension. Minimum s-inch plywood shall
be used for all other signs cut from a single sheet of plywood. Three-quarter-
inch HDO plywood shall be used for all signs requiring joining.
Polyethylene or polycarbonate flexible plastic—Minimum thickness shall be

0.055 inch and maximum thickness shall be 0.125 inch.
Wood-plastic composite (WPC)—WPCs are a composite of wood fibers

mixed with thermoplastic resins. Initial testing indicates WPC is a satisfactory
substrate for retroreflective signs, although it is a somewhat heavier substrate
than plywood. When specified as a substrate for signs, the WPC shall contain a
minimum of 50 percent wood fibers. Wood flour or finer ground wood products
are not to be used because they produce lower mechanical strengths in the
composite substrate. The composite material shall be either tan or brown in
color and may be manufactured using compression molding, extrusion, or
injection molding. Thickness for the substrate shall be the same as for the
applicable HDO plywood substrate signs.
14.3.3 Sheeting
All retroreflective materials (sheeting, legend, borders, and symbols) shall
conform to FP-03 or the latest edition and ASTM D 4956. All retroreflective
sheeting shall be ASTM Type III, high-intensity, unless another type of
sheeting is specified. Refer to chapter 3, table 3-2. Regardless of the type
of retroreflective sheeting selected it is important to ensure that the inks or
ElectroCut (EC) films that are used are compatible and approved for use by the
manufacturer of the sheeting. It also is important to ensure that a reputable sign
August 2013

manufacturer is selected that will use compatible materials that will be covered
under the material manufacturers warranties. With the proliferation of color
printers it is easy for a nonreputable sign manufacturer to print color film for
application on the retroreflective material that is inferior and will not last for the
expected time period.
Refer to chapter 3, section 3.3.2 for additional information on the merits of the
different types of reflective and retroreflective sheeting.
14.3.4 EC Film
ATSM EC Transparent Overlay Film is a durable, transparent, acrylic colored
film coated with a transparent, pressure-sensitive adhesive that is protected by
a removable liner.
Colored EC Film is often used instead of silk screened inks to provide

transparent colored background copy for retroreflective signs.
14.3.5 Protective Overlay Film

When specified, cover the entire face of a sign with a clear high-performance,
solvent-resistant, ultraviolet-stabilized, pressure-sensitive adhesive, protective
overlay film. Use 3M Scotchlite Premium Protective Overlay Film Series 1160 or
approved equivalent. This film is a durable overlay sheeting which significantly
extends the durability and life of a sign manufactured with pressure-sensitive
letters and characters, especially when installed in areas where the sign is
subjected to snow burial. Sign defacement from graffiti or other vandalism can
often be cleaned from this overlay film. Overlay films also reduce sign damage
from paintball gun impacts.
14.3.6 Edge Film

When specified, edge film shall be vinyl that is pressure-sensitive, premium
quality, clear, and ultraviolet-resistant. Top-edge tape extends the life of signs
with HDO substrates and retards peeling or delamination of the pressure-
sensitive background sheeting from the substrate of the sign. It normally should
be specified for signs, regardless of the substrate, located at higher elevations
subject to snow burial, and in wet, damp climates. Top-edge film is not needed
when specifications call for clear overlay sheeting to be applied over the face
and top of the sign.
14.3.7 Fonts
Fonts are as shown on the drawings in these guidelines unless otherwise
specified.
14.3.8 Paint
Paint applied to any surface of the substrate shall be premium grade exterior,
silicone alkyd enamel. For HDO plywood, colors should match the specified
color of the substrate or sheeting, unless otherwise specified.
14-4 Si gn and Pos t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
14.3.9 Silk-Screen Inks

Refer to FP-03, section 718.11(a).
14.3.10 Manufacturing Requirements
14.3.10a Sign Panel Preparation

Sign panels shall be cut from the specified substrate material that is flat and
free of warp or any defects that interrupt smooth continuity of the panel surface.
All panels shall be prepared precisely as described in writing by the substrate
and sheeting manufacturers. The sign manufacturer shall assure that the
retroreflective sheeting is applied to the proper side of the substrate where
applicable. Sign panels less than 4 by 8 feet shall be cut from a single sheet of
substrate material without joints.
HDO sign panels larger than 4 by 8 feet shall be fabricated in sections using
w-inch thick HDO substrate material. Individual panel sections shall be prepared
so they can be joined using doweled butt joints. Dowels shall be a-inch threaded
metal bolt stock, 42 inches in length, placed 2 inches from each side and every
12 to 15 inches along the joint. Refer to figure 14-2 for typical details. Actual
joining of the individual panels shall occur during sign installation.
14.3.10b Beveling
All edges of sign plywood panels shall be slightly rounded or beveled (typically,
45 degrees by z inch) to eliminate edge sharpness.
14.3.10c Corner Radius

Each corner radius shall be as specified in the drawings.
14.3.10d Drilling
Holes, when required, shall be drilled at the locations and to the sizes shown on
the drawings. All holes shall be deburred such that all burrs and sharp edges are
removed.
14.3.10e Preliminary Edge Finishing (HDO)

All core-gap holes on HDO plywood signs shall be filled with exterior wood filler.
Sign edges shall be sanded with sandpaper (60 to 80 grit) to produce a smooth
surface and shall receive one coat of paint before application of background
sheeting.
14.3.10f Sheeting, Legend, Border, and Symbol Application

All sheeting, legend, borders, and symbols shall be applied precisely as
prescribed in writing by the manufacturer of the material being used. The entire
face of the sign panel shall be covered with one unspliced sheet, unless the
substrate panel exceeds 48 inches in vertical dimension. In this case, only
horizontal splicing shall be used. Materials shall be color matched by use of
sheeting from the same factory lot number and manufacturing date, and the
splice shall not coincide with any legend. The top piece shall overlap the bottom
piece by a minimum of 2 inch. Refer to figure 14-1.
S i gn and Pos t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 14-5
November 2012
Top of sign
Substrate Sheeting or overlay

2 in.
min
2 in. minimum overlap
Apply lower sheeting or

overlay first. Overlap by
2 in. minimum with top sheeting.
Figure 14-1—Sheeting or overlay overlap detail.
All letters, layout, and spacing requirements for guide and information signs
shall conform to the “Standard Alphabets for Highway Signs,” FHWA, current
edition, and as shown on drawings. The following tolerances shall apply:
• Legend, numerals, and symbols shall be horizontally aligned to a tolerance

of ±z inch.
• Legend, numerals, and symbols shall be vertically aligned to a tolerance of

±z inch.
• Spacing between lines shall not exceed a tolerance of ±z inch.
Protective overlay film and borders shall be applied in the following order to
create a shingling effect:
1. Apply bottom border strip and trim to outside edge of substrate.
2. Apply bottom corners (radius) and trim to outside edge of substrate.
3. Apply left and right border strips and trim to outside edge of substrate.
4. Apply top corners (radius) and trim to outside edge of substrate.
5. Apply top border strip and trim to outside edge of substrate.
6. If specified in the requisition, apply clear protective overlay film over the
entire face of the sign.
7. Apply edge film, when specified on the requisition, over the top edge of the
panel as follows:
14-6 Si gn and Pos t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
August 2013

Edge film widths shall be selected as follows:
Sign panel thickness Edge film minimum width

(inches) (inches)
z – a 1
2 – s 2
w –1 3
Edge film shall be applied to extend a minimum of 1-inch below the top corner
radius on each side of the panel.
14.3.10g Silk-Screening
Refer to FHWA FP-03, section 718.11.
14.3.10h Final Trimming and Edge Finishing

After all sheeting, legends, borders, and symbols have been applied to the
substrate, all excess material shall be trimmed flush with the edge of the sign
panel, except sheeting may overlap HDO plywood substrate edges by 8 inch.
After trimming, the edges of HDO plywood substrate signs shall be finished with
a second coat of paint applied in accordance with the recommendations of the
paint manufacturer.
14.4 Routed Signs

14.4.1 Description
All materials, labor, tools, equipment, and supplies used to manufacture routed
signs as well as their packaging and shipment to the designated destination
must comply with this specification, drawings, and other specifics of the
requisition. Wood substrates shall meet all grading requirements with no visible
defects, including unsound knots, checks, splits, or cracks. Routing shall be
even across the sign face. The finished product shall be high quality.
14.4.2 Substrate
The manufacturer shall obtain approval from the contracting officer to use
substrate materials other than those defined herein for sign manufacture. Cleats
shall be of the same material and specifications as the material in the sign panel
unless specified otherwise by the manufacturer.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (polyethylene) (FRP)—FRP is an exceptionally

strong composite made from fiberglass reinforced in a plastic (polymer) matrix.
The extremely durable material requires little or no maintenance. Complex
forms and shapes are easily molded, such as Forest Service shields. It will not
crack, warp, oxidize, rust, break, or suffer ultraviolet deterioration. It has superior
corrosion and chemical resistance and repels graffiti. Fiberglass may have a
smooth surface or a wood grain surface. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations
for proper mounting, maintenance, and repair. Refer to section 14.5.
S i gn and Pos t er G ui del i nes for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15 14-7
November 2012

High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE or recycled plastic)—This non-
biodegradable plastic is extremely durable and requires little or no maintenance.
It will not crack, warp, oxidize, rust, break, or suffer ultraviolet deterioration. It
withstands temperatures as low as minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit and repels
graffiti. It has some flexible characteristics and may require metal or wood
reinforcement for proper support. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for
proper mounting, maintenance, and repair.
Up to three layers of polyethylene are bonded through an extrusion process

called “A/B/A” format. The surface “A” is one color with a contrasting core “B”
underneath. The surface can be routed to expose the core color underneath
or the surface material around the legend can be routed away leaving a raised
surface in the “A” color. The HDPE sheets consist of a 8-inch top layer, a
2-inch middle core layer, and a 8-inch bottom layer. The combination of layers
shall provide a unified w-inch-thick panel free of any jointing, unless requested
for oversized signs. When jointing is required, use plastic biscuits placed 2
inches from each panel end and 12-inch centers. The material is produced in a
solid sheet that is 5 feet by 10 feet by w-inch thick.
Medium Density Overlay (MDO) plywood—MDO plywood shall be all Douglas

fir, grade B, plugged core or better, exterior type, and B-B (or better) face and
shall otherwise conform to U.S. Product Standard, PS-1, current edition. Three-
quarter-inch material shall be 7-ply, and 1-inch material shall be 9-ply. The
resin-treated MDO facing shall be on both sides of the finished product and
shall present a smooth, uniform surface intended for high-quality paint finishes.
Each panel edge brand shall include the following: MDO B-B G1 EXT APA
PS-1.
Western Red Cedar—Cedar shall be grade-marked Western Red Cedar

(Thuja plicata), clear heart or A-clear grades, vertical grain, kiln dried with a
maximum moisture content of 15 percent, nominal thickness of 2 inches, and
in accordance with the “Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber,” West Coast
Lumber Inspection Bureau, current edition, including any supplements.
White Oak—White oak shall be FAS (First and Seconds) grade, relatively
knot free, and in accordance with the “National Hardwood Lumber Association
Grading Rules,” current edition. White oak shall have a finished thickness of w
to m inch.
Red oak may not be substituted because it has inferior resistance to decay in
outdoor exposures.
Wood-Plastic Composite (WPC)—WPCs are a composite of wood fibers

mixed with thermoplastic resins. WPC is somewhat heavier than plywood.
When specified as a substrate for signs, the WPC shall contain a minimum of
50 percent wood fibers. Wood flour or finer ground wood products are not to
be used because they produce lower mechanical strengths in the composite
substrate. The composite material shall be either tan or brown in color, and may
be manufactured using compression molding, extrusion, or injection molding.
Thickness for the substrate shall be the same as for the applicable MDO
plywood substrate signs.
November 2012

14.4.3 Adhesive
The adhesive (glue) shall be phenolic resorcinol, moisture resistant in
accordance with Federal Specification MMM-A-181C.
14.4.4 Hardware
All hardware, such as screws, bolts, and washers shall be zinc plated.
14.4.5 Primer, Paint, and Stain

Primer—Primer shall be top quality and oil based conforming to Federal
Specification TT-P-25.
Paint—Paint shall be top-quality exterior acrylic (high-acrylic) latex enamel

conforming to Federal Specification TT-P-19. Unless shown otherwise in
drawings, colors shall be Federal Standard 595, as shown in table 14-1.
Table 14-1 Federal Standard colors

Color 595 No.
Brown 20059
Yellow-cream 23695
Orange 12473
White 27875
Light Blue 15187
Black 17038
Green 14260
Tan 20260
Seminole Brown 20109
Gray White 27722
These lists are not all-inclusive; drawings may specify other colors. The five-digit
numbering system used for the colors is based on the assignment of numerals,
which indicate the following:
1. The first digit indicates the category of finish; 1-full gloss; 2-semigloss;
3-lusterless (flat).
2. The second digit indicates the selected color classification group.
3. The last three digits indicate the approximate order of increasing (diffuse)
reflectance.
November 2012

Stain—Stain shall be semitransparent, oil based. The final product shall match
the following colors:
• Gray stain. Gray stain shall match Federal Standard 595, No. 36357.
• Brown stain. Brown stain shall match Federal Standard 595, No. 20059.
14.4.6a Medium-Density Overlay (MDO) Plywood

Sign board panels less than 4 by 8 feet shall be cut from a single sheet
(minimum w-inch thick) substrate material (without joints) and shall be flat and
free of warp or any defects that interrupt smooth continuity of the panel surface.
Joining will be permitted only on those sign board panels exceeding 4 by 8 feet.
One-inch-thick material shall be used for all MDO signs requiring joints.
Only doweled butt joints shall be used. Dowels shall be a-inch threaded bolt
stock, 4½ inches in length, placed 2 inches from each side and every 12 to
15 inches along the joint. Refer to figure 14-2 for details. A doweling jig shall
be used as a guide to drill dowel holes. All wood chips and sawdust shall be
removed from the dowel holes and joint surfaces before joining. Dowels shall be
dipped in glue before insertion.
1 in. MDO
plywood
Glue
Dowel
2 1/4 in.
5 in. maximum
4 3/4 in. minimum 4 1/2 in.
2 1/4 in.
3/8
in.
Figure 14-2—Butt joint with dowels, MDO plywood.
November 2012

All core-gap holes shall be filled with exterior wood dough. All panel edges
shall be sanded to eliminate edge sharpness but not to exceed 1-ply in depth.
Preparing, gluing, clamping, and finishing of the plywood panels shall be as
described in other sections of this specification. Care shall be taken not to sand
through the MDO overlay at the joint. Exposed surface wood is not acceptable
on sign faces. Cleats should be attached as shown in figure 14-3.
See Figure 14-4 for cleat

size, the number of cleats,
and fastening information.
48 in.-60 in.
60 in.-72 in.
Glue joint 6 in. above glue joint
2 in. above glue joint
2 in. below glue joint
6 in. below glue joint
12 in.
Figure 14-3—MDO plywood cleating details.
14.4.6b Lumber
Sign panels made of lumber shall be fabricated from boards not more than 8
inches nor less than 4 inches wide, except that Forest Service shields and trail
signs up to 10 inches in height may be made from one board. Joined boards
shall provide a smooth match on all surfaces. Joining of boards for sign panels
shall be accomplished with butt joints, side grain to side grain. The surfaces to
be joined shall be machined just before bonding. Only horizontal joints shall be
permitted.
Preparation of surface joints—Surfaces to be glued shall be smooth, true, and

free from machine-joining marks and chipped or loosened grain.
Temperatures—Air temperatures shall be not less than 70 degrees nor more

than 90 degrees Fahrenheit, or as otherwise recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer, during the glue application and curing process.
Glue application—The entire surface of each joint face shall be covered with
the specified glue. The glue manufacturer’s recommendations concerning the
amount applied, drying time, and other application procedures shall be followed.
Clamping and curing—A minimum of four clamps shall be used on sign panels
less than 48 inches long. An additional two clamps shall be used for each 12
inches of additional length. Clamps shall be alternated on the front and back
of the sign panel and tightened in dual sequence starting in the middle of the
sign panel. All clamps shall be tightened to apply sufficient pressure to ensure
tight joints without warping the panel. The clamps shall remain in place for
a minimum of 12 hours or as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer,
whichever is longer.
November 2012

Surface and edge finishing—All surfaces shall be sanded to provide a smooth
surface. Sawdust, wood chips, and so forth, shall be removed from all surfaces.
All exposed edges of the sign panel and cleats, when applicable, shall be routed
with a corner-rounding bit (8- to x-inch radius) to eliminate edge sharpness.
Cleating—Sign panels of more than one board shall have cleats attached on
the back side (see figure 14-4). Cleats for lumber signs shall be of the same
lumber type as the sign panel. Nominal 1- by 4-inch cleats shall be used for
signs less than 16 inches high or 36 inches wide. Nominal 2- by 4-inch cleats
shall be used for signs up to 30 inches high or 60 inches wide. Nominal 2- by
6-inch size material shall be used for all larger signs.
Cleats shall extend vertically to within 1 inch of the top and bottom of the sign
panel and shall be located approximately 2 inches horizontally from the sides of
the panel. Sign panels less than 4 feet long shall have one cleat on each side.
Sign panels longer than 4 feet shall have additional cleats, equally spaced, so
that the maximum distance between cleats does not exceed 3 feet. Cleats shall
be predrilled with 4-inch holes and attached with No.12 or No.14 zinc-plated,
hex-head screws. Fasteners shall be located at the center of each sign panel
board and offset to prevent splitting. A single row of fasteners shall be used
for 4-inch-wide cleats. A double row of fasteners shall be used for 6-inch-wide
cleats. Do not place fasteners in glue joints.
14.5 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Signs

This item consists of furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and
supplies for the manufacture of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) signs in
accordance with this specification, drawings, and as specified on procurement
documents. Workmanship shall be high quality with no visible defects in the
finished product. Fiberglass reinforced plastic signs shall be fabricated by hand
layup. FRP also may be referred to as glass fiber reinforced polyethylene.
14.5.1 Design Requirements

Fiberglass reinforced plastic design shall follow the procedures and methods,
utilize the equations and formulas, and incorporate the factors of safety and
allowable design stresses and strains as set forth in ASTM D 4097, ASTM
D 3299 and ASME RTP-1. Where design conflicts arise between the various
standards, the most stringent design shall be used.
The design shall allow for the most severe combination of conditions, which
may include any or all of the following:
• Superimposed loads such as those due to wind and seismic forces.
• Loads applied during transportation and erection.
• Thermal expansion and contraction.
14.5.2 Materials
• Resin used to fabricate the FRP sign shall be polyester for the structural
layer.
November 2012
See chart below Use double row

for cleat size. of fasteners with
6-in.-wide cleats.
2-in. inset from
sides of sign.
Make cleat radius 2-in. inset from top Install third cleat when
even with panel radius. and bottom of sign. panel height exceeds 72 in. or
panel length exceeds 84 in.
#12 or #14 zinc plated, flat

Cleat Phillips-head wood screws. Sign size
Pre-drill with 4-in. holes. Less than 16 in. high
1x4
or 36 in. wide
See chart
Up to 30 in. high
2x4
or 60 in. wide
a in.-min.12 in. Larger than 30 in. high

2x6
or 60 in. wide
Sign face
Use single row of General notes:

fasteners with 3-in. 1. Cleats are also glued with specified glue.
or 4-in.-wide cleats. 2. Cleats are to be installed prior to routing.
Offset to prevent 3. Alternate screw tightening sequence from
splitting. center of cleat outward to both ends.
4. Do not install screws in glue joint.
Assembly and gluing for

wilderness signs
Figure 14-4—Dimensional lumber cleating detail.
November 2012

• Catalysts and promoters shall be of the type and amount recommended
by the resin manufacturer for use with their resin in the required service.
Positive measurement control of catalysts, promoters, and resins shall be
maintained at all times.
• All secondary laminates in contact with the stored chemical shall be made
with using the same resin as used in the corrosion barrier.
• Glass fiber reinforcement used shall be a commercial grade 12-ounce

glass matte.
• Polyester gel coats shall be in standard colors, or as specified.
• Ten-pound density or higher polyurethane closed cell foam shall be used

for the interior reinforcements of single-faced signs.

Fiberglass signs are manufactured by producing either a smooth or a wood-
grained appearance on the sign face, routing the face of the sign, backing it with
a substrate material, and laminating the whole product in fiberglass and resin.
Sign colors shall be Federal Standard 595, Brown #20059 and yellow-cream
#23695, or as specified.
14.5.3a Single-Faced Signs Construction

Sign faces shall receive a minimum of 11 mils of polyester gel coat, backed
with a minimum of three layers of 12 ounces of fiberglass matte and laminating
resin. Substrate material shall be 10-pound foam. Finish fiberglass thickness
shall be c to 2 inch of fiberglass. Signs will be subsequently routed to a depth
of 8 to 4 inch using Highway Gothic letter sizes and series specified for the
sign. Foam shall be beveled at a 45-degree angle. Backing shall be fiberglass
with another layer of 12-ounce fiberglass matte. The final layer of 12-ounce
fiberglass matte shall be applied with the backing color mixed in the final resin
for permanent color. Sign backing shall be brown in color.
14.5.3 b Double-Faced Signs Frame Construction

Figure 14-5 shows typical construction details, which are as follows:
1. Interior channels in sign shall fit over 4- by 12-inch channels, spaced

with a center line-to-center line dimension specified for the particular sign.
Channel height shall extend to within 2 inches of the top of the sign.
2. Frame size shall be appropriate for the sign. Substrate shall be 2- by 4-inch
framing. Corners shall be manufactured from 4- by 4-inch or 4- by 6-inch
treated material. Corners shall be curved. The frame shall be screwed
together with 22-inch galvanized deck screws. Prepare one side of the
frame with liquid nail compound. Install 8-inch plywood sheeting on the
frame and staple in place. Use a roller panel router bit to trim the 8-inch
plywood sheeting to fit the sign frame. Turn the frame over and drill 2- to
November 2012
s-inch holes between each section so that the sign can breathe internally.
At the bottom of the sign, drill a 1-inch hole and insert a metal vent cap.
3. Completely brush interior with a thick coat of fiberglass resin to seal all
interior framing. Completely brush a layer of fiberglass resin on the interior
side of another piece of 8-inch plywood sheeting large enough to cover the
open side of the sign. Let both sides dry completely.
4. Cut out the holes for the stanchion receptacle. Use liquid nails on the 2-
by 4-inch section of the second side of the frame. Install 8-inch plywood
sheeting and staple in place.
5. Cover one side of the sign with 12-ounce fiberglass mat and resin. Drape
the material completely over the edges of the sign. Dry thoroughly. Once
dry, turn sign over and trim excess. Repeat the fiberglass process on the
reverse side, making sure that the edges are covered again. Two layers of
12-ounce mat shall be on the edges. Trim and clean up as necessary.
6. Sign faces shall receive 11 mils of polyester gel coat backed with a
minimum of three layers of 12-ounce fiberglass mat and laminating resin.
Finish fiberglass thickness shall be 4- to a-inch of fiberglass.
Side view showing
sign faces installed
(Section A-A) Front view of sign frame
Top A Corners made from
4 in. x 4 in. or
4 in. x 6 in.
2 in. x 4 in. frame treated material.
Post slot
Front of sign
Back of sign
Post slot Post slot
Bottom view of sign frame

Front of sign
Corner and Corner and
sloping side Bottom sloping side
Back of sign
Post slot Post slot
Figure 14-5—Typical construction details for fiberglass reinforced signs.
November 2012

14.5.3c Solid Sign Construction
Solid fiberglass signs are cast w-inch thick. Signs will be subsequently routed to
a depth of 8 to x inch using Highway Gothic letter sizes and series specified
for the sign.
The back of the sign shall be drilled 2-inch deep in 4 to 6 places as specified
either by the manufacturer or the contract to allow insertion of a-inch thread
t-nuts to provide for easy mounting and to prevent the drilling of the sign face
during installation. T-nuts shall be set in place by casting in polyester resin.
14.5.4 Sign Message

The sign message shall be routed to a depth of 8 to x inch using Highway
Gothic letters, sizes, and series specified for the sign. Do not route all the way
through the fiberglass material. Fiberglass resin shall be puddled into the routed
letters. Color shall be yellow-cream or as specified.
Install sign faces onto the substrate using a 12-ounce mat to secure sign face
to the substrate. Repeat procedure to install the second face.
14.5.5 Maintenance
The fabricator shall provide instructions on the upkeep and maintenance
of the fiberglass signs. Turtle Wax Formula 2001 with ultraviolet protection
is recommended for early sign maintenance and protection from ultraviolet
damage. No painting is needed.
14.6 Flexible Banner Signs

Flexible plastic banners used to mark gates shall be manufactured from either
polyethylene or polycarbonate materials having a minimum thickness of 0.055
inch and a maximum thickness of 0.125 inch. Retroreflective sheeting with red
and white markings shall be applied to both sides of the banner. The stripes
on the front shall slant downward to the right while the slants on the back shall
slant downward to the left. The corners shall be square.
Three-spur grommets, with a minimum hole diameter of 4 inch, shall be placed

at the corners. The hole shall be centered r inch from the edge with the corner
grommets being centered w inch from both the vertical and horizontal edge.
Unless otherwise specified, banners exceeding 24 inches in any dimension,
shall have additional grommets equally spaced around the perimeter of the sign.
The distance between grommets shall not exceed 24 inches.
14.7 Legend, Layout, and Tolerances—All Signs

Dimensions of the sign panel shall be as shown in the drawings with a tolerance
of ±4 inch.
For information signs, all letters, layout, and spacing requirements shall conform
to the “Standard Alphabets for Highway Signs,” FHWA, current edition, and as
shown on drawings. Use Highway Gothic, lettering as specified in the drawings
unless otherwise indicated.
November 2012

The following tolerances shall apply:
• Legend, numerals, and symbols shall be horizontally aligned to a tolerance

of ±z inch.
• Legend, numerals, and symbols shall be vertically aligned to a tolerance of

±z inch.
• Spacing between lines shall not exceed a tolerance of ±z inch.
14.7.1 Routing
All letters, symbols, arrows, borders, separation lines, logotype, and so forth, on
all signs, shields, and plaques shall be machine routed with a vertical-sided flat-
bottom bit, with the following exception:
Routed Trail Destination (TD) signs with 1-inch scorched letters shall be routed
with a 45-degree “V”-bit or a flat bottom, angled side bit. Finished stroke width
for 1-inch letters shall be x-inch with a maximum width of 4-inch.
Use a 4-inch diameter bit for letters larger than 3 inches. Use a 8-inch diameter
bit for letters less than 3 inches.
Routing depth shall be as shown below and uniform throughout the sign.
Minimum depth Maximum depth

(inches) (inches)
Lumber 8 4
MDO plywood 8 x
Fiberglass 8 x
After routing, sand all surfaces with fine grit (100+) sandpaper. Wipe all surfaces
and lettering clean.
14.8 Finishing Operations

The entire sign (face, back, edges, and routed areas) shall be finished as
specified in procurement documents and as shown in drawings.
Medium-Density Overlay (MDO) plywood substrate signs—All MDO plywood

signs shall be painted. Scuff-sand the MDO plywood with fine grit sandpaper to
slightly roughen the surface. Apply one coat of primer and two coats of paint of
the specified color precisely as prescribed in writing by the manufacturers of the
primer and paint.
Lumber substrate signs—Lumber signs shall be stained or painted, as

specified. Painting shall be as described for MDO plywood substrate signs
above. Signs specified to be stained shall receive two coats of stain applied
precisely as prescribed in writing by the manufacturer of the stain.
November 2012

Dipped-in-stain oak signs—When specified, solid oak routed-wood signs shall
be dipped in or painted with a transparent stain with ultraviolet inhibitors and
water repellent characteristics, such as Super Deck Brand DB 1910-Natural.
If dipped, signs shall be left in the stain for a minimum of 3 hours to allow
penetration into the wood. When removed from the dip, excess stain shall be
wiped off. This stain protects the white oak from weathering and turning gray.
Artificial weathering (lumber)—When specified, trail signs shall be artificially

weathered by wire-brushing with the grain or by sandblasting to a depth of
approximately œ inch, followed by two coats of the specified stain applied
precisely as specified in writing by the manufacturer of the stain.
Unfinished signs—When specified, lumber signs shall be left unfinished.
Painted or scorched routing—When specified, all routing shall be painted

black or scorched black. Permanent black marker is not acceptable. Substrate
surface shall be lightly sanded or planed to remove any paint or scorching
outside the routed areas. Paint or scorching shall not extend outside the routed
areas or into islands within the letters “A”, “B’, “D, “O”, “P”, “Q”, and “R”.
14.9 Maker’s Mark

A decal showing the contractor’s identification or trademark and the date of
manufacture shall be installed on the back of all signs. Locate the sticker on
the lower corner of the sign closest to the road or trail. For lumber signs, this
information shall be stamped on the back, lower left-hand corner or edge of the
sign panel. Decals with this information may be applied to signs manufactured
with fiberglass, aluminum, or HDO substrates. On plastic banner signs, the mark
shall be applied to only one side in the upper left-hand corner of the sign.
Wood posts should be rough sawn standard and better, dry number 1 grade
hemlock, spruce, Western Larch, Douglas fir, or Southern or Ponderosa pine
conforming to AASHTO M168.
Treat posts with water-borne preservative ACA, ACZA, or CCA according to

AWPA Standard C14.
All lumber shall be pressure treated using the Empty Cell Process as
required by the American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA), with copper
naphthenate solution. The copper naphthenate shall contain not less that 6
percent or more than 8 percent copper in the form of copper naphthenate
in petroleum oil, AWPA P9, conforming to AWPA P8 and C1 for oil-born
preservatives.
14.10 Materials Certification

All materials used in the manufacture of signs shall comply with the
requirements of these specifications. It is the responsibility of the sign
manufacturer (contractor) to obtain and, if requested, furnish to the contracting
officer, certification that all materials comply with the requirements as specified.
November 2012
14.11 Packaging and Shipping
14.11.1 Packaging
Signs shall be packaged so that sign surfaces and edges are protected from
damage during shipping.
After packaging the sign, the contractor shall place a copy of the sign requisition
and all other documents and certifications requested in a heavily constructed
envelope and attach it securely to the package.
14.11.2 Shipping
Signs shall be shipped to the designated location and in conformance with
procedures designated in the contract.
14.11.3 Receiving Inspection

Prior to acceptance by the ordering unit, and within 10 working days of receipt
of finished signs, the ordering unit shall inspect the signs for compliance with
the specifications.
14.12 Method of Measurement

Signs, completed and accepted, shall be measured either by the square foot
of surface area (nearest one-half square foot), or on an individual unit basis as
shown in procurement documents.
14.13 Basis of Payment

The quantities shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement for
each pay item listed. The payment shall be full compensation to the contractor
for all materials and sign fabrication, including all labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals needed; payment includes shipping costs when so specified in the
contract.
Chapter 14A Manufacturing Specifications Sign Blank Standards
14A.1 Sign-Blank Standards ...................................................................................... 1
14A.2 Traffic Control Devices..................................................................................... 2
14A.3 Trail Signs........................................................................................................ 10
14A.4 Site Identification and Boundary Signs........................................................ 14

November 2012
14A.1 Introduction
The following sign-blank standards illustrate detailed dimensions for the various
signs used by the Forest Service.
November 2012
14A.2 Traffic Control Devices
Blank standard—warning sign (FW)
R (typical) 3/ -inch mounting

8
holes typical 2 places
M
L L
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L M R
FW-varies 24 12 1 2
FW-varies 30 15 1 d
FW-varies 36 18 2 4
14A-2 Si gn and P os t er G ui del ines for the For est Ser vi ce • EM 7100- 15
November 2012
Blank standard—All rectangular signs
Typical single-post detail*

Typical single-post detail* M
R (typical)
Typical single-post detail* M
M a-inch mounting
R (typical)
H R (typical) holes typical 2 places
a-inch mounting
H
a
holes
-inchtypical 2 places
mounting
H M holes typical 2 places
M2 M
L
M2 M
L
Dimensions
M2(inches)
L
Sign number L H M M2 R
Varies Varies Varies 1 2 2 L 12
Typical two-post detail*
Typical two-post detail* M
R (typical)
Typical two-post detail* M
H R (typical) M a-inch mounting
R (typical) a-inch mounting
H
a
holes
mounting
H M holes typical 4 places
1/5L 1/5L M
L
1/5L 1/5L M
L
1/5L 1/5L
L
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H M R
Typical
Varies Varies
three-post detail* Varies 1 2 to 3 2 2
Typical three-post detail* M

R (typical)
Typical three-post detail* M
R (typical) a-inch mounting M
H holes typical 6 places
R (typical) a-inch mounting
H
a
holes
mounting
H holes typical 6 places M
1/8L 1/8L M
M2
1/8L L 1/8L M
M2
1/8L L 1/8L
M2
L
Dimensions (inches)
Varies Varies Varies 1 2 to 3 2 L 3
* Refer to chapter 3D, section 3D.7 for information on selecting size and number
of posts.
November 2012
Blank standard—barricade marker (FBM and FBM1)

object marker (FOM2-2V)
x- to 4-inch typical all corners

H
H1 Mounting holes typical 2 places
M M
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H H1 M
FBM1 12 6 6 2
FBM 24 8 12 3
FBM 36 12 18 3
x- to 4-inch
typical all corners
Mounting holes
typical 2 places
L1
L
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H L1 M
FOM2-2V 3 18 1 2 1 2
November 2012
Blank standard—Site Approach sign (SA)
a-inch mounting
L holes typical 4 places
R (typical)
H M2
M1
X
M3 M4
L1
Dimensions (inches)

Sign number L H X L1 M1 M2 M3 M4 R
SA-1 38 40 5 33 2 36 8 22 4
SA-2 48 52 6 2 41 2 3 46 10 28 5
November 2012
Blank standard—Forest Route markers (M1-7 and FM1-7H)
L
M
R
(typical)
H M1
a-inch mounting
M
L1
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H L1 M M1 R
M1-7-18 18 18 12 w 1 2 15 2
M1-7-24 24 24 17 1 2 21 2 2
Blank standard—Route markers (FM1-7H)
a -inch mounting
holes typic val 2 places
M
R (typical)
H
M
M2
L
Dimensions (inches)
FM1-7H-16 16 8 1 8 12
FM1-7H-21 21 8 1 10 2 1 2
FM1-7H-20 20 10 1 10 12
FM1-7H-28 28 10 1 14 1 2
FM1-7H-26 26 12 1 13 1 2
FM1-7H-36 36 12 1 18 1 2
November 2012
Blank standard—Recreational and cultural interest area symbol signs
M3 Mounting holes
typical 2 places
R (typical)
H
M2
M1
Dimensions (inches)
Mount hole
Sign number L H M1 M2 M3 R diameter
XX-XXX-8 8 8 1 7 4 1 4 c
XX-XXX-12 12 12 1 11 6 1 4 a
XX-XXX-18 18 18 1 2 16 2 9 1 2 a
XX-XXX-24 24 24 1 2 22 2 12 1 2 a
Note:
(XX-XXX) specify sign number and series when ordering
(see chapter 3E, section 3E.11).
November 2012
Blank standard—Scenic Byway Logo (SBM)
M2
M
R (typical)
a-inch mounting
Dimensions (inches)
SBM-1 18 18 1 2 9 1 2
SBM-2 24 24 1 2 12 1 2
SBM-3 30 30 1 2 15 1 2
November 2012
Blank standard—hinged sign
Sign open
Front of sign Back of sign

when open when open
Hidden piano
hinge
Screw
Sign closed
Closed sign
Piano hinge
Hinged sign
Note: provide device to hold sign closed/open.
November 2012
14A.3 Trail Signs
Blank standard—STOP (FRI-1) and YIELD (FRI-2) signs
a-inch mounting
L
H M2
H1
X
M1
X
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H H1 X M1 M2
FR1-1-12 12 12 3 2 1 2 8 2 9
a-inch mounting
L
M2
H
M1
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H M1 M2 R
FR1-2-18 18 18 2 10 1
November 2012
Blank standard—warning/construction sign (FW)
R (typical) 3/ -inch mounting

8
M
L L
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L M R
FW-Varies 12 5 12
FW-Varies 18 8 12
FW-Varies 24 12 12
FW-Varies 30 15 1d
November 2012
Blank standard—Trail Destination sign (TD)
a-inch mounting
M
R (typical)
M
M2
L
Dimensions (inches)
TD-1 Varies 5 1 2 L 2
November 2012
Blank standard—Trail Blazer sign (TB)
L
L1 R
(typical)
M
H1 Mounting holes
typical 2 places
Dimensions (inches)
Mounting
Sign number L H L1 H1 M hole diameter R
TB-1 5 7 2 2 3 2 2 2 8 a
TB-2 9 12 4 2 6 4 2 4 2
November 2012
14A.4 Site Identification and Boundary Signs
Blank standard—National Forest Entrance (FE and FL)

Administrative Site Identification signs (AS)
National Recreation Area Forest Boundary Entrance sign (NRA-E and L)
R1
R3
H
H1
R2 R2
X
L1
Dimensions (inches)
Sign
number L H X L1 H1 R1 R2 R3
AS/FE/FL/NRA-E/NRA-L-1 54 36 9 49 27 2 4 6 5
NRA-E/NRA-L-5
AS/FE/FL/NRA-E/NRA-L-2 72 48 12 65 4 36 2 5 9 7
NRA-E/NRA-L-6
AS/FE/FL/NRA-E/NRA-L-3 108 72 18 97 w 54 2 7 12 10
NRA-E/NRA-L-7
AS/FE/FL/NRA-E/NRA-L-4 144 96 24 130 2 72 2 10 16 14

NRA-E/NRA-L-8
November 2012
Blank standard—Forest/District Administrative Site sign (A) for urban location
R (typical
all corners)
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H R
A1/A4 34 18 2
A2/A5 54 30 12
A3/A6 94 46 2
November 2012
Blank standard—Minor Forest Entrance (MFE), Minor Forest Leaving (MFL),

National Forest Land (NFL) and Minor Special Area Entering
(MSA-E) and Leaving (MSA-L) signs
L
M3 a-inch mounting
R typical
H
M2
H1
M1
X
L1
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H X L1 H1 M1 M2 M3 R
MFE-1
MFL-1 18 18 3 w 15 15 1 15 9 2
NFL-1
MFE-2
MFL-2
NFL-2 27 27 5 w 22 4 22 4 1 w 2 w 13 2 3
MSA-E
MSA-L
Note:
November 2012
Blank standard—Recreation Site Identification signs (RS and RSM1)
R (typical)
X
L1
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H X L1 R
RS-1/RSM1-1 48 30 6 42 6
RS-2/RSM1-2 63 40 8 55 7
RS-3/RSM1-3 78 48 9 4 68 w 8
RS-4/RSM1-4 93 60 11 2 81 2 9
November 2012
Blank standard—Optional Recreation Site Identification sign (RSE)
R (typical)
X
L1
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H X L1 R
RSE-1 30 14 2 28 22
RSE-2 48 20 4 44 3
RSE-3 60 24 4 w 55 4 4
RSE-4 72 28 5 2 66 2 5
November 2012
Blank standard—National Recreation Area (NRA-REC), Recreation Site

Identification sign (RSM2), National Recreation Area Entering and Leaving
Boundary signs (NRA-BDY)
R (typical)
X
L1
Dimensions (inches)
Sign
number L H X L1 R
NRA-REC/RSM2-1 48 36 7 41 6
NRA-BDY/NRA-REC/RSM2-2 63 48 9 2 53 2 7
NRA-BDY/NRA-REC/RSM2-3 78 60 11 2 66 2 8

NRA-BDY/NRA-REC/RSM2-4 93 72 14 79 9
NRA-BDY-5 108 84 16 2 91 2 10
November 2012
Blank standard—Wilderness/Primitive Area Entrance signs (WPH) (horizontal)
L
B
R3
R2
H R1
H1 H2
R1 R1
X
L1
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H L1 H1 H2 B X R1 R2 R3
WPH-1-L or R 40 20 37 2 16 15 12 4 2 3 6
WPH-2-L or R 60 30 56 25 22 18 6 4 5 12
November 2012
Blank standard—Wilderness/Primitive Area Entrance signs (vertical) (WPV)
L
Y
R2
R1
R3
H
H2
H1
R1 R1 H3
Dimensions (inches)

Sign number L H H1 H2 H3 Y X R1 R2 R3
WPV-1-L or R 13 18 11 15 2 2 1 w 2 w 2 2 2 5
WPV-2-L or R 24 36 22 31 1 3 2 5 4 5 10
November 2012
Blank standard—USDA Credit Line #1 (P)
8- to x-inch radius
typical each corner
70°
H
X
L
Dimensions (inches)
8- to x-inch radius
Sign number L H X typical each corner
H P-37 37 3 2 1 a
P-43 43 5 2 2
L
P-52 52 5 2 2
P-68 68 6 2 2 a
P-80 80 6 2 2 a
8- to x-inch radius
P-110 110 7 2 2typical
w each corner
70°
H
X
L
Blank standard—USDA Optional Credit Line #1 (P)
8- to x-inch radius
typical each corner
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H
P-37 37 32
P-43 43 52
P-52 52 52
P-68 68 62
P-80 80 62
P-110 110 72
November 2012
Blank standard—Wilderness/Primitive Area USDA Credit Line (WP-PV and

WP-PH)
8- to x-inch radius
typical each corner
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H
WP-PV 22 3
WP-PH 42 32
November 2012
Blank standard—National Recreation Area USDA Credit Line 2 (NRA-P)
R (typical)
Dimensions (inches)
Sign number L H R Fits panel sizes
NRA-P10 Variable 10 1 2 Up to 63
NRA-P12 Variable 12 1 2 78 and larger
Note:
Mounting hole location is variable depending on type of
mount.
November 2012
Blank standard—National Wild and Scenic River logo (WSR)
L
M2 R (typical)
A
H1 M
H1 M
A
Mounting holes
typical 2 places
Dimensions (inches)
Sign Mount hole
number L H H1 M M2 R A diameter
WSR-L1 15 2 18 7 7 2 7 w 17 2 a
WSR-L2 20 w 24 9 2 10 10 23 2 2 a
WSR-L3 25 w 30 11 2 12 2 12 2 29 3 2 2
WSR-L4 31 36 14 15 4 15 2 35 4 w
15.1 Introduction......................................................................................................... 1
15.1.1 Determining Sign Size and Weight...................................................... 4
15.2 Inspection of Sign Order.................................................................................... 6

November 2012
15.1 Introduction
Procure signs and posters from the most efficient and cost-effective source
(which includes shipping costs) in accordance with all government procurement
requirements including FAR clauses.
Sources include commercial sign manufacturers, Government Services

Administration (GSA) manufacturers, and UNICOR Federal Prison Industries.
Regional sign coordinators may maintain updated lists containing sign
manufacturers for use in determining potential suppliers.
Coordinate the ordering of custom posters or other silk-screened or digitally

printed products, not commercially available, through the Government Printing
Office (GPO). Contact the regional office for assistance.
Signs are to be Signs shall be manufactured in full compliance with the specifications in chapter
14, the drawings in these Guidelines, the “Standard Highway Signs” book, or as
procured from the
modified in the purchase order. Ensure the materials specified on the requisition
most efficient and cost- are appropriate for the specific type of sign ordered.
effective source. Use Forest Service Form, FS-7100-63, Sign Requisition, for ordering signs. Use
Form FS-7100-63-1a (figure 15-1a) for retroreflective signs and Form FS-7100-
63-1b (figure 15-1b) for routed signs.
Group requisitions by separate delivery destinations, different appropriations,

type of substrate, and other factors that may affect the bid. For example, do not
order routed trail signs and retroreflective signs as a combined order. Separate
the procurement into two orders: one for the routed signs and one for the
retroreflective signs.
Procurement documents should be legible, specific, and as complete as

possible. They should include or make reference to the appropriate drawings,
sign number, manufacturing specifications, and include any necessary
modifications to the specifications or drawings. Document and file the reason for
modifications.
When ordering destination signs, provide clear illustrations including arrow

directions, names, mileages, correct message sequence (based on arrow
direction and mileage), and any special instructions. Refer to “Standard Highway
Signs” book, the “Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices” (MUTCD), and
chapters 3C and 3E of these Guidelines for destination sign layout guidelines
and standards.
Submit the completed requisition to the forest sign coordinator for approval
before submitting to procurement authorities for processing.
Destination and other custom message signs often look different than intended
after the technical designer lays out the sign according to specifications. Forest
sign coordinators should request a final proof of Forest Road Destination (FRD)
signs and other custom message signs to review elements, such as wording,
size, spacing, font and layout before manufacturing. This avoids receiving
signs that do not meet expectations and incurring costs of returning and
remanufacturing the signs.
November 2012
Form FS-7100-63-1a (10/2011)

TO BE COMPLETED BY A.S.
RETROREFLECTIVE SIGN REQUISITION
1. Purchase Order Number
(Signs to be constructed in full compliance
with Forest Service EM-7100-15 and MUTCD)
Office Location Guide 5. Appropriation Code 6. Required Delivery Date
2. Region 3. Forest 4. District
7. Name & Address of Ordering Unit (Include Zip Code) 8. Ship To (Include Zip Code)
9. For Technical Assistance Contact 10. Telephone No. 11. Fax No.
12. Sign 13. Sign Message and Special 14. Materials

Identification Instructions Substrate Sheeting & Misc.
Line Item ❒ HDO Plywood ❒ Retroreflective Sheeting
❒ Aluminum Grade (Specify)
______________________
Sign No. ❒ Aluminum composite
❒ Edge Finishing Film
❒ Fiberglass FRP
❒ Graffiti Film
Est. Sq. Ft. ❒ Corex plastic
❒ Wood plastic composite ❒ Other (Specify)
❒ Other (Specify) ______________________
Quantity/Unit Price
__________________ ❒ Other (Specify)
______________________
$ Line Item Total
❒ Layout drawing and size
❒ Pre-drill Holes,
to be approved prior to
Standard spacing
manufacture
______________________
❒ Fiberglass FRP
❒ Graffiti Film
❒ Corex plastic
Est. Sq. Ft. ❒ Other (Specify)
❒ Wood plastic composite
❒ Other (Specify) ______________________
Quantity/Unit Price __________________ ❒ Other (Specify)
______________________
$ Line Item Total ❒ Layout drawing and size
Standard spacing manufacture
______________________
❒ Fiberglass FRP
❒ Corex plastic ❒ Graffiti Film
Est. Sq. Ft.
❒ Wood plastic composite ❒ Other (Specify)
❒ Other (Specify) ______________________
Quantity/Unit Price
__________________ ❒ Other (Specify)
______________________
$ Line Item Total
❒ Layout drawing and size
Standard spacing
manufacture
15. Submitted By (Signature) 16. Title 17. Date
18. Technical Approval By Sign Coordinator (Signature) 19. Date
Figure 15-1a—Retroreflective sign requisition (form FS-7100-63-1a).
November 2012
Form FS-7100-63-1b (10/2011)

TO BE COMPLETED BY A.S.
ROUTED SIGN REQUISITION
1. Purchase Order Number
(Signs to be constructed in full compliance
with Forest Service EM-7100-15)
Office Location Guide 5. Appropriation Code 6. Required Delivery Date
2. Region 3. Forest 4. District
7. Name & Address of Ordering Unit (Include Zip Code) 8. Ship To (Include Zip Code)
9. For Technical Assistance Contact 10. Telephone No. 11. Fax No.
12. Sign 13. Sign Message and Special 14. Materials & Finishing
Identification Instructions
Substrate Finish & Misc.
Line Item ❒ MDO Plywood ❒ Paint (Specify Color)
❒ Western Red Cedar ____________________
❒ White Oak ❒ Stain
Sign No. ❒ HDPE recycled Plastic ❒ Unfinished
❒ Wood Plastic Composite ❒ Artificial Weather
❒ Fiberglass ❒ Pre-drill Holes
Est. Sq. Ft. ❒ Other (Specify) ❒ Layout drawing and size
____________________ to be approved prior to
manufacture
Quantity/Unit Price Legend Treatment

❒ Natural ❒ Painted black
❒ Paint (Specify Color) ❒ Scorched black
$ Line Item Total ____________________ ❒ Other (Specify)
____________________

manufacture
____________________

manufacture

____________________
15. Submitted By (Signature) 16. Title 17. Date
18. Technical Approval By Sign Coordinator (Signature) 19. Date
Figure 15-1b—Routed sign requisition (form FS-7100-63-1b).
November 2012
Signs are often less expensive when ordered in bulk. Consider ordering larger
quantities of priority signs that often need to be replaced such as STOP signs
or object markers. Signs can then be quickly replaced from a stockpile without
waiting for replacement orders.
Signs and posters not documented in the MUTCD or these Guidelines shall
be coordinated with and approved by either the regional sign coordinator or
Washington Office (WO) Engineering prior to being ordered. Refer to chapter 1,
section 1.1. Complete the appropriate requisition (figure 15-1a or 1b) and attach
detailed drawings of the desired sign, showing dimensions, colors, message,
type of substrate, and any other pertinent information.
15.1.1 Determining Sign Size and Weight

Use the sizes of custom message signs depend on several factors including
amount of text, size of letters, arrangement of message, and use of
abbreviations. Sizes of signs will greatly affect the total sign order and the
shipping costs. Use the following methods to help determine the correct layout,
size, and weight of a sign:
1. The R1 Sign Sizing Program may be used to design and size destination
signs. It is an easy-to-use computer program that guides the user
through the design process and provides a printout of the sign with the
approximate size and square footage for cost-estimating purposes. These
printouts may be attached to the requisition form; it is not necessary to
complete a form for each individual sign. The program and users guide
are available at <http://fsweb.r1.fs.fed.us/e/transportation.shtml> under
Information and Links or <http://fsweb.wo.fs.fed.us/eng/programs/signs.
htm>.
2. The approximate sign size estimating process, shown in figure 15-2, may
be used in determining the approximate size of destination signs.
3. Table 15-1 may be used to estimate the weight of the sign based on the
type of substrate.
November 2012
Step One:
Example
The first step in determining the approximate size, area, and
weight of any given sign is to calculate the width based on
the number of characters in your longest line. Red Ives 5
Count each letter, each space between words, each space
between arrows, and each arrow (horizontal arrows count as
Townsend 25
2). Do not count the end margins. The example at right has 14
characters in the middle line, which is the longest line. Ninemile 18
Using the chart below, find out how many inches that number
of characters requires. These figures are for a 4-inch ASA 2 1 8 characters 1 2
series C alphabet; Step 4 gives you multipliers to determine
the square footage of signs using other size letters 14 characters
Number of Approximate sign length

characters (inches) Step 1—Determine length of longest line:14
5 20 characters equal approximately 50 inches.
6-7 26 Step 2—Determine height:
8-9 32 3 line signs equal 24 inches.
10-11 38 Step 3—Determine area in square inches:
12-13 44 Multiply length times height.
14-15 50 50 x 24 = 1,200 square inches
16-17 56 Convert to square feet
18-19 62 1,200 ÷ 144 = 8.3 square feet
20-21 68 Round off to nearest ½ square foot =
22-24 74 8.5.
25-26 80 Step 4—Use the following multipliers to
27-28 86 determine square footage of signs using
letters other than the 4-inch series C:
29-30 92
31-32 98 1-inch letters x 0.0625
2-inch letters x 0.2500
Step Two: 3-inch letters x 0.5625
4-inch letters x 1
Sign height is determined by the number of lines used.
The usual number of characters per line is shown in
parentheses. Signs that use more or less than this range
may be out of balance, and the sign message may need Using the example above, if using 3-inch
letters instead of 4 inch:
to be adjusted.
8.5 square feet x 0.5625 = 4.8
One line (5 to 11 characters) 10 inches 3-inch letter sign = 5.0 square feet
Two lines (6 to 17 characters) 17 inches
Three lines (8 to 24 characters) 24 inches
Four lines (12 to 28 characters) 31 inches
Five lines (14 to 32 characters) 38 inches
*Five-line signs are for trail signs only.
Step Three:
Multiply the width in inches, as determined in step one, by the height, as determined in step two. Divide
the resulting square inches by 144 to obtain the area in square feet. See example.
Step Four:
If you are using letters larger or smaller than 4 inches or want to compare different area requirements,
multiply your square footage by the numbers shown in the example.
Figure 15-2—Determining approximate sign areas.
November 2012
Table 15-1—Weight estimating chart

Type of material Thickness Weight per Sign type
(inches) square foot
(pounds)
0.5 2.2 Retroreflective
HDO plywood 0.625 2.4 Retroreflective
0.75 2.6 Retroreflective
MDO plywood 0.75 2.6 Routed
Oak 1 4.0 Routed
Cedar 2 6.8 Routed
Aluminum .125 2.7 Retroreflective
.080 1.7 Retroreflective
Fiberglass 0.1875 0.75 Retroreflective
ABS plastic 0.125 0.6 Screened
Recycled plastic 0.75 4.0 Routed
0.5 2.0 Retroreflective/routed
Wood plastic
composite (WPC) 0.625 2.5 Retroreflective/routed
0.75 3.0 Retroreflective/routed
Add 10 percent to sign weight estimate over 65 pounds to cover cost of crating
and packing material.
15.2 Inspection of Sign Order

After ordering signs, it is critical that the signs received are carefully inspected
before processing payment to ensure compliance with the requisition and the
specifications. Units cannot return noncompliant signs if payment for the order
has been processed and signs are later determined to be noncompliant. Units
may develop sign inspection checklists to assist in reviewing orders. The two
primary inspection areas are accuracy and quality. Some examples are:
Accuracy: Overall sign dimensions.

Letter and border size.
Correct message and symbols.
Placement and spacing of letters and messages.
Placement of arrows and other symbols.
Colors.
Sign shape.
Font type.
November 2012
Quality: Correct type of sheeting.

Quality of ink used on sheeting (i.e., does it rub off on your finger?)
Sheeting firmly and appropriately applied.
Overlays and/or edge treatments correctly applied if required.
Correct substrate used including type and thickness.
Mounting holes accurately drilled and treated if necessary.
Correct depths and clean lines of routed letters.
Chapter 16 Sign Maintenance, Repairs, Recycling and Disposal
16.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................... 1
16.2 Condition Surveys .............................................................................................. 1
16.3 Maintenance Plan Development......................................................................... 2
16.4 Sign Maintenance ................................................................................................ 3
16.4.1 Cleaning Signs....................................................................................... 3
16.4.2 Retroreflective Sign Repairs ................................................................ 4
16.4.2a Aluminum Substrate Signs ..................................................... 4
16.4.2b High-Density Overlay Plywood or Fiberglass

Substrate Signs ........................................................................ 5
16.4.2c Retroreflective Background Sheeting Repairs....................... 5
16.4.2d Retroreflective Characters and Border Repairs .................... 5
16.4.3 Routed Wood Sign Repairs .................................................................. 6
16.4.3a Maintenance of Routed Fiberglass Substrate Signs ............ 7
16.4.3b Repair of Routed Fiberglass Substrate Signs........................ 7
16.4.3c Painting Routed Signs ............................................................. 7
16.4.3d Staining Natural Wood Signs .................................................. 8
16.4.3e Other Sign Materials ................................................................ 8
16.4.4 Supports and Hardware ........................................................................ 8
16.5 Pavement Markings ............................................................................................ 8
16.6 Record Keeping ................................................................................................... 8
16.7 Recycling ............................................................................................................. 9

16.7.1 Recycling Retroreflective Signs .......................................................... 9
16.7.2 Recycling Routed Wood Signs ............................................................ 9
16.8 Disposal.............................................................................................................. 10
16.8.1 Documentation of Disposal ................................................................ 10
16.9 Maintenance References................................................................................... 10

November 2012
16.1 Introduction
Timely detection of and response to maintenance needs are critical. Plan,
schedule, and perform maintenance with the objective of keeping signs,
posters, and other traffic control devices clean, legible, functional, and properly
positioned. Effective sign maintenance will facilitate safe use and enjoyment of
National Forest System lands and facilities, and provide a professional Forest
Service image.
Determine if a questionable sign should be repaired, replaced, or left as is. It
Timely detection may be cheaper to replace a badly damaged or unreadable sign than to attempt
field repairs. Weigh the cost of repairs and remaining service life of the sign face
of and response to after repairs, against replacing it with a new sign. Do not leave a sign down or
maintenance needs take away a damaged sign without replacing it unless a determination has been
made that the sign is no longer needed.
are critical.
Signs should be replaced when:
• They are damaged beyond repair.
• Their poor condition has an effect on safety.
• Their appearance reflects poorly on the agency.
• They no longer meet applicable standards.
16.2 Condition Surveys

Condition surveys should be performed on a periodic basis to determine the
condition and effectiveness of all traffic control devices, signs, and posters.
Compare existing signs against current standards. Inspect retroreflective
devices at night as well as during the day. As part of the condition survey,
include evaluations of:
• Legibility and appearance.
• Message.
• Retroreflectivity.
• Overall condition of the sign and its supports.
• Damage or vandalism.
• Placement – lateral clearance, height above ground, longitudinal
placement along road.
• Visibility – day and night.
• Encroachment of vegetation.
• Supports – clear zone, breakaway or yielding.
• Continued sign need.
• Other identified conditions.
Promote a high level of awareness among field personnel to encourage them to
recognize missing, improper, incorrectly placed, damaged, or deteriorated signs,
and to report these to the person responsible for signing.
November 2012
Develop and use field inspection checklists to guide the inspection process and
document findings. Checklists also may be used to update the sign inventory
Develop and use field (see chapter 2 and FSH 7709.11). As a minimum, the checklist shall document
the following:
inspection checklists
• Route number.
to guide the inspection
• Sign number.
process and document
• Sign location.
findings.
• Date and time of inspection.
• Inspection findings.
• Recommended actions and actions taken.
• Name of inspector.
• Overall condition rating.
Photos of the sign also are an excellent method of providing documentation and
for ordering replacements for missing signs.
16.2.1 Retroreflectivity Inspections

Retroreflective signs lose their ability to reflect light as they age and when they
are subjected to vandalism or other physical damage. The orientation of a sign
also affects the rate of deterioration. Sign faces subject to direct sunlight for
much of the day will deteriorate sooner than sign faces that rarely receive direct
sunlight.
Replace signs that have lost their retroreflectivity based on the assessment
or management method that was selected to maintain sign retroreflectivity at
or above the minimum levels shown in the current edition of the “Manual of
Uniform Traffic Control Devices” (MUTCD).
For signs that show an obvious unacceptable loss of retroreflectivity due to
vandalism or other physical damage use one or more of the methods described
at <http://safety.fhwa.dot.gov/roadway_dept/night_visib/retrotoolkit/moreinfo/
maint/> to perform retroreflective inspections as necessary to ensure minimum
retroreflective levels required by Federal standards are being met. Refer to
chapter 3, section 3.3.2. Information also is available in “Sign Retroreflectivity
Guidebook for Small Agencies, Federal Land Management Agencies, and Tribal
Governments,” FHWA-CFL/TD-09-005, September 2009.
16.3 Maintenance Plan Development

Develop maintenance plans based on:
• Results of condition surveys.
• Review and analysis of vehicle accident records in which signing or lack
of signing was a factor.
• Review and analyze road users’ complaints, suggestions, or comments.
November 2012
Determine whether the sign should be repaired or replaced. Often it is less

expensive to replace a badly damaged or illegible sign than to attempt extensive
Replace nonstandard repairs. Compare repair cost versus likely extended sign life with new sign cost
signs based on safety,
and service life when making decisions.
priorities, and available

Replace nonstandard signs based on safety, priorities, and available resources.
resources.
The sign maintenance plan may be implemented separately or as part of the
annual road maintenance plan. Refer to the “Road System Operations and
Maintenance Handbook” (FSH 7709.59).
16.4 Sign Maintenance

Perform maintenance on a regular and systematic basis as necessary and
practical with the objective of keeping signs and other traffic control devices
clean and functional. The highest priority for maintenance performance are
signs that affect user safety, such as warning and regulatory signs. The
following suggested priorities are provided as a guide:
1. Location-critical regulatory signs, such as STOP and YIELD; object markers;
and location-critical warning signs, such as TURN and INTERSECTION, on:
2. Non-location critical regulatory signs, such as SPEED LIMIT, and non-
location critical warning signs, such as LIVESTOCK, on:
3. Route markers on:
4. Destination and other guide signs on:
5. Informational and Motorist Services signs on:
November 2012
Consideration also should be given to the physical attributes of the road when
determining priorities for sign replacement, especially when the attributes do
not currently match the maintenance level standards. For example, a road that
was maintenance level 4 but which has recently been lowered to maintenance
level 2 or 3 may still function like a maintenance level 4 road and consequently
should receive more consideration for sign replacement than a road which has
long been maintained at maintenance level of 2 or 3.
Other factors to consider when determining sign replacement priorities include
RMO, traffic volume and composition, crash history, and Motor Vehicle Use Map
(MVUM) designations.
Use only those materials (paints, stains, sheeting, overlay film, edge tape, and
hardware) that comply with the applicable specifications for the sign or traffic
control device being refurbished. Evaluate the maintained product against the
standards for materials and quality established by the original manufacturing or
construction specifications. Some often overlooked maintenance items include:
• Checking and replacing top edge tape on a routine basis.
• Clearing small trees, brush, and other vegetation that may obscure signs.
Ensuring that fences or other objects do not obscure signs. Relocate
signs if obstructions cannot be eliminated.
• Cleaning signs obscured by dust, bituminous materials, road film, mud,
fungus, and vandalism to restore legibility and retroreflectivity.
16.4.1 Cleaning Signs

Use the following procedures for cleaning signs:
Dust, road film, mud. Flush sign surface with clean water to remove loose dirt,
Avoid abrading or scrub sign face with a soft brush, rag, or sponge using a mild nonabrasive
the surface or detergent or other suitable cleaner free of damaging solvents. Scrub from the
top down. Avoid abrading the surface or damaging the interior structure of the
damaging the interior high-intensity sheeting with unnecessary scrubbing. Keep a steady stream of
structure of the high- water flowing on the sign face to wash away dirt. Rinse the entire sign face with
clean water.
intensity sheeting
Tar, oil, diesel fuel, bituminous material. Use a mild solvent such as mineral
with unnecessary spirits. Wash the surface with mild detergent and water and rinse with clean
scrubbing. water.
Pollen and fungus. Wash the surface with a 3- to 5-percent sodium
hypochlorite solution, such as a commercial brand of bleach, followed by
detergent and water. Rinse with clean water.
Lipstick and crayon. Use a mild solvent such as mineral spirits to remove the
material. Follow with detergent and water and clean water rinse.
Spray paint. It may be possible to remove paint sprayed onto a reflective
sheeting sign face by using a commercial paint remover designed for this
purpose. The type of paint, length of exposure, and type of remover may affect
the life of the sheeting. Consider ordering a clear overlay sheeting on future
signs in locations subjected to this type of vandalism. Do not use abrasive
November 2012
compounds or tools such as steel wool that will scratch the sign face. Inspect
the sign under night conditions to determine if sign is still legible at night.
Paintball gun damage. The impact damage from paintball guns often appears
much less severe during daylight than at night. This is especially true on high-
intensity and diamond-grade sheeting because the interior prism structure of the
sheeting is easily damaged. The impacted area on damaged signs will appear
as a “black blob” on the otherwise retroreflective sign when viewed at night with
headlights. Inspect the sign under night conditions to determine if sign is still
legible at night. If sheeting is damaged, it will need to be repaired or replaced.
Other severe contamination. Soiling that cannot be removed by traditional
methods may be removed by scrubbing with a very fine steel wool or plastic
kitchen scour. However, if this scrubbing is not done carefully, it may destroy
all or part of the sign’s retroreflectivity. Heavy scrubbing also can damage the
reflective geometry of high-intensity or diamond-grade sheeting.
If special cleaning procedures have been used, signs may need to be inspected
at night to determine if the cleaned area has lost too much of its retroreflectivity.
Replace those signs with insufficient retroreflectivity.
16.4.2 Retroreflective Sign Repairs

Minor damage may be repaired in the field without removing the sign from its
support. Repair of major damage normally requires that the work be performed
It may not be in a sign shop. Extensive repairs can easily cost more than a new sign and
often do not increase sign life significantly. Some repairs may be made so the
necessary to repair sign is operational until a replacement can be ordered and installed.
each bullet hole or It may not be necessary to repair each bullet hole or puncture in a sign,
puncture in a sign. especially if the sign was shot from the front side. Bullet damage is usually
much more evident in the face of signs with an aluminum substrate than with
signs constructed on a fiberglass or plywood substrates (sign board). When a
bullet hole does not damage the message or symbol and does not, by itself,
create a sloppy signing image for the Forest Service, maintenance may not be
needed.
Where repairs are needed, follow the steps for the specific type of substrate.
16.4.2a Aluminum Substrate Signs

Bent signs. If possible, bend the sign back into place on the sign post with
hand pressure. If it cannot be straightened on the post, remove the sign and
place on a flat surface, such as a truck bed or fender dolly. Use cardboard or
cloth to protect the sign face. Straighten bent aluminum sign substrates with
a rubber mallet. If the reflective background or legend has been scraped or
damaged, remove any additional sheeting damaged during straightening. Use
the proper safety equipment, such as leather gloves and eye protection, when
straightening bent signs.
Bullet holes or punctures. It is not necessary to repair all holes if the hole
does not damage or interfere with the sign message and functionality. Remove
all damaged background sheeting and legend from an area slightly larger that
the damaged area. Straighten the sign with a hammer and flat dolly. Remove
November 2012
any additional sheeting damaged during straightening. Clean the entire area
with a mild detergent and rinse with clean water. Patch the bullet hole or
puncture on both sides with a heavy aluminum foil tape using a squeegee to
apply firm pressure. Do this on both sides of the sign. On large holes, start
placing the foil at the bottom of the hole, overlapping each strip in a shingle
fashion to the top of the hole.
If the back of the sign has been painted, use an aerosol can of enamel paint
(color to match back of sign board), lightly spray the aluminum tape covering
the holes on the sign back.
16.4.2b High-Density Overlay Plywood or Fiberglass Substrate Signs

The following procedures are recommended to repair bullet holes and other
damage to high-density overlay (HDO) plywood or fiberglass substrates:
• Remove all loose substrate material on both sides of the sign and all
damaged sheeting.
• Fill holes with wood filler or auto body filler such as Bondo®, smooth with
a putty knife, and sand smooth.
• Wipe area with clean cloth or with denatured alcohol.
• On larger repairs it may be desirable to reinforce holes with fiberglass
mesh or aluminum foil tape before applying the auto body filler.
• Use a squeegee to smooth the repair area. If the repair is still not flush
with the sign, file or rasp the repair before it sets hard, then sand the
repair smooth once it sets hard.
16.4.2c Retroreflective Background Sheeting Repairs

If the retroreflective background has been scraped or damaged, proceed as
follows once the substrate for the sign has been repaired.
• Remove all background sheeting and legend from an area slightly larger
than the area that has been damaged.
• Clean exposed surface with a mild detergent and rinse with clean water
or with denatured alcohol and wipe with a clean cloth.
• Apply matching retroreflective background sheeting, extending it at least
½-inch beyond the damaged area.
16.4.2d Retroreflective Characters and Border Repairs

The message (legend, characters, and border) can be reapplied using die-cut,
pressure-sensitive, prespaced letters, borders, and symbols. Replacing more
than one or two letters and symbols on the original background sheeting of
a sign is more difficult. Consider ordering an entire line of a sign’s message
and symbols preapplied to strip of matching pressure-sensitive sheeting from
a sign company. Specify the exact letter height and length of the replacement
message.
November 2012
This technique also can be used to change a line of text that is no longer
appropriate in an otherwise functional sign. Apply the replacement characters as
follows:
• Properly position the entire replacement message on the sign and tape
it to the sign with masking tape or top application tape across the entire
top edge of the replacement message. The tape holds the replacement
message in the proper alignment on the sign so the backing paper on the
pressure-sensitive sheeting can be removed.
• Hinge the replacement message up using the tape to form a hinge so the
backing paper can be removed.
• Once the backing paper is removed from the pressure-sensitive
adhesive, slowly lower the replacement message with the pressure-
sensitive adhesive and use a squeegee to iron out the repair and remove
air bubbles.
• If air bubbles persist, use a pushpin to pierce the bubbles and then again
squeegee out the air.
At best, sign life can
If the sign is subjected to snow burial and the replacement sheeting extends to
be extended for a few the top edge of sign, place a 2-inch strip of clear-top application tape over the
top edge. If the sign repair sheeting is at midpoint in the sign, it is still beneficial
years using these
to apply a strip of clear-top application tape entirely across the top edge of the
methods. replacement characters. The clear tape protects the sheeting and provides
protection to the characters from peeling if the sign is subject to snow burial.
Clear overlay film also may be used.
At best, sign life can be extended for a few years using these methods. For
heavily damaged signs, these methods can provide a usable sign until a
replacement can be ordered and installed.
16.4.3 Routed Wood Sign Repairs

The following procedures are recommended for either natural woods or medium
density overlay (MDO) plywood signs.
• Scrape off loose paint with a wire brush. Dress all bullet holes and
damaged wood with a knife.
• Fill all cracks, holes, and imperfections with wood or auto body filler. Use
a putty knife to smooth filler as much as possible.
• Sand sign edges, back, and face. Do not sand into the surface overlay on
MDO substrate signs.
• Remove all loose paint, dust, and other foreign materials.
• Route the affected letters and symbols back into the sign using a
template.
November 2012
16.4.3a Maintenance of Routed Fiberglass Substrate Signs

The colors in wood-grained fiberglass signs are imbedded in a gelcoat and
should not require repainting. Dirt, paint, or graffiti often can be removed using
a pressure washer or a solvent such as acetone. Periodic cleaning by wiping of
the sign will remove dust and pollens. If the face appears to be oxidizing, the
sign can be waxed with automotive polish containing a ultra violet protection to
restore the original appearance.
16.4.3b Repair of Routed Fiberglass Substrate Signs

Most damage to routed fiberglass signs can be repaired. Bullet holes can
usually be repaired/filled on site. Contact the manufacturer for advice on
major repairs and for color-matched putty repair kits. The repair putty requires
a catalyst available from an automotive paint supply. Follow manufacturer
directions for mixing the putty with the catalyst. Typically, 4 to 6 ounces of putty
is poured into a small cup and is mixed with 4 to 5 drops of catalyst. (The higher
the air temperature, the faster the catalyst will set-usually 5 to 15 minutes.
It is best to fill holes from the back of the sign after covering the front of the
hole with masking tape. Press the putty from the back of the sign with a stick or
Most damage to putty knife until the tape on the front of the sign starts to bulge. Smooth out the
routed fiberglass signs
surfaces of the sign before the putty sets. The general area around the spot of
repair can be cleaned up with solvents (acetone) if needed.
can be repaired.
In the case of a name change or when damage to the sign is extensive, such
as from a vehicle impact or shotgun damage, the sign can be sent to the
manufacturer for repairs and, in most cases, can be repaired for about half the
cost of a new sign.
16.4.3c Painting Routed Signs

If the repairs are extensive, make the following repairs with the sign removed
from the mounting and laying flat.
• Apply a primer coat first and then apply two coats of paint to the sign
message using a short-fiber roller. Hint: Instead of cleaning the roller,
wrap the roller in tin foil between coats to prevent it from drying. For
extended periods of storage, place the paint roller wrapped in tin foil in a
deep freeze to preserve the roller between uses.
• Let paint dry thoroughly between coats.
• Apply two coats of paint to the background area.
• Work paint thoroughly into all corners of letters and numbers if the sign
remains mounted. If the sign has been removed and is laying flat, paint
for the letters can be flowed into the letters using a high-quality squeeze
bottle, such as one used in a hair salon.
• Touch up letters if background paint contaminated the message.
November 2012
16.4.3d Staining Natural Wood Signs

• Paint the message area, keeping paint off the sign face.
• Apply two coats of stain to the background area.
All painting and staining operations shall be in accordance with the specific
requirements of the appropriate manufacturing specifications (chapter 14).
16.4.3e Other Sign Materials

For other sign substrate materials not covered above, consult with the material
manufacturer or provider for specific maintenance procedures.
16.4.4 Supports and Hardware

As necessary, repair or replace damaged or deteriorated sign supports and
associated mounting hardware.
16.5 Pavement Markings

Maintain pavement markings to preserve uniformity in design, position, and
application.
Renew striping and other pavement markings when legibility has decreased and
they are no longer effective. Follow the recommended application practice of
Renew striping and
the material manufacturer, the pavement marking machine manufacturer, and
other pavement current Forest Service specifications.
markings when Remove temporary traffic stripes or lane lines when they are no longer
applicable. Also remove pavement stripes that are no longer appropriate for
legibility has
current traffic flow. Methods available for stripe removal include chemical paint
decreased and they removers, sand blasting, high-pressure water jet, grinding, and high temperature
burning. Regardless of the method used, all evidence of existing striping must
are no longer effective.
be removed and the pavement surface restored to a condition similar to the
adjacent roadway surface.
Do not paint over pavement markings with black paint or bituminous materials
as these smooth materials reflect light when wet and still appear to be a
pavement marking. In addition, the cover paint will eventually wear away and
the original lines will reappear.
16.6 Record Keeping

Record keeping is necessary to have an efficient and effective sign
management program and as a risk management strategy. Accurate records
showing the type and frequency of maintenance performed aid in determining
service life and future budget needs. They also are extremely important as
evidence in tort claim situations.
Record all maintenance accomplishments. Identify, by each individual sign, the
date, specific work performed, and any additional work needed.
November 2012
Keeping good records will help the unit:

• Make good decisions about sign replacement.
• Respond more quickly to relocating or replacing frequently damaged
signs.
• Determine which materials are best suited for certain areas.
• Assist law enforcement in reducing vandalism.
• Defend against lawsuits involving signage.
Maintenance activity records should be used to update the sign inventory in the
sign plan to keep it current and accurate. Refer to chapter 2, section 2.2.5.
16.7 Recycling
Signs that are damaged, no longer serviceable, or do not meet current
standards should either be recycled or disposed of. If the substrate of the sign is
still in good condition or is repairable, it may be refaced and used in a new sign.
Large signs may be made into several smaller signs. Aluminum signs also may
be used for various small metal projects, such as mounting brackets.
16.7.1 Recycling Retroreflective Signs

Signs with retroreflective sheeting can be refaced with a new sheet of
retroreflective material after the substrate has been repaired and the old
sheeting stripped. Aluminum substrates that are not bent or shot can be planed
to remove the sheeting and refaced with a new sheet of retroreflective sheeting.
Bent signs may be straightened and resurfaced.
Consider the cost of shipping signs to a manufacturer for stripping and refacing.
It may be more expensive to recycle an existing sign rather than to procure
a new one. In addition, recycled aluminum signs may not carry the reflective
sheeting manufacturer guarantee.
Routed wood signs
16.7.2 Recycling Routed Wood Signs
with unneeded
Routed wood signs with unneeded messages or holes and blemishes can
messages or holes often be repaired and reused for other signs. Large holes in MDO plywood and
and blemishes can natural lumber can be filled with fiberglass epoxy material such as Bondo®.
Split, warped, and unusable natural boards can be sawed out and reglued with
often be repaired and new boards, or the face can be planed and sanded to remove the old message
reused for other signs. and a new message routed. A new message can sometimes be routed on
an unused back face. Also it is possible to reface a sign with a new routed
fiberglass sign glued or bolted over the old sign.
November 2012
16.8 Disposal
Follow the procedures in 41 CFR 101-45 references 102-102.38 to dispose of
signs.
When signs have no use or sales value and cannot be donated, they should be
destroyed provided:
• The sign has no commercial value either as an item or as scrap.
• The estimated cost of handling, care, and preparation of the signs would
be greater than the expected sale proceeds.
When signs are to be disposed, destroy them so they are no longer usable as a
sign and remove all government identification.
Aluminum signs should be cut, rolled, or bent and taken to a recycling center.
Large wood and fiberglass signs should be cut into smaller sizes to facilitate
handling.
16.8.1 Documentation of Disposal

Disposal of individual signs with an original acquisition cost over $500 should be
documented on an AD-112 “Report of Unserviceable, Lost, Stolen, Damaged or
Destroyed Property.”
Individual signs with an original acquisition cost less than $500 may be
destroyed without an AD-112, although a signed statement of accomplishment
action should be retained.
16.9 Maintenance References

Maintenance of Signs and Sign Supports, January 2010
A Guide for Local Highway and Street Maintenance Personnel
U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration

Stelprd 3810021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Stelprd 3810021

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Stelprd 3810021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

United States Department of Agriculture

Engineering Staff • Washington, D.C. • EM7100-15 • Revised • October 2013

Sign and Poster

To File an Employment Complaint

To File a Program Complaint

Persons with Disabilities

1.1 Policy ............................................................................................................... 1

1.4 MUTCD—Standard for Traffic Control Devices................................................... 2

1.5 Sign Coordinators.................................................................................................. 3

1.6.1 Purpose and Use....................................................................................... 3

1.6.3 Definitions of Headings, Words, and Phrases in Guidelines................ 4

1.6.4 Sign Identification................................................................................... 12

1.7 Sign and Poster Standards................................................................................. 14

1.7.2 Standard Abbreviations for Signs......................................................... 15

1.7.3 Forest Service Shield, USDA Identification, and Logotypes ............. 17

1.7.3a Forest Service Shield and USDA Credit Line.......................... 17

1.7.3b Logotypes .................................................................................. 17

1.7.4 Accessibility Signing ............................................................................. 19

1.7.5 Other International Symbols.................................................................. 20

1.8 Removing/Covering Signs.................................................................................. 22

1.9 Temporary Signs and Posters............................................................................ 22

1.10 Overview of Chapters........................................................................................ 22

Chapter 1 Introduction and Principles Policy and Standards

Standard signs shown in the Management of Uniform Traffic Control Devices

• Support accomplishment of direction contained in land and resource

• Provide information for the safety, enjoyment, and convenience of national

• Identify facilities and lands within the National Forest System.

Chapter 1 Introduction and Principles Policy and Standards

• Fulfill a legal requirement or an important need.

• Convey a clear, simple meaning.

Signage should consider the needs of persons with disabilities or non-English-

1.4 MUTCD—Standard for Traffic Control Devices

The Forest Service is required by 23 CFR 655.603(b)(3) to revise the EM 7100-

Chapter 1 Introduction and Principles Policy and Standards

1.5 Sign Coordinators

1.6 EM 7100-15 Sign and Poster Guidelines for the Forest

• AADT or ADT—Average annual daily traffic or average daily traffic.

• AASHTO—American Association of State Highway and Transportation

• CFR—Code of Federal Regulations

Chapter 1 Introduction and Principles Policy and Standards

• FHWA—Federal Highway Administration.

• FSH—Forest Service Handbook.

• FSM—Forest Service Manual.

• HDO—High Density Overlay plywood with hard smooth surface(s) to which

• MDO—Medium Density Overlay plywood with surface(s) similar to kraft

• ML—Road maintenance level, usually followed by a number (1 through 5).

• MUTCD—Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, a manual published

• NFS—National Forest System.

• RMO­—Road Management Objective(s).

• SADT—Seasonal Annual Daily Traffic.

• TCD—Traffic Control Device(s). Signs, markings, pavement markings, and

• TMO—Trail Management Objective(s).

• USC—United States Code.

• VIS—Visitor Information Services.

In addition, many chapters contain abbreviations that are defined in those

1.6.3 Definitions of Headings, Words, and Phrases in Guidelines

Administrative unit—A national forest, a national grassland, a purchase

Advisory speed—A recommended speed for all vehicles operating on a

Chapter 1 Introduction and Principles Policy and Standards

• RMO—Road Management Objective(s).